CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUITO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS Abierto a La Firma En La Uni6n Panamericana El 13 De Enero De 1944

CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUITO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS Abierto a la firma en la Uni6n Panamericana el 13 de enero de 1944

CONVENTION ON THE INTER-AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES

Opened for signature at the Pan American Union on January 15, 1944

CONVEN AO SOBRE

0 INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRONOMICAS Aberto h assinatura na Unigo Pan-Americana em 15 de janeiro de 1944

CONVENTION RELATIVE A L'INSTITUT INTERAMERICAIN DES SCIENCES AGRICOLES Ouvert h la signature h l'Union Panamricaine le 15 janvier 1944

UNION PANAMERICANA UNIAO PAN-AMERICANA PAN AMERICAN UNION UNION PANAMIRICAINE Washington, D. C., 1957

SERIE SOBRE TRATADOS NO. 10 SEIlE SOBRE TRATADOS NO. 10 TREATY SERIES NO. 10 SERIt SUR LES TRAITES NO. 10

CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITI.TO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS Abierto a la firma en la Uni6n Panamericana el 13 de enero de 1944

CONVENTION ON THE INTER-AMERICAN INSTITt TE OF AGRIC/ LTURAL SCIENCES

Opened for signature at the Pan American Union on January 15, 1944

CONVEN iO SOBRE

0 INSTITtTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCI\S \GRONOMICAS

Aberto a assinatura na Unigo Pan-Americana em 15 de janeiro de 1944

CONVENTION RELATIVE A L'INSTITUT INTERAMERICAIN DES SCIENCES \GRICOLES

Ouvert ' la signature ' I'Union Panam~ricaine le 15 janvier 1914

UNION PANAMERICANA UNIAO PN-AMEMIlC\NA UNICN PAN\MEHIICAIN"

NOTA

Los textos de tratados, convenciones y otros acuerdos se publican por la Divisi6n Juridica, a partir de 1956, en esta "Serie sobre Tratados". Anteriormente aparecian en la "Serie sobre Derecho y Tratados", la cual ha sido eliminada. La Divisi6n publica ademas las Constituciones de los paises americanos, los "Statements of Laws in Matters Affecting Business", Documentos del Consejo Interamerica- no de Jurisconsultos y estudios diversos.

N 0 T E

The texts of treaties, conventions and agreements, and works related thereto now appear in the "Treaty Series". The previous "Law and Treaty Series" has been discontinued. Other publications of the Legal Division are the Constitutions, the Statements of Laws in Matters Affecting Business, Documents of the Inter-American Coun- cil of Jurists, and Miscellaneous.

N 0 T A

Os textos de tratados, convenc~es e outros ac-rdos sao publica- dos pela Divislo Juridica, a partir de 1956, nesta "Sgrie s8bre Tra- tados". Apareciam,anteriormente, na "Serie s8bre Direito e Trata- dos", que foi abolida. A Divislo publica, al6m disso, as Constitui- q5es dos palses americanos, os "Statements of Laws in Matters Affect- ing Business", Documentos do Conselho Interamericano de Jurisconsul- tos e estudos diversos.

NOTE

Les textes des trait~s, conventions et accords qui paraissaient auparavant dans la "Serie droit et traites". aujourd'hui supprimee, sont publi~s depuis 1956 dans la pr6sente "Serie des traites", qui est assuree par la Division juridique. La Division publie en outre les constitutions des pays am6ricains, les rtatements of Laws in Matters Affecting Business", les documents du Conseil interam~ricain de Jurisconsultes et diverses etudes.

iii C0NVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUTO INTER- CONVENTION ON TM INTER-AMERICAN AMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS INSTITUTE OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES

Los Gobiernos de las Repfblicas The Governments of the American Americanas, animados del prop6sito de Pepublics, desiring to promote the fomentar el adelanto de las ciencias advancement of the agricultural sci- agrfcolas, asf como de las artes y ences and related arts and sciences; ciencias conexas; y deseosos de dar and wishing to give practical ef- cumplimiento en forma pr~ctica a la fect to the resolution approved by resoluci6n aprobada por el Octavo Con- the Eighth American Scientific Con- greso Cientffico Americano que se ce- aress held in Washington in 1940, lebr6 en Wdshington en 1940, recomen- recommending the establishment of an dando el establecimiento de un Insti- Inter-American Institute of Tropical tuto Interamericano de Agricultura Agriculture, have agreed to conclude Tropical, han resuelto concertar una a Convention in order to recognize Convenci6n para reconocer como insti- the permanent status of the Inter- tuci6n permanente al Instituto Inter- American Institute of Agricultural americano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, que Sciences, hereinafter referred to as en el texto de esta Convenci6n se de- "the Institute," on the basis of the signard coma "el Instituto", sobre las following Articles: bases que se determinan en los siguientes Artfculos:

Artfculo I Article I

Los Estados Contratantes reconocen The Contracting States hereby rec- mediante la presente Convenci6n coma ognize the permanent status of the Instituci6n permanente al Instituto Inter-American Institute of Agricul- Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, tural Sciences, incorporated under organizado coma sociedad autorizada de the laws of the District of Columbia, acuerdo con las leyes del Distrito de United States of America, on June 18, Columbia, Estados Unidos de Am6rica, 1942; and they agree to recognize the con fecha 18 de junio de 1942; y con- Institute as a legal entity in accor- vienen en darle al Instituto el cardc- dance with their own legislation. The ter de persona jurfdica de acuerdo con Institute shall have all the rights, su propia legislaci6n. El Instituto benefits, assets, lands and other gozar. de todos los derechos, benefi- property to which it was or may be cios, capital, terrenos y otros bienes 3ntitled as a corporation, and shall que ha adquirido o adquiera en calidad assume all the obligations and con- de corporaci6n y asumir6 todas las o- tracts for which it became respon- bligacionep y cumplird los contratos sible as a corporation. que ha celebrado o celebre en la misma capacidad.

La oficina central ejecutiva del The executive headquarters of the Institute tendrd su sede en Wishing- Institute shall be located in Wash- ton, D. C. La oficina principal de ington, D. C. The principal field actividades radicarA en Turrialba, headquarters of the Institute shall Costa Rica. Oficinas regionales del be located in Turrialba, Costa Rica. Instituto podr6n ser establecidas en Regional offices of the Institute may todas las otras Repfiblicas Americanas. be maintained throughout the American Republics. CONVENQAO SOBRE 0 INSTITUTO INTER- CONVENTION RELATIVE A L'INSTITUT AMERICANO DE CIANCIAS AGRONOMICAS INTERAM8RICAIN DES SCIENCES AGRICOLES

Animados do prop6sito de fomentar Les Gouvernements des R~publiques o progresso das ciencias agronomicas, Am~ricaines, anim6s du d~sir d'encou- bem come das ci~ncias e das artes co- rager l'avancement des sciences agri- nexas; e desejosos de levar a efeito, coles et des arts et sciences connex- por forma pr~tica, a resolugdo apro- es, et voulant donner des suites pra- vada no Oitavo Congresso Cientffico tiques A la r6solution recommandant Americano realizado em Washington em l'etablissement d'un institut Inter- 1940, recomendando o estabelecimento am6ricain d'Agriculture Tropicale et de um Instituto Interamericano de approav~e par le Huitibme Congrbs Agricultura Tropical, os Governos das Scientifique Am6ricain tenu A Wash- Repfiblicas Americanas resolveram ajus- ington en 1940, ont r6solu de contar uma Convengao par, reconhecer como clure une Convention ayant pour ob- instituigdo permanente, o Instituto jet de reconnaitre le statut perma- Interamericano de Ci~ncias Agron6micas, nent de l'Institut Interam~ricain des que no texto desta Convenq~o passard a Sciences Agricoles, d6sign6, ci-aprbs ser chamado "o Instituto", a qual se sous le nom de "l'Institut", en pre- basearA nos seguintes Artigos: nant pour base les articles suivants:

Artigo I Article I

Pela presente Convengdo, os Esta- Les ftats Contractants reconnais- dos Contratantes reconhecem como ins- sent par la pr~sente Convention le tituiqdo permanente o Instituto In- statut permanent de l'Institut Inter- teramericano de Ci~ncias Agron6micas, am6ricain des Sciences Agricoles, organizado coma sociedade em confor- constitu6 selon les lois du District midade com as leis do Distrito fede- de Columbia, 2tats-Unis d'Am6rique, ral de Columbia, Estados Unidos da le 18 juin 1942, et ils conviennent AmeLica, em 18 de junho de 1942; e de reconnaitre l'Institut comme une ,.;onvencionam dar ao Instituto o carA- entit6 lgale en conformit6 aveQ leur ter de pessoa jurfdica, de ac6rdo com propre legislation. L'Institut joui- sua pr6pria legislaqo. 0 Institute ra de tous les droits, b6n6fices, gozarA de todos os direitos, beneff- capitaux, terrains, et autres biens cios, capital, terrenos e outros bens auxquels il a eu droit ou peut avoir que adquiriu ou que venha a adquirir droit comme corporation, et assumera na qualidade de corporago, e assumirA tous cotrats et obligations qui lui todas as obrigag6es e cumprirA os con- incombent c titre de corporation. tratos que tenha celebrado ou que venha a celebrar na mesma capacidade.

0 escrit6rio central de administra- Le service central ex6cutif de gao do Institute terd sua sede na ci- l'Institut aura son sibge A Washing- dade de Washington, D. C., e o escri- ton, D. C. Le bureau principal sur t6rio principal para o desempenho de les lieux sera situ6 A Turrialba suas atividades estarA localizado em (Gosta-Rica). Des bureaux r6gionaux Turrialba, Cost& Rica. 0 Instituto de l'Institut pourront 6tre maintenus poderd estabelecer escrit6rios regio- dans toutes les autres R~publiques nais em -eta-e as IaptDl iL s americanas. Am6ricaines. FINES PURPOSES

Articulo II Article II

Los fines del Instituto ser~n los The purposes of the Institute are de estimular y promover el desarrollo to encourage and advance the develop- de las ciencias agrfcolas en las Re- ment of agricultural sciences in the pblicas Americanas mediante la in- American Republics through research, vestigacidn, la ensefianza y la di- teaching and extension activities in vulgaci6n de la teorfa y de la pr~c- the theory and practice of agricul- tica de la agricultura, asf como de ture and related arts and sciences. otras artes y ciencias conexas.

Para realizar estos fines, el Ins- In furtherance of these purposes tituto podrA, de conformidad con las the Institute may, subject to the laws leyes de los distintos pafses, hacer of the several countries, exercise the uso de las siguientes atribuciones: following powers: To develop, finance crear, sostener y administrar esta- and operate similar establishments and blecimientos similares e instalacio- installations in one or more of the nes en una o mis de las Repfiblicas American Republics; to give assistance Americanas; prestar ayuda al estable- in the establishment and maintenance cimiento y mantenimiento de organiza- of organizations having similar pur- ciones que persigan finalidades ang- poses in the said Republics; to pur- logas en dichas Repfiblicas; comprar, chase, sell, lease, improve or operate vender, arrendar, mejorar o adminis- any property in the American Republics, trar cualquiera propiedad en las Re- in accordance with the purposes of the pfiblicas Americanas, de acuerdo con Institute; to collaborate with the Gov- las finalidades del Instituto; colabo- ernment of any American Republic, or rar con el Gobierno de cualquiera with any other organization or entity, Repfiblica Americana, o con cuales- and to give assistance to the same; quiera otros organismos o entidades y to receive contributions and donations prestar ayuda a los mismos; aceptar of money or property, both real and contribuciones y donativos en forma personal; to enter into and carry out de dinero o bienes, tanto muebles como contracts and agreements; to raise or inmuebles; celebrar y llevar a cabo acquire and, in any manner, dispose of contratos y acuerdos; cultivar o ad- all agricultural commodities and pro- quirir toda clase de productos agri- ducts thereof essential for experimen- colas y sus derivados o disponer de tal or research purposes; and to carry los mismos en cualquiera forma cuando on any other business or activity ap- sea esencial para fines de investiga- propriate to the foregoing purposes. ci6n o experimentaci6n; y efectuar cualquier otro negocio o llevar a cabo cualquiera otra actividad que sean convenientes para los fines indicados.

LA JUNTA DIRECTIVA THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Articulo III Article III

Los reV-eantantes de las veintiuna The representatives of the twenty- Repfiblicas Americanas st al Consejo Di- one American Republics on the Govern- FINALIDADES BUTS

Artigo II Article II

Os fins do Instituto serao os de L'Institut a pour buts l'encoura- estimular e o de promover o progressc gement et l'avancement des sciences das ci~ncias agron6micas nas Repfibli- agricoles dans les R4publiques Am6ri- cas americanas, por meio do ensino, caines par des recherches, par l'en- das pesquisas, e da divulgag'o da te- seignement et la diss6mination de la oria e da pr~tica da agricultura, as- th6orie et de la pratique de l'agri- aim como de outras artes e ci~ncias culture et des arts et sciences con- conexas. nexes.

Para levar a cabo 6sses fins, o Pour la poursuite de ces buts, l'Ins- Instituto, de ac6rdo com as leis dos titut peut, en conformit6 avec les diversos pafses, poderl fazer uso das lois des diff6rents pays, exercer les seguintes atribuig6es: criar, manter pouvoirs suivants: Cr6er, financer et e administrar estabelecimentos simila- administrer des 6tablissements et ins- res e instalag5es em uma ou mais das tallations semblables dans une ou Repfiblicas americanas; prestar auxflio plusieurs des R~publiques Am~ricaines; A fundagdo e & manutengdo de institui- pr@ter son concours & l'6tablissement q6es que tenham finalidades an~logas et au maintien, dans lee dites Rpu- nas ditas Repfiblicas; comprar, vender, bliques, d'organisations ayant des buts arrendar, melhorar ou administrar qual- analogues: acqu~rir, vendre, louer, quer propriedade nas Repfiblicas ameri- am6liorer ou administrer toutes propri- canas, de ac6rdo com as finalidades do 6t6s dans les R6publiques Am6ricaines, Instituto; colaborar com o gov~rno de en accord avec les buts de l'Institut; qualquer Repfblica americana, ou com collaborer avec le Gouvernement de tou- quaisquer outros orgios ou entidades e te autre R6publique Amricaine, ou avec prestar auxflio aos mesmos; aceitar toute autre organisation ou entit6, et contribuig6es e dddivas na forma de leur pr@ter son concours; accepter des dinheiro ou bens, m6veis ou imveis, contributions et donations en argent ou fazer e executar contratos e acordos; en biens tant mobiliers qu'immobiliers; cultivar ou adquirir toda a esp6cie de conclure et ex6cuter des contrats et produtos agrfcolas e seus derivados, des accords; cultiver ou acqu6rir tou- ou dispor dos mesmos por qualquer for- tes sortes de produits agricoles et ma quando seja essencial para fins de leurs derives, ou en disposer de quel- pesquisa ou experimentagdo; e efetuar que manibre que ce soit quand les re- qualquer outro neg6cio ou levar a efei- cherches et les exp6riences de l'Insti- to qualquer outra atividade que sejam tut l'exigeront; et pour suivre tout convenientes para os fins indicados. autre commerce ou activit6 se rapportant aux buts mentionn6s ci-dessus.

A JUNTA ADMINISTRATIVA LE CONSEIL D'ADMINISTRATION

Artigo III Article III

Ser~o membros da Junta Administra- Les repr6sentants des vingt et une tiv~t do Tnstituta azazresentantes R6publiques Am6ricaines qui font par- rectivo de la Uni6n Panamericana actua- ing Board of the Pan American Union r6n como miembros del Instituto y se shall serve as members of the Insti- considerar.n como miembros de la Junta tute, and shall be considered as mem- Directiva del mismo. Si alguno de ellos bers of the Board of Directors there- no pudiere asistir a una reuni6n de of. In the event that any member is la Junta Directiva se podrA designar unable to attend a meeting of the Board un suplente para ese fin, ya sea por of Directors the said member or his el propietario o por su respectivo government may designate an alternate Gobierno. Las decisiones de la Junta for that purpose. The decisions of serdn adoptadas por la mayorfa de los the Board shall be adopted by a major- votos de sus miembros, cuya mayorfa ity vote of its members, which major- de votos incluirA una mayorfa de vo- ity vote shall include the votes of a tos de los representantes de los Esta- majority of the members representing dos Contratantes. La Junta tendrd, en- Contracting States. The Board shall tre otras, las siguientes atribuciones: have, among others, the following functions:

Elegir al Director del Instituto To elect the Director of the Insti- y ratificar el nombramiento del Se- tute and to approve the appointment of cretario. the Secretary made by the Director.

Remover tanto al Director como al To remove both the Director and the Secretario. Secretary.

Fijar la remuneraci6n del Director To determine the compensation of y del Secretario. the Director and the Secretary.

Vigilar las actividades del Direc- To supervise the activities of the tor, quien ser . responsable de dar Director, who shall be responsible for cumplimiento a todas las 6rdenes y carrying out all orders and resolu- resoluciones de la Junta. tions of said Board.

Nombrar un Comit6 Administrativo, To appoint and define the duties asign~ndole sus deberes y fij6ndole and compensation of an administrative sus gastos o emolumeritos, el que con- committee consisting of not more than sistird de no m6s de ocho personas, eight persons, of whom one shall be entre las cuales servird de miembro the Director of the Institute ex officio ex officio el Director del Instituto. The members of this administrative No se requiere que los miembros de committee need not be members of the este Comit6 sean miembros de la Junta Board of Directors. Directiva del Instituto.

Aprobar el presupuesto que someterA To approve the budget for the ad- anualmente el Director para la admi- ministration of the Institute to be nistraci6n del Instituto. submitted annually by the Director. das vinte e uma Repfiblicas americanas tie du Conseil d'Administration de que fazem parte do Conselho Diretor da Union Panam6ricaine serviront comme Unido Panamericana. Se algum deles ndo membres de l'Institut et seront con- puder Assistir a uma reunido da Junta sid6r6s comme membres du Conseil Administrativa, poder-se-d designar um d'Administration de l'Institut. Au suplente para 6ste fim, podendo ser cas oti un membre quelconque ne pour- feita a indicagdo pelo pr6prio membro rait pas assister & une reunion du ou pelo seu GoV~rno. As decis~es da Conseil d'Administration, le dit mem- Junta serdo aprovadas por maioria de bre ou son Gouvernement pourra d~sig- votos dos seus membros, cuja maioria ner un substitut dans ce but. Les d6- de votos se compord dos votos da maio- cisions du Conseil seront adopt~es par ria dos representantes dos Estados Con- un vote de majorit6 de ses membres. tratantes. A Junta terd, entre outras, Ce vote de majorit6 comprendra les as seguintes atribuiq9es: voix d'une majorit6 des membres repr6- sentant les 2tats Contractants. Le Conseil aura, entre autres, les fonctions sui-antes:

Eleger o Diretor do Instituto, e Il 6lira un Directeur de l'Institut ratificar a nomeagdo do Secretdrio. et ratifiera la nomination du Secr6- taire faite par le Directeur.

Remover de seus cargos tanto o Di- Ii aura pleins pouvoirs pour r~vo- rector como o Secretrio. quer le Directeur ainsi que le Secr6- taire.

Fixar a remuneragdo do Diretor e II d6terminera le montant des 6mo- do Secretdrio. luments du Directeur et du Secr~taire

Fiscalizar as atividades do Dire- Ii dirigera les activit6s du Direc- tor, que serd respons~vel pelo cum- teur, A qui il imcombera d'ex6cuter primento de todas as ordens e resolu- tous ordres et r6solutions du dit 96es da Junta. Conseil.

Nomear uma Comissdo Administrativa, II nommera un comit6 administratif indicando seus deveres e fixando as compos6 de huit personnes au plus, suas despesas e a remuneragdo de seus dont l'une sera le Directeur de l'In- membros, devendo essa Comissdo compor- stitut ex officio, et fixera les atribu- se de um n1imero ndo excedente de oito tions et le montant des 6moluments des pessoas, entre as quais servird de mem- membres de ce comit6. Les membres de bro ex officio o Diretor do Instituto. ce comit6 administratif ne seront pas Ndo se requer que os membros desta Co- n~cessairement des membres du Conseil missdo sejam membros da Junta Adminis- d'Administration. trativa do Instituto.

Aprovar o orgamento que o Diretor II approuvera le budget qui lui dever. apresentar anualmente para a sera soumis annuellement par le Direc- administragdo do Instituto. teur pour l'administration de l'Ins- titut. La Junta fijarA las cuotas anuales To fix the annual quotas of the In- del Instituto. stitute.

La Junta recibiri del Director un The Board shall receive an annual informe anual sobre las actividades report from the Director upon the ac- del Instituto, asf como de su estado tivities of the Institute as well as general y situaci6n financiera. upon its general condition and financial status.

FUNCIONARIOS OFFICERS

Artfculo IV Article IV

El Instituto tendri un Director y The Institute shall havo a Director un Secretario. El Director ser6 ele- and a Secretary. The Director shall gido por la Junta Directiva en sesi6n be elected by the Board of Directors plenaria y durari seis afios en su car- in plenary session for a term of six go; podrA ser reelecto una o mds veces years; he may be reelected one or more El primer perfodo del Director, para times. The first term of the Director los fines de la presente Convenci6n, under the provisions of this Conven- principiar6 el dia que 6sta entre en tion shall begin as of the day on vigor. which this Convention enters into force.

El Secretario serA nombrado por el The Secretary shall be appointed by Director con la aprobaci6n de la Junta the Director with the approval of the Directiva del Instituto y serA direc- Board of Directors of the Institute tamente responsable ante el Director. and shall be directly responsible to the Director.

El Director y el Secretario desem- The Director and the Secretary pefiar~n sus cargos hasta que sus su- shall hold office until their respec- cesores respectivos sean designados y tive successors shall be chosen and entren al desempefio de sus cargos; shall qualify; but they may be removed pero podrin ser removidos por el voto by vote of the majority of the members de la mayorfa de los miembros del of the Institute. Instituto.

EL DIRECTOR THE DIRECTOR

Artfculo V Article V

1. El Director tendr6 amplios y 1. The Director under the super- plenos poderes para dirigir las ac- vision of the Board of Directors tividades del Instituto, bajo la shall have ample and full powers to vigilancia de la Junta Directiva del direct the activities of the Insti- mismo; y ser6 responsable del cumpli- tute; and he shall be responsible for miento de todas las 6rdenes y resolu- carrying out all orders and resoluciones de dicha Junta. tions of said Board. A Junta fixarg as despesas anuais Ii fixera les quotes-parts annuel- do Instituto. lee de l'Institut.

A Junta receberl do Diretor um re- Ii recevra un rapport annuel du Di- lat6rio anual dos trabalhos do Insti- recteur sur les activit6s de l'Insti- tuto, assim como de seu estado geral tut ainsi que sur son 6tat g6n6ral et e situago financeira. sa situation financibre.

FUNCION.ARIOS FONCTIONNAIRES

Artigo IV Article IV

0 Instituto terl um Diretor e um L'Institut aura un Directeur et un Secretdrio. 0 Diretor serl eleito Secr6taire. Le Directeur sera 6lu par pela Junta Administrativa em sessdo le Conseil d'Administration en session plengria, e o seu mandato durard seis pl6nibre pour une p6riode de six ans; anos; poderd ser eleito uma ou mais il peut @tre r661u une ou plusieurs vezes. 0 primeiro perfodo administra- fois. La premibre p6riode d'activit6 tivo do Diretor, para os fins da pre- du Directeur aux termes de cette Con- sente Convengdo, principiar6 do dia vention commencera le jour oii celle-ci em que esta entrar em vigor. entrera en vigueur.

0 Secretrio serd nomeado pelo Di- Le Secr6taire sera nomm6 par le Di- retor com aprovagdo da Junta Adminis- recteur avec l'approbation du Conseil trativa, e serd diretamente responsl- d'Administration de i'Institut et sera vel ao Diretor. directemente responsable envers le Di- recteur.

0 Diretor e o Secretdrio desempe- Le Directeur et le Secr6taire res- nhar~o seus cargos, at6 que tenham sido teront en fonctions jusqu'au moment oii designados e tenham sido investidos de leurs successeurs respectifs auront suas fung6es os seus respectivos su- 6t6 choisis et seront entr6s en fonc- cessores; mas poder~o ser removidos tions; ils pourront toutefois 6tre r6- pelo voto da maioria dos membros do voqu6s par un vote de la majorit6 des Instituto. membres de l'Institut.

0 DIRETOR LE DIRECTEUR

Artigo V Article V

1. 0 Diretor ter6 amplos e plenos 1. Le Directeur, sous la direc- poderes para dirigir os neg6cios do tion du Conseil d'Administration, Instituto, sob a fiscalizaQgo da Junta aura amples et pleins pouvoirs pour Administrativa do mesmo, e serd res- diriger les activit6s de l'Institut, ponsdvel pelo cumprimento de todas as et il lui incombera de mettre . ex6- ordens e resolugdes da Junta. cution tous ordres et r6solutions du dit Conseil. 2. El Director tendrA la represen- 2. The Director under the super- taci6n legal del Instituto bajo la vi- vision of the Board of Directors shall gilancia de la Junta Directiva del mis- be the legal representative of the In- mo; y podr6 legalizar con el sello del stitute; and he may legalize, with the Instituto todos los contratos, traspa- seal of the Institute, all contracts, sos y otros instrumentos que requieran conveyances and other instruments ese trmite y que en su opini6n sean which require such legalization and necesarios y convenientes para el fun- which in his opinion are necessary and cionamiento del Instituto. Ademns es- advantageous to the operation of the tarA facultado para tomar cualquiera Institute. In addition, he shall be otra medida necesaria para dar fuerza authorized to take any other step nec- legal a tales instrumentos, de confor- essary to validate such instruments as midad con los requisitos o disposi- may be required or permitted by law. ciones de la ley. El Director podrA The Director may grant powers to others otorgar poderes a otras personas para for all those acts which he cannot per- todos aquellos actos que no pueda rea- form personally. lizar 61 personalmente.

3. El Director, sujeto a la super- 3. The Director, under the supervi- vigilancia de la Junta Directiva del sion of the Board of Directors of the Instituto, tendrd facultad para nom- Institute, shall have the power to ap- brar y remover empleados y fijar su point, remove, and determine the com- remuneraci6n. pensation of employees.

4. El Director preparard el presu- 4. The Director shall prepare the puesto del Instituto para cada aho fis- budget of the Institute for each fiscal cal y 1o someterd a la Junta Directiva year, and submit it to the Board of Di- con no menos de dos meses de anticipa- rectors at least two months before the ci6n a la reuni6n anual, en la cual annual meeting at which it will be con- se considerar6 su aprobaci6n. sidered for approval.

5. El Director presentard un in- 5. The Director shall submit an an- forme anual a la Junta Directiva del nual report to the Board of Directors Instituto, dos meses antes de cele- of the Institute two months before the brarse la reuni6n anual, en el que annual meeting, setting forth the work darA cuenta de las labores del Insti- of the Institute during the year and its tuto durante el afo, asf como de su general condition and financial status, estado general y situaci6n financiera; and he shall submit to the approval of y someterA a la aprobaci6n de la misma the said Board the budget and the plans Junta el presupuesto y los planes para for the following year. el afo siguiente.

EL SECRETARIO THE SECRETARY

Artfculo VI Article VI

El Secretario tendrd bajo su cui- The Secretary shall keep the minutes dado las actas y archivos del Insti- and records of the Institute, shall 2. 0 Diretor ter6 a representaqgo 2. Le Directeur, sous la direc- legal do Instituto, sob a fiscalizagdo tion du Conseil d'Administration, da respectiva Junta Administrativa, e sera le representant l6gal de l'Insti- poderd legalizar com o solo do Insti- tut; il pourra l6galiser, par l'appo- tuto todos os contratos, traspasses e sition du sceau de l'Institut, tous demais documentos que o requeiram, e contrats, actes translatifs de pro- que em sua opini~o sejam necesscirios e pri6t6 et autres instruments qui )xi- convenientes para o funcionamento do gent une telle l6galisation et qui, A Instituto. Al~m disso terd atribui- son avis, seront n6cessaires et utiles 95es para tomar qualquer outra medida au bon fonctionnement de l'Institut. necessdria para dar forga legal a to- De plus, il sera autoris6 A prendre dos os documentos, de conformidade com toutes autres mesures n6cessaires pour as exig6ncias e disposigbes da lei. rendre valides les instruments qui O Diretor poderd outorgar poderes a pourraient 6tre exig~s ou permis par outras pessoas para a efetivaq~o de la loi. Le Directeur pourra accorder todos os atos que 6le pr6prio nao A d'autres personnes le pouvoir d'ac- possa realizar. complir les actes qu'il ne peut pas accomplir personnellement.

3. 0 Diretor estA sujeito A fis- 3. Le Directeur, sous la haute calizagdo da Junta Administrativa do surveillance du Conseil d'Administra- Instituto, e terd poderes para nomear tion de l'Institut, aura la facult6 de e demitir empregados e fixar a remu- nommer et r~voquer les employ6s et de neragao dos mesmos. fixer leurs 6moluments.

4. 0 Diretor preparard o orgamento 4. Le Directeur pr6parera le bud- do Instituto para cada exercicio fi- get de l'Institut pour chaque ann6e nanceiro, e o apresentard A Junta Admi- budg6taire et le soumettra au Conseil nistrativa pelo menos dois meses antes d'Administration deux mois au moins da reuniao anual da mesma, em que se avant la r6union annuelle ot sa rati- deliberarA a aprovago do referido or- fication sera mise h l'6tude. Qamento.

5. Todos os anos, o Diretor apre- 5. Deux mois avant la r6union an- le Directeur soumettra au Con- sentard um relatorio A Junta Adminis- nuelle, l'Institut un trativa, dois meses antes de sua re- seil d'Administration de lequel il rendra unido anual, dando conta dos trabalhos rapport annuel dans do Instituto durante o referido ano, compte des travaux accomplis au cours son bem como de seu estado geral e condi- de l'ann6e par l'Institut, et de de meme que de sa situa- 96es financeiras; e submeter. A apro- 6tat g6n6ral soumettra & vagdo da mesma Junta o orgamento e o tion financibre, et il l'approbation du dit Conseil le budget programa dos trabalhos para o ano se- relatifs & l'ann6e sui- guinte. et les plans vante.

0 SECRETARIO LZ SECR9TAIRE

Artigo VI Article VI

0 Secretdrio terd sob sua guarda as Le Secr6taire aura la garde des et des archives de atas e os arquivoqsdo~Q. ktituto, pos- procbs-verbaux tuto, gozarl de todas las tacultades exercise all prerogatives and carry y desempefard todas las funciones ad- out all administrative duties as- ministrativas que le encomiende el signed to him by the Director. Director.

EL CONSEJO T8CNICO CONSULTIVO TECHNICAL ADVISORY COUNCIL

Artfculo VII Article VII

Se establecerd un Consejo T~cnico Provision is made for the estab- Consultivo, que se organizdrd en la lishment of a Technical Advisory forma siguiente: Council, as follows:

1. Cada uno de los Estados Con- 1. Each of the Contracting States tratantes podrd designar un experto may appoint an agricultural expert to agrfcola, quien actuar6 como su re- be its representative in the Technical presentante en el seno del Consejo T6c- Advisory Council of the Institute. nico Consultivo del Instituto. Este This Council shall cooperate with the Consejo cooperarA con el Director en Director on agricultural matters of a asuntos de fndole t~cnica agricola. technical nature. The appointment of El nombramiento de cada representante each representative shall be official- se comunicard oficialmente al Secre- ly notified to the Secretary of the tario del Instituto. Los miembros del Institute. The members of the Council Consejo, sujetos a la voluntad de sus shall serve for a period of five years gobiernos, ejercerdn sus funciones at the will of their respective gov- durante un perfodo de cinco afhos, ernments, and may be reappointed one pudiendo ser nombrados nuevamente una or more times. o mds veces para continuar en el de- sempeio de sus cargos.

2. El Consejo T6cnico Consultivo 2. The Technical Advisory Council se reunird, a lo menos una vez al afo, shall meet at least once a year, under bajo la presidencia del Director del the chairmanship of the Director of the Instituto, en el lugar en que las ac- Institute, at such place as the activ- tividades del Instituto lo requieran. ities, of the Institute may require. El Director podrd citar al Consejo a The Director may call special meetings reuniones extraordinarias por su propia of the Council on his own initiative, iniciativa, cuando la buena marcha del whenever the best interests of the In- Instituto asf lo requiera. Cada una stitute may require. Notice with re- de estas reuniones deberA convocarse spect to any meeting shall be given at con dos meses de anticipaci6n por lo least two months in advance and shall menos, indicdndose el motivo o motivos state the purpose or purposes of the de la reuni6n propuesta. Una mayoria proposed meeting. A majority of the de los miembros del Consejo consti- members of the Council shall constitute tuirA qu6rum. a quorum.

3. Ningfin miembro del Consejo T6c- 3. No member of the Technical Ad- nico Consultivo recibir. del Instituto, visory Council, as such, shall receive en tal capacidad, remuneraci6n pecu- from the Institute any pecuniary com- niaria alguna por sus servicios; pero pensation for his services, although el Instituto podrd sufragar los gastos the Institute may defray traveling ey suirA todas as atribuicbes e exercerA l'Institut, exercera toutes pr6roga- todas as func~es administrativas que tives et s'acquittera de toutes les lhe sejam delegadas pelo Diretor. fonctions administratives qui lui se-ront assignees par le Directeur.

CONSELHO T9CNICO CONSULTIVO CONSEIL CONSULTATIF TECHNIQUE

Artigo VII Article VII

Estabelecer-se-A um Conselho T6c- Il est pourvu a l'6tablissement nico Consultivo, que serA organizado d'un Conseil Consultatif Technique, da seguinte forma: comme suit:

1. Cada um dos Estados Contratan- 1. Chacun des ttats Contractants tes poder6 nomear um especialista pourra designer un expert agricole agr6nomo, que agirA como seu repre- pour le repr6senter dans le Conseil sentante no Conselho T6cnico Consul- Consultatif Technique de l'Institut. tivo do Instituto. Este Conselho Ce Conseil coop6rera avec le Directeur cooperard com o Diretor em assuntos sur les questions agricoles d'ordre t6cnicos referentes A agricultura. A technique. La nomination de chaque nomeagdo de cada representante ser representant sera communiqu6e offi- comunicada oficialmente A Secretaria ciellement au Secr6taire de l'Insti- do Instituto. Os membros do Conselho tut. Les membres du Conseil Consul- sujeitos A vontade de seus governos, tatif Technique resteront en fonctions exercerdo suas fungbes pelo prazo de pour une p6riode de cinq ans au gr6 cinco anos, podendo ser nomeados no- de leurs gouvernements respectifs, vamente uma ou mais vezes para conti- et leur nomination pourra Gtre renou- nuar no desempenho de seus cargos. vel6e une ou plusieurs fois.

2. 0 Conselho T6cnico Consultivo 2. Le Conseil Consultatif Technique se reunird, ao menos uma vez por ano, se r~unira au moins une fois par an, sob a presid~ncia do Diretor do Insti- sous la pr~sidence du Directeur de tuto, no lugar em que as atividades l'Institut, A l'endroit le mieux indi- do Instituto o requeiram. 0 Diretor que pour les activit~s de l'Institut poderd, por sua pr6pria iniciativa, Le Directeur pourra, de sa propre ini- convocar o Conselho T~cnico a reuni~es tiative, convoquer le Conseil Consul- extraordindrias, quando a boa marcha do tatif Technique en reunion sp6ciale Instituto assim o exija. A convocacdo chaque fois que l'intdr6t de l'Insti- de cada uma dessas reunibes dever. ser tut l'exigera. En ce qui concerne comunicada ao Conselho com dois meses, toute reunion, notification sera faite pelo menos, de anteced~ncia, com explica- au moins deux mois A l'avance, et indi- 9o do motivo ou motivos que ddo lug&r quera le but ou les buts de la r6union a reunido proposta. Uma maioria dos proposee. Une majorit6 des membres du membros do Conselho constituird quorum. Conseil constituera un quorum.

3. Nenhum membro do Conselho T6c- 3. Aucun membre du Conseil Consul- nico Consultivo receberd do Instituto, tatif Technique ne recevra, en cette por efeito do cargo, qualquer remune- capacit6, aucune r6mun6ration pecu- rago pecunidria pelos seus servigos; niaire pour ses services, bien que mas o Instituto poderA ocorrer as des- l'Institut Duisse rembourser les mem- de viaje de los miembros del Consejo penses of the members of the Council para su reuni6n anual. to the annual meeting.

AGENTE FISCAL FISCAL AGENT

Artfculo VIII Article VIII

La Uni6n Panamericana actuarA como The Pan American Union shall act as agente fiscal del Instituto, y en tal fiscal agent for and on behalf of the capacidad recibir. y administrarA los Institute, and as such shall receive fondos del Instituto. and disburse the funds of the Insti- tute.

SOSTENIMIENTO DEL INSTITUTO MAINTENANCE OF THE INSTITUTE

Artfculo IX Article IX

Los recursos para sostener y fomen- The income of the Institute for its tar las labores del Instituto consis- maintenance and operation shall consist tir6n en las cuotas anuales que cubran of annual quotas paid by the Contract- los Estados Contratantes, asf como en ing States, as well as of legacies, dolos legados, donativos y contribuciones nations and contributions which the In- que el Instituto acepte. Tales fondos stitute may accept. Such funds and y contribuciones se utilizardn exclu- contributions shall be used only for sivamente para fines que est6n de a- purposes in keeping with the character cuerdo con el car~cter del Instituto. of the Institute.

La Junta Directiva del Instituto The annual quotas shall be deter- fijarA las cuotas anuales, en el en- mined by the Board of Directors of the tendimiento de que el voto deber6 ser Institute provided the vote is unani- un6nime en lo que respecta a los miem- mous with respect to the members repre- bros que representen a los Estados senting the Contracting States. The Contratantes. El monto de las cuotas amounts of the respective quotas shall respectivas se fijard en proporci6n be in proportion to the population of con el nfimero de habitantes de cada each Contracting State, on the basis of Estado Contratante, tomdndose como the latest official statistics in pos- base las dltimas estadfsticas oficia- session of the Pan American Union on les que existan en la Uni6n Paname- the first day of July of each year. ricana el 10 de julio de cada aflo.

Se fijarg la cuota anual de cada The annual quota payment of each Estado Contratante, la que no excederd Contracting State shall not exceed one de un d6lar en moneda de los Estados dollar United States currency per one Unidos de America, por cada mil habi- thousand of the total population of tantes. Sin embargo, esa cuota po- that State. The quota payments may, drd aumentarse mediante la recomenda- however, be increased by unanimous rec- ci6n undnime de los miembros de la ommendation of those members of the Junta Directiva que represente los Es- Board of Directors who represent Con- tados Contratantes y con la aprobaci6n tracting States and the approval by pesas de viagem que os Conselheiros bres du Conseil Consultatif Technique tenham feito para atender & sua reu- de leurs frais de d6placement lors de niao anual. la r6union annuelle.

AGENTE FISCAL AGENT FISCAL

Artigo VIII Article VIII

A Uni~o Panamericana exercerl as L'Union Panam~ricaine fera fonc- fung6es de Agente Fiscal do Instituto, tion d'agent fiscal pour et au nom e neste cardter receberd e adminis- de l'Institut et, comme tel, recevra trarl os fundos do Instituto. et d6boursera les fonds de l'Institut.

MANUTENQAO DO INSTITUTO ENTRETIEN DE L'INSTITUT

Artigo IX Article IX

Os recursos para manter e para es- Les ressources n6cessaires & 'en- timular os trabalhos do Instituto, tretien et au fonctionnement de l'Ins- consistirdo das quotas de contribui- titut seront fournies par les quotes- 9do anual dadas pelos Estados Contra- parts annuelles vers6es par les 8tats tantes, e bem assim os provenientes Contractants, ainsi que par les legs, de legados, dddivas e contribuig6es donations et contributions que l'Ins- que sejam aceitas pelo Instituto. titut pourrait accepter. Ces fonds 2sses fundos e contribuig6es serao et contributions ne seront employ6s usados exclusivamente para fins per- que dans des buts conformes au carac- tinentes ao car~ter do Instituto. tbre de l'Institut.

A Junta Administrativa do Instituto Les quotes-parts annuelles seront fixard as quotas anuais, contanto que d6termin6es par le Conseil d'Adminis- o voto seja unAnime no que respeita tration de l'Institut, A condition aos membros que representem os Estados que le vote soit unanime en ce qui Contratantes. A importAncia das res- concerne les membres de chaque 2tat pectivas quotas serd em proporgo & Contractant, en prenant pour base les ipopulaqao de cada Estado Contratante, statistiques officielles les plus r6- tomando-se por base a i1 tima estatfs- centes dont disposera !'Union Panam6- tica oficial em poder da Uniao Paname- ricaine le premier juillet de chaque ricana no dia 1 de julho de cada ano. annee.

Fixar-se-A a quota anual de cada Le payement quotitaire annuel de Estado Contratante em importancia ndc chaque 2tat Contractant sera base sur excedente de un d6lar em moeda dos le chiffre total de la population de Estados Unidos da Am6rica, por cada cet 2tat et ne d6passera pas un dollar mil habitantes. Contudo, essa quota (monnaie des 2tats-Unis) par millier poderd ser aumentada mediante recomen- de personnes. Les payements quoti- dagao unAnime dos membros da Junta taires peuvent, cependant, §tre aug- Administrativa que representem os Es- ment6s sur la recommandation unanime tados ContrataAtes, e com a aprovagdo des membres du Conseil d'Administra- de las autoridades competentes de cada the appropriate authorities of each of Estado Contratante. the Contracting States of the increased quota of that State.

La Uni6n Panamericana comunicari a The quotas shall be communicated an- los Gobiernos de los Estados Contra- nually by the Pan American Union to the tantes las cantidades que les corres- Governments of the Contracting States, pondan, las que deberin pagarse antes and shall be paid before the first of del 10 de julio de cada aho. July of each year.

El pago de la cuota ccorrespondien- The quota payments of each Contract- te a cada Estado Contratante se comen- ing State shall commence on the day zarA a partir de la fecha en que esta on which this Convention enters into Convenci6n entre en viior con respecto force with respect to that State, pro- a ese Estado, calculdndose la cantidad rated accordi:,g to the number of full a base del nfimero de meses completos calendar months remaining in the cur- que quedaren por terminarse dentro del rent fiscal year. afio fiscal en curso.

El afio fiscal del Instituto comen- The fiscal year of the Institute zarl cada 10 de julio. shall begin on the first day of July of each year.

IDIOMAS LANGUAGES

Artfculo X Article X

Ser~n idiomas oficiales del Insti- The official languages of the In- tuto el espaiol, el ingl6s, el portu- stitute shall be English, Spanish, gu6s y el franc6s. Portuguese and French.

FRANQUICIA POSTAL POSTAL PRIVILEGES

Artfculo XI Article XI

Los Estados Contratantes acuerdan The Contracting States agree to ex- hacer extensiva al Instituto, desde tend to the Institute forthwith the luego dentro de sus respectivos terri- domestic and international franking torios, y entre unos y otros, la privilege provided in the existing franquicia postal establecida en las inter-American postal conventions and convenciones postales interamericanas to ask the States members of the Pan en vigencia, pidiendo a los Estados American Union which have not ratified miembros de la Uni6n Panamericana, que the present Convention to grant the no hayan ratificado la presente Con- Institute the same postal privileges. venci6n, que concedan al Instituto dicha prerrogativa. das autoridades competentes de cada tion qui repr6sentent les 9tats Con- Estado Contratante. tractants et avec l'approbation des autorit6es comp6tentes de chacun des Ptats Contractants quant A l'augmentation de la quote-part de cet 2tat.

A Unigo Panamericana deverd comuni- Les quotes-parts seront compuni- car anualmente aos Governos dos Esta- qu6es arinuellement aux Gouvernements dos Contratantes as quotas que lhes des 9tats Contractants par I'Union cabem, e que dever&o ser pagas antes Panam6ricaine et seront pay6es avant do 10 de julho de cada ano. le premier juillet de chaque ann6e.

0 pagamento da quota de cada Estado Les payements quititaires de chaque Contratante, comegarA na data em que 8tat Contractant commenceront A la esta Convenq~o entrar em vigor no que date de l'entrde en vigueur de la Con- respeita ao referido Estado, prorra- vention en ce qui concerne cet 2tat, teado de ac6rdo com o n(Lmero de dias et seront d6termin6s proportionnelle- do exercfcio financeiro que ainda res- ment au nombre de mois entiers qu'il tarem a correr. restera dans I'ann6e budg6taire en cours.

0 exercfcio financeiro do Instituto L'ann6e budg6taire de l'Institut comegard em 1O de julho de cada ano. commencera le premier juillet de chaque ann6e.

IDIOMAS LANGUES

Artigo X Article X

As lfnguas oficiais do Instituto Les langues officielles de I'Insti- sergo o portugu~s, o espanhol, o tut seront le frangais, l'anglais, ingl6s e o franc~s. l'espagnol et le portugais.

FRANQUIA POSTAL PRIVILEGES POSTAUX

Artigo XI Article XI

Os Estados Contratantes acordam em Les 9tats Ccntractanto conviennent tornar tambiAm extensiva ao Instituto, d'accorder sans d6lai & l'Institut dentro de seua respectivos territ6- la franchise de port domestique et rios, e entre uns a outros, a fran- international pr6vue dans les conven- quia postal estabelecida nas conventions postales interam6ricaines exis- 2tats mem- 96es postais interamericanas em vigor, tantes, et de demander aux pedindo aos Estados da Uniao Paname- bres de l'Union Panam6rcaine qui n'ont ricana que ndo tenham ratificado a pas ratifi6 la pr6sente Convention presente Convengdo, que concedam ao d'accorder les m~mes privilbges pos- Instituto a referida prerrogativa. taux h l'Institut. EXENCION DE IMPUESTOS EXEMPTION FROM TAXATION

Articulo XII Article XII

Los bienes inmuebles que posea el Lands ard buildings in the terri- Instituto, en derecho o equidad, en tory of any of the Contracting States cualquiera de los Estados Contratan- of which the Institute is the legal or tes, y que se utilicen exclusivamen- equitable owner and which are used ex- te para los fines que persigue el Ins- clusively for the purposes of the In- tituto, estar~n exentos de impuestos stitute shall be exempt from taxation de cualquiera naturaleza, ya sean na- of every kind, National, State, Pro- cionales, estaduales, provinciales o vincial or Municipal, other than as- municipales, con excepci6n de las ta- sessments levied for services or for sas que deban ser pagadas por raz6n local public improvements by which the de servicios o de mejoramientos pi- premises are benefited. blicos locales que redunden en beneficio de dichos inmuebles.

El mobiliario, los efectos, ense- Furniture, equipment, supplies, con- res, utensilios, materiales de cons- struction materials and any other arti- trucci6n y cualesquiera otros artf- cles intended for official use of the culos destinados al uso oficial del Institute shall be exempt in the terri- Instituto estar~n exentos, en el te- tory of any of the Contracting States rritorio de cualquiera de los Estados from every form of taxation, including Contratantes, de todo gravamen, inclu- but not limited to customs duties, ex- yendo derechos aduaneros, contribu- cise and surtaxes. ciones indirectas y sobretasas, o cualesquiera otros.

Estarin tambi~n exentos de toda All funds and other property used clase de impuestos, en el territorio for the purposes of the Institute, and de cada uno de los Estados Contratan- all contracts and other official acts tes, los fondos y otros bienes que se of the Institute within the scope of empleen para los fines del Instituto, its purposes shall likewise be exempt y todos los contratos y actos oficia- from taxation of every kind in the les del Instituto, que se mantengan territory of each of the Contracting dentro de los lfmites de sus funciones. States.

CIRCULACION DE FONDOS MOVEMENT OF FUNDS

Artfculo XIII Article XIII

Cada uno de los Estados Contratan- Each of the Contracting States shall tes tomarl las medidas que sean nece- take such measures as may be appropri- sarias para facilitar el movimiento de ate to facilitate the movement of funds los fondos del Instituto. of the Institute. ISENQAO DE IMPOSTOS EXEMPTION D'IMPOTS

Artigo XII Article XII

Os bens m6veis possuidos pelo Ins- Les terrains et les b~timents si- tituto, em direito ou equidade, em tu~s sur le territoire de tout 8tat qualquer dos Estados Contratantes, Contractant, dont l'Institut est le que estejam seldo usados exclusiva- propri~taire en droit ou en 6quit6, mente para os fins a que o Instituto et qui sont affect6s exclusivement se dedica, estarao isentos de impos- l'usage de l'Institut dan3 la pour- tos de qualquer natureza, sejam 6les suite de ses buts, seront exempts de federais, estaduais ou provinciais, tout imp6ts, de quelque nature qu'ils e municipais, excetuando-se por6m, soient -- nationaux, d'2tat, provin- as taxas que devem ser pagas por ser- ciaux ou municipaux -- autres que lee vigos ou por melhoramentos pfiblicos taxes perques pour services ou pour locais, que redundem em beneficio dos travaux publics d'am6lioration dont referidos im6veis. les locaux b6n6ficient.

0 mobilirio, aparelhos, utensi- Le mobilier, le mat6riel, les four- lios e artigos diversos, materiais nitures, les mat6riaux de construction de construgao ou quaisquer outros ar- et tous autres articles destin6s h tigos oficialmente destinados ao uso l'usage officiel de l'Institut seront do Instituto, estar~o isentos, no exempts, sur le territoire de tout territ6rio de cada um dos Estados 2tat Contractant, de toute forme de Contratantes, de qualquer gravame, taxation, y compris les droits de inclusive direitos aduaneiros, con- douane, les taxes d'accise et les tribuigbes indiretas ou sobretaxas, surtaxes. ou quaisquer tributos.

Estardo tamb6m isentos de qualquer Tous fonds ou autres biens h l'us- esp6cie de impostos no territ6rio de age de l'Institut dans la poursuite cada um dos Estados Contratantes, os de ses buts, et tous contrats ou fundos e outros bens do Instituto autres actes officiels de l'Institut pqr 6le empregados nas suas atividades dans les limits de ses fonctions, se- bem assim todos os contratos e atos ront 6galement exempts de toute forme oficiais do mesmo, que estejam dentro de taxation sur le territoire de dos limites de suas fung5es. chacun des 9tats Contractants.

MOVIMENTO DE FUNDOS MOUVEMENTS DE FONDS

Artigo XIII Article XIII

Cada um dos Estados Contratantes Chacun des 2tats Contractants tomar( as medidas necesrias para fa- prendra toutes mesures appropri6es cilitar o movimento dos fundos do pour facilitar les mouvements de Instituto. fonds de l'Institut. FACILIDADES PARA EL EXEMPTIONS AND PRIVILEGES FOR PERSONAL Y ESTUDIANTES PERSONNEL AND STUDENTS

Artfculo XIV Article XIV

Cada uno de los Estados Contratantes Each of the Contracting States a- conviene en acordar a las personas al grees that it will accord to persons servicio del Instituto, o que realicen engaged in the work of the Institute estudios duspiciados por 61, todas a- or pursuing studies under the auspices quellas facilidades que puedan conceder of the Institute, such privileges with en cuanto concierne a exenciones de im- respect to exemption from taxation and puestos y otros recargos que afecten la other burdens affecting the entry, entrada, viajes y residencia de tales travel and residence of such persons as personas, conforme a sus leyes y regla- may be appropriate under its laws and mentos. regulations.

FIRMA Y RATIFICACION SIGNATURE AND RATIFICATION

Artfculo XV Article XV

1. El original de la presente Con- 1. The original of the present Con- venci6n, redacto en los idiomas espa- vention in the English, Spanish, Portu- hol, ing16s, portugu6s y franc6s, serA guese and French languages shall be de- depositado en la Uni6n Panamericana posited with the Pan American Union and y abierto a la firma de los Gobier- opened for signature by the Governments nos de las RepOiblicas Americanas. La of the American Republics. The Pan Uni6n Panamericana enviarA copias cer- American Union shall furnish a certi- tificadas aut6nticas de la presente fied copy of the present Convention to Convenci6n a los gobiernos signatarios each signatory Government and to the y a los gobiernos de los Estados no sig- Government of each non-signatory-State natarios que sean miembros de la Uni6n which is a member of the Union. The Panamericana. La Uni6n Panamericana Pan American Union shall inform all the informarA a todos los gobiernos de los Governments of the States members of parses miembro9 de la Uni6n Panameri- the Pan American Union with respect to cana acerca de las firmas de adhesi6n all signatures and the respective dates que se registren y de las fechas res- thereof. pectivas de las mismas.

2. La presente Convenci6n serA ra- 2. The present Convention shall be tificada por los Estados Signatarios de ratified by the signatory States in acuerdo con sus respectivos procedi- conformity with their respective con- mientos constitucionales. Los instru- stitutional procedures. The instrumentos de ratificaci6n ser~n deposita- ments of ratification shall be depos- dos en la Uni6n Panamericana, la que ited, with the Pan American Union, comunicar6 a todos los Gobiernos Signa- which shall notify all the signatory tarios los datos sobre cada ratifica- Governments of each ratification depos- ci6n depositada. ited and the date of its deposit.

3. La presente Convenci6n entrar6 3. The present Convention shall en vigor tres meses despu6s de que se come into force three months after hayan depositado en la Uni6n Panameri- the deposit of not less than five FACILIDADES PARA 0 PESSOAL EXEMPTIONS ET PRIVILtGES ACCORDS E ESTUDANTES AU PERSONNEL ET AUX 9STUDIANTS

Artigo XIV Article XIV

Cada um dos Estados Contratantes Chacun des ttats Contractants con- acorda em proporcionar As pessoas ao vient d'accorder aux personnes prenant serviQo do Instituto, ou que realizem part aux travaux de l'Institut, ou estudos por fle patrocinados, todas poursuivant leurs 6tudes sous les aus- as facilidades que possam conceder no pices de l'Institut, tous les privi- que respeita a iseng6es de impostos lbges, en ce qui concerne l'exemption e outros onus que afetam a entrada, d'imp6ts et autres charges se rappor- as viagens e a resid~ncia de tais pe- tant A l'entr6e, au voyage et au s~jour ssoas, em conformidade com suas leis e de telles pdrsonnes, que lui permet- regulamentos. tront ses lois et r~glements.

ASSINATURA E RATIFICAQAO SIGNATURE ET RATIFICATION

Artigo XV Article XV

1. 0 original desta Convenq~o, 1. L'original de la pr~sente Con- redigido nos idiomas portugu~s, espa- vention en langues frangaise, anglaise, nhol, ingl~s, e frances, ser depositado espagnole et portugaise, sera d~pos6 na Unido Panamericana, e aberto A as- A l'Union Panam6ricaine et soumis A sinatura dos Governos dos Repfiblicas la signature des Gouvernements des Americanas. A Uni~o Panamericana en- R6publiques Am6ricaines. L'Union viard c6pias certificadas da presente Panam6ricaine fournira une copie cer- Convenq~o aos Governos dos Estados tifi6e conforme de la pr~sente Con- signatJrios e aos dos n~o signat.rios vention A chaque Gouvernement signa- e que sejam seus membros, e informar. taire et au Gouvernement de chaque aos governos de todos os paises que 9tat non signataire qui est membre de dela fazem parte, a respeito das as- l'Union Panam6ricaine. L'Union Pan- sinaturas de ades~o que sejam regis- am6ricaine avisera tous les Gouverne- tradas e das datas dos respectivos ments des 9tats membres de l'Union registros. Panam6ricaine quant & toutes les signatures d'adh6sion et leurs dates respectives.

2. A presente Convenq~o ser6 ra- 2. La pr6sente Convention sera tificada pelos Estados Signat.rios ratifi6e par les 9tats signataires en de ac6rdo com seus respectivos pro- conformit6 avec leurs procedures cons- cessos constitucionais. Os instru- titutionnelles respectives. Les ins- mentos de ratificaq&o sergo deposi- truments de ratification seront d6- tados na Uni~o Panamericana, que co- pos6s & l'Union Panam6ricaine, qui municarb a todos os Governos Signat6- avertira tous les Gouvernements signa- rios a data de dep6sito de cada ra- taires du d6p6t de chaque ratification tificago. et de la date de ce d6p~t.

3. A presente ConvenQgo entrarg 3. La pr6sente Convention entrera em vigor tr~s meses depois de terem en vigueur trois mois apres que cinq sidQ depositadas na Uni&o Panamericana ratifications au moins auront 6t6 d6- cana cinco ratificaciones cuando me- ratifications with the Pan American nos. Cualquiera ratificaci6n que se Union. Any ratification received af- reciba despu6s de que la presente Con- ter the date of entry into force of the venci6n entre en vigor tendr. efecto Convention shall take effect one month un mes despu6s de la fecha del dep6- after the date of its deposit with the sito de dicha ratificaci6n en la Uni6n Pan American Union. Panamericana.

DENUNCIA DENUNCIATION

Artfculo XVI Article XVI

1. La presente Convenci6n, de a- 1. The present Convention shall, cuerdo con lo dispuesto en el pdrrafo subject to the provisions of Paragraph 21 de este Articulo, regird indefini- 2 of this Article, remain in force in- damente, pero podr. ser denunciada por definitely, but may be denounced by cualquier Estado Contratante, dando a- any Contracting State by a notifica- viso por escrito a la Uni6n Panameri- tion in writing to the Pan American cana, la cual informar. a todos los Union, which shall inform all the other otros Estados Contratantes acerca de Contracting States of each notification cada notificaci6n de denuncia que sea of denunciation received. After the recibida. Transcurrido un afio a con- expiration of one year from the date of tar de la fecha en que haya sido re- the receipt by the Pan American Union cibida por la Uni6n Panamericana la of a notification of denunciation by notificaci6n de denuncia, la presente any Contracting State, the present Con- Convenci6n cesard en sus efectos para vention shall cease to be in force with el Estado denunciante, pero permane- respect to such State, but the Conven- cerd en pleno efecto en lo que res- tion shall remain in full force and ef- pecta a todos los otros Estados Con- fect with respect to all the other Con- tratantes. tracting States.

2. En el caso de que el nimero de 2. In the event that the number of Estados Contratantes quedare reducido Contracting States should be reduced to a menos de cinco, como resultado de las less than five as the result of denun- deruncias, los Estados restantes se con- ciations, the remaining Contracting sultardn recfprocamente y de modo in- States shall immediately consult with mediato con el objeto de revisar la each other with a view to revising the presente Convenci6n y resolver 1o con- present Convention and with a view to veniente sobre el futuro del Instituto. determining the future status of the Si dentro de dos ahos, a partir de la Institute. If, within two years after fecha en que el nfimero de Estados que- the date upon whiqh the number of Con- dare reducido a menos de cinco, como tracting States is reduced to less than resultado de denuncias, esos Estados no five, as the result of denunciations, hubieren llegado a un acuerdo respecto no agreement shall have been reached by a la continuidad de la Convenci6n y al the remaining Contracting States re- futuro del Instituto, la Convenci6n ce- garding the continuation of the Conven- sard de tener vigor seis meses despu6s tion and the status of the Institute, de la fecha en que cualquiera de dichos the Convention shall, upon the expira- Estados notifique por escrito a los o- tion of six months' written notice by tros su intenci6n de terminarla. En any remaining Contracting State, cease el caso de que la Convenci6n cesare de to be in force. In the Avent that. tha cinco ratificag~es, pelo menos. Qual- pos6es A l'Union Panam6ricaine. Toute quer ratificacao recebida depois de ratification reque aprbs la date A later a presente Convenq~o entrado em quelle la pr6sente Convention entrera Vigor, comegarA a ter efeito um m~s en vigueur prendra effet un mois aprbs depois da data em que tenha sido dela date du d~p6t l'Union Panam6ri- Positada na Uniio Panamericana. caine de la dite ratification.

DENONCIA D2NONCIATION

Artigo XVI Article XVI

I. A presente Convengao, de ac6rdo 1. La pr6sente Convention restera com a alfnea 2 d~sta Artigo, vigorarA en vigueur ind~finiment sous reserve por tempo indeterminado, mas poderd des dispositions du paragraphe 2 de cet ser denunciada por qualquer Estado Article, mais pourra 6tre d~noncee par Contratante, mediante aviso dado por tout 2tat Contractant par une notifi- escrito a Uniao Panamericana, que in- cation par ecrit addressee a l'Union formard a todos os demais Estados Con- Panamrricaine, qui informera tous les tratantes s6bre cada notificago de autres 2tats Contractants de chaque denfincia que seja recebida. Ap6s um notification de d~nonciation reque. ano, a contar da data em que tenha A l'expiration d'un d6lai d'un an & sido recebida pela Uni~o Panamericana partir de la date h laquelle l'Union a notificaq~o da denl3ncia, a presente Panamrricaine aura requ une notifica- Convengdo cessarI em seus efeitos no tion de d~nonciation de la part de que toca ao Estado denunciante, con- tout 2tat Contractant, la pr6sente tinuando por6m em pleno vigor para Convention cessera d'op6rer pour cet todos os demais Estados Contratantes. 2tat, mais restera pleinemente en vigueur en ce qui concerne tous les autres 2tats Contractants.

2. Caso o nfimero de Estados Con- tratantes fique reduzido a menos de 2. Au cas oU, par suite de d6- cinco, por efeito das denfincias, os nonciations, le nombre des 2tats Con- Estados restantes se consultarao re- tractants serait r~duit & moins de cfprocamente, sem perda de tempo, a cinq, les 2tats Contractants restants fim de rever a presente Convenq~o, e entreront imm6diatement en consulta- resolver o que for conveniente s6bre tion les uns avec les autres, en vue o futuro do Instituto. Se dentro de de reviser la pr~sente Convention et dois anos, a partir da data em que o de d6terminer le status futur de nfimero de Estados tenha ficado redu- l'Institut. Si, dans un d6lai de deux le zido a menos de cinco, por efeito das ans A partir de la date & laquelle 6t6 denfincias, 6sses Estados ndo tiverem nombre des 2tats Contractants aura de chegado a um ac6rdo s6bre a continua- r~duit & moins de cinq, par suite pas q o da Convengdo e o futuro do Insti- d6nonciations, ces 8tats n'ont concernant la tuto, a Convenq~o cessard de ter efei- abouti A un arrangement et le to seis meses depois da data em que continuation de la Convention status de l'Institut, la Convention, qualquer dos ditos Estados notifique h l'expiration d'un d~lai de six mois por escrito aos demais sua intengdo de la notification aura 6t6 termind-la. No caso em que a Conven- aprbs que par 6crit par l'un quelconque 9&o deixe de ter efeito, o futuro donn6e tener efecto, el futuro destino del Ins- Convention should cease to be in force, tituto seri determinado por el Consejo the status of the Institute shall be Directivo de la Unidn Panamericana. determined by the GoverningBoard of the Pan American Union.

EN FE DE LO CUAL, los infrascritos IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Plenipotenciarios, despu6s de haber de-, Plenipotentiaries, having deposited positado sue plenos poderes, que se han their full powers found to be in due encontrado en buena y debida forma, and proper form, sign this Convention firman y sellan la presente Convenci6n in the English, Spanish, Portuguese en espafiol, ingl6s, portugu6s y fran- and French languages-at the Pan Ameri- c6s, en la Uni6n Panamericana, Wgshing- can Union, Washington, D. C., on be- ton, D. C., en nombre de sus respecti- half of their respective Governments vos Gobiernos, en las fechas indicadas and affix thereto their seals on the al lado de sue firmas, dates appearing opposite their signatures. destino do Instituto ser6 decidido des 9tats Contractants restants, ces- pelo Conselho Diretor da Uni~o Pana- sera d'6tre en vigueur. Au cas ot la mericana. Convention cesserait d'Otre en vigueur, le status de l'Institut sera d6termin6 par le Conseil d'Administration de l'Union Panam~ricairie.

EM TESTEMUNHO DO QUE, os Plenipoten- EN FOI DE QU0I, les P16nipoten- ci~rios abaixo assinados, depois de tiaires soussign6s, ayant d6pos6 leurs terem depositado seus plenos poderes, pleins-pouvoirs, reconnus en bonne et que foram achados em boa e devida due forme, signent cette Convention forma, assinam e selam a presente Con- dans les langues frangaise, espagnole, vengio em portugu~s, espanhol, ingl~s anglaise, et portugaise, & l'Union e frances, na Uni&o Panamericana, em Panam6ricaine, Washington, D. C., au Washington, D.C., em nome de seus res- nom de leurs Gouvernements respectifs pectivos Governos, nas datas indicadas et y apposent leur cachet aux dates 4 margem de suas Assinaturas. apparaissant en face de leur signature. POR COSTA RICA:

(F) Carlos Manuel Eocalante 15 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR NICARAGUA:

(F) Guillermo Sevilla Sacasa 15 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR PANAMA:

(F) Enrique A. Jim6nez 15 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA:

(S) Cordell Hull January 15, 1944 (SEAL)

POR CUBA:

(F) Aurelio F. Concheso 20 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR ECUADOR:

(F) C. E. Alfaro 20 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR HONDYJRAS:

(F) JuliAn R. Caceres 28 de enero de 1944 (suL o)

POR LA REPUBLICA DOLINICANA:

(F) A. Copello 28 de enero de 1944 (SaLLu)

POR EL SALVADOR:

(F) Hector David Castro 18 de febrero de 1944 (SRL.T.O)

POR GUATKILALA:

(F) Adrign Recinos 16 de marzo de 1944 (SILLOj POR URUGUAY:

El Plenipotenciario del Uruguay firma la Convenci6n bajo la reserva do su posterior aprobaci6n parlamentaria conform al articulo 157, inciso 21, de la Constituci6n de la Repdblica.

(F) J. C. Blanco 17 de abril de 1944 (SELLO)

POR CHILE:

(F) R. Michels 13 de mayo de 1944 (SELI)

POR BOLIVIA:

(F) Carlos Dorado 12 de junio do 1944 (SELLO)

POR VENEZUELA:

El Plenipotenciario de Venezuela firma la presente Convenci6n con las reservas siguientes:

PRIMERA: En cuanto a la estipulaci6n contenida en el articulo XII por la cual los Estados signatarios se comprometen a conceder la exenci6n do impuestos estaduales o municipales en favor do los bienes inmuebles pertenecientes al Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agricolas, deja constancia expresa de que no puede acordar dicha exenci6n por cuanto el r4gimen de tales impuestos escapa a la competencia del Poder Federal, de conformidad con el numeral 30 del part- grafo 4 del articulo 17 do la Constituci6n Nacional.

SEGUNDA: En cuanto a la estipulaci6n contenida en el pardgrafo 20 del articulo XVI por la cual se conviene on quo el futuro destino del Instituto serd determinado por el Consejo Directivo de la Uni6n Panamericana, en el caso de quo la presente Convenci6n cesare de tener efecto, el Gobierno do Venezuela se reserva los derechos quo puedan corresponderle, llegada esa eventualidad, sobre los inmuebles situados en su territorio quo se hubieren destinado a los fines previstos on la Convenci6n, y los cuales no podrin ser traspasados, cedidos ni on forma alguna enajenados o gravados, sino de conformidad con las leyes vigentes en el pals.

(F) Di6genes Escalante 10 do octubre de 1944 (SELLO)

POR MEXICO:

(F) Antonio Espinosa do los Monteros 19 do noviembre do 1946 (SELLO) 14

POR COLomBIA:

(F) Silvio Villegas 23 de Julio de 1948 (SELL)

POR HAITI:

(F) Joseph L. D6jean 21 de agosto de 1950* (SELLO)

* Fecha de adhesi6n PAISES QE HAN RATIFICADO LA CONVENCION

PAIS FECHA DEL INSTRUMENTO FECHA DE DEPOSITO DEL DE RATIFICACION INSTRUMENTO DE RATIFI CACION

Colombia Julio 15. 1952 Agosto 25, 1952

Costa Rica Julio 22, 1944 Agosto 14, 1944

Cuba Noviembre 24, 1952 Diciembre 11, 1952

Chile Junio 25, 1957 Agosto 8. 1957

Ecuador Noviembre 13, 1952 Diciembre 15, 1952

El Salvador Mayo 16, 1944 Mayo 31, 1944

Estados Unidos Junio 29, 1944 Julio 4, 1944

Guatemala Junio 7, 1944 Julio 6, 1944 (1 1950(1 1951(1 Haiti Agosto 21, Junio 19,

Honduras Febrero 20, 1945 Marzo 19, 1945

M6xico Febrero 27, 1947 Mayo 26, 1947

Nicaragua Julio 18. 1944 Agosto 31, 1944

Panama Enero 10, 1947 Enero 24, 1,947

Repablica Dominicana Dicienbre 21, 1944 Enero 8, 1945 2 1946(2 1946 ( Venezuela(2 Febrero 21, Marzo 6,

Adhesi6n

Con reserva

I RI 0B: ATAIII II

Acuerdo entre

la Uni6n Panamericana y el Gobierno de la Repfiblica Argentina

sobre el establecimiento en Buenos Aires

de una Oficina de Informaci6n de la Secretarla General de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos

ION PANAMERICANA * WASHINGTON, D.C.

Acuerdo entre la Uni6n Panamericana y el Gobierno de la Rep'blica Argentina sobre el establecimiento en Buenos Aires de una Oficina de Informaci6n de la Secretarla General de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos

Di-.ision Juridica Departamento de Atintos Juridicos

V'NION PANAMERICANA - WASHINGTON, D.C., 1958

Nota

Los textos de tratados, convenciones y otros acuerdos se publican por la Divisi6n Jurfdica a partir de 1956, en esta "Serie sobre Tratados". Anteriormente aparecian en la "Se- rie sobre Derecho y Tratados", la cual ha sido eliminada. La Divisi6n publica adem5s las Constituciones de los pafses americanos, los "Statements of Laws in Matters Affecting Business", Documentos del Consejo Interamericano de Jurisconsultos y estudios diversos.

ACUERDO ENTRE LA UNION PANAMERICANA Y EL GOBIERNO DE LA REPUBLICA ARGENTINA SOBRE EL ESTABLECIMIEN- TO EN BUENOS AIRES DE UNA OFICINA DE INFORMACION DE LA SECRETARIAGENERAL DE LA ORGANIZACION DE LOS ESTADOS AMERICANOS

CONSIDERANDO:

Que el Comite Interamericano de Representantes de los Presidentes, en su Recomendacion Z5 seffal', como uno de los medios de fortalecer la acci 6 n de la Organiza- cion de los Estados Americanos para que sea un conducto cada dia mas eficaz de cooperacion entre los Estados Miem- bros, la conveniencia de estrechar la vinculacionentre los parses del continente mediante el conocimiento reciproco de sus caracterlsticas culturales, economicas y sociales dentro de la comunidad americana, agregando que es un asunto de interns vital para el funcionamiento eficaz de la organizacion contar con la comprension, el apoyo y la participa - cion del pu'blico;

Que a fin de alcanzar tales objetivos el Comite a- consejo en dicha Recomendacion que se dieran los pasos necesarios para establecer, debidamente estructuradas, las Oficinas locales de la Organizacion en todas las Repulblicas ame ic anas;

Que el Consejo de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Americanos, en su Resoluci 6 n del 3 de junio de 1953, auto- rizo al Secretario General para establecer Oficinas de la Union Panamericana en los distintos par-ses Miembros;

Que el Gobierno de la Repiiblica Argentinaha ofre- cido a la Uni6n Panamericana su colaboraci 6 n para lograr esa aspiracion, mediante el establecimiento en Buenos Ai- res de una Oficina de Informacion de la Secretaria General de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Americanos, y ha ofreci- do tambi~n las facilidades que se otorgan a los organismos internacionales; y Que para estos efectos es necesario formalizar un Acuerdo con el prop 6 sito de definir las modalidades de cooperacion entre las Partes y determinar las condiciones, facilidades y prerrogativas que el Gobierno de la Repiiblica Argentina acordara a la Union Panamericana, en relacion con el establecimiento de dicha Oficina,

POR TANTO,

LA UNION PANAMERICANA (denominada en adelante la "Uni 6 n") representada por el Dr. JOSE A. MORA, Secreta- rio General de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Americanos,por una parte, y

EL GOBIERNO DE LA REPUBLICA ARGENTINA (de- nominado en adelante el "Gobierno") representado por S. E. el sefior Ministro Interino de Relaciones Exteriores y Culto, Con- tralmirante D. TEODORO E. HARTUNG, por la otra parte, ACUERDAN LO SIGUIENTE:

ESTABLECIMIENTO Y PROPOSITO DE LA OFICINA

Arti'culo 1. El Gobierno autoriza a la Uni 6 n para establecer en Buenos Aires una Oficina de Informacion de la Secretarfa General de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Americanos.

Artr'culo 2. El objeto de la Oficina sera servir como centro para promover y coordinar en forma mas eficaz las actividades de la Uni 6 n. A tal efecto la Union estudiarai la posibilidad de desarrollar, entre otras, las siguientes actividades: Am- pliacion de un programa de relaciones publicas; reuniones con la participacion de personas destacadas en los diversos campos de actividad interamericana; exposiciones de arte para hacer conocer los valores latinoamericanos; festivales de muisi- ca; muestras de productos; exhibiciones de peli'culas; fomento de turismo; impresion, promocion y distribuci6n de publicaciones de la Union.

Artrculo 3. El Gobierno pondra. a disposicion de la Union el uso del local correspondiente,y le proporcionar& anualmente la suma de 250. 000 pesos moneda nacional, para el sostenimiento de la Oficina. Art culo 4. La Uni 6 n contribuira anualmente con los fondos que destina al mantenimiento de la actual Oficina de la Union Panamericana en Buenos Aires y con los fondos que acuerde asignar de su propio presupuesto para publicaciones o actividades que la Uni 6 n desee realizar por medio de las facilidades de la Oficina. Adernas, la Union suministrara todoel material de oficina que sea necesario, como Utiles de escri- torio y equipo.

Articulo 5. La Oficina formara parte integrante de la Se- cretarfa General de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Ameri- canos. El personal que sea asignado a la misma seranom- brado por el Secretario General de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Americanos.

La Oficina gozara en el territorio de la Repii- blicaArticulo Argentina, 6. de acuerdo con lo previsto en el Arti"culo 103 de la Carta de la Organizacion de los Estados Ameri- canos, de la capacidad juri'dica, privilegios e inmunidades que sean necesarios para el ejercicio de sus funciones y la realizacion de sus propositos, dentro de los limites que se especifican en este Acuerdo.

CAPACIDAD JURIDICA

Artfculo 7. La Oficina gozara de personerfa jurifdica en el territorio de la Repu'blica Argentina y tendra capacidad legal para (a) contratar, (b) adquirir bienes mulebles e inmuebles y disponer de ellos, y (c) entablar procedimientos judiciales y administrativos.

LIBERTAD DE ACCION

Articulo 8. La Oficina gozara en la Repiblica Argentinade la independencia y libertad de acci 6 n que corresponden alos organismos internacionales de acuerdo con la costumbrein- ternacional.

PROPIEDADES, BIENES Y HABERES

Artf'culo 9. La Oficina, asi c omo sus propiedades, bienes y haberes gozaran en la Repi'blica Argentina de inmunidad contra procedimientos judiciales y administrativos, a excepci 6 n de los casos particulares en que esa inmunidad sea expresamente renunciada por el Director de la Oficina, debidamente autorizado para hacerlo por el Secretario Gene- ral de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos.

Articulo 10. Los locales, dependencias, archivos y documentos de la Oficina sera'n inviolables.

Arti'culo 11. La Oficina, asf como sus propiedades, bienes y haberes estaran exentos:

a) de toda contribucion directa o indirecta; entendiendose, sin embargo, que no se podra reclamar exencion alguna por concepto de contribuciones que, de hecho, constituyan una remuneracion por servicios piiblicos;

b) de derechos de aduana. prohibiciones y restriccio- nes respecto a los articulos, equipo o elementos de trabajo que importe o exporte para su uso oficial; entendiendose, sin embargo, que los articulos que se importen libres de derechos no se vendera.n en el pal's sino conforme a las condiciones que se acuerden con el Gobierno; y

c) de derechos de aduana, prohibiciones y restriccio- nes respecto a la importacion y exportacion de sus public acione s.

Articulo 12. Sin quedar afectada por ordenanzas fiscales, reglamentos o moratorias de naturaleza alguna:

a) la Oficina podra tener fondos o divisa corriente de cualquier clase y llevar sus cuentas en cualquier divis a, y

b) la Oficina tendra libertad para transferir sus fondos dentro o fuera de la Repiiblica Argentina ypa- ra convertir en cualquier otra divisa, la divisa corriente que tenga en custodia.

Artculo 13. En el ejercicio de los derechos consagrados en el Articulc 12, la Oficina prestara la debida atencion a cualquier reparo que le haga el Gobierno. FACILIDADES RESPECTO A LAS COMUNICACIONES

Articulo 14. La Oficina gozara en la Repiblica Argentina, para sus comunicaciones oficiales, de un tratamiento no menos favorable del que sea acordado por el Gobierno de la Rep6blica Argentina a cualquier otro Gobierno, incluyendo sus misiones diplomaticas, en asuntos de prioridades, tari- fas y tasas sobre correo, cables, telegramas, radiogramas, telefonos y otras comunicaciones.

Articulo 15. La Oficina tendr& el derecho de despachar y recibir correspondencia por mensajeros o en valijas sella- das.

PERSONAL DE LA OFICINA

Artfculo 16. Los funcionarios de la Oficina gozaran de inmunidad contra todo procedimiento judicial respecto de todos los actos que ejecuten y de las expresiones orales o es- critas que emitan en el desempefo de sus funciones. Ade- mas, estaran exentos de impuestos sobre los sueldos yemo- lumentos que les pague la Oficina. Al Director y demos funcionarios de la Oficina se les concederi la introduccion en franquicia, cada dos aflos, de un automovil para su uso personal.

Arti'culo 17. Los funcionarios de la Oficina, que no sean nacionales de la Rep~iblica Argentina:

a) gozaran de inmunidad contra todo servicio nacional de caracter obligatorio;

b) recibiran, tanto ellos como sus esposas y sus fami- liares dependientes, todas las facilidades compatibles con la ley en materia de inmigracion;

c) podran importar y exportar en franquicia sus muebles y efectos personales por una sola vez.

ArtI'culo 18. El Director de la Oficina, o su representante debidamente autorizado, comunicara al Gobierno los nombres de los funcionarios y demas miembros del personal en la Republica Argentina a quienes correspondan los beneficios enumerados en el Arti'culo 17. Artficulo 19. Los privilegios e inmunidades se concedenal Director y funcionarios de la Oficina, exclusivamente en interes de esta. Por consiguiente, el Director de la Oficina, debidamente autorizado para tal efecto por el Secretario Ge- neral de la Organizaci 6 n de los EstadosAmericanos, debera renunciar a los privilegios e inmunidades de cualquier funcionario en cualquier caso en que, segiun el criterio del Secretario General, el ejercicio de ellos impida el curso de la justicia y cuando dicha renuncia pueda hacerse sin que se perjudiquen los intereses de la Oficina.

COOPERACION Y SOLUCION DE DISPUTAS

Articulo Z0. La Oficina cooperara' con las autoridades competentes del pal's para facilitar la administracion adecuada de la justicia, velar por el cumplimiento de las ordenanzas de policfa y evitar que ocurran abusos en relacion con los privilegios e inmunidades mencionados en este Acuerdo.

Artf'culo 21. La Oficina tomara' las medidas que sean necesarias para la solucion adecuada de:

a) las disputas que se originen en contratos u otras cuestiones de derecho privado en que sea parte la Oficina; y

b) las disputas en que sea parte cualquier funcionario de la Oficina, respecto de las cuales goce de inmunidad, en caso de que el Director, debidarnente autorizado para tal efecto por el Secretario General de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Americanos, no haya renunciado a tal inmunidad de acuerdo con el Arti'culo 19.

DISPOSICIONES FINALES

Arti'culo 22. Ninguna disposici6n del presente Acuerdo de- berg ser interpretada como impedimento para la adopcionde medidas apropiadas de seguridad para los intereses del Go- bie rno.

Artfculo 23. Este Acuerdo entrar& en vigor el dia de su firma. Artriculo 24. Este Acuerdo podra' ser revisado por mutuo consentirniento del Gobierno y de la Uni6n.

Arti'culo 25. Cualquiera delas Partes podra dar por termi- nado este Acuerdo dando aviso por escrito a la otra, con un afio de anticipaci6n.

EN FE DE LO CUAL, los infrascritos, debidamente autorizados para hacerlo, firman el presente Acuerdo endu- plicado en Buenos Aires, a los veinticuatro dfas del mes de enero de mil novecientos cincuenta y ocho.

Por el Gobierno Por la de la Repulblica Argentina Uni6n Panamericana

(f) TEODORO E. HARTUNG (f) JOSE A. MORA Ministro Interino de Relaciones Secretario General Exteriores y Culto de la Organizaci 6 n de los (SELLO) Estados Americanos

(SELLO)

PROTOCOLO DE ENMIENDA A LA CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS

Abierto a la firma en la Uni6n Panamericana el 1 ° de diciembre de 1958

PROTOCOL OF AMENDMENT TO THE CONVENTION ON THE INTER-AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES

Opened for signature at the Pan American Union on December 1, 1958

PROTOCOLO DE EMENDA i\ CONVENCAO SOBRE 0 INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRONOMICAS Aberto h assinatura na Unigo Pan-Americana em 1 de dezembro de 1958

9 PROTOCOLE D'AMENDEMENTS A LA CONVENTION RELATIVE A L' INSTITUT INTERAM ERICA IN DES SCIENCES A GRICOLES

Ouvert N la signature h l'Union Panam~ricaine le ler dcembre 1958

Uni6n Panamericana Unido Pan-Americana Pan American Union Union Panamericaine

Washington, D. C., 1958

Serie sobre Tratados N' 12 Serie sabre Tratados N) 12 Treaty Series N' 12 S~rie sur les Traites No 12

PROTOC OLO DE ENMIENDA A LA CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS Abierto a la firma en la Uni6n Panamericana el 10 de diciembre de 1958

PROTOCOL OF AMENDMENT TO THE CONVENTION ON THE INTER-AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES Opened for signature at the Pan American Union on December 1, 1958

PROTOCOLO DE EMENDA A CONVEN(;AO S6BRE 0 INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRON6MICAS

Aberto a assinatura na Uni~o Pan -Americana em 1 de dezembro de 1958

PROTOCOLE DAMENDEMENTS A LA CONVENTION RELATIVE A LINSTITUT INTERAMERICAIN DES SCIENCES AGRICOLES Ouvert N la signature lPUnion Panam~ricaine le ier d&cembre 1958

UNION PANAMERICANA Secretarfa General, Organizaci'n de los Estados Americanos Washington, D. C., 1958 Esta Serie se publica bajo la direcci6n de la Divisi6n Jurfdica General, Departamento de Asuntos Jurfdicos, Uni6n Panamericana, Washington, D. C.

ii TABLA DE MATERIAS QUADRO DAS MATERIAS TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE DES MATIERES

Pfigina

Protocolo de Enmienda a la Convenci6n sobre el Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas 1 Anexo - Antecedentes sobre el Protocolo 22 Convenci6n sobre el Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas 30

Protocol of Amendment to the Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences 6 Appendix - Background on the Protocol 24 Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences 38

Protocolo de Emenda N Convenggo sbbre o Instituto Interamericano de Ci~ncias Agronbmicas 11 Anexo - Antecedentes sbbre o Protocolo 26 Convenqfo s6bre o Instituto Interamericano de Cincias Agronbmicas 45

Protocole d'Amendements a la Convention relative a l'Institut Interam~ricain des Sciences Agricoles 16 Annexe - Antecedents relatifs au Protocole 28 Convention relative a l'Institut Interam~ricain des Sciences Agricoles 52

Estado de la Convenci6n 66

PROTOCOLO DE ENMIENDA A LA CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS

Los Estados Contratantes, con miras a fortalecer y ampliar las actividades agropecuarias de la Organizaci6n de los EstadosAmericanos, hanacor- dado efectuar ciertas modificaciones en la Convenci6n sobre el Instituto Inte- ramericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas (denominada en adelante "Ila Convenc16n"), abierta a la firma en la Union Panamericana el 15 de enero de 1944, y para estos efectos han resuelto concertar el siguiente Protocolo de Enmienda a la mencionada Convencion:

Artfculo I

El termino "Repuiblica" o "Repu'blicas" serf substituido por "Estado" o "Estados", segfn sea el caso, siempre que aqu6l figure en el texto de la Con- vencion.

Artfculo II

El Artfculo I de la Convenci6n queda enmendado en los t~rminos siguientes:

"Artfculo I

Los Estados Contratantes, por medio del presente instrumento, reorga- nizan el Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas y lo establecen como organismo internacional, reconoci~ndole personalidad jurfdica deacuerdo con su propia legislaci6no En tal carfcter, el Instituto goza de todos los derechos, tftulos e intereses en los bienes, terrenos y otras propiedades de cualquier naturaleza que sean y que pertenezcan al Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, segin fue organizado, con fecha de 18 de junio de 1942, como cor- poraci6n establecida de acuerdo con las leyes del Distrito de Columbia, Esta- dos Unidos de America; y asume todas las obligaciones de que se haya hecho responsable dicho Instituto en esa calidad de corporaci6n.

El Instituto tendrfi su sede en Turrialba, Costa Rica, y podrf establecer oficinas en otros lugares de dicho pafs. PodrA tener tambien oficinas o centros regionales en otros pafses de Americao"

Artfculo III

El Artfculo III de la Convenci6n queda enmendado en los t6rminos siguientes: "Artfculo I

La Junta Directiva, autoridad suprema del Instituto, se compone de un representante por cada Estado Contratante. Cada Estado designari como su representante preferentemente a un alto funcionario del Ministerio o Secreta- rfa de Agricultura, especialista en materias agrfcolas. Asimismo, cada Es- tado podrA nombrar un representante suplente y los asesores que considere necesarios°

Para las decisiones de la Junta Directiva se requiere el voto favorable de la mayorfa absoluta de los Estados Contratantes, excepto en lo referente a asuntos presupuestarios en que es necesaria una mayorfa de dos tercioso

Son atribuciones de la Junta las siguientes:

Elegir al Director del Instituto y determinar su remuneraci6n; Remover al Director; Considerar el Proyecto de Programa de Trabajo que le someta elDirec- tor, y aprobar anualmente el Programa de Trabajo del Instituto; Aprobar el presupuesto del Instituto y fijar las cuotas anuales de los Es- tados Contratantes; Cooperar con el Director en asuntos de fndole tecnico-agrfcola; Aprobar el Acuerdo que el Instituto, en su calidad de Organismo Espe- cializado, celebre con el Consejo de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos, y en el que se determinen las relaciones que deben existir entre el Instituto y la Organizaci6n; Aprobar acuerdos entre el Instituto y otros organismos internacionales cuyos objetivos sean similares a los de 6ste; Recibir del Director un informe anual sobre las actividades, estado general y situaci6n financiera del Instituto;

Formular su propio Reglamento y aprobar el Reglamento para la admi- nistraci6n del Instituto.

La Junta establecerf, entre sus miembros, una comision que prepare las reuniones de aqu~lla y lleve a cabo los demos trabajos que la Junta le encomiende.

La Junta celebrarfi anualmente una reuni6n ordinaria y podrfi celebrar reuniones extraordinarias cuando una mayorfa de los Estados Contratantes lo acuerde° Las reuniones de la Junta tendr, n lugar en la sede del Instituto a menos que aqu~lla fije otro lugar en casos determinados."

Artfculo IV Los artfculos IV, V y VI de la Convenc16n, junto con sus tftulos correspondientes,quedan reemplazados por el siguiente artfculo y tftulo: "EL DIRECTOR

Artfculo IV

El Director del Instituto serfi elegido por la Junta Directiva en sesi6n plenaria para un perfodo de seis aflos y podrfi ser reelecto una sola vez. De- sempefiarfi su cargo hasta que su sucesor sea elegido y entre en funciones.

El Director, bajo la supervision de la Junta Directiva, tendr amplios y plenos poderes para dirigir las actividades del Instituto; tendrA la represen- taci6n legal del mismo; y sera' responsable del cumplimiento de todas las 6r- denes y resoluciones de la Junta.

El Director tendrfi, adema's, las siguientes atribuciones y deberes:

Preparar el proyecto de presupuesto y el programa de trabajo del Insti- tuto para cada aflo fiscal y someterlos a los miembros de la Junta Direc- tiva con no menos de dos meses de anticipaci'n a la reuni6n anual en la que se considere su aprobaci6n; Presentar un informe anual a la Junta Directiva dando cuenta de las labores del Instituto durante el afto fiscal anterior, asf como del estado general y de la situacion financiera del mismo; Celebrar contratos y arreglos para la realizac16n de proyectos y actividades especfficas que, en su opini'n, resulten en beneficio del Instituto, de acuerdo con las normas generales que establezca la Junta Directiva; Nombrar y remover funcionarios y empleados y fijar su remuneraci6n, de acuerdo con las normas generales que determine la Junta Directiva; Procurar la mayor coordinaci6n posible entre las actividades del Insti- tuto y las de otros organismos internacionales cuyos objetivos sean similares a los de 6steo

Cuando lo estime necesario y bajo su responsabilidad, el Director podrf delegar en otros funcionarios del Instituto las atribuciones inherentes a sucar- go."

Artfculo V

Los Artfculos VII y VIII de la Convenc16n, junto con sus respectivos tftulos, quedan sin efectoo

Artfculo VI

ElArtfculo IX de la Convenci6n queda enmendado en los tfrminos siguientes: "Artfculo IX

Los Estados Contratantes contribuirfin al sostenimiento del Instituto mediante cuotas anuales que serfn fijadas por la Junta Directiva de acuerdo con las bases utilizadas enla determinaci6n de las cuotas para el sostenimiento de la Uni6n Panamericana. El Instituto podrf, ademfis, aceptar de fuentes oficiales o de fuentes particulares, contribuciones especiales, legados o donacio- nes para realizar actividades que est&n de acuerdo con el carfcter y los propositos del Instituto.

El aflo fiscal del Instituto comienza el 10 dejulio y termina el 30 de junio.

Las cuotas anuales que correspondan a los Estados Contratantes se co- municarfn con anticipaci6n a los Gobiernos y se considerarfn debidas desde el primer dfa del precitado aflo fiscal."

Artfculo VII

El original del presente Protocolo, cuyos textos en espafiol, franc~s, ingles y portugubs son igualmente autenticos, serf depositado en la Uni6n Pa- namericana y abierto a la firma de los Gobiernos de los Estados Americanos. La Uni6n Panamericana informarfi a los Gobiernos acerca de las firmas y de las fechas correspondientes.

Artfculo VIII

Solamente podra'n ratificar o adherirse al presente Protocolo los Esta- dos Americanos que sean Partes en la Convenci6no

Artfculo IX

La Uni6n Panamericana enviarfi copias certificadas del Protocolo a los Gobiernos de los Estados Americanos para los fines de su ratificaci6n o adhe- s16n. Los instrumentos de ratificaci6n o adhesi'n serfin depositados en la Uni'n Panamericana y 6sta comunicarf a los Gobiernos cada dep6sito y la fecha del mismoo

Artfculo X

Este Protocolo entrarfi en vigor un mes despu6s de la fecha en quetodos los Estados Partes en la Convenci6n hayan depositado sus respectivos instrumentos de ratificaci6n o de adhesi6n al mismo.

Sin embargo, el nuevo sistema de cuotas, establecido por el Artfculo VI del presente Protocolo, no se empezarf a aplicar sino a partir del primer afto fiscal que comience seis meses o mfs despu6s de la fecha en que todos los Estados Miembros de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos hayan depositado sus respectivos instrumentos de ratificaci6n o adhesi6n, a menos que todos los Estados Contratantes acuerden, por conducto de sus Representantes en la Junta Directiva, iniciar dicho sistema de cuotas en un aflo fiscal anterior y convengan en la manera de Ilevar a cabo su decisi6n. El pago de la primera cuota de cualquier Estado que se haga Parte en el presente Protocolo despu~s de que el nuevo sistema de cuotas se empiece a aplicar, serfi calculado a base del nfdmero de meses completos que quedaren del respectivo afto fiscal.

Hasta la fecha en que se empiece a aplicar el nuevo sistema de cuotas, continuarf aplicindose el sistema incorporado en el Artfculo IX de la Conven- cion.

Cualquier instrumento de ratificaci6n o adhesi6n que se reciba despu~s de la fecha de entrada en vigor de este Protocolo, surtirA efecto un mes despues de la fecha de su dep6sito.

Artfculo XI

El presente Protocolo, al entrar en vigor, se considerarfi como parte integrante de la Convenci6n.

EN FE DE LO CUAL, los infrascritos Plenipotenciarios, debidamente autorizados, firman el presente Protocolo de Enmienda a la Convenci6n en la Union Panamericana, Washington, D. C. , en nombre de sus respectivos Go- biernos, en las fechas indicadas al lado de sus firmas. PROTOCOL OF AMENDMENT TO THE CONVENTION ON THE INTER-AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES

The Contracting States, with a view to strengthening and expanding the agricultural activities of the Organization of American States, have agreedto effect certain modifications in the Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences (hereinafter referred to as "the Convention"), opened for signature at the Pan American Union on January 15, 1944, andfor thatpur- pose have resolved to conclude a Protocol of Amendment to the said Conven- tion, as follows:

Article I

The term "State" or "States" shall be substituted for theterm "Republic" or "Republics", as the case may be, wherever the latter appears in the Con- vention.

Article II

Article I of the Convention is amended to read as follows:

"Article I The Contracting States hereby reorganize the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences and establish it as an international organization, which they recognize as a legal entity in accordance with their own legislation. As such, the Institute has all the rights, title and interest in and to the assets, lands and other property of any nature whatsoever of the Inter-American Insti- tute of Agricultural Sciences incorporated under the laws of the District of Columbia, United States of America, on June 18, 1942; and it assumes all the obligations for which the Institute as a corporation became responsible.

The headquarters of the Institute shall be located at Turrialba, Costa Ri- ca, and offices may be established at other locations in that country. The Insti- tute may also maintain regional offices or centers in other American countries."

Article I

Article Ill of the Convention is amended to read as follows: "Article III The Board of Directors, the highest authority of the Institute, is composed of one representative from each Contracting State. Each State shall appoint as its representative preferably a high official of its Ministry or Department of Agriculture, who is a specialist in agricultural matters. In addition, each State may designate an alternate representative and such advisers as it considers necessary. The decisions of the Board of Directors require the affirmative vote of an absolute majority of the Contracting States, except that decisions on budget- ary matters require a majority of two thirds. The Board has the following powers: To elect the Director of the Institute and to determine his compensation; To remove the Director; To consider the draft work program submitted to it by the Director, and to approve annually the work program of the Institute; To approve the budget of the Institute and to fix the annual quotas of the Contracting States; To cooperate with the Director in technical agricultural matters; To approve the Agreement which the Institute, as a Specialized Organi- zation, may enter into with the Council of the Organization of American States to determine the relations that should exist between the Institute and the Organization; To approve agreements between the Institute and other international organizations with similar objectives; To receive from the Director an annual report on the activities, general condition, and financial status of the Institute; To formulate its own Regulations and to approve the Regulations for the administration of the Institute. The Board shall establish a committee of its members to preparefor meetings of the Board and to carry out such other duties as the Board may entrust to it. The Board shall hold one regular meeting annually and may hold special meetings when agreed to by a majority of the Contracting States. The meetings of the Board shall take place at the headquarters of the Institute unless the Board decides upon some other place in a particular case." Article IV Articles IV, V and VI of the Convention, together with the titles thereto, are replaced by the following Article and title thereto: "THE DIRECTOR Article IV

The Director of the Institute shall be elected by the Board of Directors in plenary session for a term of six years and he may be reelected only once. He shall hold office until his successor shall be chosen and shall assume his duties. The Director, under the supervision of the Board of Directors, shall have ample and full powers to direct the activities of the Institute; he shall be the legal representative thereof; and he shall be responsible for carrying out all orders and resolutions of the Board.

The Director shall have, in addition, the following powers and duties:

To prepare the draft budget and the work program of the Institute for each fiscal year, and submit them to the members of the Board of Di- rectors at least two months before the annual meeting at which they will be considered for approval; To submit an annual report to the Board of Directors setting forth the work of the Institute during the previous fiscal year and its general condition and financial status; To make contracts and arrangements for carrying out projects and specific activities which in his opinion will be of benefit to the Institute, subject to the general policies established by the Board of Directors; To appoint, remove, and determine the compensation of officers and employees, in accordance with the general policies determined by the Board of Directors; To seek the greatest possible coordination between the activities of the Institute and those of other international organizations with similar objectives.

When he considers it necessary and under his responsibility, the Direc- tor may delegate the powers of his office to other officers of the Institute."

Article V Articles VII and VIII of the Convention, together with the titles thereto, are hereby abrogated.

Article VI

Article IX of the Convention is amended to read as follows:

"Article IX

The Contracting States shall contribute to the maintenance of the Insti- tute by means of annual quotas to be fixed by the Board of Directors on the same basis that is used for determining the quotas for the maintenance of the Pan American Union. The Institute may also accept, from either official or private sources, special contributions, legacies, or donations for carrying out activities that are in keeping with the character and objectives of the Institute.

The fiscal year of the Institute begins on the first day of Iuly and ends on the thirtieth day of June. The annual quotas of the Contracting States shall be communicated to the respective Governments in advance, and they shall be due on the first day of the fiscal year."

Article VII

The original of the present Protocol, the English, French, Portuguese and Spanish texts of which are equally authentic, shall be deposited with the Pan American Union and opened for signature by the Governments of theAmer- ican States. The Pan American Union shall inform the Governments with respect to the signatures and the respective dates thereof.

Article VIII

Only American States that are Parties to the Convention may ratify or adhere to the present Protocol.

Article IX

The Pan American Union shall send certified copies of the Protocol to the Governments of the American States for the purpose of ratification or adherence. The instruments of ratification or adherence shall be deposited with the Pan American Union, which shall notify the Governments of each deposit and the date thereof.

Article X

This Protocol shall come into force one month after the date on which all the States Parties to the Convention have deposited their respective instruments of ratification of or adherence to the Protocol.

However, the new quota system established by Article VI of the present Protocol shall not begin to be applied until the first fiscal year commencing six months or more after the date on which all Member States of the Organiza- tion of American States have deposited their respective instruments of ratification or adherence, unless all the Contracting States agree, through their representatives on the Board of Directors, to initiate such quota system in a previous fiscal year and agree upon the manner of doing so.

Payment of the first quota of any State becoming a Party to the present Protocol after the new quota system begins to be applied, shall be calculated on the basis of the number of full calendar months remaining in the respective fiscal year

Until such time as the new quota system begins to be applied, the system provided for in Article IX of the Convention shall continue in effect.

Any instrument of ratification or adherence received after the date on which this Protocol comes into force shall take effect one month after the date of its deposit. Article XI

The present Protocol, upon its entry into force, shall be deemed to be an integral part of the Convention.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Plenipotentiaries, duly authorized, sign the present Protocol of Amendment to the Convention, at the Pan American Union, Washington, D. C., onbehalf of their respective Governments, on the dates appearing opposite their signatures. PROTOCOLO DE EMENDA A CONVEN9AO SOBRE O INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRONOMICAS

Os Estados Contratantes, corn o objetivo de fortalecer e ampliar as atividades agropecuirias da Organizaqfo dos Estados Americanos, resolveram fazer certas modificag6es na Convenqdo sabre o Instituto Interamericano de Citncias Agron6micas, denominada daqui por diante "a Convenqo", a qual foi aberta assinatura na Unifo Pan-Americana em 15 de janeiro de 1944, e para tsse fim decidiram concluir o seguinte Protocolo de Emenda A mencionada Convenqffo.

Artigo I

O tOrmo "Repu'blica" ou "Repuiblicas" seri substitufdo por "Estado" ou "Estados", segundo o caso, sempre que aqu~1e conste do texto da Convenqo.

Artigo II

O Artigo I da Convengo fica emendado nos tLrmos seguintes:

"Artigo I

Os Estados Contratantes, por meio dLste instrumento, reorganizam o Instituto Interamericano de Citncias Agron8micas e o estabelecem como organismo internacional, reconhecendo-Ihe personalidade jurfdica de ac~rdo com sua pr6pria legislaro. Com tal cardter, o Instituto goza de todos os direitos, tftulos e interbsses relativos aos bens, terrenos e outras propriedades de qualquer natureza que sejam, e que pertenqam ao Instituto Interamericano de Ci-ncias Agronbmicas emvirtudede sua organizago em 18 de junho de 1942, como sociedade estabelecida de ac{rdo com as leis do Distrito de Colfimbia, Estados Unidos da Am6rica; e assume t6das as obriga 6es de que se tenhafei- to responsfvel o dito Instituto nesse carfter de sociedade.

O Instituto tern sede em Turrialba, Costa Rica, e poderf estabelecer es- crit6rios em outros lugares do mesmo pafso Poderf, tamb~m, manter escri- t6rios ou centros regionais em outros pafses da Am6rica.

Artigo III

O Artigo III da Convengo fica emendado nos t~rmos seguintes: "Artigo M

A Junta Diretora, autoridade suprema do Instituto, comp6e-se de um representante de cada Estado Contratante. Cada Estado designarf. como seu representante, de prefertncia, um alto funcion~rio do Minist~rio ou Secreta- ria da Agricultura, especialista em assuntos agrfcolas. Cada Estado poderA, igualmente, nomear um representante suplente e os assessbres que considerar necessirios.

Para as decis6es da Junta Diretora se requer o voto favora'vel da maioria absoluta dos Estados Contratantes, exceto quanto aos assuntos orgamentA- rios, em que e necess~ria a maioria de dois tercos.

A Junta tem as seguintes atribuiq6es:

Eleger o Diretor do Instituto e fixar sua remuneraqdo; exonerar o Diretor; estudar o Projeto de Programa de Trabalho que Ihe submeter o Diretor, e aprovar anualmente o Programa de Trabalho do Instituto; aprovar o orqamento do Instituto e fixar as cotas anuais dos Estados Con- tratantes; cooperar com o Diretor em assuntos de fndole t~cnico-agrfcola; aprovar o Acbrdo que o Instituto, em sua qualidade de Organismo Espe- cializado, celebrar com o Conselho da Organizaqdo dos Estados Ameri- canos, e no qual se determinem as relaq6es que devem existir entre o Instituto e a Organizago; aprovar acordos entre o Instituto e outras organizaq~es internacionais cujos objetivos sejam semelhantes aos d~ste. receber do Diretor um relat6rio anual s6bre as atividades, o estado geral e a situagdo financeira do Instituto; elaborar seu pr6prio Regulamento e aprovar o Regulamento para a admi- nistraqfo do Instituto.

A Junta estabelecerA, de entre seus membros, uma comissdo para preparar as reuni6es daquela e empreender os demais trabalhos que a Junta The encomendar.

A Junta realizar, anualmente, uma reunigo ordinfria e poderA efetuar reuni6es extraordinfrias quando a maioria dos Estados Contratantes assim o decidir. As reuni6es da Junta se realizardo na sede do Instituto, a nfo ser que a mesma Junta, em casos determinados, fixe outro lugar."

Artigo IV

Os Artigos IV, V e VI da Convenqfio, com os tftulos correspondentes, ficam substitufdos pelo tftulo e artigo seguintes: "0 DIRETOR

Artigo IV

0 Diretor do Instituto seri eleito pela Junta Diretora, em sessfo plenfiria, para um perfodo de seis anos e poderfi ser reeleito apenas uma vezo De- sempenharfi o cargo at6 que seu sucessor seja eleito e entre no exercfcio de suas fung6es.

O Diretor, sob a supervisgo da Junta Diretora, terfi amplos e plenos poderes para dirigir as atividades do Instituto; terfi a representaqio legal do mesmo; e sera responsfvel pelo cumprimento de tWdas as ordens eresoluq6es da Junta.

0 Diretor tern, al6m disso, os seguintes deveres e atribuig~es:

Preparar a proposta orqamentfria e o programa de trabalho do Instituto para cadaanofiscal e submet6-los aos membros da Junta Diretora coma antecedbncia de, pelo menos, dois meses da reunido anual em que seja estudada sua aprovaqio; apresentar um relat6rio anual Junta Diretora, relativo aos trabalhos do Instituto durante o ano fiscal anterior, assim como ao estado geral e situaqdo financeira do mesmo;

celebrar, de ac~rdo com as normas gerais que estabelecer a Junta Dire- tora, contratos e ajustes para a realizaq~o de projetos e atividades especfficas que, em sua opinigo, sejam em beneffcio do Instituto; nomear e exonerar funcionfirios e empregados e fixar sua remuneraqao, segundo as normas gerais que forem adotadas pela Junta Diretora; procurar a maior coordenaqdo possfvel entre as atividades do Instituto e as de outras organizar6es internacionais cujos objetivos sejam seme- hantes aos dbste°

o Diretor poderf, sob sua responsabilidade, quando considerar necessf- rio, delegar a outros funcionfrios do Instituto as atribuig~es inerentes a seu cargo."

Artigo V

Os Artigos VII e VIII da Convenqfto, com os respectivos tftulos, ficam sem efeito.

Artigo VI

0 Artigo IX da Convengfio fica emendado nos tibrmos seguintes: "Artigo IX

Os Estados Contratantes contribuirlo para a manutenqfto do Instituto mediante cotas anuais que serdo fixadas pela Junta Diretora nas mesmas bases utilizadas para determinagdo das cotas destinadas N manutenqio da Unifo Pan- Americana. 0 Instituto poderf, tamb6m, para realizar atividades que estejam de acbrdo com sua natureza e objetivos, aceitar, de fontes oficiais ou de fontes particulares, contribuiq6es especiais, legados ou doar6es.

O ano fiscal do Instituto comeqa em 1 de julho e termina em 30 de junho.

As cotas anuais, que corresponderem aos Estados Contratantes, serfo comunicadas com antecedbncia aos governos e serdo consideradas devidasdes- de o primeiro dia do citado ano fiscal."

Artigo VII

O original diste Protocolo, cujos textos portugis, espanhol, francis e ingles sdo igualmente autinticos, sera depositado na Unifo Pan-Americana e aberto A assinatura dos governos dos Estados americanos. A Unifo Pan-Ame- ricana informarf os governos s6bre as assinaturas e as datas correspondentes.

Artigo VIII

Sbmente os Estados americanos que sejam partes na Convenqio poderdo ratificar iste Protocolo ou aderir ao mesmo.

Artigo IX

A Unifo Pan-Americana enviara c6pias autenticadas do Protocolo aos governos dos Estados Americanos para os fins de ratificaqffo ou adesgo. Os instrumentos de ratificaqflo ou adesdo serdo depositados na Unido Pan-Americana e esta comunicard aos governos cada dep6sito e a data do mesmo.

Artigo X

Este Protocolo entrarf em vigor um mibs depois da data em que todos os Estados partes na Convenqdo tenham depositado seus respectivos instrumentos de ratificaqfto ou de adesffo ao mesmo.

Entretanto, o novo sistema de cotas, estabelecido no Artigo VI diste Protocolo, no comeqarfi a ser aplicado sendo a partir do primeiro ano fiscal que comerar seis meses ou mais depois da data em que todos os Estados Membros da Organizaqfo dos Estados Americanos tenham depositado seusres- pectivos instrumentos de ratificaqdo ou adesgo, a menos que todos os Estados Contratantes concordem, por intermedio de seus Representantes na Junta Di- retora, iniciar o dito sistema de cotas num ano fiscal anterior e acordem a maneira de realizar sua decisgo. 0 pagamento da primeira cota de qualquer Estado que se torne parte neste Protocolo depois de iniciada a aplicagdo do novo sistema de cotas, seri calculado na base do nfdmero de meses completos que restarem do respectivo ano fiscal.

Ate a data em que se iniciar a aplicaqio do novo sistema de cotas, con- tinuarfi sendo aplicado o sistema previsto no Artigo IX da Conven(go.

Qualquer instrumento de ratificagfo ou adesf o que f~r recebido depois da data de entrada em vigor diste Protocolo surtirfi efeito um mis depois da data do seu dep6sito.

Artigo XI

Este Protocolo, ao entrar em vigor, seri considerado como parte integrante da Convenrdo.

EM FE DO QUE os infra-assinados Plenipotenci, rios, devidamente autorizados, assinam tste Protocolo de Emenda A Convenq.1o, na Unido Pan- Americana, Washington, D. C., em nome dos respectivos governos, nas datas indicadas ao lado de suas firmas. PROTOCOLE D'AMENDEMENTS A LA CONVENTION RELATIVE A L'INSTITUT INTERAMERICAIN DES SCIENCES AGRICOLES

Les Etats Contractants, en vue de renforcer et d'elargir les activites agricoles de l'Organisation des Etats Americains, ont d~cide d'apporter cer- taines modifications h la Convention relative l'Institut Interam~ricain des Sciences Agricoles (ci-aprbs denommee "la Convention"), ouverte ' la signature h l'Union Panamericaine le 15 janvier 1944, et h cet effet ont resolu d'etablir le suivant Protocole d'Amendements ladite Convention:

Article I

Toutes les fois qu'il figure dans le texte de la Convention, le terme "Re- publique" ou "Republiques" sera remplac6, suivant le cas, par "Etat" ou "Etats".

Article II

L'article I de la Convention est modifie dans les termes suivants:

"Article I

Les Etats Contractants, par le moyen du present instrument, r~organi- sent l'Institut Interamericain des Sciences Agricoles, l'tablissent comme un organisme international et lui reconnaissent la personnalite juridique conformement A leur propre l6gislationo En tant que tel, l'Institut Interamericain des Sciences Agricoles conserve la jouissance detous les droits, titres et in- terits afferents aux biens, terrains et autres proprietes, de quelque nature que ce soit, qui lui appartiennent en vertu de sa constitution, h la date du 18 juin 1942, comme une corporation 6tablie conform6ment aux lois du District de Columbia, Etats-Unis d'Amerique, et assume toutes les obligations quilui incombent A ce titre de corporation.

L'Institut a son sibge h Turrialbe, Costa Rica, et pourra etablir des offices en d'autres lieux de ce pays. II pourra 6galement avoir des offices ou des centres r6gionaux dans d'autres pays de lAmerique."

Article III

L'article I de la Convention est modifie dans les termes suivants: "Article III

Le Conseil d'Administration, autorite supreme de l'Institut, est compo- s6 d'un repr6sentant de chacun des Etats Contractantso Chaque Etat d~signe- ra de pr6ference, comme repr6sentant, un haut fonctionnaire du Ministbre ou de la Secretairerie d'Etat de l'Agriculture, specialise dans les questions agricoles. I1peut egalement designer un repr~sentant suppliant ainsi que des conseillers, s'il le juge necessaire.

Les decisions du Conseil d'Administration sont votees h la majorite ab- solue des Etats Contractants, sauf en ce qui concerne les questions budgetaires oti la majorite des deux tiers est requiseo

Le Conseil a les attributions suivantes:

Elire le Directeur de l'Institut et fixer ses 6moluments; Destituer le Directeur; Examiner le projet de programme de travail que lui soumet le Directeur, et approuver, chaque annee, le programme de travail de l'Institut; Approuver le budget de l'Institut et fixer les quotes-parts annuelles des Etats Contractants; Coop6rer avec le Directeur dans les questions technico-agricoles; Approuver l'accord que l'Institut, en sa qualit6 d'Organisme specialise, peut conclure avec le Conseil de l'Organisation des Etats Am~ricains et dans lequel seront dterminees les relations qui devront exister entre 1'Institut et I'Organisation;

Approuver les accords passes entre l'Institut et d'autres organismes internationaux dont les objectifs sont similaires aux siens; Recevoir du Directeur un rapport annuel sur les activites, l'tat gen6- ral et la situation financibre de l'Institut; Formuler son propre rbglement et approuver le rbglement administratif de 1'Institut.

Le Conseil d'Administration formera une commission dont les membres seront choisis dans son sein et qui aura pour attributions de preparer les r~u- nions dudit conseil et d'accomplir les tftches que ce dernier lui aura recom- mandees.

Le Conseil tiendra, chaque annee, une session ordinaire et pourra se r6unir l'extraordinaire toutes les fois que la majorite des EtatsContractants le decidera. Les sessions auront lieu au sibge de l'Institut, moins que le Conseil, en des cas determin6s, ne fixe un autre lieu." Article IV

Les articles IV, V et VI de la Convention ainsi que les titres correspon- dants sont remplac~s, respectivement, par Particle et le titre suivants:

"LE DIRECTEUR

Article IV

Le Directeur de l'Institut est elu par le Conseil d'Administration en senace pl~nibre, pour une periode de six ans; il ne peut Ltre reelu qu'une fois. 11 occupe la charge jusqu'a ce que son successeur soit 6lu et que ceder- nier entre en fonctiono

Le Directeur, sous le contr6le du Conseil d'Administration, a pleins pouvoirs pour diriger les activit6s de l'Institut, dont il assume la representation juridique, et il est responsable de l'excution de tous les ordres et de toutes les resolutions dudit conseil.

Le Directeur exerce en outre les attributions suivantes:

Pr6parer le projet de budget et le programme de travail de l'Institut pour chaque exercice financier et les soumettre aux membres du Conseil d'Administration deux mois au moins avant la reunion annuelle o4 ils sont examines et approuv~s; Presenter au Conseil d'Administration un rapport annuel rendant compte des tftches accomplies par l'Institut au cours de l'exercice pr6cdent, ainsi que de 1' 6tat g~neral et de la situation financibre; Conclure, en vertu des normes genrales 6tablies par le Conseil d'Ad- ministration, des contrats et des arrangements pour la r6alisation de projets et d'activites sp6cifiques qui, de son avis, seront profitables a I' Institut; Nommer et r~voquer les fonctionnaires et les employ6s et fixer leurs emoluments conform6ment aux normes g~nerales 6tablies par le Conseil d'Administration; Assurer la plus grande coordination possible entre les activites de lIns- titut et celles des autres organismes internationaux qui ont des objectifs similair es.

S'il le juge n~cessaire, le Directeur pourra d6leguer h d'autres fonctionnaires de l'Institut, sous sa propre responsabilit6, les attributions inh~rentes sa charge."

Article V

Les articles VIE et VIII de la Convention, ainsi que leurs titres respectifs, demeurent sans effetso Article VI

L'article IX de la Convention est amend6 dans les termes suivants:

"Article IX

Les Etats Contractants contribuent au soutien de 1' Institut moyennant des quotes-parts annuelles qui sont fixees par le Conseil d'Administration conformement aux normes 6tablies pour determiner les quotes-parts afferentes au soutien de l'Union Panamericaine. L'Institut pourra, d'autre part, accepter de sources publiques ou priv6es des contributions speciales, des legs et des donations, en vue d'accomplir des tfches conformes au caractbre et aux buts de 1' Institut°

L'exercice financier de I'Institut commence le ler juillet et prend finle 30 juin.

Les quotes-parts annuelles des Etats Contractants sont communiqu6es d'avance aux Gouvernements. Elles sont considerees comme dues ' partir du premier jour du susdit exercice°"

Article VII

L'original du pr6sent Protocole, dont les textes frangais, anglais, espagnol et portugais font egalement foi, sera depos6 auprbs de l'Union Panam- ricaine et ouvert h la signature des gouvernements des Etats am~ricains° L'Union Panam6ricaine informera les Gouvernements des signatures et de leurs dates respectiveso

Article VIII

Pourront seulement ratifier le present Protocole, ou y adherer, les Etats am6ricains qui sont parties la Convention.

Article IX

L'Union Panam6ricaine enverra des copies certifiees conformes du Pro- tocole aux gouvernements des Etats am6ricains aux fins de ratification ou d'adhesion. Les instruments de ratification ou d'adh~sion seront d~poses auprbs de l'Union Panamericaine, qui notifiera aux Gouvernements chaque dep~t ainsi que la date A laquelle il a et effectubo

Article X

Le pr6sent Protcole entrera en vigueur un mois aprbs la date 'a laquelle tous les Etats parties h la Convention auront d6pos6 leurs instruments respectifs de ratification ou d'adhesion.

Toutefois, le nouveau systbme de contributions etabli Particle VI du pr6sent Protocole ne sera appliqu6 qu'h partir du premier exercice financier commenqant six mois au moins aprbs la date a laquelle tous les Etats membres de l'Organisation des Etats Am~ricains auront depose leurs instruments respectifs de ratification ou d'adhesion, A moins que tous les Etats Contrac- tants ne d~cident, par l'interm~diaire de leurs representants au Conseil d'Ad- ministration, d'appliquer ledit systbme de contributions partir d'un exercice anterieur et ne conviennent de la marche A suivre A cette fin.

Le montant de la premire contribution , verser par tout Etat qui de- vient partie au present Protocole aprbs la mise en application du nouveau systbme, sera calcule d'aprbs le nombre de mois complets qui restent A courir sur lexercice correspondant.

Jusqu'I la date de la mise en application du nouveau systbme de contributions, on appliquera celui qui est prevu ? Particle IX de la Convention.

Tout instrument de ratification ou d'adh~sion requ aprbs la date d'entre en vigueur du present Protocole sortira ses effets un mois aprbs la date de son d~p~t.

Article XI

A son entree en vigueur, le present Protocole sera consid6r6 comme partie int6grante de la Convention.

EN FOI DE QUOI les Pl6nipotentiaires suivants, dflment autoris6s, signent le present Protocole d'Amendements la Convention l'Union Panam6- ricaine (Washington, D. C.) au nom de leurs gouvernements respectifs, aux dates indiquees en regard de leurs signatures. Certifico que el documento preinserto es copia fiel de los textos autenticos en espafiol, frances, ingles y portugu~s del Protocolo de Enmienda a la Convenci6n sobre el Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, abierto a la firma de los Estados Americanos en la Uni6n Panamericana el 10 de diciembre de 1958, los cuales han sido debidamente examinados para los fines de coordinaci'n por la Comisi6n Permanente de la Junta Directiva del Instituto. 10 de diciembre de 1958

I hereby certify that the foregoing is a true and faithful copy of the authentic texts in English, French, Portuguese, and Spanish of the Protocol of Amendment to the Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences, opened for signature by the American States at the Pan American Union on December 1, 1958, and that these texts have been duly examined for purposes of coordination by the Permanent Committee of the Board of Direc- tors of the Institute. December 1, 1958

Certifico que o documento transcrito e c6pia fiel dos textos aut~nticos em portugu~s, espanhol, franc~s e ingles do Protocolo de Emenda h Conven- go s~bre o Instituto Interamericano de CiLncias Agron~micas, aberto N assinatura dos Estados Americanos na Unifio Pan-Americana em 1 de dezembro de 1958, os quais foram devidamente examinados, para os fins de coordenaqao, pela Comissdo Permanente da Junta Diretora do Instituto. 1 de dezembro de 1958

Je certifie que le document qui pr6cbde est une copie fidble des textes authentiques franqais, anglais, espagnol et portugais du Protocoled'amendements N la Convention relative ' l'Institut interam~ricain des Sciences agricoles, ouvert h la signature des Etats am6ricains le ler dcembre 1958, les- quels ont W dament examines, aux fins de coordination, par la Commission permanente du Conseil d'Administration de l'Institut. le 1 er decembre 1958

William Sanders Secretario del Consejo Secret~rio do Conselho de la Organizaci6n de da Organiza 5o dos los Estados Americanos Estados Americanos Secretary of the Council Secr6taire du Conseil of the Organization of de l'Organisation des American States Etats Amricains ANEXO

Antecedentes sobre el Protocolo

El Comit6 Interamericano de Representantes de los Presidentes sugiri6 en su Recomendaci'n N' 1, aprobada en la reuni'n verificada en Washington, D. C. en mayo de 1957, la revisi'n dela Convenci'n del Instituto Interameri- cano de Ciencias Agrfcolas con el objeto defortalecer las actividades agropecuarias de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos.

En la sesi6n celebrada el 18 de diciembre de 1957, la Junta Directiva del Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas aprob6 una resolucion enlos terminos siguientes:

Encomendar a su Comision Permanente el estudio de la Convenci6n del Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas con el objeto de realizar las modificaciones necesarias para dar efecto a la Recomendacion N' 1 del Comite Interamericano de Representantes de los Presidentes sobre "Fortalecimiento de las Actividades Agropecuarias de la Organi- zaci6n de los Estados Americanos".

Las modificaciones previstas en la Recomendaci6n N' 1 del Comite In- teramericano de Representantes de los Presidentes eran las siguientes:

(1) Cambiar el sistema del aporte financiero para el mantenimien- to del Instituto, adoptando el que rige en la actualidad para el sostenimiento de la Union Panamericana y la Oficina Sanitaria Panamericana;

(2) Reestructurar la Junta Directiva del Instituto a fin de que sus miembros sean preferiblemente los Directores Generales o funcionarios de igual categorfa de los Ministerios de Agricultura de los Estados Miembros.

Con el objeto de cumplir el encargo que le di6 la Junta Directiva del Ins- tituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, la Comisi6n Permanente comen- z6 a examinar el 19 de marzo de 1958 un Anteproyecto de Protocolo de En- mienda a la Convencion del Instituto, que fue elaborado por el Departamento de Asuntos Jurfdicos, a solicitud de la Comisi6n, para servir como documen- to de trabajo. La Comisi6n termin6 la elaboraci'n del Proyecto de Protocolo el 20 de junio de 1958.

El Proyecto de Protocolo de Enmienda a la Convenci6n, junto con el In- forme de la Comisi'n sobre el mismo, fueron transmitidos a los Gobiernos de los Estados Miembros de la Organizacion de los Estados Americanos, por conducto de sus Representantes en la Junta Directiva del Instituto, de acuerdo con la Resoluci6n aprobada por la Junta en su sesi6n del 10 de julio de 1958, conla solicitud de quetuvierana bien comunicar al Secretario General de la Organi- zaci6n de los Estados Americanos cualesquiera observaciones o comentarios que estimaran pertinente hacer sobre dicho Proyecto.

Sobre la base de las observaciones recibidas, la Comisi6n Permanente modific6 el Proyecto de Protocolo de Enmienda a la Convenci6n y luego desig- no un grupo de trabajo para los efectos de coordinar los textos del Proyecto de Protocolo en los cuatro idiomas oficiales de la Organizaci6n.

La Junta Directiva del Instituto de Ciencias Agrfcolas consider6 el texto definitivo propuesto por la Comisi6n en su sesi6n del 12 de noviembre de 1958, acordando en la misma aprobar el texto del Protocolo de Enmienda a la Con- venci6n sobre el Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, y abrirlo a la firma de los Estados Miembros de la Organizaci6n de los Estados America- nos, en la Uni6n Panamericana, a partir del 1' de diciembre de 1958.

De acuerdo con la Recomendaci6n del Comit6 Interamericano de Repre- sentantes de los Presidentes, el Protocolo de Enmienda introduce dos cambios bfsicos, a saber, varfa la integraci6n de la Junta Directiva y modifica el sistema del aporte financiero para el mantenimiento del Instituto. Ademis, in- corpora las modificaciones que surgen l6gicamente de esos dos cambios fun- damentales.

En vista de que el Protocolo enmienda la Convenci6n, se incluye tambien en el presente documento el texto de aquella, a fin de que pueda ser consultado en relaci6n con dicho Protocolo. APPENDIX

Background on the Protocol

The Inter-American Committee of Presidential Representatives, inRec- ommendation No 1, approved at its meeting held in Washington in May 1957, suggested that the Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences be revised, for the purpose of strengthening the agricultural activities of the Organization of American States.

At its meeting of December 18, 1957, the Board of Directors of the In- ter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences approved the following resolution:

To request its Permanent Committee to study the Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences for the purpose of making such amendments as are required to implement Recommendation N' 1 of the Inter-American Committee of Presidential Representatives, on "Strengthening of the Agricultural Activities of the Organization of American States".

The amendments set forth in Recommendation N' 1 of the Committee of Presidential Representatives were the following:

(1) Change the system of financial contributions to the maintenance of the Institute by adopting the one now in effect for the support of the Pan American Union and the Pan American Sanitary Bureau; and

(2) Reorganize the Board of Directors of the Institute, so that its members will preferably be Directors General or officials of equalrank of the Ministries of Agriculture of the Member States.

For the purpose of complying with the request of the Board of Directors of the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences, the Permanent Com- mittee, on March 19, 1958, began to study a Preliminary Draft Protocol of Amendment to the Convention on the Institute, which had been preparedby the Department of Legal Affairs at the Committee's request, for use as a working document. The Committee completed its preparation of the Draft Protocol on June 26, 1958.

The Draft Protocol of Amendment to the Convention, together with the Report of the Committee thereon, was transmitted to the governments of the Member States of the Organization of American States, through their representatives on the Board of Directors of the Institute, in accordance with the resolution approved by the Board at its meeting of July 10, 1958, with the request that they transmit to the Secretary General of the Organization of American States any observations or comments on the Draft Protocol that they considered pertinent.

In the light of the observations received, the Permanent Committee amended the Draft Protocol of Amendment to the Convention, and then designated a working group to coordinate the four official languages of the Organi- zation.

The Board of Directors of the Institute of Agricultural Sciences considered the definitive text proposed by the Committee at its meeting of November 12, 1958, at which time it approved the text of the Protocol of Amendment to the Convention on the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences, and decided to open it for signature by the Member States of the Organization of American States on December 1, 1958, at the Pan American Union.

In accordance with the Recommendation of the Inter-American Commit- tee of Presidential Representatives, the Protocol of Amendment introduces two basic changes: it alters the membership of the Board of Directors, and it modifies the system of financial contributions to the maintenance of the Insti- tute. In addition, it incorporates the modifications that logically arise from those two fundamental changes.

Inasmuch as the Protocol amends the Convention, the text of the latter is also included, so that it may be conveniently consulted in relation with the Pro- tocol. ANEXO

Antecedentes s6bre o Protocolo

O Comitt Interamericano de Representantes dos Presidentes, em sua Recomendaqdo N' 1, aprovada na reunifto realizada em Washington, D. C., em maio de 1957, sugeriu a revisgo da Convenqfo do Instituto Interamerica- no de Ci~ncias Agronbmicas corn o fim de fortalecer as atividades agropecuarias da Organizaqfo dos Estados Americanos.

Na sessdo efetuada em 18 de dezembro de 1957, a Junta Diretora do Ins- tituto Interamericano de Ciincias Agron6micas aprovou uma resoluqao nos tirmos seguintes:

Encarregar a sua Comissfo Permanente do estudo da Conven Ao do Instituto Interamericano de Ci~ncias Agron6micas a fim de fazer asmo- difica Ses necessdrias para levar-se a efeito a Recomendaqfto No 1 do Comiti Interamericano de Representantes dos Presidentes, s6bre o "Fortalecimento das Atividades Agropecuarias da Organizaqfto dos Es- tados Americanos".

As modificaq6es previstas na Recomendacdo N' 1 do Comite Interame- ricano de Representantes dos Presidentes eram as seguintes-

(1) Alterar o sistema de contribuiqdo financeira para a manutenqo do Instituto, adotando o que rege atualmente para a manutenqo da Unigo Pan-Americana e a Repartiqfo Sanitaria Pan-Americana;

(2) Reestruturar a Junta Diretora do Instituto, a fim de que seus membros sejam, de prefer~ncia, os diretores gerais ou funcionfiriosde igual categoria dos Ministerios da Agricultura dos Estados membros.

Com o objetivo de cumprir corn o encargo que Iho conferiu a Junta Dire- tora do Instituto Interamericano de Ci~ncias Agronbmicas, a Comissao Per- manente comeqou a examinar, em 19 de marqo de 1958, um Anteprojeto de Protocolo de Emenda Convenqo do Instituto, que foi elaborado pelo Depar- tamento de Assuntos Jurfdicos, a pedido da Comissaio, para servir como documento de trabalho. A Comissdo terminou a elaboraqflo do Projeto de Pro- tocolo em 26 de junho de 1958.

0 Projeto de Protocolo de Emenda h Convenqdo e o Relat6rio da Comis- sdo s6bre o mesmo foram transmitidos aos Governos dos Estados Membros da Organizaqfo dos Estados Americanos, por intermdio dos seus Represen- tantes na Junta Diretora do Instituto, de ac6rdo com a Resoluqfo aprovadape- la Junta em sua sessfo de 10 de julho de 1958, com o pedido de que se dignas- sem comunicar ao Secreta'rio Geral da Organizaqdo dos Estados Americanos quaisquer observa§6es ou comentarios que desejassem fazer sobre o dito Projeto. A Comissfio Permanente, em vista das observaqbes recebidas, modificou o Projeto de Protocolo de Emenda Convenqfo e designou um grupo de trabalho para coordenar os textos do Projeto de Protocolo nos quatro idiomas oficiais da Organizaqo.

A Junta Diretora do Instituto de Ci~ncias Agron~micas, em sua sessgo de 12 de novembro de 1958, estudou o texto definitivo proposto pela Comiss~o, resolvendo aprovar o texto de Protocolo de Emenda h Convenqdo sabre o Ins- tituto Interamericano de Citncias Agron6micas, e abrf-lo assinatura dos Estados Membros da Organiza~fto dos Estados Americanos a partir de 1 dede- zembro de 1958.

De ac6rdo com a Recomendago do ComitZ Interamericano de Represen- tantes dos Presidentes, o Protocolo de Emenda introduz duas modificaq6es b~sicas, a saber, altera a integragfo da Junta Diretora e modifica o sistema de contribuiqdo financeira para a manutenqo do Instituto. Alne' disso, incor- pora as modificaq6es que surgem logicamentedessas duasaltera 6esfundamen- tais.

Em virtude das emendas que o Protocolo introduz na Convenqdo, inclui- se tambem, neste documento, o texto da mesma, a fim de que possa ser consultado em relado corn o Protocolo. ANNEXE

Antecedents relatifs au Protocole

Le Comite interamericain de Representants des Presidents a suggere dans sa Recommandation No 1, adoptee au cours de la reunion qu'il a tenue en mai 1957, ' Washington D. C., que la Convention de 1' Institut interamericain des Sciences agricoles fflt revisee dans le but d'intensifier les activites de l'Organisation des Etats Americains dans le domaine de Ilagriculture.

Le 18 decembre 1957, le Conseil d'Administration de l'Institut interamericain des Sciences agricoles vota une resolution

Chargeant sa Commission permanente d'examiner la Convention relative A 'Institut interamericain des Sciences agricoles afin d'y apporter les modifications necessaires en application de la Recommanda- tion N' 1 du Comite interam~ricain de Repr~sentants des Presidents sur 1 intensification des activites agricoles de lOrganisation desEtats Americains.

La Recommandation N' 1 du Comit6 interamericain de Repr6sentants des Presidents proposait:

(1) De modifier le systbme relatif aux contributions des Etats membres de l'Institut etd'adopter celui qui s' applique actuellement pour le soutien de P Union Panamericaine et du Bureau sanitaire panamericain;

(2) De mofifier la structure du Conseil directeur de l'Institut/-Con- seil d'Administration/, afin que ses membres soient, dans la mesuredu possible, les Directeurs generaux ou les fonctionnaires de mime cate- gorie des ministbres de l'Agriculture des Etats membres.

Le 19 mars 1958, pour s'acquitter du mandat dont la investi le Conseil d'Administration de lInstitut interamericain des Sciences agricoles, la Com- mission permanente entreprit 1' examen d'un avant-projet de Protocole d' amendement h la Convention de IlInstitut elabore par le D~partement des Affaires juridiques sur demande de la Commission, pour servir A celle-ci de document de travail. La Commission a acheve la mise au point du projet de Protocole le 26 juin 1958.

Le projet de Protocole d'amendement . la Convention ainsi que le rapport y relatif de la Commission furent transmis aux gouvernements des Etats membres de l'Organisation des Etats Americains par l'intermediaire deleurs representants au Conseil d'Administration de lInstitut, conformement A la resolution adoptee par ledit Conseil le 10 juillet 1958, avec pribre de bienvou- loir communiquer au Secretaire g~neral de l'Organisation des Etats Americains toutes observations qu'ils jugeraient necessaire de faire concernant le projet.

Sur la base des observations reques, la Commission permanente a mo- difi6 le projet de Protocole d'amendement N la Convention, puis elle a forme un groupe de travail pour coordonner les textes du projet de Protocole dans les quatre langues officielles de l'OrganisatioA.

Le Conseil d'Administration de IlInstitut interam~ricain des Sciences agricoles a examin6 le texte d6finitif propose par la Commission le 12 novem- bre 1958, et il a decide, seance tenante, de I'adopter et de l'ouvrir h la signature des Etats membres de l'Organisation des Etats Am~ricains, N l'Union Panamericaine, a partir du premier decembre 1958.

Conformement ' la Recommandation du Comite interamericain de Re- pr6sentants des Presidents, le Protocole d'amendement introduit deux change- ments essentiels, portant 'un sur la composition du Conseil d'Administration, l'autre sur le systbme de contribution financibre relatif au soutien de l'Insti- tuto I1 incorpore aussi les modifications qui decoulent logiquement des deux premiers.

Comme le Protocole amende la Convention, le present document repro- duit 6galement cette dernibre, de sorte qu'elle puisse ttre consultee relative- ment h tout ce qui concerne le Protocole. CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS

Los Gobiernos delas Repfiblicas Americanas, animados del prop6sitode fomentar el adelanto de las ciencias agrfcolas, asf como de las artes y ciencias conexas; y deseosos de dar cumplimiento en forma practica a la resolu- ci6n aprobada por el Octavo Congreso Cientffico Americano que se celebr6 en Washington en 1940, recomendando el establecimiento de un Instituto Intera- mericano de Agricultura Tropical, han resuelto concertar una Convenci6n para reconocer como instituci6n permanente al Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, que en el texto de esta Convenci6n se designarfi como"el Instituto", sobre las bases que se determinan en los siguientes Artfculos:

Artfculo I

Los Estados Contratantes reconocen mediante la presente Convenci6n como Institucion permanente al Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfco- las, organizado como sociedad autorizada de acuerdo con las leyes del Distri- to de Columbia, Estados Unidos de America, con fecha 18 de junio de 1942; y convienen en darle al Instituto el carficter de persona jurfdica de acuerdo con su propia legislaci6no El Instituto gozara' de todos los derechos, beneficios, capital, terrenos y otros bienes que ha adquirido o adquiera en calidad decor- poraci6n y asumira todas las obligaciones y cumplira los contratos que ha celebrado o celebre en la misma capacidad.

La oficina central ejecutiva del Instituto tendrfi su sede en Washington, D. C. La oficina principal de actividades radicar& en Turrialba, Costa Rica. Oficinas regionales del Instituto podran ser establecidas en todas las otras Re- publicas Americanas.

FINES

Artfculo II

Los fines del Instituto serfn los de estimular y promover el desarrollo de las ciencias agrfcolas en las Repuiblicas Americanas mediante la investigaci'n, la ensefianza y la divulgaci6n de la teorfa y de la prfctica de la agricultura, asf como de otras artes y ciencias conexas.

Para realizar estos fines, el Instituto podrfi, de conformidad con las leyes de los distintos pafses, hacer uso de las siguientes atribuciones: crear, sostener y administrar establecimientos similares e instalaciones en una o mas de las Reptiblicas Americanas; prestar ayuda al establecimiento y mantenimiento de organizaciones que persigan finalidades anflogas en dichas Repfiblicas; comprar, vender, arrendar, mejorar o administrar cualquiera propiedad en las Repfiblicas Americanas, de acuerdo con las finalidades del Instituto; colaborar con el Gobierno de cualquiera Repfiblica Americana, o con cualesquiera otros organismos o entidades y prestar ayuda a los mismos; aceptar contribuciones y donativos en forma de dinero o bienes, tanto muebles como inmuebles; celebrar y Ilevar a cabo contratos y acuerdos; cultivar o adquirir toda clase de productos agrfcolas y sus derivados o disponer de los mismos en cualquiera forma cuando sea esencial para fines de investigaciono experimentacion; y efectuar cualquier otro negocio o Ilevar a cabo cualquiera otra actividad que sean convenientes para los fines indicados.

LA JUNTA DIRECTIVA

Artfculo III

Los Representantes de las veintiuna Repfiblicas Americanas en el Con- sejo Directivo de la Uni6n Panamericana actuarfn como miembros del Institu- to y se consideraran como miembros de la Junta Directiva del mismo. Si alguno de ellos no pudiere asistir a una reuni6n de la Junta Directiva se podra designar un suplente para ese fin, ya sea por el propietario o por su respectivo Gobierno. Las decisiones de la Junta serfin adoptadas por la mayorfa de los votos de sus miembros, cuya mayorfa de votos incluira una mayorfa devo- tos de los representantes de los Estados Contratantes. La Junta tendra, entre otras, las siguientes atribuciones: Elegir al Director del Instituto y ratificar el nombramiento del Secreta- rio. Remover tanto al Director como al Secretario. Fijar la remuneraci6n del Director y del Secretario. Vigilar las actividades del Director, quien serf responsable de dar cumplimiento a todas las 6rdenes y resoluciones de la Junta. Nombrar un Comit6 Administrativo, asignandole sus deberes y fijandole sus gastos o emolumentos, el que consistirf de no mas de ocho personas, entre las cuales servirf de miembro ex officio el Director del Instituto. No se requiere que los miembros de este Comite sean miembros de la Junta Directiva del Instituto. Aprobar el presupuesto que someterA anualmente el Director para la ad- ministraci6n del Instituto.

La Junta fijarf las cuotas anuales del Institutoo

La Junta recibira del Director un informe anual sobre las actividades del Instituto, asf como de su estado general y situaci6n financiera. FUNCIONARIOS

Artfculo IV

El Instituto tendra un Director y un Secretarioo El Director sera elegido por la Junta Directiva en sesi'n plenaria y durarA seis afios en su cargo; podra ser reelecto una o mas veces. El primer perfodo del Director, para los fines de la presente Convenci'n, principiarA el dfa que esta entre en vigor.

El Secretario sera nombrado por el Director con la aprobacibndelaJun- ta Directiva del Instituto y seri directamente responsable ante el Director.

El Director y el Secretario desempefiaran sus cargos hasta que sus su- cesores respectivos sean designados y entren al desempefio de sus cargos; pero podra'n ser removidos por el voto de la mayorfa de los miembros del Ins- tituto.

EL DIRECTOR

Artfculo V

1 El Director tendra amplios y plenos poderes para dirigir las actividades del Instituto, bajo la vigilancia de la Junta Directiva del mismo; y sera' responsable del cumplimiento de todas las 6rdenes y resoluciones de dicha Junta.

2. El Director tendra la representaci'n legal del Instituto bajo la vigilancia de la Junta Directiva del mismo; y podri legalizar con el sello del Ins- tituto todos los contratos, traspasos y otros instrumentos que requieran ese tra'mite y que en su opinion sean necesarios y convenientes para el funcionamiento del Institutoo Ademas estarA facultado para tomar cualquiera otrame- dida necesaria para dar fuerza legal a tales instrumentos, de conformidadcon los requisitos o disposiciones de la ley. El Director podra otorgar poderes a otras personas para todos aquellos actos que no pueda realizar el personal- m ente.

3. El Director, sujeto a la supervigilancia de la Junta Directiva del Ins- tituto, tendra facultad para nombrar y remover empleados y fijar su remuneracion.

4. El Director preparar5 el presupuesto del Instituto para cada afiofis- cal y lo sometera a la Junta Directiva con no menos de dos meses de antici- pacibn a la reuni6n anual, en la cual se considerarAi su aprobaci6n.

5. El Director presentara' un informe anual a la Junta Directiva del Ins- tituto, dos meses antes de celebrarse la reunibn anual, en el que dar5 cuenta de las labores del Instituto durante el aflo, asf como de su estado general y situaci6n financiera; y someteri a la aprobacion de la misma Junta el presupuesto y los planes para el afto siguiente. EL SECRETARIO

Artfculo VI

El Secretario tendri bajo su cuidado las actas y archivos del Instituto, gozara' de todas las facultades y desempefiarA todas las funciones administrativas que le encomiende el Director.

EL CONSEJO TECNICO CONSULTIVO

Artfculo VII

Se establecera' un Consejo Thcnico Consultivo, que se organizara' en la forma siguiente:

1. Cada uno de los Estados Contratantes podr5 designar un expertoagrf- cola, quien actuara' como su representante en el seno del Consejo TecnicoCon- sultivo del Instituto. Este Consejo cooperara' con el Director en asuntos de fndole t6cnica agrfcola. El nombramiento de cada representante se comunicara oficialmente al Secretario del Instituto. Los miembros del Consejo, sujetosa la voluntad de sus gobiernos, ejerceran sus funciones durante un perfodo de cinco afios, pudiendo ser nombrados nuevamente una o mas veces para continuar en el desempefio de sus cargos.

2. El Consejo Tcnico Consultivo se reunira, a lo menos una vezalafio, bajo la presidencia del Director del Instituto, en el lugar en que las actividades del Instituto lo requieran. El Director podra citar al Consejo a reuniones extraordinarias por su propia iniciativa, cuando la buena marcha del Instituto asf lo requierao Cada una de estas reuniones deberA convocarse con dos meses de anticipaci6n por lo menos, indic~ndose el motivo o motivos de la reu- ni6n propuesta. Una mayorfa de los miembrosdel Consejo constituira quorum.

3. Ningu'n miembro del Consejo T6cnico Consultivo recibirA del Institu- to, en tal capacidad, remuneraci'n pecuniaria alguna por sus servicios; pero el Instituto podrA sufragar los gastos de viaje de los miembros del Consejo para su reuni6n anualo

AGENTE FISCAL

Artfculo VIII

La Uni'n Panamericana actuarA como agente fiscal del Instituto, y ental capacidad recibirf y administrara' los fondos del Instituto. SOSTENIMIENTO DEL INSTITUTO

Artfculo IX

Los recursos para sostener y fomentar las labores del Instituto consis- titarn en las cuotas anuales que cubran los Estados Contratantes, asf como en los legados, donativos y contribucionis que el Instituto acepte. Tales fondos y contribuciones se utilizaran exclusivamente para fines que esten de acuerdo con el carfcter del Institutoo

La Junta Directiva del Instituto fijarf las cuotas anuales, en el entendi- miento de que el voto deberd ser unfnime en lo que respecta a los miembros que representen a los Estados Contratanteso El monto de las cuotas respectivas se fijara en proporcion con el nfimero de habitantes de cada Estado Con- tratante, tomfndose como base las diltimas estadfsticas oficiales que existan en la Uni6n Panamericana el 1' de julio de cada afio.

Se fijara la cuota anual de cada Estado Contratante, la que no excedera de un d6lar en moneda de los Estados Unidos de America, por cada mil habitanteso Sin embargo, esa cuota podra aumentarse mediante la recomendaci6n unanime de los miembros de la Junta Directiva que represente los Estados Contratantes y con la aprobaci'n de las autoridades competentes de cada Es- tado Contratante.

La Uni6n Panamericana comunicarf a los Gobiernos de los Estados Con- tratantes las cantidades que les correspondan, las que deberfn pagarse antes del 10 de julio de cada afio.

El pago de la cuota correspondiente a cada Estado Contratante se comenzara a partir de la fecha en que esta Convenci6n entre en vigor con respecto a ese Estado, calculfndose la cantidad a base del nfimero de meses completos que quedaren por terminarse dentro del afto fiscal en curso.

El aflo fiscal del Instituto comenzara cada 10 de julio.

IDIOMAS

Artfculo X

Serin idiomas oficiales del Instituto el espafiol, el ingles, el portugu~s y el frances.

FRANQUICIA POSTAL

Artfculo XI

Los Estados Contratantes acuerdan hacer extensiva al Instituto, desde luego dentro de sus respectivos territorios, y entre unos y otros, la franquicia postal establecida en las convenciones postales interamericanas en vigencia, pidiendo a los Estados miembros de la Uni6n Panamericana, que no hayan ratificado la presente Convenci6n, que concedan al Instituto dicha prerro- gativao

EXENCION DE IMPUESTOS

Artfculo XII

Los bienes inmuebles que posea el Instituto, en derecho o equidad, en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes, y que se utilicen exclusivamente para los fines que persigue el Instituto, estaran exentos de impuestos de cualquiera naturaleza, ya sean nacionales, estaduales, provinciales o municipales, con excepci6n de las tasas que deban ser pagadas por raz6n de servicios o de mejoramientos ptiblicos locales que redunden en beneficio de dichos inmuebleso

El mobiliario, los efectos, enseres, utensilios, materiales de construc- ci6n y cualesquiera otros artfculos destinados al uso oficial del Instituto esta- r n exentos, en el territorio de cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes, deto- do gravamen, incluyendo derechos aduaneros, contribuciones indirectas y sobretasas, o cualesquiera otroso

Estarfn tambien exentos de toda clase de impuestos, en el territorio de cada uno de los Estados Contratantes, los fondos y otros bienes que se empleen para los fines del Instituto, y todos los contratos y actos oficiales del Instituto, que se mantengan dentro de los lfmites de sus funciones.

CIRCULACION DE FONDOS

Artfculo XIII

Cada uno de los Estados Contratantes tomard las medidas que sean necesarias para facilitar el movimiento de los fondos del Instituto.

FACILIDADES PARA EL PERSONAL Y ESTUDIANTES

Artfculo XIV

Cada uno de los Estados Contratantes conviene en acordar a las personas al servicio del Instituto, o que realicen estudios auspiciados por 61, todas a- quellas facilidades que puedan conceder en cuanto concierne a exenciones de impuestos y otros recargos que afecten la entrada, viajes y residencia de tales personas, conforme a sus leyes y reglamentos.

FIRMA Y RATIFICACION

Artfculo XV

1. El original de la presente Convenci6n, redactado en los idiomas espafiol, ingl6s, portugues y francds, serA depositado en la Uni6n Panamericana y abierto a la firma de los Gobiernos de las Repuiblicas Americanas. La Uni6n Panamericana enviarA copias certificadas aut6nticas de la presente Conven- ci6n a los gobiernos signatarios y a los gobiernos de los Estados no signatarios que sean miembros de la Uni6n Panamericana. La Uni6n Panamericana informarA a todos los gobiernos de los pafses miembros de la Uni'n Paname- ricana acerca de las firmas de adhesion que se registren y de las fechasres- pectivas de las mismaso

2. La presente Convencion sera ratificada por los Estados Signatarios de acuerdo con sus respectivos procedimientos constitucionales. Los instrumentos de ratificaci'n sera'n depositados en la Uni'n Panamericana, laqueco- municara. a todos los Gobiernos Signatarios los datos sobre cada ratificacion depositada.

3. La presente Convenci'n entrara en vigor tres meses despu~sde que se hayan depositado en la Uni6n Panamericana cinco ratificaciones cuando menos. Cualquiera ratificacion que se reciba despues de que la presente Conven- ci'n entre en vigor tendrA efecto un mes despu~s de la fecha del dep'sitodedi- cha ratificaci6n en la Uni'n Panamericanao

DENUNCIA

ArtfculoXVI

1. La presente Convenci6n, de acuerdo con lo dispuesto en el parrafo2' de este Artfculo, regira indefinidamente, pero podrA ser denunciada por cualquier Estado Contratante, dando aviso por escrito a la Uni'n Panamericana, la cual informara' a todos los otros Estados Contratantes acerca de cada notifica- ci6n de denuncia que sea recibidao Transcurrido un afio a contar de la fecha en que haya sido recibida por la Uni'n Panamericana la notificaci6n de denuncia, la presente Convenci6n cesarA en sus efectos para el Estado denunciante, pero permanecera en pleno efecto en lo que respecta a todos los otros Estados Contratantes.

2. En el caso de que el nuimero de Estados Contratantes quedare reducido a menos de cinco, como resultado de las denuncias, los Estados restantes se consultarin recfprocamente y de modo inmediato con el objeto de revisar la presente Convenci6n y resolver lo conveniente sobre el futuro del Institutoo Si dentro de dos afios, a partir de la fecha en que el nrimero de Estados quedare reducido a menos de cinco, como resultado de denuncias, esos Estados no hubieren Ilegado a un acuerdo respecto a la continuidad de la Convencion y alfu- turo del Instituto, la Convenci6n cesari de tener vigor seis meses despues de la fecha en que cualquiera de dichos Estados notifique por escrito a los otros su intenci6n de terminarla. En el caso de que la Convenci'n cesare de tener efecto, el futuro destino del Instituto serA determinado por el Consejo Directi- vo de la Uni'n Panamericanao EN FE DE LO CUAL, los infrascritos Plenipotenciarios, despu~s de haber depositado sus plenos poderes, que se han encontrado en buena y debida forma, firman v sellan la presente Convenci'n en espafiol, ingles, portugues y frances, en la Uni6n Panamericana, Washington, D. C., en nombre de sus respectivos Gobiernos, en las fechas indicadas al lado de sus firmas. CONVENTION ON THE INTER-AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES

The Governments of the American Republics, desiring to promote the advancementof the agricultural sciences and related arts and sciences; and wishing to give practical effect to the resolution approved by the Eighth American Scientific Congress held in Washington in 1940, recommending the establishment of an Inter-American Institute of Tropical Agriculture, have agreed to conclude a Convention in order to recognize the permanent status of the Inter- American Institute of Agricultural Sciences, hereinafter referred to as "the Institute", on the basis of the following Articles:

Article I

The Contracting States hereby recognize the permanent status of the In- ter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences, incorporated under the laws of the District of Columbia, United States of America, on June 18, 1942; and they agree to recognize the Institute as a legal entity in accordance with their own legislation. The Institute shall have all the rights, benefits, assets, lands and other property to which it was or may be entitled as a corporation, and shall assume all the obligations and contracts for which it became responsible as a corporation.

The executive headquarters of the Institute shall be located in Washington, D. C. The principal field headquarters of the Institute shall be located in Tu- rrialba, Costa Rica. Regional offices of the Institute may be maintained throughout the American Republics.

PURPOSES

Article II

The purposes of the Institute are to encourage and advance the development of agricultural sciences in the American Republics through research, teaching and extension activities in the theory and practice of agriculture and related arts and sciences.

In furtherance of these purposes the Institute may, subject to the laws of the several countries, exercise the following powers: To develop, financeand operate similar establishments and installations in one or more of the Amer- ican Republics; to give assistance in the establishment and maintenance of organizations having similar purposes in the said Republics; to purchase, sell, lease, improve or operateany property in the American Republics, in accordance with the purposes of the Institute; to collaborate with the Government of any American Republic, or with any other organization or entity, and to give assistance to the same; to receive contributions and donations of money or property, both real and personal; to enter into and carry out contracts and agreements; to raise or acquire and, in any manner, dispose of all agricultural commodities and products thereof essential for experimental or research purposes; and to carry on any other business or activity appropriate to the foregoing purposes. THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Article III

The representatives of the twenty-oneAmerican Republics on the Govern- ing Board of the Pan American Union shall serve as members of the Institute, and shall be considered as members of the Board of Directors thereof, In the event that any member is unable to attend a meeting of the Board of Directors the said member or his government may designate an alternate for that purpose. The decisions of the Board shall be adopted by a majority vote of its members, which majority vote shall include the votes of a majority of the members representing Contracting States. The Board shall have, amongoth- ers, the following functions:

To elect the Director of the Institute and to approve the appointment of the Secretary made by the Director. To remove both the Director and the Secretary. To determine the compensation of the Director and the Secretary. To supervise the activities of the Director, who shall be responsible for carrying out all orders and resolutions of said Board. To appoint and define the duties and compensation of an administrative committee consisting of not more than eight persons, of whom one shall be the Director of the Institute ex officio. The members of this administrative committee need not be members of the Board of Directors. To approve the budget for the administration of the Institute to be submitted annually by the Director.

To fix the annual quotas of the Institute.

The Board shall receive an annual report from the Director upon the activities of the Institute as well as upon its general condition and financial status.

OFFICERS

Article IV

The Institute shall have a Director and a Secretary. The Director shall be elected by the Board of Directors in plenary session for a term of sixyears; he may be reelected one or more times. The first term of the Director under the provisions of this Convention shall begin as of the day on which this Con- vention enters into force.

The Secretary shall be appointed by the Director with the approval of the Board of Directors of the Institute and shall be directly responsible to the Director.

The Director and the Secretary shall hold office until their respective successors shall be chosen and shall qualify; but they may be removedbyvote of the majority of the members of the Institute.

THE DIRECTOR

ArticleV

1. The Director under the supervision of the Board of Directors shall have ample and full powers to direct the activities of the Institute; and he shall be responsible for carrying out all orders and resolutions of said Board.

2. The Director under the supervision of the Board of Directors shall be the legal representative of the Institute; and he may legalize, with the seal of the Institute, all contracts, conveyances and other instruments which require such legalization and which in his opinion are necessary and advantageous to the operation of the Institute. In addition, he shall be authorized to take any other step necessary to validate such instruments as mayberequired or permitted by law. The Director may grant powers to others for all those acts which he cannot perform personally.

3. The Director, under the supervision of the Board of Directors of the Institute, shall have the power to appoint, remove, and determine the compensation of employees.

4. The Director shall prepare the budget of the Institute for each fiscal year, and submit it to the Board of Directors at least two months before the annual meeting at which it will be considered for approval.

5. The Director shall submit an annual report to the Board of Directors of the Institute two months before the annual meeting, setting forth the work of the Institute during the year and its general condition and financial status and he shall submit to the approval of the said Board the budget and the plans for the following year0

THE SECRETARY

Article VI

The Secretary shall keep the minutes and records of the Institute, shall exercise all prerogatives and carry out all administrative duties assigned to him by the Director TECHNICAL ADVISORY COUNCIL

Article VII

Provision is made for the establishment of a Technical Advisory Coun- cil, as follows:

1. Each of the Contracting States may appoint an agricultural expert to be its representative in the Technical Advisory Council of the Institute. This Council shall cooperate with the Director on agricultural matters of a technical nature. The appointment of each representative shall be officially notified to the Secretary of the Institute. The members of the Council shall serve for a period of five years at the will of their respective governments, and may be reappointed one or more times.

2. The Technical Advisory Council shall meet at least once a year, under the chairmanship of the Director of the Institute, at such place as the activities of the Institute may require. The Director may call special meetings of the Council on his own initiative, whenever the best interests of the Institute may require. Notice with respect to any meeting shall be given at least two months in advance and shall state the purpose or purposes of the proposed meeting. A majority of the members of the Council shall constitutea quorum.

3. No member of the Technical Advisory Council, as such, shall receive from the Institute any pecuniary compensation for his services, although the Institute may defray traveling expenses of the members of the Council to the annual meeting.

FISCAL AGENT

Article VIII

The Pan American Union shall act as fiscal agent for and on behalf of the Institute, and as such shall receive and disburse the funds of the Institute.

MAINTENANCE OF THE INSTITUTE

Article IX

The income of the Institute for its maintenance and operation shall consist of annual quotas paid by the Contracting States, as well as of legacies, donations and contributions which the Institute may accept. Such funds and contributions shall be used only for purposes in keeping with the character of the Institute.

The annual quotas shall be determined by the Board of Directors of the Institute provided the vote is unanimous with respect to the members representing the Contracting States. The amounts of the respective quotas shallbe in proportion to the population of each Contracting State, on the basis of the latest official statistics in possession of the Pan American Union on the first day of July of each year, The annual quota payment of each Contracting State shall not exceed one dollar United States currency per one thousand of the total population of that State. The quota payments may, however, be increased by unanimous recommendation of those members of the Board of Directors who represent Contrac- ting States and the approval by the appropriate authorities of each of the Con- tracting States of the increased quota of that State.

The quotas shall be communicated annually by the Pan American Union to the Governments of the Contracting States, and shall be paid before the first of July of each year.

The quota payments of each Contracting State shall commence on theday on which this Convention enters into force with respect to that State, prorated according to the number of full calendar months remaining in the current fiscal year,

The fiscal year of the Institute shall begin on the first day of July of each year.

LANGUAGES

Article X

The official languages of the Institute shall be English, Spanish, Portu- guese and French.

POSTAL PRIVILEGES

Article XI

The Contracting States agree to extend to the Institute forthwith the domestic and international franking privilege provided in the existing inter- American postal conventions and to ask the States members of the Pan Amer- ican Union which have not ratified the present Convention to grant the Institute the same postal privileges.

EXEMPTION FROM TAXATION

Article XII

Lands and buildings in the territory of any of the Contracting States of which the Institute is the legal or equitable owner and which are used exclusively for the purposes of the Institute shall be exempt from taxation of every kind, National, State, Provincial or Municipal, other than assessments levied for services or for local public improvements by which the premises are benefited.

Furniture, equipment, supplies, contruction materials and any other articles intended for official use of the Institute shall be exempt in the territory of any of the Contracting States from every form of taxation, including but not limited to customs duties, excise and surtaxes. 42 All funds and other property used for the purposes of the Institute, and all contracts and other official acts of the Institute within the scope of its purposes shall likewise be exempt from taxation of every kind in the territory of each of the Contracting States.

MOVEMENT OF FUNDS

Article XIII

Each of the Contracting States shall take such measures as may be appropriate to facilitate the movement of funds of the Institute.

EXEMPTIONS AND PRIVILEGES FOR

PERSONNEL AND STUDENTS

Article XIV

Each of the Contracting States agrees that it will accord to persons engaged in the work of the Institute or pursuing studies under the auspices of the Institute, such privileges with respect to exemption from taxation and other burdens affecting the entry, travel and residence of such persons as may be appropriate under its laws and regulations.

SIGNATURE AND RATIFICATION Article XV

1. The original of the present Convention in the English, Spanish, Por- tuguese and French languages shall be deposited with the Pan American Union and opened for signature by the Governments of the American Republics. The Pan American Union shall furnish a certified copy of the present Convention to each signatory Government and to the Government of each non-signatory State which is a member of the Union. The Pan American Union shall inform all the Governments of the States members of the Pan American Union with respectto all signatures and the respective dates thereof.

2. The present Convention shall be ratified by the signatory States in conformity with their respective constitutional procedures. The instruments of ratification shall be deposited with the Pan American Union, which shall notify all the signatory Governments of each ratification deposited and the date of its deposit.

3. The present Convention shall come into force three months after the deposit of not less than five ratifications with the Pan American Union. Any ratification received after the date of entry into force of the Convention shall take effect one month after the date of its deposit with the Pan American Union. DENUNCIATION

Article XVI

1. The present Convention shall, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 2 of this Article, remain in force indefinitely, but may be denounced by any Contracting State by a notification in writing to the Pan American Union, which shall inform all the other Contracting States of each notification of denunciation received. After the expiration of one year from the date of the receipt by the Pan American Union of a notification of denunciation by any Contracting State, the present Convention shall cease to be in force with respect to such State, butthe Convention shall remain in full force and effect with respectto all the other Contracting States.

2. In the event that the number of Contracting States shouldbe reduced to less than five as the result of denunciations, the remaining Contracting States shall immediately consult with each other with a view to revising the present Convention and with a view to determining the future status of the Insti- tute. If, within two years after the date upon which the number of Contracting States is reduced to less than five, as the result of denunciations, no agreement shall have been reached by the remaining Contracting States regarding the continuation of the Convention and the status of the Institute, the Conven- tion shall, upon the expiration of six months' written notice by any remaining Contracting State, cease to be in force. In the event that the Convention should cease to be in force, the status of the Institute shall be determined by the Gov- erning Board of the Pan American Union.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Plenipotentiaries, having deposited their full powers found to be in due and proper form, sign this Con- vention in the English, Spanish, Portuguese and French languages at the Pan American Union, Washington, D. C., on behalf of their respective Govern- ments and affix thereto their seals on the dates appearing opposite their signatures. CONVEN;AO SOBRE 0 INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANODE CIENCIASAGRONOMICAS

Animados do prop6sito de fomentar o progresso das ci~ncias agronbmicas, bern como das ciincias e das artes conexas; e desejosos de levar a efei- to, por forma pra'tica, a resolu go aprovada no Oitavo Congresso Cientffico Americano realizado em Washington em 1940, recomendando o estabelecimen- to de um Instituto Interamericano de Agricultura Tropical, os Governos das Repflblicas Americanas resolveram ajustar uma Convenqdo para reconhecer como instituiqdo permanente, o Instituto Interamericano de Ci~ncias Agronb- micas, que no texto desta Convenqfto passara a ser chamado "o Instituto", a qual se basearA nos seguintes Artigos:

Artigo I

Pela presente ConvenQ5o, os Estados Contratantes reconhecem como institui~do permanente o Instituto Interamericano de Ciincias Agron6micas, organizado como sociedade em conformidade com as leis do Distrito federal de Columbia, Estados Unidos da America, em 18 de junho de 1942; e conven- cionam dar ao Instituto o car.ter de pessoa jurfdica, de acbrdo corn sua pr6- pria legisla 5o. 0 Instituto gozari de todos os direitos, beneffcios, capital, terrenos e outros bens que adquiriu ou que venha a adquirir na qualidade de corporaqfio, e assumirA t~das as obriga Ses e cumprira os contratos que tenha celebrado ou que venha a celebrar na mesma capacidade.

O escrit6rio central de administragdo do Instituto tera' sua sede na cida- de de Washington, D. C., e o escritbrio principal para o desempenho de suas atividades estarA localizado em Turrialba, Costa Rica. 0 Instituto podera' estabelecer escritbrios regionais em tbdas as Repfiblicas americanas.

FINA LIDADES Artigo II

Os fins do Instituto serdo os de estimular e o de promover o progresso das ci*ncias agronimicas nas Repuiblicas americanas, por meio do ensino, das pesquisas, e da divulgaQdo da teoria e da pratica da agricultura, assim como de outras artes e ciincias conexas.

Para levar a cabo isses fins, o Instituto, de acbrdo corn as leis dos diversos parses, poderi fazer uso das seguintes atribuiq5es: criar, manter e administrar estabelecimentos similares e instalaq5es em uma ou mais das Repu'blicas americanas; prestar auxflio ' fundaq5.o e manutenqdo de institui- Q6es que tenham finalidades ana'logas nas ditas Repuiblicas; comprar, vender, arrendar, melhorar ou administrar qualquer propriedade nas Repablicas americanas, de acordo com as finalidades do Instituto; colaborar com o govirno de qualquer Repfiblica americana, ou corn quaisquer outros orgaos ou entidades e prestar auxflio aos mesmos; aceitar contribuiq6es e d~divas na forma de dinheiro ou bens, m6veis ou im6veis, fazer e executar contratos e acordos; cultivar ou adquirir t6da a especie de produtos agrfcolas e seus derivados, ou dispor dos mesmos por qualquer forma quando seja essencial para fins depes- quisa ou experimenta 5o; e efetuar qualquer outro neg6cio ou levar a efeito qualquer outra atividade que sejam convenientes para os fins indicados.

A JUNTA ADMINISTRATIVA

Artigo HI

Serdo membros da Junta Administrativa do Instituto os representantes das vinte e uma Repuiblicas americanas que fazem parte do Conselho Diretor da Uni~o Panamericana. Se algum d61es ndo puder assistir a uma reuniftoda Junta Administrativa, poder-se-a designar um suplente para iste fim, podendo ser feita a indicac~o pelo pr6prio membro ou pelo seu Govbrno. As deci- s6es da Junta serdo aprovadas por maioria de votos dos seus membros, cuja maioria de votos se compora dos votos da maioria dos representantes dos Estados Contratanteso A Junta terfi, entre outras, as seguintes atribui- qJes:

Eleger o Diretor d- Instituto, e ratificar a nomeagdo do Secretfrioo Remover de seus cargos tanto o Diretor como o Secretfrio. Fixar a remuneraq~o do Diretor e do Secretfrioo Fiscalizar as atividades do Diretor, que sera responsfivel pelo cumprimento de tbdas as ordens e resoluq3es da Junta. Nomear uma Comissdo Administrativa, indicando seus deveres efixando as suas despesas e a remunerarfto de seus membros, devendo essa Co- missdo compor-sedeum nuimero nfo excedente de oito pessoas, entre as quais servirf de membro ex officio o Diretor do Institutoo Nfo serequer que os membros desta Comissfo sejam membros da Junta Administrati- va do Instituto. Aprovar o orqamento que o Diretor deverf apresentar anualmente para a administracfo do Institutoo A Junta fixara as despesas anuais do Instituto.

A Junta recebera do Diretor um relat6rio anual dos trabalhos do Institu- to, assim como de seu estado geral e situaggo financeira.

FUNCIONARIOS Artigo IV

0 Instituto tern um Diretor e um Secretarioo 0 Diretor serf eleito pela Junta Administrativa em sessfo plenfiria, e o seu mandato durara seis anos; podera ser eleito uma ou mais vzes. 0 primeiro perfodo administrativo do Diretor, para os fins da presente Convenqao, principiara no dia em que esta entrar em vigor. O Secretirio sera nomeado pelo Diretor com aprovaqfo da Junta Admi- nistrativa, e sera diretamente responsfvel ao Diretoro

O Diretor e o Secretfrio desempenharfio seus cargos, ate que tenham sido designados e tenham sido investidos de suas funq5es os seus respectivos sucessores; mas poder~o ser removidos pelo voto da maioria dos membros do Institutoo

O DIRETOR

Artigo V

1. 0 Diretor tern amplos e plenos poderes para dirigir os negocios do Instituto, sob a fiscalizaqdo da Junta Administrativa do mesmo, e sera responsfvel pelo cumprimento de t*das as ordens e resoluq6es da Junta.

2, 0 Diretor tern a representaqfo legal do Instituto, sob a fiscalizarfio da respectiva Junta Administrativa, e poderf legalizar com o silo do Institu- to todos os contratos, traspasses e demais documentos que o requeiram, e que em sua opinifio sejam necessfirios e convenientes para o funcionamento do Instituto. Alem disso tern atribuiq6es para tomar qualquer outra medida ne- cessaria para dar fbrra legal a todos os documentos, de conformidade com as exig'ncias e disposi Ses da lei. 0 Diretor poderfi outorgar poderes a outras pessoas para a efetivaq~o de todos os atos que eIe pr6prio ndo possa realizar.

3. 0 Diretor esta sujeito N fiscalizaqo da Junta Administrativa do Ins- tituto, e tern poderes para nomear e demitir empregados e fixar a remunera- fto dos mesmos,

4. 0 Diretor prepararfi o orqamento do Instituto para cada exercfcio financeiro, e o apresentarA h Junta Administrativa pelo menos dois meses antes da reunifto anual da mesma, em que se deliberarA a aprovaqdo do referido orqamento.

5. Todos os anos, o Diretor apresentara um relatorio h Junta Adminis- trativa, dois meses antes de sua reunido anual, dando conta dos trabalhos do Instituto durante o referido ano, bem como de seu estado geral e condiq6es financeiras; e submeterf h aprovacfo da mesma Junta o orqamento e o programa dos trabalhos para o ano seguinte.

O SECRETARIO Artigo VI

0 Secretario tern sob sua guarda as atas e os arquivos do Instituto, pos- suir5 t5das as atribuiq6es e exercerfi tbdas as funq6es administrativas quelhe sejam delegadas pelo Diretor. CONSELHO TECNICO CONSULTIVO

Artigo VII

Estabelecer-se-i um Conselho Thcnico Consultivo, que sera organizado da seguinte forma:

1. Cada um dos Estados Contratantes poderi nomear um especialista agr6nomo, que agirA como seu representante no Conselho Tcnico Consultivo do Institutoo Este Conselho cooperarA com o Diretor em assuntos tcnicos referentes ' agricultura. A nomeaq~o de cada representante sera comunicada oficialmente h Secretaria do Institutoo Os membros do Conselho sujeitos h vontade de seus governos, exercerdo suas funqOes pelo prazo de cinco anos, podendo ser nomeados novamente uma ou mais v~zes para continuar nodesem- penho de seus cargos.

2. 0 Conselho Thcnico Consultivo se reunirA, ao menos uma vez por ano, sob a presid~ncia do Diretor do Instituto, no lugar em que as atividades do Instituto o requeiram. 0 Diretor poder5, por sua pr6pria iniciativa, convocar o Conselho Tecnico a reuni~es extraordina'rias, quando a boa marcha do Instituto assim o exija. A convoca 5o de cada uma dessas reuni6es devera ser comunicada ao Conselho com dois meses, pelo menos, de antecedbncia, corn explica~do do motivo ou motivos que d5.o lugar h reunifto proposta. Uma maioria dos membros do Conselho constituira' quorum.

3. Nenhum membro do Conselho Tecnico Consultivo recebera do Insti- tuto, por efeito do cargo, qualquer remuneraqfo pecunifria pelos seus serviqos; mas o Instituto poderi ocorrer s despesas de viagem que os Conselhei- ros tenham feito para atender L sua reunifto anual.

AGENTE FISCAL

Artigo VIII

A Unido Panamericana exercera' as funq~es de Agente Fiscal do Institu- to, e neste cariter receber5 e administrara os fundos do Instituto.

MANUTEN AO DO INSTITUTO

Artigo IX

Os recursos para manter e para estimular os trabalhos do Instituto, con- sistirfo das quotas de contribuiqdo anual dadas pelos Estados Contratantes, e bem assim os provenientes de legados, d~divas e contribuiqces que sejam a- ceitas pelo Instituto. Esses fundos e contribuiqOes serfo usados exclusivamente para fins pertinentes ao carater do Instituto.

A Junta Administrativa do Instituto fixari as quotas anuais, contanto que o voto seja un~nime no que respeita aos membros que representem os Estados Contratanteso A import~ncia das respectivas quotas sera em proporqfo h populaqdo de cada Estado Contratante, tomando-se por base a riltima estatfs- tica oficial em poder da UniAo Panamericana no dia 10 de julho de cada ano.

Fixar-se-i a quota anual de cada Estado Contratante em import~ncia ndo excedente de um d6lar em moeda dos Estados Unidos da Am6rica, por cada mil habitanteso Contudo, essa quota podera ser aumentada mediante reco- mendaq~o unftnime dos membros da Junta Administrativa que representem os Estados Contratantes, e com a provaqdo das autoridades competentes de cada Estado Contratante.

A Unido Panamericana devera comunicar anualmente aos Governos dos Estados Contratantes as quotas que Ihes cabem, e que deverdo ser pagas antes do 10 de julho de cada ano.

O pagamento da quota de cada Estado Contratante, comegara na data em que esta Convenqfto entrar em vigor no que respeita ao referido Estado, pror- rateado de acbrdo com o nu'mero de dias do exercfcio financeiro que ainda restarem a correro

O exercfcio financeiro do Instituto comeqara em 1' de julho de cadaanoo

IDIOMAS

Artigo X

As lfnguas oficiais do Instituto serfooportugubs, o espanhol, o inglbs e o franc~s.

FRANQUIA POSTAL

Artigo XI

Os Estados Contratantes acordam em tornar tambem extensiva ao Insti- tuto, dentro de seus respectivos territ6rios, e entre uns e outros, a franquia postal estabelecida nas convenq5es postais interamericanas em vigor, pedindo aos Estados da Unifo Panamericana que nfo tenham ratificado a presente Con- venqdo, que concedam ao Instituto a referida prerrogativa.

ISEN;AO DE IMPOSTOS

Artigo XII

Os bens m6veis possuidos pelo Instituto, em direito ou equidade, em qualquer dos Estados Contratantes, que estejam sendo usados exclusivamente para os fins a que o Instituto se dedica, estarfo isentos de impostos de qualquer natureza, sejam iles federais, estaduais ou provinciais, e municipais, excetuando-se porem, as taxas que devem ser pagas por serviqos ou por melhoramentos pdblicos locais, queredundem em beneffcio dos referidos im6- veis. 0 mobilifrio, aparelhos, utensilios e artigos diversos, materiais de construgfio ou quaisquer outros artigos oficialmente destinados ao uso do Ins- tituto, estardo isentos, no territorio de cada um dos Estados Contratantes, de qualquer gravame, inclusive direitos aduaneiros, contribuiq6es indiretas ou sobretaxas, ou quaisquer tributos.

Estardo tamb~m isentos de qualquer especie de impostos no territbrio de cada um dos Estados Contratantes, os fundos e outros bens do Institutopor t1e empregados nas suas atividades, bem assim todos os contratos e atosofi- ciais do mesmo, que estejam dentro dos limites de suas funq6es.

MOVIMENTO DE FUNDOS

Artigo XIII

Cada um dos Estados Contratantes tomar as medidas necesarias para facilitar o movimento dos fundos do Instituto.

FACILIDADES PARA 0 PESSOAL E ESTUDANTES

Artigo XIV

Cada um dos Estados Contratantes acorda em proporcionar s pessoas ao serviqo do Instituto, ou que realizem estudos por le patrocinados, tdas as facilidades que possam conceder no que respeita a isenqSes de impostos e outros onus que afetam a entrada, as viagens e a resid~ncia de tais pessoas, em conformidade corn suas leis e regulamentos.

ASSINATURA E RATIFICA.AO

Artigo XV

1. 0 original desta Convenqo, redigido nos idiomas portuguis, espanhol, inglis, e francts, sera depositado na Uni~o Panamericana, e aberto assinatura dos Governos dos Repriblicas Americanas° A Unifo Panamericana enviar! c6pias certificadas da presente Convenrao aos Governos dos Estados signat~rios e aos dos nfo signatf.rios e que sejam seus membros, e informa- ri aos governos de todos os pafses que dela fazem parte, a respeito das assinaturas de adesfo que sejam registradas e das datas dos respectivosregis- tros°

2. A presente Convenq5o serfi ratificada pelos Estados Signatfirios de ac6rdo com seus respectivos processos constitucionaiso Os instrumentosde ratifica qfo sergo depositados na Unigo Panamericana, que comunicara' atodos os Governos Signatarios a data de dep6sito de cada ratificaq5.o.

3. A presente Convenqdo entrard em vigor trbs meses depois de terem sido depositadas na Unifo Panamericana cinco ratificaroes, pelo menos. Qualquer ratificaro recebida depois de ter a presente Convenqfo entrado em vigor, come~ara a ter efeito um mbs depois da data em que tenha sido depositada na Unido Panamericana.

DEN1TNCIA

Artigo XVI

1. A presente Convenro, de acbrdo com a alfnea 2 dtste Artigo, vigorara por tempo indeterminado, mas podera ser denunciada por qualquer Esta- do Contratante, mediante aviso dado por escrito Unifto Panamericana, que informarA a todos os demais Estados Contratantes s~bre cada notificaqdo de den6ncia que seja recebidao Ap6s um ano, a contar da data em que tenha sido recebida pela Unido Panamericana a notificaq~o da denfincia, a presente Con- vengo cessara em seus efeitos no que toca ao Estado denunciante, continuan- do porerm em pleno vigor para todos os demais Estados Contratanteso

2. Caso o nfimero de Estados Contratantes fique reduzido a menos de cinco, por efeito das denuincias, os Estados restantes se consultardo recfprocamente, sem perda de tempo, a fim de rever a presente Convenqdo, eresol- ver o que for conveniente sabre o futuro do Institutoo Se dentro de dois anos, a partir da data em que o nfimero de Estados tenha ficado reduzido a menos de cinco, por efeito das denu'ncias, isses Estados ndo tiverem chegado a um acbrdo sabre a continuaqfo da Convenqfto e o futuro do Instituto, a Convenqdo cessara de ter efeito seis meses depois da data em que qualquer dos ditos Es- tados notifique por escrito aos demais sua intenqdo de terminf-la. No caso em que a Convenqfto deixe de ter efeito, o futuro destino do Instituto serf decidido pelo Conselho Diretor da Unifo Panamericana.

EM TESTEMUNHO DO QUE, os Plenipotencifirios abaixo assinados, depois de terem depositado seus plenos poderes, que foram achados em boa e devida forma, assinam e selam a presente Convenqfto em portuguis, espanhol, inglis e franc~s, na Unido Panamericana, em Washington, D. C., em nome de seus respectivos Governos, nas datas indicadas N margem de suas assina- turaso CONVENTION RELATIVE A L'INSTITUT INTERAME'RICAIN DES SCIENCES AGRICOLES

Les Gouvernements des Republiques Americaines, animus du d~sir d'encourager l'avancement des sciences agricoles et des arts et sciences connexes, et voulant donner des suites pratiques la resolution recommandant l?6tablissement d'un Institut Interamericain d'Agriculture Tropicale et ap- prouve par le Huitibme Congrbs Scientifique Americain tenu N Washington en 1940, ont resolu de conclure une Convention ayant pour objet de reconnaftrele statut permanent de l'Institut Interam'ricain des Sciences Agricoles, design6 ci-aprbs sous le nom de "l'Institut", en prenant pour base les articles suivants:

Article I

Les Etats Contractants reconnaissent par la pr~sente Convention lesta- tut permanent de l'Institut Interam~ricain des Sciences Agricoles, constitu6 selon les lois du District de Columbia, Etats-Unis d'Amerique, le 18 juin 1942, et ils conviennent de reconnaltre l'Institut comme une entite legale en conformite avec leur propre legislation. L'Institut jouira de tous les droits, benfices, capitaux, terrains, et autres biens auxquels il a eu droit ou peut avoir droit comme corporation, et assumera tous contrats et obligations qui lui incombent A titre de corporation.

Le service central executif de I'Institut aura son sibge Washington, D. C. Le bureau principal sur les lieux sera situe Turrialba (Costa Rica). Des bureaux regionaux de l'Institut pourront btre maintenus dans toutes les autres Republiques Amricaines.

BUTS

Article II

L'Institut a pour buts I'encouragement et lavancement des sciences agricoles dans les Republiques Americaines par des recherches, par l'enseigne- ment et la dissemination de la theorie et de la pratique de l'agriculture et des arts et sciences connexes.

Pour la poursuite de ces buts, l'Institut peut, en conformit6 avec les lois des differents pays, exercer les pouvoirs suivants: Crier, financer et administrer des etablissements et installations semblables dans une ou plusieurs des Republiques Amricaines; prater son concours l'tablissement et au maintien, dans les dites Republiques, d'organisations ayant des buts analogues; acqurir, vendre, louer, am~liorer ou administrer toutes propriet-s dans les R6publiques Am6ricaines, en accord avec les buts de l'Institut; collaborer avec le Gouvernement de toute autre R'publique Am'ricaine, ou avec toute autre organisation ou entitY, et leur prater son concours; accepter des contributions et donations en argent ou en biens tant mobiliers qu'immobiliers; conclure et excuter des contrats et des accords; cultiver ou acqu~rir toutes sortes de produits agricoles et leurs deriv~s, ou en disposer de quelque manibre que ce soit quand les recherches et les experiences de l'Institut l1exige- ront; et poursuivre tout autre commerce ou activit6 se rapportant aux buts mentionnes ci-dessus.

LE CONSEIL D'ADMINISTRATION

Article III

Les representants des vingt et une R~publiques Americaines qui font partie du Conseil d'Administration de l'Union Panamericaine serviront comme membres de l'Institut et seront consider~s comme membres du Conseil d'Ad- ministration de l'Institut. Au cas ohi un membre quelconque ne pourrait pas assister une reunion du Conseil d'Administration, le dit membre ou son Gou- vernement pourra designer un substitut dans ce but. Les decisions du Con- seil seront adopt6es par un vote de majorit6 de ses membres. Ce vote dema- jorit6 comprendra les voix d'une majorite des membres representant les Etats Contractants. Le Conseil aura, entre autres, les fonctions suivantes:

11 Ulira un Directeur de l'Institut et ratifiera la nomination du Secretaire faite par le Directeur. I aura pleins pouvoirs pour revoquer le Directeur ainsi que le Secr6- ta ire. I1 determinera le montant des 'moluments du Directeur et du Secretaire. II dirigera les activites du Directeur, qui il incombera d' executer tous ordres et resolutions du dit Conseil. Il nommera un comit6 administratif compos6 de huit personnes au plus, dont Pune sera le Directeur de l'Institut ex officio, et fixera les attributions et le montantdes 6moluments des membres de ce comitY. Les membres de ce comite administratif ne seront pas necessairement des membres du Conseil d' Administration. I1 approuvera le budget qui lui sera soumis annuellement par le Direc- teur pour 1' administration de I' Institut. I1 fixera les quotes-parts annuelles de l'Institut.

I recevra un rapport annuel du Directeur sur les activites de l'Institut ainsi que sur son tat gen6ral et sa situation financibre, FONCTIONNA IRES

Article IV

L'Institut aura un Directeur et un Secr taire. Le Directeur sera lu par le Conseil d'Administration en session plenibre pour une p~riode de six ans; il peut tre re'1u une ou plusieurs fois. La premibre p6riode d'activite du Directeur aux termes de cette Convention commencera le jour oh celle-ci entrera en vigueuro

Le Secretaire sera nomme par le Directeur avec l'approbation du Con- seil d'Administration de l'Institut et sera directement responsable envers le Directeur.

Le Directeur et le Secrtaire resteront en fonctions jusqu'au moment ohi leurs successeurs respectifs auront et choisis et seront entres en fonctions; ils pourront toutefois itre r6voques par un vote de la majorit6 des membres de 1? Institut.

LE DIRECTEUR

Article V

1. Le Directeur, sous la direction du Conseil d'Administration, aura amples et pleins pouvoirs pour diriger les activit6s de lInstitut, et il lui incombera de mettre ' execution tous ordres et resolutions du dit Conseil.

2. Le Directeur, sous la direction du Conseil d'Administration, sera le representant 1hgal de l'Institut; il pourra l'galiser, par l'apposition du sceau de l'Institut, tous contrats, actes translatifs de propriete et autres instruments qui exigent une telle l'galisation et qui, h son avis, seront necessaires et utiles au bon fonctionnement de l'Institut. De plus, il sera autorise h prendre toutes autres mesures necessaires pour rendre valides les instruments qui pourraient ttre exiges ou permis par la loi. Le Directeur pourra accorder h d'autres personnes le pouvoir d'accomplir les actes qu'il ne peut pas accomplir personnellement°

3. Le Directeur, sous la haute surveillance du Conseil d'Administra- tion de l'Institut, aura la facult6 de nommer et r~voquer les employ~s et de fixer leurs 6moluments.

4. Le Directeur pr6parera le budget de l'Institut pour chaque annie budgtaire et le soumettra au Conseil d'Administration deux mois au moins avant la r~union annuelle ohi sa ratification sera mise h 1'6tude.

5. Deux mois avant la reunion annuelle, le Directeur soumettra auCon- seil d'Administration de l'Institut un rapport annuel dans lequel il rendra compte des travaux accomplis au cours de l'ann6e par l'Institut, et de son tat g~n6ral de meme que de sa situation financibre, et il soumettra N l'approbation du dit Conseil le budget et les plans relatifs h l'ann~e suivante. LE SECRETA IRE

Article VI

Le Secr~taire aura la garde des procbs-verbaux et des archives de PIns- titut, exercera toutes prerogatives et s'acquittera de toutes les fonctions administratives qui lui seront assignees par le Directeur.

CONSEIL CONSULTATIF TECHNIQUE

Article VII

I est pourvu l'6tablissement d'un Conseil Consultatif Technique, comme suit:

1. Chacun des Etats Contractants pourra designer un expert agricole pour le representer dans le Conseil Consultatif Technique de l'Institut. Ce Con- seil cooprera avec le Directeur sur les questions agricoles d'ordre technique. La nomination de chaque representant sera communiqu~e officiellementauSe- cretaire de I'Institut. Les membres du Conseil Consultatif Technique resteront en fonctions pour une p~riode de cinq ans au gre de leurs gouvernements respectifs, et leur nomination pourra ttre renouvel~e une ou plusieurs fois.

2. Le Conseil Consultatif Technique se reunira au moins une fois par an, sous la presidence du Directeur de 1'Institut, l'endroit le mieux indiqu pour les activit~s de l'Institut. Le Directeur pourra, de sa propre initiative, convoquer le Conseil Consultatif Technique en reunion speciale chaque fois que l'int~rit de P Institut I'exigerao En ce qui concerne toute r~union, notification sera faite au moins deux mois A lavance, et indiquera le but ou les buts de la reunion proposee. Une majorit6 des membres du Conseil constituera un quorum.

3. Aucun membre du Conseil Consultatif Technique ne recevra, en cette capacite, aucune r~mun~ration pecuniaire pour ses services, bien que l'Ins- titut puisse rembourser les membres du Conseil Consultatif Technique de leurs frais de deplacement lors de la reunion annuelle.

AGENT FISCAL

Article VIII

L'Union Panam~ricaine fera fonction d'agent fiscal pour et au nom de 1lInstitut et, comme tel, recevra et d~boursera les fonds de 1'Instituto ENTRETIEN DE L' INSTITUT

Article IX

Les ressources ncessaires N l'entretien et au fonctionnement de 1 Ins- titut seront fournies par les quotes-parts annuelles vers~es par les Etats Con- tractants, ainsi que par les legs, donations et contributions que l'Institut pourrait accepter. Ces fonds et contributions ne seront employ~s que dans des buts conformes au caractbre de I' Institut.

Les quotes-parts annuelles seront d~terminees par le Conseil d'Admi- nistration de l'Institut, h condition que le vote soit unanime en ce qui concerne les membres de chaque Etat Contractant, en prenant pour base les statistiques officielles les plus recentes dont disposera l'Union Panam~ricaine le premier juillet de chaque annie.

Le payement quotitaire annuel de chaque Etat Contractant sera bas6 sur le chiffre total de la population de cet Etat et ne d~passera pas un dollar (monnaie des Etats-Unis) par millier de personnes. Les payementsquotitaires peuvent, cependant, 6tre augment~s sur la recommandation unanimedesmem- bres du Conseil d'Administration qui reprbsentent les Ltats Contractants et avec l'approbation des autorit~s compbtentes de chacun des Etats Contractants quant N 'augmentation de la quote-part de cet Etat.

A Les quotes-parts seront communiqu~es annuellement aux Gouvernements des Etats Contractants par l'Union Panamericaine et seront payees avant le premier juillet de chaque annie.

Les payements quotitaires de chaque Etat Contractant commenceront N la date de l'entr~e en vigueur de la Convention en ce qui concerne cet Etat, et seront d~termin~s proportionnellement au nombre de mois entiers qu'il restera dans l'annee budg6taire en cours. L'ann~e budgetaire de l'Institut commencera la premier juillet de chaque ann~e.

LA NGUES

Article X

Les langues officielles de l'Institut seront le franqais, l'anglais, l'espagnol et le portugais.

PRIVILEGES POSTAUX

Article XI

Les Etats Contractants conviennent d'accorder sans d~lai l'Institut la franchise de port domestique et international pr~vue dans les conventions postales interam~ricaines existantes, et de demander aux Ltats membres de

56 l'Union Panam6ricaine qui n'ont pas ratifi6 la pr~sente Convention d'accorder les mLmes privilbges postaux h l' Institut.

EXEMPTION D'IMPOTS

Article XII

Les terrains et les bfttiments situ6s sur le territoire de tout Etat Con- tractant, dont l'Institut est le proprietaire en droit ou en 6quit6, et qui sont affect~s exclusivement h l'usage de l'Institut dans la poursuite de ses buts, seront exempts de tous impbts, de quelque nature qu' ils soient- nationaux, d' tat, provinciaux ou municipaux- autres que les taxes perques pour services ou pour travaux publics d'am~lioration dont les locaux b~n~ficient.

Le mobilier, le materiel, les fournitures, les mat6riaux de construction et tous autres articles destines ' l'usage officiel de l'Institut seront exempts, sur le territoire de tout Etat Contractant, de toute forme de taxation, y compris les croits de douane, les taxes d'accise et les surtaxes.

Tous fonds ou autres biens 'a l'usage de l'Institut dans la poursuite de ses buts, et tous contrats ou autres actes officiels de l' Institutdans les limites de ses fonctions, seront 6galement exempts de toute forme de taxation sur le territoire de chacun des Etats Contractantso

MOUVEMENTS DE FONDS

Article XIII

Chacun des Etats Contractants prendra toutes mesures appropri6es pour faciliter les mouvements de fonds de l'Institut.

EXEMPTIONS ET PRIVILEGES ACCORDES AU PERSONNEL ET AUX tTUDIANTS

Article XIV

Chacun des Etats Contractants convient d'accorder aux personnes prenant part aux travaux de l'Institut, ou poursuivant leurs etudes sous les auspices de lInstitut, tous les privilfges, en ce qui concerne l'exemption d'im- p6ts et autres charges se rapportant h l'entr6e, au voyage et au s6jour detel- les personnes, que lui permettront ses lois et rbglements.

SIGNATURE ET RATIFICATION Article XV

1. L'original de la pr6sente Convention en langues franqaise, anglaise, espagnole et portugaise, sera d~pos6 h l'Union Panam~ricaine et soumis h la signature des Gouvernements des R1publiques Amricaines. L'Union Pana- naricaine fournira une copie certifi6e conforme de la pr6sente Convention h chaque Gouvernement signataire et au Gouvernement de chaque ttat non signataire qui est membre de l'Union Panam~ricaine. L'Union Panamricaine avisera tous les Gouvernements des ]tats membres de l'Union Panamricaine quant toutes les signatures d'adhesion et leurs dates respectiveso

2. La pr~sente Convention sera ratifi~e par les Ltats signataires en conformit6 avec leurs proc6dures constitutionnelles respectives. Les instruments de ratification seront d~poses I'Union Panam~ricaine, qui avertira tous les Gouvernements signataires du depbt de chaque ratification et de la date de ce depbto

3. La presente Convention entrera en vigueur trois mois apr~s que cinq ratifications au moins auront et d~posees N l'Union Panam~ricaine. Toute ratification reque aprbs la date laquelle la presente Convention entrera en vigueur prendra effet un mois aprbs la date du dep t l'Union Panam6- ricaine de la dite ratification.

DENONCIA TION

ArticleXVI

1. La presente Convention restera envigueur indefiniment sous reserve des dispositions du paragraphe 2 de cet Article, mais pourra tre denonc~e par tout Etat Contractant par une notification par 6crit addressee N l'Union Pa- nam~ricaine, qui informera tous les autres Etats Contractants de chaquenoti- fication de denonciation reque. A l'expiration d'un delai d'un an A partir dela date laquelle 1'Union Panam6ricaine aura requ une notification de d~nonciation de la part de tout Etat Contractant, la pr6sente Convention cessera d'op6- rer pour cet Ptat, mais restera pleinement en vigueur en ce qui concerne tous les autres Etats Contractantso

2. Au cas ot, par suite de d6nonciations, le nombre des Etats Contrac- tants serait reduit N moins de cinq, les Etats Contractants restants entreront immediatement en consultation les uns avec les autres, en vue de r6viser la pr6sente Convention et de determiner le status futur de 1lInstitut. Si, dansun d~lai de deux ans N partir de la date h laquelle le nombre des Etats Contrac- tants aura 6 reduit N moins de cinq, par suite de d~nonciations, ces Etats n'ont pas abouti N un arrangement concernant la continuation de la Convention et le status de I' Institut, la Convention, N ' expiration d'un d6lai de six mois aprbs que la notification aura W donn~e par 6crit par Plun quelconque des Etats Contractants restants, cessera d'Otre en vigueur. Au cas oui la Conven- tion cesserait d'etre en vigueur, le status de 1' Institut sera d~termin6 par le Conseil d' Administration de 1'Union Panamericaine.

EN FOI DE QUOI, les P16nipotentiaires soussignes, ayant d~pos~leurs pleins pouvoirs, reconnus en bonne et due forme, signent cette Convention dans les langues frangaise, espagnole, anglaise, et portugaise, h 1'Union Pa- namricaine, Washington, D. C., au nom de leurs Gouvernments respectifs et y apposent leur cachet aux dates apparaissant en face de leur signature. POR COSTA RICA: (F) Carlos Manuel Escalante 15 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR NICARAGUA: (F) Guillermo Sevilla Sacasa 15 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR PANAMA: (F) Enrique A. Jim6nez 15 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA: (S) Cordell Hull January 15, 1944 (SEAL)

POR CUBA: (F) Aurelio F. Concheso 20 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR ECUADOR: (F) C. E. Alfaro 20 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR HONDURAS: (F) Juliin R. Cfceres 28 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR LA REPUBLICA DOMINICANA: (F) A. Copello 28 de enero de 1944 (SELLO)

POR EL SALVADOR: (F) Hctor David Castro 18 de febrerode1944 (SELLO)

POR GUATEMALA: (F) Adria'n Recinos 16 de marzo de 1944 (SELLO)

POR URUGUAY:* (F) Jo C. Blanco 17 de abril de 1944 (SELLO)

POR CHILE: (F) R. Michels 13 de mayo de 1944 (SELLO)

POR BOLIVIA: (F) Carlos Dorado 12 de junio de 1944 (SELLO)

POR VENEZUELA:* (F) Di6genes Escalante 10de octubredel944 (SELLO)

* Con reserva POR MEXICO: (F) Antonio Espinosa de los Monteros 19 de noviembre de 1946 (SELLO)

POR COLOMBIA: (F) Silvio Villegas 23 de julio de 1948 (SELLO)

PAR HAITI: (S) Joseph L. Dejean 21 aofit 1950* (SCEAU)

* Fecha de adhesi6n RESERVAS HECHAS AL FIRMARSE LA CONVENCION

URUGUAY:

El Plenipotenciario del Uruguay firma la Convencion bajo la reserva de su posterior aprobaci6n parlamentaria conforme al artfculo 157, inciso 21, de la Constituci6n de la Repflblica.

VENEZUELA:

El Plenipotenciario de Venezuela firma la presente Convenci6n con las reservas siguientes:

PRMVERA: En cuanto a la estipulaci'n contenida en el artfculo XII por la cual los Estados signatarios se comprometen a conceder la exenci6ndeim- puestos estaduales o municipales en favor de los bienes inmuebles pertenecientes al Instituto Interamericano de Ciencias Agrfcolas, deja constancia expresa de que no puede acordar dicha exenci6n por cuanto el r6gimen de tales impuestos escapa a la competencia del Poder Federal, de conformidad con el numeral 30 del par~grafo 4 del artfculo 17 de la Constituci6n Nacional.

SEGUNDA: En cuanto a la estipulaci6n contenida en el par5grafo 2' del artfculo XVI por la cual se conviene en que el futuro destino del Instituto serA determinado por el Consejo Directivo de la Uni6n Panamericana, en el caso de que la presente Convenci6n cesare de tener efecto, el Gobierno de Venezue- la se reserva los derechos que puedan corresponderle, Ilegada esa eventualidad, sobre los inmuebles situados en su territorio que se hubieren destinado a los fines previstos en la Convenci6n, y los cuales no podrfn ser traspasados, cedidos ni en forma alguna enajenados o gravados, sino de conformidad con las leyes vigentes en el pafs.

RESERVAS HECHAS AL RATIFICARSE LA CONVENCION

VENEZUELA:

Al depositar su instrumento de ratificaci6n, el Gobierno de Venezuela mantuvo las reservas hechas al tiempo de firmar la Convenci6n. RESERVATIONS MADE AT TIME OF SIGNATURE

URUGUAY:

The Plenipotentiary of Uruguay signs the Convention with the reservation that it be subsequently approved by the parliament in conformity with Article 157, item 21 of the Constitution of the Republic.

VENEZUELA:

The Plenipotentiary of Venezuela signs the present Convention with the following reservations:

FIRST: With respect to the stipulation in Article XII whereby the contracting States agree to exempt from state and municipal taxation the lands and buildings owned by the Inter-American Institute of Agricultural Sciences, it is expressly understood that Venezuela cannot grant such exemption, inasmuch as such taxes do not fall within the competence of the Federal Govern- ment, as provided by N' 3, Paragraph 4, of Article 17 of the National Consti- tution.

SECOND: With respect to the stipulation in Paragraph 2 of Article XVI whereby it is agreed that the status of the Institute shall be determined by the Governing Board of the Pan American Union, in the event that the present Convention should cease to be in force, the Government of Venezuela reserves any rights it may have, in that eventuality, in lands and buildings situated in its territory that are devoted to the purposes of the Convention, andwhichmay not be transferred, ceded or otherwise alienated or encumbered, except in conformity with the laws of the country.

RESERVATIONS MADE UPON RATIFICATION

VENEZUELA:

Upon depositing its instrument of ratification, the Government of Vene- zuela maintained the reservations made at the time of signature. RESERVAS FEITAS NO ATO DA ASSINATURA

URUGUA I

O Plenipotenci~rio do Uruguai assina a Convenqdo sob a reserva de sua posterior aprovardo parlamentar, conforme o Artigo 157, inciso 21, daCons- tituiqfo da Republica.

VENEZUELA:

O Plenipotenci~rio da Venezuela assina a presente Convenqao com as seguintes reservas:

PRIM EIRA: Quanto ao disposto no Artigo XII, pelo qual os Estados Sig- natfirios se comprometem a conceder a isenr,5o de impostos estaduais ou municipais em favor dos bens imoveis pertencentes ao Instituto Interamericano de Citncias Agronimicas, deixa constar expressamente que n~o pode conceder a citada isenqo porquanto o regime de tais impostos escapa N competin- cia do Poder Federal, de conformidade com o nfimero 3 do parigrafo 4 do Artigo 17 da Constituicdo Nacional.

SEGUNDA: Quanto ao disposto no parfgrafo 2 do Artigo XVI, pelo qual se acorda que o destino futuro do Instituto serf determinado pelo Conselho Di- retor da Unido Pan-Americana, no caso de que a presente Convenqfo deixar de ter efeito, o Govirno da Venezuela se reserva os direitos que possam corresponder-lhe, chegada essa eventualidade, s~bre os im6veis situados em seu territ6rio que se tenham destinado aos fins previstos na Convenqao, e os quais ndo poderdo ser transferidos, cedidos, nem de forma alguma alienados ou gravados, senfo de conformidade com as leis vigentes no pafs.

RESERVAS FEITAS NO ATO DA RATIFICA;AO

VENEZUELA:

No ato de dep6sito do seu instrumento de ratificaqdo, o GovLrno da Ve- nezuela manteve as reservas feitas no ato da assinatura. RESERVES FAITES AU MOMENT DE LA SIGNATURE

URUGUAY:

Le Pl~nipotentiaire de l'Uruguay signe la Convention sous la r~servede son approbation post~rieure par le Parlement, conformement A Particle 157, alin~a 21, de la Constitution de la Republique.

VENEZUELA:

Le Plnipotentiaire du Venezuela signe la pr~sente Convention avec les r~serves suivantes:

PREMIEREMENT: En ce qui a trait h la stipulation contenue clans 'article XII par laquelle les Etats signataires s'engagent N accorder l'exemption d'impbts d'Etat ou municipaux en faveur des biens immeubles appartenant h l'Institut Interam~ricain des Sciences agricoles, le Gouvernement v~n~zu~lien dclare formellement ne pas pouvoir accorder cette exemption, vu que le r4- gime de ces impbts 6chappe h la comptence du Pouvoir federal, conformement N l'alin~a 3 du paragraphe 4 de l'article 17 de la Constitution nationale.

DEUXIEMEMENT: En ce qui a trait N la stipulation contenue au paragraphe 2 de Particle XVI, par laquelle il est convenu que le destin futur Je I' Institut sera d~termine par le ConseJ d'Administration de l'Union Panani- ricaine, au cas ob la presente Convention cessera d'etre en vigueur, le Gou- vernement v6n~zu6lien se r6serve, dans cette &ventualit&, les droits qui lui reviennent sur les immeubles situ6s sur son territoire et destin~s aux fins pr6vues clans la Convention, et qui ne pourront 6tre transferes, c6des ni en aucune faqon vendus ou grev6s que conform6ment aux lois en vigueur dans le pays.

RESERVES FAITES AU MOMENT DE LA RATIFICATION

VENEZUELA:

En d~posant ses instruments de ratification, le Gouvernement du Vene- zuela a maintenu les reserves faites au moment de la signature. ESTADO DE LA CONVENCION SOBRE EL INSTITUTO INTERAMERICANO DE CIENCIAS AGRICOLAS

Pafses Signatarios Fecha del Instrumento Fecha de Dep6sito de Ratificaci5n del Instrumento de Ratificaci6n

Bolivia Colombia Julio 15, 1952 Agosto 25, 1952 Costa Rica Julio 22, I944 Agosto 14, 1944 Cuba Noviembre 24, 1952 Diciembre 11, 1952 Chile Junio 25, 1957 Agosto 8, 1957 Ecuador Noviembre 13, 1952 Diciembre 15, 1952 El Salvador Mayo 16, 1944 Mayo 31, 1944 Estados Unidos Junio 29, 1944 Julio 4, 1944 Guatemala Junio 7, 1'144 Julio 6, 1944 Haitf 1 Agosto 21, 19501 Junio 19, 1951 1 Honduras Febrero 20, 1945 Marzo 19, 1945 M xico Febrero 27, 1947 Mayo 26, 1947 Nicaragua Julio 18, 1944 Agosto 31, 1944 PanamA Enero 10, 1947 Enero 24, 1947 Rep(iblica Dominicana Diciembre 21, 1944 Enero 8, 1945 Uruguay 2 Venezuela 2 Febrero 21, 19462 Marzo 6, 19462

1 Adhesi6n 2 Con reserva

$ 0.25 341-ESPF-5875 ACUERDO

entre los Gobiernos de las Repiiblicas de HONDURAS y NICARAGUA sobre Asilo Territorial

Suscrito en la Uni6n Panamericana el dia 26 de febrero de 1959

UNION PANAMERICANA - Washington, D.C.

1959

Serie sobre Tratados No 13 S~rie sobre Tratados No 13 Treaty Series No 13 Srie sur les Trait~s No 13

ACUERDO

ENTRE LOS GOBIERNOS DE LAS REPUBLICAS DE

HONDURAS Y NICARAGUA SOBRE ASILO TERRITORIAL

Suscrito en la Uni6n Panamericana el dfa 26 de febrerode 1959

UNION PANAMERICANA Secretarfa General, Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos Washington, D,C., 1959 Esta Serie se publica bajo la direcci6n de la Divisi6n Jurfdica General, Departamento de Asuntos Jurfdicos, Uni6n Panamericana, Washington, D.C. ACUERDO ENTRE LOS GOBIERNOS DE LAS REPUBLICAS DE HONDURAS Y NICARAGUA SOBRE ASILO TERRITORIAL

Los Gobiernos delas Repfiblicas de Honduras y Nicaragua, reafir- mando su deseo de mantener entre ellos relaciones pacfficas como corres- ponde a dos pueblos hermanos y vecinos, y de evitar en el presente y en el futuro toda diferencia que interfiera en sus fraternales vinculaciones; deseando prevenir en forma efectiva que dentro de sus respectivos territorios se organicen movimientos subversivos por parte de nacionales del otro pats, sean emigrados polfticos o no, residentes permanentes o temporales, transeuntes o por personas de terceras nacionalidades; reconociendo la eficaz labor pacificadora del Consejo de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos, han resuelto celebrar el presente Acuerdo que estipula las medidas que ambos Gobiernos habrfn de poner en prfctica para impedir la organizaci6n de cualquier movimiento revolucionario contra el Gobier- no de cualquiera de las dos Partes en elterritorio de la otra, complemen- tando asf, en la medida y forma que las necesidades del caso particular lo requieran, la Convenci6n sobre Deberes y Derechos de los Estados en Caso de Luchas Civiles, principalmente respecto a las medidas de con- trol y vigilancia fronteriza. Para este fin, el Excelentfsimo sefior Pre- sidente de la Repdblica de Honduras, Doctor Ram6n Villeda Morales, y el Excelentfsimo sefior Presidente de la Reptiblica de Nicaragua, Ingeniero Luis A. Somoza D., han tenido a bien designar los siguientes Plenipoten- ciarios: - 2 -

Por la Repfiblica de Honduras: El Excelentfsimo sefior Embaja- dor Doctor C6leo Dfvila, Representante de Honduras en el Consejo de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos;

Por la Repdiblica de Nicaragua: El Excelentfsimo sefior Embaja- dor Doctor Guillermo Sevilla Sacasa, Representante de Nicaragua en el Consejo de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos;

Quienes, despu6s de exhibidos los respectivos Plenos Poderes, hallados en buena y debida forma, suscriben dicho Acuerdo en los siguientes trminos:

Artfculo I

Ambas Partes, dentro del espfritu que debe animar a los inte- grantes de la familia centroamericana de Naciones, colaborarfn al maximo de sus posibilidades para organizar con la mayor eficacia la vigilancia de sus territorios, especialmente zonas fronterizas, costas y aeropuertos, como medio de evitar que del territorio de una de las Partes puedan introducirse ilegalmente al de la otra, ya sea armas 0 grupos armados. Las autoridades de ambos Gobiernos, y en especial las fronterizas, se intercambiarfn en la forma mfs amplia posible cualquier informaci6n que llegue a su conocimiento y que permita evitar tales hechos.

Artfculo II

Cada una de las Partes se compromete a tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar que en su territorio se promuevan o Ileven a cabo movimientos revolucionarios contra la otra Parte. - 3 -

Cada una de las Partes se compromete a tomar toda clase de medidas para evitar que cualquier persona, nacional o extranjera, desdeal- gin lugar bajo su jurisdicci6n, participe o ayude en cualquier empresa subversiva contra la otra Parte.

Artfculo LII

La contribuci6n, suministro o provisi6n de armas, material de guerra o equipo, la instalaci6n y funcionamiento de radiodifusoras o cualquier otro medio de difusi6n o propaganda que inciten a la rebeli6n o actos subversivos, el entrenamiento, enlistamiento, organizaci6n o transporte de personas o la obtenci6n o suministro de dinero con los fines antes indicados, ademis de cualesquiera otros hechos similares, serfn considerados como participaci6n para los efectos del Articulo an- ter ior.

Artfculo IV

Cada una de las Partes se compromete a expulsar de su territorio a los asilados o refugiados polfticos y a cualquier extranjero cuya expulsi6n solicitare la otra Parte, por violar las normas internacionales del derecho de asilo o infringir las disposiciones de este Acuerdoo

Artfculo V

A requerimiento de la Parte interesada, la que ha concedido el refugio o asilo procederfi a la vigilancia o a la internaci6n en la cabe- cera departamental mfis distante de la frontera, de aquellos refugiados o asilados polfticos que fueren notoriamente dirigentes de unmovimien- to subversivo, asf como de aquellos extranjeros que participen en la or- ganizaci6n de dicho movimiento, o que se disponen a incorporarse a 61. - 4 -

Aquellos extranjeros que habiendo sido internados por sus actividades subversivas visitaren o se transladaren a otros lugares mis cercanos de la frontera, podrfn ser expulsados a solicitud de la Parte afectada.

Artfculo VI

Cada una de las Partes se compromete a no designar o nombrar a personas asiladas o refugiadas en su territorio para ocupar puestos o desempefiar funciones de carficter polftico o militar.

Artfculo VII

Cada una de las Partes se compromete a no otorgar en forma alguna ayuda de ningtin g~nero a quienquiera que intente de cualquier manera alterar el orden pfiblico en el territorio de la otra Parte.

Para los efectos de este Articulo se entenderi como ayuda de la Parte la que preste cualquier funcionario de su Gobierno, cuando una vez comprobada la complicidad de tal funcionario, no se le impu- sieren a 6ste las sanciones del caso.

Artfculo VIII

Cada una de las Partes se compromete a prohibir que dentro de su jurisdicci6n se efectile, por personas o entidades oficiales o no oficiales, cualquier trdfico o comercio de armas, equipo omuniciones de guerra para alterar el orden pfiblico en la otra Parte.

Artfculo IX

Ambas Partes convienen en que cualquier material del citado en el Artfculo anterior que fuere localizado en la jurisdicci6n de una - 5 - de las Partes, con violaci6n a lo dispuesto en dicho Artfculo, deberf ser de inmediato decomisado por esa Parte e impedida su exportaci6n.

ArtfculoX

Ambas Partes podr~n solicitar los servicios de la Comisi6n Militar Mixta Hondurefia-Nicaragtlense, que ha venido funcionando entre ellas, cuando se trate de casos que requieran una pronta y eficaz investigaci6n o esclarecimiento.

Artfculo XI

Ambas Partes convienen en que toda referencia que se haga en el presente Acuerdo o en la Convenci6n Interamericana sobre Deberes y Derechos de los Estados en Caso de Luchas Civiles, a "armas o material de guerra", incluye a aviones militares y tambi6n a los de carfcter civil cuando existan razones para creer que van a ser usados con el fin de iniciar o ayudar a una lucha civil en territorio de una de las Partes. Asimismo convienen en que las referencias hechas en la Convenci6n Interamericana sobre Deberes y Derechos de los Estados en Caso de Luchas Civiles, a la expresi6n "buques" o "embarcaci6n", incluye tambi6n a las naves atreas de cualquier tipo, ya sean militares o civiles.

Artfculo XII

Cuando se usa el t6rmino "extranjeros" en este Acuerdo, se refiere a nacionales de la otra Parte, sean emigrados polfticos o no, residentes permanentes o temporales, transeuntes, y a personas de terceras nacionalidades. - 6 -

Artfculo XIII

De toda comunicaci6n que se cruzare entre las Partes en re- laci6n a la ejecuci6n de este Acuerdo se enviarA copia a la Uni6n Panamericana.

Artfculo XiLv

Ambas Partes expresamente declaran que su prop6sito al firmar este Acuerdo no ha sido otro - como se deja dicho en el Prefimbulo - que el de evitar en el presente y en el futuro toda diferencia que interfiera en sus fraternales vinculaciones y que tenga como causa las actividades clandestinas que realicen nacionales del otro pafs, sean emigrados politicos o no, residentes permanentes o temporales, transeuntes o personas de terceras nacionalidades. En consecuencia, ambas Partes convienen enque siendo estos los fines exclusivos del Acuerdo, no podrf invocarse su existencia como prueba o evidencia en forma alguna, ni podrfi aplicarse ni utilizarse nada de su contenido para otros fines que no sean los indicados.

Artfculo XV

El presente Acuerdo sera' depositado en la Uni6n Panameri- cana, la cual enviarfi copia certificada autfntica a los Gobiernos signatarios, a los demais Gobiernos de los Estados Miembros de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos, al Secretario Generalde las Naciones Unidas y al Secretario General de la Organizacion de los Estados Centroamericanos. - 7 -

Artfculo XVI

El presente Acuerdo serA ratificado y entrarA en vigor cuando las ratificaciones sean depositadas en la Uni6n Panamericana.

EN FE DE LO CUAL los Plenipotenciarios arriba mencionados firman el presente Acuerdo en la Uni6n Panamericana, en pre- sencia del Presidente y miembros del Consejo de la Organizaci6nde los Estados Americanos, del Presidente y miembros de la Comisi6n Interamericana de Paz y del Secretario General de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos, en la Ciudad de Washington, D. C., Estados Unidos de America, a los veintiseis dfas del mes de febrero de mil novecientos cincuenta y nueve.

Por HONDURAS: (f) C6leo Dfivila

Por NICARAGUA: (f) Guillermo Sevilla Sacasa Certifico que el documento preinserto es copia fiel del original del Acuerdo entre los Gobiernos de Honduras y Nicaragua sobre Asilo Territorial, suscrito por los Representantes de esas RepCiblicas en la Uni6n Panamericana el dfa 26 defebrero de 1959.

William Sanders Secretario del Consejo de la Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos

Washington, D. C., 27 de febrero de 1959

$0.10 341-S-5903 AGREEMENT ESTABLISHING THE INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK

Opened for signature at the Pan American Union on April 8, 1959

PAN AMERICAN UNION

WASHINGTON, D.C. - 1959

Treaty Series No. 14

AGREEMENT ESTABLISHING THE INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK

Opened for signature at the Pan American Union on April 8, 1959

PAN AMERICAN UNION General Secretariat, Organization of American States Washington, D. C. 1959 This Series is published under the direction of the General Legal Division, Department of Legal Affairs, Pan American Union, Washington, D. C. INTER-AMERICAN ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL COUNCIL

SPECIALIZED COMMITTEE FOR NEGOTIATING AND DRAFTING

THE INSTRUMENT OF ORGANIZATION

OF AN INTER-AMERICAN FINANCIAL INSTITUTION

Washington, D. C.

January 8 to April 8, 1959

FINAL ACT

General Secretariat of the

Organization of American States

Washington, D.C. - 1959

SPECIALIZED COMMITTEE FOR NEGOTIATING AND DRAFTING THE INSTRUMENT OF ORGANIZATION OF AN INTER-AMERICAN FINANCIAL INSTITUTION

FINAL ACT

Convocation and Participants

The meeting of the Specialized Committee for Negotiating and Drafting the Instrument of Organization of an Inter-American Financial Institution was convoked by the Inter-American Economic and Social Council by Resolution 30/58 of October 9, 1958.

On December 18, 1958, the Council of the Organization of American States approved a resolution, proposed by the Special Committee to Study the Formulation of New Measures for Economic Cooperation, endorsing the establishment of an inter-American financial institution.

In accordance with Resolution 32/58, approved by the Inter-American Eco- nomic and Social Council on November 6, 1958, the Specialized Committee began its work at the Pan American Union, Washington, D. C., on January 8, 1959.

The delegations accredited were as follows:

ARGENTINA

Representative: Dr. Mario 0. Mendivil

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Emilio Llorens Mr. Carlos Brignone Mr. Leonardo A. Vartalitis Mr. Manuel 0. Merediz

BOLIVIA

Representative: Mr. German Rovira

BRAZIL

Representative: Mr. Cleantho de Paiva Leite

Advisers: Mr. Joao Paulo da Silva Paranhos do Rio-Branco Mr. Dgrio Moreira de Castro Alves Mr. Luiz de Almeida Cunha Mr. Italo Zappa Mr. Ronaldo Costa Mr. Gerardo Egidro da Costa Holanda Cavalcanti Mr. Marcilio Marques Moreira

CHILE

Representative: Ambassador Walter Miller

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Felipe Herrera Mr. Jorge Marshall Mr. Joaquin Figueroa Mr. Jorge Burr

COLOMBIA

Representative: Ambassador Jos6 Gutidrrez G5mez

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Ignacio Mesa Salazar Dr. Ignacio Copete Lizarralde Dr. German Botero de los Rios

COSTA RICA

Representative: Ambassador Manuel G. Escalante

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Jorge Hazera Mr. Luis Demetrio Tinoco Mr. Juan Hern~ndez

CUBA

Representative:

Alternate Representatives: Dr. Emilio Pando Machado Mr. Jos6 M. Berriz Romero Dr. Enrique Serrano

Adviser: Dr. Gonzalo de la Pezuela

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC

Representative: Ambassador Virgilio Di'az Ord6flez

Alternate Representative: Dr. Luis Galvgn

ECUADOR

Representative: Ambassador Jos6 R. Chiriboga

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Federico Intriago Arrata Mr. Herngn Guarderas Adviser: Mr. Jorge Naranjo EL SALVADOR

Representative: Mr. Rafael Glower Valdivieso

Alternate Representative: Mr. Roberto E. Quirds

GUATEMALA

Re presentative: Dr. Gustavo Mir6n Porras

Alternate R epresentative: Mr. Arturo Pdrez Galliano

Advisers: Mr. Julio Asensio Wunderlich Mr. Ramiro Arag6n Castafieda

HAITI

Representative: Ambassador Lucien Hibbert

Alternate Representative: Mr. Musset Pierre-Jerome

HONDURAS

Repre sentative: Ambassador C6leo D~vila

Alternate Representative: Dr. Roberto Rami"rez

MEXICO

Representative: Ambassador Armando C. Amador

Alternate Representative: Mr. Josd Luna Guerra

NICARAGUA

Representative: Ambassador Guillermo Sevilla Sacasa

Alternate Representatives: Dr. Jorge A. Montealegre Mr. Ricardo Parrales Sgnchez

PANAMA

Representative: Mr. Julio E. Heurtematte

Alternate Representative: Dr. Arturo Morgan Morales

PARAGUAY

Representative: Ambassador Juan Plate

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Victor A. Pane Mr. Persio da Silva PERU

R epresentatives: Mr. Carlos Gibson Mr. Fernando Morales Macedo

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

Representative: Mr. T. Graydon Upton

Alternate Representatives: Mr. Charles W. Adair, Jr. Mr. George H. Willis

Advisers: Mr. Elting Arnold Mr. Charles R. Harley Mr. Ralph V. Korp Mr. James A. Lynn Mr. Robert B. Menapace Mr. Stanley Metzger Mr. Alexander M. Rosenson Mr. R. Henry Rowntree Mr. Walter C. Sauer Mr. Fred B. Smith Mr. George Springsteen Mr. Harry R. Turkel

URUGUAY

Representative: Ambassador Julio A. Lacarte

Alternate Representatives: Dr. Enrique J. Palacios Mr. Pablo Oscar Guffanti

VENEZUELA

Representative: Dr. Carlos Miguel Lollett Calderili

Preparation

In keeping with instructions given by the Inter-American Economic and Social Council, the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States prepared and submitted to the Committee draft Rules of Procedure and a proposed Agenda. The General Secretariat also presented, as a work paper, the study entitled "Fi- nancing of Economic Development in Latin America."

Preliminary Meetings

At the preliminary meetings held on January 8 and 9, 1959, attended by the representatives of Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba the Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Mexico, Nicaragua, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, the United States of America, Uruguay, and Venezuela, and by the Secretary General of the Organization of American States, the Rules of Procedure of the Meeting of. the Specialized Commitee were approved. In conformity with the aforesaid Rules of Procedure the decision was reached to establish a Coordinating Committee, a Committee on Credentials, a Subcommittee on Purposes, Operations, and Resources of the Institution and a Subcommittee on Organization, Management, and Legal Status of the Institution.

Pursuant to Article 3 of the Rules of Procedure, Mr. Rafael Glower Valdivie- so, Chairman of the Inter-American Economic and Social Council, acted as Tempo- rary Chairman of the Meeting.

Opening Session

At the opening session, held during the afternoon of Monday, January 12, 1959, which was attended by all the delegations, Dr. Mario 0. Mendivil, Representative of Argentina, was elected Chairman of the Specialized Committee, and Mr. Rafael Glower Valdivieso, Representative of El Salvador, was elected Vice Chairman.

This session was addressed by Mr. Rafael Glower Valdivieso, the Chairman of the Inter-American Economic and Social Council; Dr. Jos6 A. Mora, the Secre- tary General of the Organization of American States; Dr. Mario 0. Mendivil, the Chairman of the Committee; and Mr. T. Graydon Upton, Representative of the United States.

Committees and Subcommittees

Coordinating Committee

The Coordinating Committee was organized on the morning of January 13,1959, and was established as follows:

Chairman: Dr. Mario 0. Mendivil

Vice Chairman: Mr. Rafael Glower Valdivieso

Members: The Chiefs of the Delegations

Committee on Credentials

At the meeting held by the Coordinating Committee on January 13, 1959, the Committee on Credentials was established as follows:

Chairman: Ambassador Virgilio Diaz Ord6fiez (Dominican Republic) Members: Mr. Arturo P6rez Galliano (Guatemala) Ambassador Julio A. Lacarte (Uruguay)

The Committee on Credentials found the credentials presented by the delegates to be in good and due form. Subcommittees

Subcommittee 1 and Subcommittee Z were installed in meetings held on the afternoon of the same day, January 13, 1959. All delegations were members of both subcommittees, the officers of which were as follows:

Subcommittee 1 (Purposes, Operations, and Resources of the Institution)

Chairman: Mr. Ignacio Copete Lizarralde (Colombia)

Vice Chairman: Mr. Jorge Hazera (Costa Pica)

i apporteur: Mr. Julio E. Heurtematte (Panama)

Subcommittee 2 (Organization, Management, and Legal Status of the Institution)

Chairman: Mr. Felipe Herrera (Chile)

Vice Chairman: Mr. Jorge A. Montealegre (Nicaragua)

R apporteur: Mr. Federico Intriago (Ecuador)

Style Subcommittee

At the meeting held by the Coordinating Committee on March 2, 1959, a Style Subcommittee was established, on which the following served:

Chairman: Mr. Jorge Marshall (Chile)

Members: Mr. Luiz de Almeida Cunha (Brazil) Ambassador Lucien Hibbert (Haiti) Mr. Fred B. Smith (United States of America) Mr. James A. Lynn (United States of America)

Secretariat

In accordance with the Rules of Procedure, the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States appointed Mr. Cecilio J. Morales, Director of the Department of Economic and Social Affairs of the Pan American Union, Secretary General of the Specialized Committee. Mr. Pedro Irafteta, Chief of the Division of Economic Research of the Pan American Union, was Assistant Secretary Gener- al and Adviser of the Committee. The Committee also received the advice of Messrs. Jorge Sol Castellanos andRaymond Mikesell, Special Consultants of the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States. Mr. Armando Cassor- la acted as secretary of the Specialized Committee and of Subcommittee 2. Mr. Oscar A. Ayala was secretary of Subcommittee 1 and Dr. Isidoro Zanotti acted as Legal Adviser of Subcommittee 2, of the Specialized Committee, and of the Style Subcommittee. Mr. Fernando Hazera, Chief of the Division of Official Records of the Pan American Union, acted as secretary of the Style Subcommittee. Mr. Daniel Villegas was Assistant Secretary of the Committee. Meetings Held

The Coordinating Committee held 15 plenary sessions. Subcommittees I and 2 of the Specialized Committee held 13 and 7 meetings respectively. In addition, numerous meetings of Working Groups were held. The Style Subcommittee held 29 meetings.

Closing Session

At the-closing session, held on April 8, 1959, the following persons spoke, in the order named: Mr. T. Graydon Upton, Representative of the United States; Mr. Felipe Herrera, Alternate Representative of Chile; Dr. Mario 0. Mendivil, Chair- man of the Committee; Mr. Rafael Glower Valdivieso, Chairman of the Inter- American Economic and Social Council; and Dr. Jos4 A. Mora, Secretary General of the Organization of American States.

As a result of its deliberations, as recorded in the summary minutes of the meetings and reports of the committees and subcommittees and in the minutes of the plenary sessions, the Specialized Committee negotiated and drafted the Agree- ment Establishing the Inter-American Development Bank, the text and annexes of which are attached hereto and constitute integral parts of the present Final Act.

The Specialized Committee also resolved to establish, for the purposes and in the terms provided in the Appendix hereof, a Preparatory Committee to be convoked by the Secretary General of the Organization of American States for Septem- ber 15, 1959.

The original of this Final Act, whose texts in English, French, Portuguese, and Spanish are equally authentic, shall be deposited in the archives of the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States, which shall transmit certified copies thereof to the member states of the Organization.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Representatives, duly empowered to negotiate and draft the afore-mentioned Agreement, sign the present Final Act on the dates indicated after each signature. The Final Act shall remain open for signature at the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States until April 18, 1959.

DONE at Washington, District of Columbia, United States of America, this eighth day of the month of April, nineteen hundred fifty-nine. APPENDIX

PREPARATORY COMMITTEE OF THE INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK

1. A Preparatory Committee for the Inter-American Development Bank is hereby established to perform the following functions:

(a) To establish the rules of procedure for its activities;

(b) To take the necessary steps for the preparation of the first meeting of the Board of Governors, including the drafting of an agenda and provisional regulations for that meeting; and

(c) To prepare for consideration by the Board of Governors at its first meeting such studies as the Committee deems necessary on technical, administrative, and legal matters related to the establishment of the Bank.

2. The Preparatory Committee shall perform its duties until the first meeting of the Board of Governors. The Committee shall be composed of one representative of each of the following countries:

Argentina Brazil Chile Costa Rica El Salvador Mexico United States of America

The first meeting of the Preparatory Committee will be held on September 15, 1959.

3. The Preparatory Committee shall make arrangements with the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States as to the cooperation of that Secretariat with the Committee, especially with respect to providing personnel and space for its work.

4. Once the Agreement Establishing the Inter-American Development Bank has entered into force, pursuant to Article XV, Section 2, the Committee may have at its disposal, to enable it to perform its functions, not more than 20 per cent of the resources which are required to be delivered pursuant to Section 1 (c) of that article.

5. Each government shall defray the expenses incidental to its representation on the Preparatory Committee. AGREEMENT ESTABLISHING

THE INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

ARTICLE I - PURPOSE AND FUNCTIONS

Section 1 - Purpose 17 Section 2 - Functions 17

ARTICLE II - MEMBERSHIP IN AND CAPITAL OF THE BANK

Section 1 - Membership 18 Section Z - Authorized Capital 18 Section 3 - Subscription of Shares 19 Section 4 - Payment of Subscriptions 19 Section 5 - Ordinary Capital Resources 20

ARTICLE III OPERATIONS

Section 1 - Use of Resources 21 Section 2 - Ordinary and Special Operations 21. Section 3 - Basic Principle of Separation 21 Section 4 - Methods of Making or Guaranteeing Loans 21 Section 5 - Limitations on Ordinary Operations 22 Section 6 - Direct Loan Financing 22 Section 7 - Rules and Conditions for Making or Guaranteeing Loans 22 Section 8 - Optional Conditions for Making or Guaranteeing Loans 23 Section 9 - Use of Loans Made or Guaranteed by the Bank 23 Section 10 - Payment Provisions for Direct Loans 24 Section II - Guarantees 24 Section 12 - Special Commission 24 Section 13 - Special Reserve 24

ARTICLE IV - FUND FOR SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Section 1 - Establishment, Purpose, and Functions 25 Section 2 - Applicable Provisions 25 Section 3 - Resources 25 Section 4 Operations 26 Section 5 - Limitation on Liability 27 Section 6 Limitation on Disposition of Quotas 27 Section 7 Discharge of Fund Liabilities on Borrowings 27 Section 8 Administration 27 Section 9 Voting 27 Section 10 - Distribution of Net Profits 28 Section 11 - Withdrawal of Contributions 28 Section 12 - Suspension and Termination 28 Page

ARTICLE V - CURRENCIES

Section 1 - Use of Currencies 28 Section 2 - Valuation of Currencies 29 Section 3 - Maintenance of Value of the Currency Holdings of the Bank 29 Section 4 - Methods of Conserving Currencies 30

ARTICLE VI - TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

Section I - Provision of Technical Advice and Assistance 30 Section 2 - Cooperative Agreements on Technical Assistance 30 Section 3 - Expenses 31

RTICLE VII - MISCELLANEOUS POWERS AND DISTRIBUTION OF PROFITS

Section I - Miscellaneous Powers of the Bank 31 Section 2 - Warning to be Placed on Securities 31 Section 3 - Methods of Meeting Liabilities of the Bank in Case of Defaults 32 Section 4 - Distribution of Net Profits and Surplus 32

ARTICLE VIII - ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT

Section 1 - Structure of the Bank 33 Section 2 - Board of Governors 33 Section 3 - Board of Executive Directors 34 Section 4 - Voting 35 Section 5 - President, Executive Vice President, and Staff 36 Section 6 - Publication of Reports and Provision of Information 37

ARTICLE IX - WITHDRAWAL AND SUSPENSION OF MEMBERS

Section I - Right to Withdraw 37 Section 2 - Suspension of Membership 37 Section 3 - Settlement of Accounts 37

ARTICLE X - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION OF OPERATIONS

Section 1 - Suspension of Operations 39 Section 2 - Termination of Operations 39 Section 3 - Liability of Members and Payment of Claims 39 Section 4 - Distribution of Assets 39

ARTICLE XI - STATUS, IMMUNITIES AND PRIVILEGES

Section 1 - Scope of Article 40 Section 2 - Legal Status 40 Section 3 - Judicial Proceedings 40 Section 4 - Immunity of Assets 40 14 Page

Section 5 Inviolability of Archives Section 6 Freedom of Assets from Restrictions Section 7 Privilege for Communications Section 8 Personal Immunities and Privileges Section 9 Immunities from Taxation Section 10 Implementation

ARTICLE XII - AMENDMENTS

ARTICLE XIII - INTERPRETATION AND ARBITRATION

Section I - Interpretation Section 2 - Arbitration

ARTICLE XIV - GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1 Principal Office Section 2 Relations with other Organizations, Section 3 Channel of Communication Section 4 Depositories

ARTICLE XV - FINAL PROVISIONS

Section 1 - Signature and Acceptance Section 2 - Entry into Force Section 3 - Commencement of Operations

ANNEX A - SUBSCRIPTIONS TO AUTHORIZED CAPITAL STOCK OF THE BANK

ANNEX B - CONTRIBUTION QUOTAS FOR THE FUND FOR SPECIAL OPERATIONS

ANNEX C - ELECTION OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

AGREEMENT ESTABLISHING THE INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK

The countries on whose behalf this Agreement is signed agree to create the Inter-American Development Bank, which shall operate in accordance with the following provisions:

ARTICLE I

PURPOSE AND FUNCTIONS

Section 1. Purpose

The purpose of the Bank shall be to oontribute to the acceleration of the process of economic development of the member countries, individually and col- lectively.

Section 2. Functions

(a) To implement its purpose, the Bank shall have the following functions:

(i) to promote the investment of public and private capital for development purposes;

(ii) to utilize its own capital, funds raised by it in financial markets, and other available resources, for financing the development of the member countries, giving priority to those loans and guarantees that will contribute most effectively to their economic growth;

(iii) to encourage private investment in projects, enterprises, and activities contributing to economic development and to supplement private investment when private capital is not available on reasonable terms and conditions;

(iv) to cooperate with the member countries to orient their development policies toward a better utilization of their resources, in a manner consistent with the objectives of making their economies more complementary and of fostering the orderly growth of their foreign trade; and

(v) to provide technical assistance for the preparation, financing, and implementation of development plans and projects, including the study of priorities and the formulation of specific project proposals.

(b) In carrying out its functions, the Bank shall cooperate as far as possible with national and international institutions and with private sources supplying investment capital. ARTICLE II

MEMBERSHIP IN AND CAPITAL OF THE BANK

Section 1. Membership

(a) The original members of the Bank shall be those members of the Organi- zation of American States which, by the date specified in Article XV, Section 1 (a), shall accept membership in the Bank.

(b) Membership shall be open to other members of the Organization of American States at such times and in accordance with such terms as the Bank may determine.

Section 2. Authorized Capital

(a) The authorized capital stock of the Bank, together with the initial resources of the Fund for Special Operations established in Article IV (hereinafter called the Fund), shall total one billion dollars ($1, 000, 000, 000) in terms of United States dollars of the weight and fineness in effect on January 1, 1959. Of this sum, eight hundred fifty million dollars ($850, 000, 000) shall constitute the authorized capital stock of the Bank and shall be divided into 85, 000 shares having a par value of $10, 000 each, which shall be available for subscription by members in accordance with Section 3 of this article.

(b) The authorized capital stock shall be divided into paid-in shares and callable shares. The equivalent of four hundred million dollars ($400, 000, 000) shall be paid in, and four hundred fifty million dollars ($450, 000, 000) shall be callable for the purposes specified in Section 4 (a) (ii) of this article.

(c) The capital stock indicated in (a) of this section shall be increased by five hundred million dollars ($500, 000, 000) in terms of United States dollars of the weight and fineness existing on January 1, 1959, provided that:

(i) the date for payment of all subscriptions established in accordance with Section 4 of this article shall have passed; and

(ii) a regular or special meeting of the Board of Governors, held as soon as possible after the date referred to in subparagraph (i) of this paragraph, shall have approved the above-mentioned increase of five hundred million dollars ($500, 000, 000) by a three-fourths majority of the total voting power of the member countries.

(d) The increase in capital stock provided for in the preceding paragraph shall be in the form of callable capital.

(e) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, the authorized capital stock may be increased when the Board of Governors deems it advisable and in a manner agreed upon by a two-thirds majority of the total number of governors representing not less than three fourths of the total voting power of the member countries. Section 3. Subscription of Shares

(a) Each member shall subscribe to shares of the capital stock of the Bank. The number of shares to be subscribed by the original members shall be those set forth in Annex A of this Agreement, which specifies the obligation of each member as to both paid-in and callable capital. The number of shares to be subscribed by other members shall be determined by the Bank.

(b) In case of an increase in capital pursuant to Section 2, paragraph (c) or (e) of this article, each member shall have a right to subscribe, under such conditions as the Bank shall decide, to a proportion of the increase of stock equivalent to the proportion which its stock theretofore subscribed bears to the total capital stock of the Bank. No member, however, shall be obligated to subscribe to any part of such increased capital.

(c) Shares of stock initially subscribed by original members shall be issued at par. Other shares shall be issued at par unless the Bank decides in special circumstances to issue them on other terms.

(d) The liability of the member countries on shares shall be limited to the unpaid portion of their issue price.

(e) Shares of stock shall not be pledged or encumbered in any manner, and they shall be transferable only to the Bank.

Section 4. Payment of Subscriptions

(a) Payment of the subscriptions to the capital stock of the Bank as set forth in Annex A shall be made as follows:

(i) Payment of the amount subscribed by each country to the paid-in capital stock of the Bank shall be made in three installments, the first of which shall be 20.per cent, and the second and third each 40 per cent, of such amount. The first installment shall be paid by each country at any time on or after the date on which this Agree- ment is signed, and the instrument of acceptance or ratification deposited, on its behalf in accordance with Article XV, Section 1, but not later than September 30, 1960. The remaining two installments shall be paid on such dates as are determined by the Bank, but not sooner than September 30, 1961, and September 30, 1962, respectively.

Of each installment, 50 per cent shall be paid in gold and/or dollars and 50 per cent in the currency of the member.

(ii) The callable portion of the subscription for capital shares of the Bank shall be subject to call only when required to meet the obligations of the Bank created under Article III, Section 4 (ii) and (iii) on borrowings of funds for inclusion in the Bank's ordinary capital resources or guarantees chargeable to such resources. In the event of such a call, payment may be made at the option of the member either in gold, in United States dollars, or in the currency required to discharge the obligations of the Bank for the purpose for which the call is made. Calls on unpaid subscriptions shall be uniform in percentage on all shares.

(b) Each payment of a member in its own currency under paragraph (a) (i) of this section shall be in such amount as, in the opinion of the Bank, is equivalent to the full value in terms of United States dollars of the weight and fineness in effect on January 1, 1959, of the portion of the subscription being paid. The initial payment shall be in such amount as the member considers appropriate hereunder but shall be subject to such adjustment, to be effected within 60 days of the date on which the payment was due, as the Bank shall determine to be necessary to constitute the full dollar value equivalent as provided in this paragraph.

(c) Unless otherwise determined by the Board of Governors by a three-fourths majority of the total voting power of the member countries, the liability of members for payment of the second and third installments of the paid-in portion of their subscriptions to the capital stock shall be conditional upon payment of not less than 90 per cent of the total obligations of the members due for:

(i) the first and second installments, respectively, of the paid-in portion of the subscriptions; and

(ii) the initial payment and all prior calls on the subscription quotas to the Fund.

Section 5. Ordinary Capital Resources

As used in this Agreement, the term "ordinary capital resources" of the Bank shall be deemed to include the following:

(i) authorized capital, including both paid-in and callable shares, subscribed pursuant to Section 2 and 3 of this article;

(ii) all funds raised by borrowings under the authority of Article VII, Section I (i) to which the commitment set forth in Section 4 (a) (ii) of this article is applicable;

(iii) all funds received in repayment of loans made with the resources indicated in (i) and (ii) of this section; and

(iv) all income derived from loans made from the afore-mentioned funds or from guarantees to which the commitment set forth in Section 4 (a) (ii) of this article is applicable. ARTICLE III

OPERATIONS

Section 1. Use of Resources

The resources and facilities of the Bank shall be used exclusively to implement the purpose and functions enumerated in Article I of this Agreement.

Section 2. Ordinary and Special Operations

(a) The operations of the Bank shall be divided into ordinary operations and special operations.

(b) The ordinary operations shall be those financed from the Bank's ordinary capital resources, as defined in Article II, Section 5, and shall relate exclusively to loans made, participated in, or guaranteed by the Bank which are repayable only in the respective currency or currencies in which the loans were made. Such operations shall be subject to the terms and conditions that the Bank deems advisable, consistent with the provisions of this Agreement.

(c) The special operations shall be those financed from the resources of the Fund in accordance with the provisions of Article IV.

Section 3. Basic Principle of Separation

(a) The ordinary capital resources of the Bank as defined in Article II, Sec- tion 5, shall at all times and in all respects be held, used, obligated, invested, or otherwise disposed of entirely separate from the resources of the Fund, as defined in Article IV, Section 3 (h).

The financial statements of the Bank shall show the ordinary operations of the Bank and the operations of the Fund separately, and the Bank shall establish such other administrative rules as may be necessary to ensure the effective separation of the two types of operations.

The ordinary capital resources of the Bank shall under no circumstances be charged with, or used to discharge, losses or liabilities arising out of operations for which the resources of the Fund were originally used or committed.

(b) Expenses pertaining directly to ordinary operations shall be charged to the ordinary capital resources of the Bank. Expenses pertaining directly to special operations shall be charged to the resources of the Fund. Other expenses shall be charged as the Bank determines.

Section 4. Methods of Making or Guaranteeing Loans

Subject to the conditions stipulated in this article, the Bank may make or guarantee loans to any member, or any agency or political subdivision thereof, and to any enterprise in the territory of a member, in any of the following ways:

(i) by making or participating in direct loans with funds corresponding to the unimpaired paid-in capital and, except as provided in Section 13 of this article, to its reserves and undistributed surplus; or with the unimpaired resources of the Fund;

(ii) by making or participating in direct loans with funds raised by the Bank in capital markets, or borrowed or acquired in any other manner for inclusion in the ordinary capital resources of the Bank or the resources of the Fund; and

(iii) by guaranteeing in whole or in part loans made, except in special cases, by private investors.

Section 5. Limitations on Ordinary Operations

(a) The total amount outstanding of loans and guarantees made by the Bank in its ordinary operations shall not at any time exceed the total amount of the unimpaired subscribed capital of the Bank, plus the unimpaired reserves and surplus included in the ordinary capital resources of the Bank, as defined in Article II, Sec- tion 5, exclusive of income assigned to the special reserve established pursuant to Section 13 of this article and other income assigned by decision of the Board of Governors to reserves not available for loans or guarantees.

(b) In the case of loans made out of funds borrowed by the Bank to which the obligations provided for in Article II, Section 4 (a) (ii) are applicable, the total amount of principal outstanding and payable to the Bank in a specific currency shall at no time exceed the total amount of principal of the outstanding borrowings by the Bank that are payable in the same currency.

Section 6. Direct Loan Financing

In making direct loans or participating in them, the Bank may provide financing in any of the following ways:

(a) By furnishing the borrower currencies of members, other than the currency of the member in whose territory the project is to be carried out, that are necessary to meet the foreign exchange costs of the project.

(b) By providing financing to meet expenses related to the purposes of the loan in the territories of the member in which the project is to be carried out. Only in special cases, particularly when the project indirectly gives rise to an increase in the demand for foreign exchange in that country, shall the financing granted by the Bank to meet local expenses be provided in gold or in currencies other than that of such member; in such cases, the amount of the financing granted by the Bank for this purpose shall not exceed a reasonable portion of the local expenses incurred by the borrower.

Section 7. Rules and Conditions for Making or Guaranteeing Loans

(a) The Bank may make or guarantee loans subject to the following rules and conditions:

(i) the applicant for the loan shall have submitted a detailed proposal and the staff of the Bank shall have presented a written report recommending the proposal after a study of its merits. In special circumstances, the Board of Executive Directors, by a majority of the total voting power of the member countries, may require that a proposal be submitted to the Board for decision in the absence of such a report;

(ii) in considering a request for a loan or a guarantee, the Bank shall take into account the ability of the borrower to obtain the loan from private sources of financing on terms which, in the opinion of the Bank, are reasonable for the borrower, taking into account all pertinent factors;

(iii) in making or guaranteeing a loan, the Bank shall pay due regard to prospects that the borrower and its guarantor, if any, will be in a position to meet their obligations under the loan contract;

(iv) in the opinion of the Bank, the rate of interest, other charges and the schedule for repayment of principal are appropriate for the project in question;

(v) in guaranteeing a loan made by other investors, the Bank shall receive suitable compensation for its risk; and

(vi) loans made or guaranteed by the Bank shall be principally for financing specific projects, including those forming part of a national or regional development program. However, the Bank may make or guarantee over-all loans to development institutions or similar agencies of the members in order that the latter may facilitate the financing of specific development projects whose individual financing requirements are not, in the opinion of the Bank, large enough to warrant the direct supervision of the Bank.

(b) The Bank shall not finance any undertaking in the territory of a member if that member objects to such financing.

Section 8. Optional Conditions for Making or Guaranteeing Loans

(a) In the case of loans or guarantees of loans to nongovernmental entities, the Bank may, when it deems it advisable, require that the member in whose territory the project is to be carried out, or a public institution or a similar agency of the member acceptable to the Bank, guarantee the repayment of the principal and the payment of interest and other charges on the loan.

(b) The Bank may attach such other conditions to the making of loans or guarantees as it deems appropriate, taking into account both the interests of the members directly involved in the particular loan or guarantee proposal and the interests of the members as a whole.

Section 9. Use of Loans Made or Guaranteed by the Bank

(a) Except as provided in Article V, Section 1, the Bank shall impose no condition that the proceeds of a loan shall be spent in the territory of any particular countrv nor that such proceeds shall not be spent in the territories of any particular (b) The Bank shall take the necessary measures to ensure that the proceeds of any loan made, guaranteed, or participated in by the Bank are used only for the purposes for which the loan was granted, with due attention to considerations of economy and efficiency.

Section 10. Payment Provisions for Direct Loans

Direct loan contracts made by the Bank in conformity with Section 4 (i) or (ii) of this article shall establish:

(a) All the terms and ccnditions of each loan, including among others, provision for payment of principal, interest and other charges, maturities, and dates of payment; and

(b) The currency or currencies in which payments shall be made to the Bank.

Section Ii. Guarantees

(a) In guaranteeing a loan the Bank shall charge a guarantee fee, at a rate determined by the Bank, payable periodically on the amount of the loan outstanding.

(b) Guarantee contracts concluded by the Bank shall provide that the Bank may terminate its liability with respect to interest if, upon default by the borrower and by the guarantor, if any, the Bank offers to purchase, at par and interest accrued to a date designated in the offer, the bonds or other obligations guaranteed.

Section 12. Special Commission

On all loans, participations, or guarantees made out of or by commitment of the ordinary capital resources of the Bank, the latter shall charge a special commission. The special commission, payable periodically, shall be computed on the amount outstanding on each loan, participation, or guarantee and shall be at the rate of one per cent per annum, unless the Bank, by a two-thirds majority of the total voting power of the member countries, decides to reduce the rate of commission.

Section 13. Special Reserve

The amount of commissions received by the Bank under Section 12 of this article shall be set aside as a special reserve, which shall be kept for meeting liabilities of the Bank in accordance with Article VII, Section 3 (b) (i). The special reserve shall be held in such liquid form, permitted under this Agreement, as the Board of Executive Directors may decide. ARTICLE IV

FUND FOR SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Section 1. Establishment, Purpose, and Functions

A Fund for Special Operations is established for the making of loans on terms and conditions appropriate for dealing with special circumstances arising in specific countries or with respect to specific projects.

The Fund, whose administration shall be entrusted to the Bank, shall have the purpose and functions set forth in Article I of this Agreement.

Section 2. Applicable Provisions

The Fund shall be governed by the provisions of the present article and all other provisions of this Agreement, excepting those inconsistent with the provisions of the present article and those expressly applying only to the ordinary operations of the Bank.

Section 3. Resources

(a) The original members of the Bank shall contribute to the resources of the Fund in accordance with the provisions of this section.

(b) Members of the Organization of American States that join the Bank after the date specified in Article XV, Section 1 (a) shall contribute to the Fund with such quotas, and under such terms, as may be determined by the Bank.

(c) The Fund shall be established with initial resources in the amount of one hundred fifty million dollars ($150, 000, 000) in terms of United States dollars of the weight and fineness in effect on January 1, 1959, which shall be contributed by the original members of the Bank in accordance with the quotas specified in Annex B.

(d) Payment of the quotas shall be made as follows:

(i) Fifty per cent of its quota shall be paid by each member at any time on or after the date on which this Agreement is signed, and the instrument of acceptance or ratification deposited, on its behalf in accordance with Article XV, Section 1, but not later than September 30, 1960.

(ii) The remaining 50 per cent shall be paid at any time subsequent to one year after the Bank has begun operations, in such amounts and at such times as are determined by the Bank; provided, however, that the total amount of all quotas shall be made due and payable not later than the date fixed for payment of the third installment of the subscriptions to the paid-in capital stock of the Bank.

(iii) The payments required under this section shall be distributed among the members in proportion to their quotas and shall be made one half in gold and/or United States dollars, and one half in the z-'rfle contributing member. (e) Each payment of a member in its own currency under the preceding paragraph shall be in such amount as, in the opinion of the Bank, is equivalent to the full value, in terms of United States dollars of the weight and fineness in effect on January 1, 1959, of the portion of the quota being paid. The initial payment shall be in such amount as the member considers appropriate hereunder but shall be subject to such adjustment, to be effected within 60 days of the date on which payment was due, as the Bank shall determine to be necessary to constitute the full dollar value equivalent as provided in this paragraph.

(f) Unless otherwise determined by the Board of Governors by a three-fourths majority of the total voting power of the member countries, the liability of members for payment of any call on the unpaid portion of their subscription quotas to the Fund shall be conditional upon payment of not less than 90 per cent of the total obligations of the members for:

(i) the initial payment and all prior calls on such quota subscriptions to the Fund; and

(ii) any installments due on the paid-in portion of the subscriptions to the capital stock of the Bank.

(g) The resources of the Fund shall be increased through additional contributions by the members when the Board of Governors considers it advisable by a three-fourths majority of the total voting power of the member countries. The provisions of Article II, Section 3 (b), shall apply to such increases, in terms of the proportion between the quota in effect for each member and the total amount of the resources of the Fund contributed by members.

(h) As used in this Agreement, the term 'resources of the Fund" shall be deemed to include the following:

(i) contributions by members pursuant to paragraphs (c) and (g) of this section;

(ii) all funds raised by borrowing to which the commitment stipulated in Article II, Section 4 (a) (ii) is not applicable, i. e. , those that are specifically chargeable to the resources of the Fund;

(iii) all funds received in repayment of loans made from the resources mentioned above;

(iv) all income derived from operations using or committing any of the resources mentioned above; and

(v) any other resources at the disposal of the Fund.

Section 4. Operations

(a) The operations of the Fund shall be those financed from its own resources, as defined in Section 3 (h) of the present article.

(b) Loans made with resources of the Fund may be partially or wholly repaya- 26 ble in the currency of the member in whose territory the project being financed will be carried out. The part of the loan not repayable in the currency of the member shall be paid in the currency or currencies in which the loan was made.

Section 5. Limitation on Liability

In the operations of the Fund, the financial liability of the Bank shall be limited to the resources and reserves of the Fund, and the liability of members shall be limited to the unpaid portion of their respective quotas that has become due and payable.

Section 6. Limitation on Disposition of Quotas

The rights of members of the Bank resulting from their contributions to the Fund may not be transferred or encumbered, and members shall have no right of reimbursement of such contributions except in cases of loss of the status of membership or of termination of the operations of the Fund.

Section 7. Discharge of Fund Liabilities on Borrowings

Payments in satisfaction of any liability on borrowings of funds for inclusion in the resources of the Fund shall be charged:

(i) first, against any reserve established for this purpose; and

(ii) then, against any other funds available in the resources of the Fund.

Section 8. Administration

(a) Subject to the provisions of this Agreement, the authorities of the Bank shall have full powers to administer the Fund.

(b) There shall be a Vice President of the Bank in charge of the Fund. The Vice President shall participate in the meetings of the Board of Executive Directors of the Bank, without vote, whenever matters relating to the Fund are discussed.

(c) In the operations of the Fund the Bank shall utilize to the fullest extent possible the same personnel, experts, installations, offices, equipment, and services as it uses for its ordinary operations.

(d) The Bank shall publish a separate annual report showing the results of the Fund's financial operations, including profits or losses. At the annual meeting of the Board of Governors there shall be at least one session devoted to consideration of this report. In addition, the Bank shall transmit to the members a quarterly summary of the Fund's operations.

Section 9. Voting

(a) In making decisions concerning operations of the Fund, each member country of the Bank shall have the voting power in the Board of Governors accorded to it pursuant to -Article VIII, Section 4 (a) and (b), and each Director shall have the voting power in the Board of Executive Directors accorded to him pursuant to Article VIII, Section 4 (a) and (c). (b) All decisions of the Bank concerning the operations of the Fund shall be adopted by a two-thirds majority of the total voting power of the member countries, unless otherwise provided in this article.

Section 10. Distribution of Net Profits

The Board of Governors of the Bank shall determine what portion of the net profits of the Fund shall be distributed among the members after making provision for reserves. Such net profits shall be shared in proportion to the quotas of the member s.

Section 11. Withdrawal of Contributions

(a) No country may withdraw its contribution and terminate its relations with the Fund while it is still a member of the Bank.

(b) The provisions of Article IX, Section 3, with respect to the settlement of accounts with countries that terminate their membership in the Bank also shall apply to the Fund.

Section 12. Suspension and Termination

The provisions of Article X also shall apply to the Fund with substitution of terms relating to the Fund and its resources and respective creditors for those relating to the Bank and its ordinary capital resources and respective creditors.

ARTICLE V

CURRENCIES

Section 1. Use of Currencies

(a) The currency of any member held by the Bank, either in its ordinary capital resources or in the resources of the Fund, however acquired, may be used by the Bank and by any recipient from the Bank, without restriction by the member, to make payments for goods and services produced in the territory of such member.

(b) Members may not maintain or impose restrictions of any kind upon the use by the Bank or by any recipient from the Bank, for payments in any country, of the following:

(i) gold and dollars received by the Bank in payment of the 50 per cent portion of each member's subscription to shares of the Bank's capital and of the 50 per cent portion of each member's quota for contribution to the Fund, pursuant to the provisions of Article II and Article IV, respectively;

(ii) currencies of members purchased with the gold and dollar funds referred to in (i) of this paragraph; (iii) currencies obtained by borrowings, pursuant to the provisions of Article VII, Section I (i), for inclusion in the ordinary capital resources of the Bank;

(iv) gold and dollars received by the Bank in payment on account of principal, interest, and other charges, of loans made from the gold and dollar funds referred to in (i) of this paragraph; currencies received in payment of principal, interest, and other charges, of loans made from currencies referred to in (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph; and currencies received in payment of commissions and fees on all guarantees made by the Bank; and

(v) currencies, other than the member's own currency, received from the Bank pursuant to Article VII, Section 4 (c) and Article IV, Sec- tion 10, in distribution of net profits.

(c) A member's currency held by the Bank, either in its ordinary capital resources or in the resources of the Fund, not covered by paragraph (b) of this section, also may be used by the Bank or any recipient from the Bank for payments in any country without restriction of any kind, unless the member notifies the Bank of its desire that such currency or a portion thereof be restricted to the uses specified in paragraph (a) of this section.

(d) Members may not place any restrictions on the holding and use by the Bank, for making amortization payments or anticipating payment of, or repurchas- ing part or all of, the Bank's own obligations, of currencies received by the Bank in repayment of direct loans made from borrowed funds included in the ordinary capital resources of the Bank.

(e) Gold or currency held by the Bank in its ordinary capital resources or in the resources of the Fund shall not be used by the Bank to purchase other currencies unless authorized by a two-thirds majority of the total voting power of the member countries.

Section 2. Valuation of Currencies

Whenever it shall become necessary under this Agreement to value any currency in terms of another currency, or in terms of gold, such valuation shall be determined by the Bank after consultation with the International Monetary Fund.

Section 3. Maintenance of Value of the Currency Holdings of the Bank

(a) Whenever the par value in the International Monetary Fund of a member's currency is reduced or the foreign exchange value of a member's currency has, in the opinion of the Bank, depreciated to a significant extent, the member shall pay to the Bank within a reasonable time an additional amount of its own currency sufficient to maintain the value of all the currency of the member held by the Bank in its ordinary capital resources, or in the resources of the Fund, excepting currency derived from borrowings by the Bank. The standard of value for this purpose shall be the United States dollar of the weight and fineness in effect on January 1, 1959. (b) Whenever the par value in the International Monetary Fund of a member's currency is increased or the foreign exchange value of such member's currency has in the opinion of the Bank, appreciated to a significant extent, the Bank shall return to such member within a reasonable time an amount of that member's currency equal to the increase in the value of the amount of such currency which is held by the Bank in its ordinary capital resources or in the resources of the Fund, excepting currency derived from borrowings by the Bank. The standard of value for this purpose shall be the same as that established in the preceding paragraph.

(c) The provisions of this section may be waived by the Bank when a uniform proportionate change in the par value of the currencies of all the Bank's members is made by the International Monetary Fund.

Section 4. Methods of Conserving Currencies

The Bank shall accept from any member promissory notes or similar securities issued by the government of the member, or by the depository designated by such member, in lieu of any part of the currency of the member representing the 50 per cent portion of its subscription to the Bank's authorized capital and the 50 per cent portion of its subscription to the resources of the Fund, which, pursuant to the provisions of Article II and Article IV, respectively, are payable by each member in its national currency, provided such currency is not required by the Bank for the conduct of its operations. Such promissory notes or securities shall be non-negotiable, non-interest-bearing, and payable to the Bank at their par value on demand.

ARTICLE VI

TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

Section 1. Provision of Technical Advice and Assistance

The Bank may, at the request of any member or members, or of private firms that may obtain loans from it, provide technical advice and assistance in its field of activity, particularly on:

(i) the preparation, financing, and execution of development plans and projects, including the consideration of priorities, and the formulation of loan proposals on specific national or regional development projects; and

(ii) the development and advanced training, through seminars and other forms of instruction, of personnel specializing in the formulation and implementation of development plans and projects.

Section 2. Cooperative Agreements on Technical Assistance

In order to accomplish the purposes of this article, the Bank may enter into 3 g~ agreements on technical assistance with other national or international institutions, either public or private. Section 3. Expenses

(a) The Bank may arrange with member countries or firms receiving technical assistance, for reimbursement of the expenses of furnishing such assistance on terms which the Bank deems appropriate.

(b) The expenses of providing technical assistance not paid by the recipients shall be met from the net income of the Bank or of the Fund. However, during the first three years of the Bank's operations, up to three per cent, in total, of the initial resources of the Fund may be used to meet such expenses.

ARTICLE VII

MISCELLANEOUS POWERS AND DISTRIBUTION OF PROFITS

Section 1. Miscellaneous Powers of the Bank

In addition to the powers specified elsewhere in this Agreement, the Bank shall have the power to:

(i) borrow funds and in that connection to furnish such collateral or other security therefor as the Bank shall determine, provided that, before making a sale of its obligations in the markets of a country, the Bank shall have obtained the approval of that country and of the member in whose currency the obligations are denominated. In addition, in the case of borrowings of funds to be included in the Bank's ordinary capital resources, the Bank shall obtain agreement of such countries that the proceeds may be exchanged for the currency of any other country without restriction;

(ii) buy and sell securities it has issued or guaranteed or in which it has invested, provided that the Bank shall obtain the approval of the country in whose territories the securities are to be bought or sold;

(iii) with the approval of a two-thirds majority of the total voting power of the member countries, invest funds not needed in its operations in such obligations as it may determine;

(iv) guarantee securities in its portfolio for the purpose of facilitating their sale; and

(v) exercise such other powers as shall be necessary or desirable in furtherance of its purpose and functions, consistent with the provisions of this Agreement.

Section 2. Warning to be Placed on Securities

Every security issued or guaranteed by the Bank shall bear on its face a conspicuous statement to the effect that it is not an obligation of any government, unless it is in fact the obligation of a particular government, in which case it shall so state.

Section 3. Methods of Meeting Liabilities of the Bank in Case of Defaults

(a) The Bank, in the event of actual or threatened default on loans made or guaranteed by the Bank using its ordinary capital resources, shall take such action as it deems appropriate with respect to modifying the terms of the loan, other than the currency of repayment.

(b) The payments in discharge of the Bank's liabilities on borrowings or guarantees under Article III, Section 4 (ii) and (iii) chargeable against the ordinary capital resources of the Bank shall be charged:

(i) first, against the special reserve provided for in Article III, Section 13; and

(ii) then, to the extent necessary and at the discretion of the Bank, against the other reserves, surplus, and funds corresponding to the capital paid in for shares.

(c) Whenever necessary to meet contractual payments of interest, other charges, or amortization on the Bank's borrowings, or to meet the Bank's liabilities with respect to similar payments on loans guaranteed by it chargeable to its ordinary capital resources, the Bank may call upon the members to pay an appropriate amount of their callable capital subscriptions, in accordance with Article II, Sec- tion 4 (a) (ii). Moreover, if the Bank believes that a default may be of long dura- tion, it may call an additional part of such subscriptions not to exceed in any one year one per cent of the total subscriptions of the members, for the following purposes:

(i) to redeem prior to maturity, or otherwise discharge its liability on, all or part of the outstanding principal of any loan guaranteed by it in respect of which the debtor is in default; and

(ii) to repurchase, or otherwise discharge its liability on, all or part of its own outstanding obligations.

Section 4. Distribution of Net Profits and Surplus

(a) The Board of Governors may determine periodically what part of the net profits and of the surplus shall be distributed. Such distributions may be made only when the reserves have reached a level which the Board of Governors considers adequate.

(b) The distributions referred to in the preceding paragraph shall be made in proportion to the number of shares held by each member.

(c) Payments shall be made in such manner and in such currency or currencies as the Board of Governors shall determine. If such payments are made to a member in currencies other than its own, the transfer of such currencies and their use by the receiving country shall be without restriction by any member. ARTICLE VIII

ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT

Section 1. Structure of the Bank

The Bank shall have a Board of Governors, a Board of Executive Directors, a President, an Executive Vice President, a Vice President in charge of the Fund, and such other officers and staff as may be considered necessary.

Section 2. Board of Governors

(a) All the powers of the Bank shall be vested in the Board of Governors. Each member shall appoint one governor and one alternate, who shall serve for five years, subject to termination of appointment at any time, or to reappointment, at the pleasure of the appointing member. No alternate may vote except in the absence of his principal. The Board shall select one of the governors as Chairman, who shall hold office until the next regular meeting of the Board.

(b) The Board of Governors may delegate to the Board of Executive Directors all its powers except power to:

(i) admit new members and determine the conditions of their admission;

(ii) increase or decrease the authorized capital stock of the Bank and contributions to the Fund;

(iii) elect the President of the Bank and determine his remuneration;

(iv) suspend a member, pursuant to Article IX, Section 2;

(v) determine the remuneration of the executive directors and their alternate s;

(vi) hear and decide any appeals from interpretations of this Agreement given by the Board of Executive Directors;

(vii) authorize the conclusion of general agreements for cooperation with other international organizations;

(viii) approve, after reviewing the auditors' report, the general balance sheet and the statement of profit and loss of the institution;

(ix) determine the reserves and the distribution of the net profits of the Bank and of the Fund;

(x) select outside auditors to certify to the general balance sheet and the statement of profit and loss of the institution;

(xi) amend this Agreement; and

(xii) decide to terminate the operations of the Bank and to distribute its 33 (c) The Board of Governors shall retain full power to exercise authority over any matter delegated to the Board of Executive Directors under paragraph (b) above.

(d) The Board of Governors shall, as a general rule, hold a meeting annually. Other meetings may be held when the Board of Governors so provides or when called by the Board of Executive Directors. Meetings of the Board of Governors also shall be called by the Board of Executive Directors whenever requested by five members of the Bank or by members having one fourth of the total voting power of the member countries.

(e) A quorum for any meeting of the Board of Governors shall be an absolute majority of the total number of governors, representing not less than two thirds of the total voting power of the member countries.

(f) The Board of Governors may establish a procedure whereby the Board of Executive Directors, when it deems such action appropriate, may submit a specific question to a vote of the governors without calling a meeting of the Board of Gover- nors.

(g) The Board of Governors, and the Board of Executive Directors to the extent authorized, may adopt such rules and regulations as may be necessary or appropriate to conduct the business of the Bank.

(h) Governors and alternates shall serve as such without compensation from the Bank, but the Bank may pay them reasonable expenses incurred in attending meetings of the Board of Governors.

Section 3. Board of Executive Directors

(a) The Board of Executive Directors shall be responsible for the conduct of the operations of the Bank, and for this purpose may exercise all the powers delegated to it by the Board of Governors.

(b) There shall be seven executive directors, who shall not be governors, and of whom:

(i) one shall be appointed by the member having the largest number of shares in the Bank;

(ii) six shall be elected by the governors of the remaining members pursuant to the provisions of Annex C of this Agreement.

Executive directors shall be appointed or elected for terms of three years and may be reappointed or re-elected for successive terms. They shall be persons of recognized competence and wide experience in economic and financial matters.

(c) Each executive director shall appoint an alternate who shall have full power to act for him when he is not present. Directors and alternates shall be citizens of the member countries. None of the elected directors and their alternates may be of the same citizenship. Alternates may participate in meetings but may vote only when they are acting in place of their principals. (d) Directors shall continue in office until their successors are appointed or elected. If the office of an elected director becomes vacant more than 180 days before the end of his term, a successor shall be elected for the remainder of the term by the governors who elected the former director. An absolute majority of the votes cast shall be required for election. While the office remains vacant, the alternate shall have all the powers of the former director except the power to appoint an alternate.

(e) The Board of Executive Directors shall function in continuous session at the principal office of the Bank and shall meet as often as the business of the Bank may require.

(f) A quorum for any meeting of the Board of Executive Directors shall be an absolute majority of the total number of directors representing not less than two thirds of the total voting power of the member countries.

(g) A member of the Bank may send a representative to attend any meeting of the Board of Executive Directors when a matter especially affecting that member is under consideration. Such right of representation shall be regulated by the Board of Governors.

(h) The Board of Executive Directors may appoint such committees as it deems advisable. Membership of such committees need not be limited to governors, directors, or alternates.

(i) The Board of Executive Directors shall determine the basic organization of the Bank, including the number and general responsibilities of the chief administrative and professional positions of the staff, and shall approve the budget of the Bank.

Section 4. Voting

(a) Each member country shall have 135 votes plus one vote for each share of capital stock of the Bank held by that country.

(b) In voting in the Board of Governors, each governor shall be entitled to cast the votes of the member country which he represents. Except as otherwise specifically provided in this Agreement, all matters before the Board of Governors shall be decided by a majority of the total voting power of the member countries.

(i) the appointed director shall be entitled to cast the number of votes of the member country which appointed him;

(ii) each elected director shall be entitled to cast the number of votes that counted toward his election, which votes shall be cast as a unit; and

(iii) except as otherwise specifically provided in this Agreement, all matters before the Board of Executive Directors shall be decided by a majority of the total voting power of the member countries. Section 5. President, Executive Vice President, and Staff

(a) The Board of Governors, by an absolute majority of the total number of governors representing not less than a majority of the total voting power of the member countries, shall elect a President of the Bank who, while holding office, shall not be a governor or an executive director or alternate for either.

Under the direction of the Board of Executive Directors, the President of the Bank shall conduct the ordinary business of the Bank and shall be chief of its staff. He also shall be the presiding officer at meetings of the Board of Executive Di- rectors, but shall have no vote, except that it shall be his duty to cast a deciding vote when necessary to break a tie.

The President of the Bank shall be the legal representative of the Bank. The term of office of the President of the Bank shall be five years, and he may be reelected to succesive terms. He shall cease to hold office when the Board of Gover- nors so decides by a majority of the total voting power of the member countries.

(b) The Executive Vice President shall be appointed by the Board of Executive Directors on the recommendation of the President of the Bank. Under the direction of the Board of Executive Directors and the President of the Bank, the Executive Vice President shall exercise such authority and perform such functions in the administration of the Bank as may be determined by the Board of Executive Directors. In the absence or incapacity of the President of the Bank, the Executive Vice Presi- dent shall exercise the authority and perform the functions of the President.

The Executive Vice President shall participate in meetings of the Board of Executive Directors but shall have no vote at such meetings, except that he shall cast the deciding vote, as provided in paragraph (a) of this section, when he is acting in place of the President of the Bank.

(c) In addition to the Vice President referred to in Article IV, Section 8 (b), the Board of Executive Directors may, on recommendation of the President of the Bank, appoint other Vice Presidents who shall exercise such authority and perform such functions as the Board of Executive Directors may determine.

(d) The President, officers, and staff of the Bank, in the discharge of their offices, owe their duty entirely to the Bank and shall recognize no other authority. Each member of the Bank shall respect the international character of this duty.

(e) The paramount consideration in the employment of the staff and in the determination of the conditions of service shall be the necessity of securing the highest standards of efficiency, competence, and integrity. Due regard shall be paid to the importance of recruiting the staff on as wide a geographical basis as possible.

(f) The Bank, its officers and employees shall not interfere in the political affairs of any member, nor shall they be influenced in their decisions by the political character of the member or members concerned. Only economic considerations shall be relevant to their decisions, and these considerations shall be weigh- ed impartially in order to achieve the purpose and functions stated in Article I. Section 6. Publication of Reports and Provision of Information

(a) The Bank shall publish an annual report containing an audited statement of the accounts. It shall also transmit quarterly to the members a summary statement of the financial position and a profit-and-loss statement showing the results of its ordinary operations.

(b) The Bank may also publish such other reports as it deems desirable to carry out its purpose and functions.

ARTICLE IX

WITHDRAWAL AND SUSPENSION OF MEMBERS

Section 1. Right to Withdraw

Any member may withdraw from the Bank by delivering to the Bank at its principal office written notice of its intention to do so. Such withdrawal shall become finally effective on the date specified in the notice but in no event less than six months after the notice is delivered to the Bank. However, at any time before the withdrawal becomes finally effective, the member may notify the Bank in writing of the cancellation of its notice of intention to withdraw.

After withdrawing, a member shall remain liable for all direct and contingent obligations to the Bank to which it was subject at the date of delivery of the withdrawal notice, including those specified in Section 3 of this article. However, if the withdrawal becomes finally effective, the member shall not incur any liability for obligations resulting from operations of the Bank effected after the date on which the withdrawal notice was received by the Bank.

Section 2. Suspension of Membership

If a member fails to fulfill any of its obligations to the Bank, the Bank may suspend its membership by decision of the Board of Governors by a two-thirds majority of the total number of governors representing not less than three fourths of the total voting power of the member countries.

The member so suspended shall automatically cease to be a member of the Bank one year from the date of its suspension unless the Board of Governors decides by the same majority to terminate the suspension.

While under suspension, a member shall not be entitled to exercise any rights under this Agreement, except the right of withdrawal, but shall remain subject to all its obligations.

Section 3. Settlement of Accounts

(a) After a country ceases to be amember, it no longer shall share in the profits or losses of the Bank, nor shall it incur any liability with respect to loans 37 and guarantees entered into by the Bank thereafter. However, it shall remain liable for all amounts it owes the Bank and for its contingent liabilities to the Bank so long as any part of the loans or guarantees contracted by the Bank before the date on which the country ceased to be a member remains outstanding.

(b) When a country ceases to be a member, the Bank shall arrange for the repurchase of such country's capital stock as a part of the settlement of accounts pursuant to the provisions of this section; but the country shall have no other rights under this Agreement except as provided in this section and in Article XIII, Section 2.

(c) The Bank and the country ceasing to be a member may agree on the repurchase of the capital stock on such terms as are deemed appropriate in the circumstances, without regard to the provisions of the following paragraph. Such agreement may provide, among other things, for a final settlement of all obligations of the country to the Bank.

(d) If the agreement referred to in the preceding paragraph has not been consummated within six months after the country ceases to be a member or such other time as the Bank and such country may agree upon, the repurchase price of such country's capital stock shall be its book value, according to the books of the Bank, on the date when the country ceased to be a member. Such repurchase shall be subject to the following conditions:

(i) As a prerequisite for payment, the country ceasing to be a member shall surrender its stock certificates, and such payment may be made in such installments, at such times and in such available currencies as the Bank determines, taking into account the financial position of the Bank.

(ii) Any amount which the Bank owes the country for the repurchase of its capital stock shall be withheld to the extent that the country or any of its subdivisions or agencies remains liable to the Bank as a result of loan or guarantee operations. The amount withheld may, at the option of the Bank, be applied on any such liability as it matures. However, no amount shall be withheld on account of the country's contingent liability for future calls on its subscription pursuant to Article II, Section 4 (a) (ii).

(iii) If the Bank sustains net losses on any loans or participations, or as a result of any guarantees, outstanding on the date the country ceased to be a member, and the amount of such losses exceeds the amount of the reserves provided therefor on such date, such country shall repay on demand the amount by which the repurchase price of its shares would have been reduced, if the losses had been taken into account when the book value of the shares, according to the books of the Bank, was determined. In addition, the former member shall remain liable on any call pursuant to Article II, Sec- tion 4 (a) (ii), to the extent that it would have been required to respond if the impairment of capital had occurred and the call had been made at the time the repurchase price of its shares had been determined. (e) In no event shall any amount due to a country for its shares under this section be paid until six months after the date upon which the country ceases to be a member. If within that period the Bank terminates operations all rights of such country shall be determined by the provisions of Article X, and such country shall be considered still a member of the Bank for the purposes of such article except that it shall have no voting rights.

ARTICLE X

SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION OF OPERATIONS

Section 1. Suspension of Operations

In an emergency the Board of Executive Directors may suspend operations in respect of new loans and guarantees until such time as the Board of Governors may have an opportunity to consider the situation and take pertinent measures.

Section 2. Termination of Operations

The Bank may terminate its operations by a decision of the Board of Governors by a two-thirds majority of the total number of governors representing not less than three fourths of the total voting power of the member countries. After such termination of operations the Bank shall forthwith cease all activities, except those incident to the conservation, preservation, and realization of its assets and settlement of its obligations.

Section 3. Liability of Members and Payment of Claims

(a) The liability of all members arising from the subscriptions to the capital stock of the Bank and in respect to the depreciation of their currencies shall continue until all direct and contingent obligations shall have been discharged.

(b) All creditors holding direct claims shall be paid out of the assets of the Bank and then out of payments to the Bank on unpaid or callable subscriptions. Be- fore making any payments to creditors holding direct claims, the Board of Executive Directors shall make such arrangements as are necessary, in its judgment, to ensure a pro rata distribution among holders of direct and contingent claims.

Section 4. Distribution of Assets

(a) No distribution of assets shall be made to members on account of their subscriptions to the capital stock of the Bank until all liabilities to creditors shall have been discharged or provided for. Moreover, such distribution must be approved by a decision of the Board of Governors by a two-thirds majority of the total number of governors representing not less than three fourths of the total voting power of the member countries.

(b) Any distribution of the assets of the Bank to the members shall be in proportion to capital stock held by each member and shall be effected at such times and under such conditions as the Bank shall deem fair and equitable. The shares of assets distributed need not be uniform as to type of assets. No member shall be entitled to receive its share in such a distribution of assets until it has settled all of its obligations to the Bank.

(c) Any member receiving assets distributed pursuant to this article shall enjoy the same rights with respect to such assets as the Bank enjoyed prior to their distribution.

ARTICLE XI

STATUS, IMMUNITIES AND PRIVILEGES

Section 1. Scope of Article

To enable the Bank to fulfill its purpose and the functions with which it is entrusted, the status, immunities, and privileges set forth in this article shall be accorded to the Bank in the territories of each member.

Section 2. Legal Status

The Bank shall possess juridical personality and, in particular, full capacity:

(a) to contract;

(b) to acquire and dispose of immovable and movable property; and

Section 3. Judicial Proceedings

Actions may be brought against the Bank only in a court of competent jurisdiction in the territories of a member in which the Bank has an office, has appointed an agent for the purpose of accepting service or notice of process, or has issued or guaranteed securities.

No action shall be brought against the Bank by members or persons acting for or deriving claims from members. However, member countries shall have recourse to such special procedures to settle controversies between the Bank and its members as may be prescribed in this Agreement, in the by-laws and regulations of the Bank or in contracts entered into with the Bank.

Property and assets of the Bank shall, wheresoever located and by whomsoever held, be immune from all forms of seizure, attachment or execution before the delivery of final judgment against the Bank.

Section 4. Immunity of Assets

40 Property and assets of the Bank, wheresoever located and by whomsoever held, shall be considered public international property and shall be immune from search, requisition, confiscation, expropriation or any other form of taking or foreclosure by executive or legislative action.

Section 5. Inviolability of Archives

The archives of the Bank shall be inviolable.

Section 6. Freedom of Assets from Restrictions

To the extent necessary to carry out the purpose and functions of the Bank and to conduct its operations in accordance with this Agreement, all property and other assets of the Bank shall be free from restrictions, regulations, controls and moratoria of any nature, except as may otherwise be provided in this Agreement.

Section 7. Privilege for Communications

The official communications of the Bank shall be accorded by each member the same treatment that it accords to the official communications of other members.

Section 8. Personal Immunities and Privileges

All governors, executive directors, alternates, officers and employees of the Bank shall have the following privileges and immunities:

(a) Immunity from legal process with respect to acts performed by them in their official capacity, except when the Bank waives this immunity.

(b) When not local nationals, the same immunities from immigration restrictions, alien registration requirements and national service obligations and the same facilities as regards exchange provisions as are accorded by members to the representatives, officials, and employees of comparable rank of other members.

(c) The same privileges in respect of traveling facilities as are accorded by members to representatives, officials, and employees of comparable rank of other members.

Section 9. Immunities from Taxation

(a) The Bank, its property, other assets, income, and the operations and transactions it carries out pursuant to this Agreement, shall be immune from all taxation and from all customs duties. The Bank shall also be immune from any obligation relating to the payment, withholding or collection of any tax, or duty.

(b) No tax shall be levied on or in respect of salaries and emoluments paid by the Bank to executive directors, alternates, officials or employees of the Bank who are not local citizens or other local nationals.

(c) No tax of any kind shall be levied on any obligation or security issued by the Bank, including any dividend or interest thereon, by whomsoever held:

(i) which discriminates against such obligation or security solely because it is issued by the Bank; or (ii) if the sole jurisdictional basis for such taxation is the place or currency in which it is issued, made payable or paid, or the location of any office or place of business maintained by the Bank.

(d) No tax of any kind shall be levied on any obligation or security guaranteed by the Bank, including any dividend or interest thereon, by whomsoever held:

(i) which discriminates against such obligation or security solely because it is guaranteed by the Bank; or

(ii) if the sole jurisdictional basis for such taxation is the location of any office or place of business maintained by the Bank.

Section 10. Implementation

Each member, in accordance with its juridical system, shall take such action as is necessary to make effective in its own territories the principles set forth in this article, and shall inform the Bank of the action which it has taken on the matter.

ARTICLE XII

AMENDMENTS

(a) This Agreement may be amended only by decision of the Board of Gover- nors by a two-thirds majority of the total number of governors representing not less than three fourths of the total voting power of the member countries.

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, the unanimous agreement of the Board of Governors shall be required for the approval of any amendment modifying:

(i) the right to withdraw from the Bank as provided in Article IX, Section 1;

(ii) the right to purchase capital stock of the Bank and to contribute to the Fund as provided in Article II, Section 3 (b) and in Article IV, Section 3 (g), respectively; and

(iii) the limitation on liability as provided in Article II, Section 3 (d) and Article IV, Section 5.

(c) Any proposal to amend this Agreement, whether emanating from a member or the Board of Executive Directors, shall be communicated to the Chair- man of the Board of Governors, who shall bring the proposal before the Board of Governors. When an amendment has been adopted, the Bank shall so certify in an official communication addressed to all members. Amendments shall enter into force for all members three months after the date of the official communication unless the Board of Governors shall specify a different period. ARTICLE XIII

INTERPRETATION AND ARBITRATION

Section 1. Interpretation

(a) Any question of interpretation of the provisions of this Agreement arising between any member and the Bank or between any members of the Bank shall be submitted to the Board of Executive Directors for decision.

Members especially affected by the question under consideration shall be entitled to direct representation before the Board of Executive Directors as provided in Article VIII, Section 3 (g).

(b) In any case where the Board of Executive Directors has given a decision under (a) above, any member may require that the question be submitted to the Board of Governors, whose decision shall be final. Pending the decision of the Board of Governors, the Bank may, so far as it deems it necessary, act on the basis of the decision of the Board of Executive Directors.

Section 2. Arbitration

If a disagreement should arise between the Bank and a country which has ceased to be a member, or between the Bank and any member after adoption of a decision to terminate the operation of the Bank, such disagreement shall be submitted to arbitration by a tribunal of three arbitrators. One of the arbitrators shall be appointed by the Bank, another by the country concerned, and the third, unless the parties otherwise agree, by the Secretary General of the Organization of American States. If all efforts to reach a unanimous agreement fail, decisions shall be made by a majority vote of the three arbitrators.

The third arbitrator shall be empowered to settle all questions of procedure in any case where the parties are in disagreement with respect thereto.

ARTICLE XIV

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1. Principal Office

The principal office of the Bank shall be located in Washington, District of Columbia, United States of America.

Section 2. Relations with other Organizations

The Bank may enter into arrangements with other organizations with respect to the exchange of information or for other purposes consistent with this Agreement. Section 3. Channel of Communication

Each member shall designate an official entity for purposes of communication with the Bank on matters connected with this Agreement.

Section 4. Depositories

Each member shall designate its central bank as a depository in which the Bank may keep its holdings of such member's currency and other assets of the Bank. If a member has no central bank, it shall, in agreement with the Bank, designate another institution for such purpose.

ARTICLE XV

FINAL PROVISIONS

Section 1. Signature and Acceptance

(a) This Agreement shall be deposited with the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States, where it shall remain open until December 31, 1959, for signature by the representatives of the countries listed in Annex A. Each signatory country shall deposit with the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States an instrument setting forth that it has accepted or ratified this Agreement in accordance with its own laws and has taken the steps necessary to enable it to fulfill all of its obligations under this Agreement.

(b) The General Secretariat of the Organization of American States shall send certified copies of this Agreement to the members of the Organization and duly notify them of each signature and deposit of the instrument of acceptance or ratification made pursuant to the foregoing paragraph, as well as the date thereof.

(c) At the time the instrument of acceptance or ratification is deposited on its behalf, each country shall deliver to the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States, for the purpose of meeting administrative expenses of the Bank, gold or United States dollars equivalent to one tenth of one per cent of the purchase price of the shares of the Bank subscribed by it and of its quota in the Fund. This payment shall be credited to the member on account of its subscription and quota prescribed pursuant to Articles II, Section 4 (a) (i), and IV, Section 3 (d) (i). At any time on or after the date on which its instrument of acceptance or ratification is deposited, any member may make additional payments to be credited to the member on account of its subscription and quota prescribed pursuant to Articles II and IV. The General Secretariat of the Organization of American States shall hold all funds paid under this paragraph in a special deposit account or accounts and shall make such funds available to the Bank not later than the time of the first meeting of the Board of Governors held pursuant to Section 3 of this article. If this Agreement has not come into force by December 31, 1959, the General Secre- tariat of the Organization of American States shall return such funds to the countries that delivered them. (d) On or after the date on which the Bank commences operations, the General Secretariat of the Organization of American States may receive the signature and the instrument of acceptance or ratification of this Agreement from any country whose membership has been approved in accordance with Article II, Section 1 (b).

Section 2. Entry into Force

(a) This Agreement shall enter into force when it has been signed and instruments of acceptance or ratification have been deposited, in accordance with Section I (a) of this article, by representatives of countries whose subscriptions comprise not less than 85 per cent of the total subscriptions set forth in Annex A.

(b) Countries whose instruments of acceptance or ratification were deposited prior to the date on which the agreement entered into force shall become members on that date. Other countries shall become members on the dates on which their instruments of acceptance or ratification are deposited.

Section 3. Commencement of Operations

(a) The Secretary General of the Organization of American States shall call the first meeting of the Board of Governors as soon as this Agreement enters into force under Section 2 of this article.

(b) At the first meeting of the Board of Governors arrangements shall be made for the selection of the executive directors and their alternates in accordance with the provisions of Article VIII, Section 3, and for the determination of the date on which the Bank shall commence operations. Notwithstanding the provisions of Article VIII, Section 3, the governors, if they deem it desirable, may provide that the first term to be served by such directors may be less than three years.

DONE at the city of Washington, District of Columbia, United States of America, in a single original, dated April 8, 1959, whose English, French, Portu- guese, and Spanish texts are equally authentic. ANNEX A

SUBSCRIPTIONS TO AUTHORIZED CAPITAL STOCK OF THE BANK (In shares of US$10, 000 each)

Paid-in Capital Callable Total Sub, Country Shares Shares scription

Ar gentina 5,157 5,157 10, 314 828 Bolivia 414 414 5,157 10, 314 Brazil 5,157 2, 832 Chile 1, 416 1, 416 2, 830 Colombia 1, 415 1, 415 414 Costa Rica 207 207 3, 684 Cuba 1, 842 1, 842 552 Dominican Republic 276 276 552 Ecuador 276 276 41 4 El Salvador 207 207 552 Guatemala 276 276 207 414 Haiti 207

Honduras 207 207 414

Mexico 3, 315 3, 315 6, 630

Nicaragua 207 207 414

Panama 207 207 414

Paraguay 207 207 414

Peru 691 691 1, 382

United States of America 15, 000 20,000 35, 000

Uruguay 553 553 1, 106

Venezuela 2, 763 2, 763 5, 526

000 Total 40, 000 45, 000 85, ANNEX B

CONTRIBUTION QUOTAS FOR THE FUND FOR SPECIAL OPERATIONS (In thousands of US$)

Country Quota

Argentina 10, 314 Bolivia 828

Brazil 10, 314

Chile 2, 832

Colombia 2, 830

Costa Rica 41 4

Cuba 3, 684

Dominican Republic 552

Ecuador 552

El Salvador 414

Gua te mala 552

Haiti 414

Honduras 414

Mexico 6, 630

Nicaragua 414

Panama 414

Paraguay 414

Peru 1, 382

United States of America 100, 000

Uruguay 1,106

Venezuela 5, 526

Total 150, 000 ANNEX C

ELECTION OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

(a) The six executive directors referred to in Article VIII, Section 3 (b) (ii) shall be elected by the governors eligible to vote for that purpose.

(b) Each governor shall cast in favor of a single person all the votes to which the menber he represents is entitled under Article VIII, Section 4.

(c) In the first place, as many ballots as are necessary shall be taken until each of four candidates receives a number of votes that represents a percentage not less than the sum of the percentages appertaining to the country with the greatest voting power and to the country with the least voting power. For the purposes of this paragraph, the total voting power of the countries entitled to participate in the voting provided for under this annex shall be counted as 100 per cent.

(d) In the second place, governors whose votes have not been cast in favor of any of the directors elected under paragraph (c) of this annex shall elect the other two directors on the basis of one vote for each governor. The two candidates who each receive a greater number of votes than any other candidate, on the same ballot, shall be elected executive directors, and the balloting shall be repeated until this occurs. After the balloting has been completed, each governor who did not vote for either of the candidates elected shall assign his vote to one of them.

The number of votes under Article VIII, Section 4, of each governor who has voted for or assigned his vote to a candidate elected hereunder shall be deemed for the purposes of Article VIII, Section 4 (c) (ii) to have counted toward the election of such candidate.

341-E-5918 $ 0.2. I' OEA SI:BR, DOCUMENTOS OFICIALES I5 OEA/Ser. X/1 (espajol)

TRATADOS YCONVENCIONES INTERAMERICANOS SOBRE PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

UNION PANAMERICANA o WASHINGTON, D.C. SecretarTa General, Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos • 1960

Serie sobre Tratados No. 15

TRATADOS YCONVENCIONES INTERAMERICANOS SOBRE PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

UNION PANAMERICANA Secretaria General, Organizaci6n de los Estados Americanos W ashington, D.C., 1960. Esta Serie se publica bajo la direccion de la Divisi6n Jurfdica General, Departamento de Asuntos Jurfdicos, Uni6n Panamericana, Washington, D.C. TABLA DE MATERIAS

Pagina

Nota Preliminar 1

Tratado sobre Patentes de Invencion, Dibujos y Mode- 4 los Industriales, y Marcas de Comercio y de Fabrica, Mexico, 1902

Convenci6n sobre Patentes de Invenci 6 n, Dibujos y 9 Modelos Industriales, Marcas de Fabrica y Comercio, y Propiedad Literaria y Artfstica, Ri'o de Janeiro, 1906

Convenci6n sobre Patentes de Invenci 6 n, Dibujos y Mode- 16 los Industriales, Buenos Aires, 1910

Convenci6n sobre Marcas de Fabrica y Comercio, 20 Buenos Aires, 1910

Convenci6n para la Protecci 6 n de Marcas de F~brica, 27 Comercio y Agricultura y Nombres Comerciales, Santiago de Chile, 1923

Convenci6n General Interamericana de Protecci 6 n Mar- 38 caria y Comercial, Washington, 1929

Protocolo sobre el Registro Interamericano de Marcas 53 de Fabrica, Washington, 1929

NOTA PRELIMINAR

El presente documento tiene por objeto ofrecer en una sola fuen- te los textos de todas las convenciones interarrericanas en el campo de la propiedad industrial, y suministrar informaci6n sobre la vigencia de las mismas.

Como se observar6, existen sobre la materia las Convenciones de Mexico, 1902; Rio de Janeiro, 1906; Buenos Aires, 1910; Santiago, 1923; y Washington, 1929.

Las Convenciones de 1902 y 1906 cubren tanto las patentes de invencion como las marcas de fabrica y otras materias que generalmente constituyen la propiedad industrial. En 1910 se firmaron convenciones separadas, siendo la referente a patentes la ultima adoptada en Ameri- ca. En lo que respecta a marcas de fabrica se firmaron dos convenciones mas, en 1923 y 1929, respectivamente.

Para determinar que convencion rige entre dos o mas paises, es necesario examinar el texto respectivo y ver cual de ellas esti en vigor entre los mismos. Despues del texto de cada convencion se incluye un cuadro que muestra el estado de las ratificaciones respectivas.

La Convenci 6 n de 1906 constituy6 una "Uni6n de las Naciones de America", con dos oficinas que se denominaron "iOficinas de la Uni6n Internacional Americana para la Protecci 6 n de la Propiedad Intelectual e Industrial", y que debi'an funcionar, una en La Habana y otra en Rio de Janeiro. Su objeto era centralizar el registro de obras literarias y artfsticas, patentes, marcas, dibujos y modelos, etc., que se regis- traran en cada uno de los pai'ses signatarios. El registro internacional, sin embargo, quedaba facultativo para el interesado. Para proceder a la organizaci 6 n de las oficinas indicadas, se requeria la ratificaci 6 n de la Convenci6n por lo menos de dos terceras partes de las naciones que correspondfan a cada grupo. Como esto no ocurri6, las Oficinas de referencia no fueron establecidas.

La idea de crear una uni 6 n con oficinas para centralizar el registro se abandon6 en 1910 en lo que respecta a patentes, pero se mantuvo en relaci 6 n con marcas de fabrica y comercio, adoptindose en esa fecha convenciones separadas sobre ambas materias. Se mantuvo tambien esa idea en las Convenciones de 1923 y 1929. La 'Iitima va acompafiada de un Protocolo que estableci6 una oficina central en La Habana para el registro de marcas de fibrica.

La Oficina de Rio de Janeiro no leg6 a establecerse. La de La Habana se estableci 6 en 1917 y comenz 6 a funcionar en 1919. En vista de que los pai'ses que se hicieron partes en el Protocolo de 1929 lo denunciaron, la Oficina de La Habana de j6 de existir de hecho a partir de 1944. El Consejo de la Organizaci 6 n de los Estados Ameri- canos decidi6, el 2 de noviembre de 1949, "dar por terminadas las actividades de la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas". La Convenci 6 n, sin embargo, se mantiene en vigor entre los pal'ses que actualmente son partes en la misma.

Ademas de las convenciones interamericanas antes mencionadas, rige tambien en algunos paises americanos la Convenci 6 n de la Uni6n de Paris del 20 de marzo de 1883, que entr 6 en vigor el 7 de julio de 1884, para la protecci 6 n de la propiedad industrial, revisada en Bruse- las en 1900, en Washington en 1911, en La Haya en 1925, en Londres en 1934, y en Lisboa en 1958.

De los pafses de America, Cuba es parte en la Revisi 6 n de Washington de 1911, el Brasil y la Repiblica Dominicana son partes en la Revisi6n de La Haya de 1925 y Haitf, Mexico y Estados Unidos son partes en la Revision de Londres de 1934.

De acuerdo con la Convenci6n de Parts, los parses contratantes se constituyen en forma de Uni6n para la proteccion de la propiedad industrial.

Cabe tener presente que la Convenci6n Internacional cubre todas las materias que generalmente constituyen la propiedad industrial como las patentes de invencion, los modelos de utilidad, los disefios y modelos industriales, las marcas de fabrica o de comercio, el nombre comercial y las indicaciones de procedencia, o nombres de origen, as" como tambign para la represi6n de la competencia desleal. La propiedad industrial se comprende en su accion mas lata, y se aplica no sola- nente a la industria y al comercio propiamente dichos, sino que igualmente se extiende al dominio de las industrias agri'colas y extractivas.

De acuerdo con la Convenci6n Internacional, los jurisdiccionados (ressortissants) de cada uno de los parses contratantes gozan en todos los otros pal'ses de la Uni6n, por lo que se refiere a la protecci6n de la propiedad industrial, de las ventajas qie las leyes respectivas conceden actualmente o concedieran en lo sucesivo a los nacionales, sin perjuicio de los derechos especiales que previene la Convenci6n.

En lo que respecta exclusivamente a las patentes, cuando una persona hace el dep 6 sito de una solicitud de patente de invenci 6 n de acuerdo con las disposiciones vigentes, en uno de los palses contratantes, o su causahabiente, goza, para efectuar el deposito en los otros paifses y bajo la reserva de los derechos de terceros, de un derecho de prioridad durante el plazo de 12 meses que corre desde la le- cha del dep6sito de la primera solicitud en un pais de la Uni6n.

Los pai'ses contratantes crean por medio de la Convenci6n la Oficina Internacional en Berna bajo el nombre de "Oficina Internacio- nal para la Protecci6n de la Propiedad Industrial". TRATADO SOBRE PATENTES DE INVENCION, DIBUJOS Y MODELOS INDUSTRIALES, Y MARCAS DE COMERCIO Y DE FABRICA

MEXICO, 1902

SS. EE. el Presidente de la Republica Argentina, el de Bolivia, el de Colombia, el de Costa Rica, el de Chile, el de la Repulblica Do- minicana, el del Ecuador, el de El Salvador, el de los Estados Unidos de America, el de Guatemala, el de Haitf, el de Honduras, el de los Estados Unidos Mexicanos, el de Nicaragua, el del Paraguay, el del Peru' y el del Uruguay;

Deseando que sus paises respectivos fueran representados en la Segunda Conferencia Internacional Americana, enviaron a ella, debidamente autorizados para aprobar las recomendaciones, resoluciones, convenciones y tratados que juzgaren iitiles a los intereses de la America, a los siguientes sefiores Delegados:

/-Siguen los nombres de los seiores Delegados.-/

Quienes, despuis de haberse comunicado sus plenos poderes y encontrandolos en buena y debida forina, con excepci 6 n de los exhibidos por los representantes de SS. EE. el Presidente de los Estados Unidos de America, el de Nicaragua y el del Paraguay, los cuales obran ad referendum, han convenido en celebrar un Tratado sobre Patentes de Invenci 6 n, Dibujos y Modelos Industriales y Marcas de Comercio y de Fabrica, en los terminos siguientes:

Art. I. Los ciudadanos de cada uno de los Estados signatarios gozaran en los otros de las mismas ventajas acordadas a los nacionales, en cuanto a las marcas de comercio o de fabrica, a los modelos y dibujos industriales y a las patentes de invenci6n. En consecuencia, tendran derecho a igual protecci 6 n y a identicos recursos contra el ataque a sus derechos.

Art. 2. Son asimilados a los nacionales, para los efectos de este Tratado, los extranjeros domiciliados en alguno de los pai'ses signatarios, o que tengan en 41 un establecimiento industrial o comercial.

Art. 3. Las patentes de invenci 6 n, las de dibujos o modelos industriales y las marcas de comercio o de f~brica, ot6rgadas en el pais de origen, podr~n ser importadas a los dem's Estados signata- PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL rios, mediante el dep6sito y publicaci6n que exija las leyes de 4stos, y seran protegidos en igual forma que las otorgadas en el mismo Estado. Esta disposicion no obsta a la obligaci6n que establezcan las leyes nacionales, de fabricar en el paf's los objetos que sean materia de privilegio.

Art. 4. Los agentes consulares de la naci6n a que pertenezcan o donde se hallen establecidos los propietarios de patentes, dibujos, modelos o marcas, seran considerados como representantes legitimos de dichos propietarios, para cumplir las formalidades y condiciones exigidas con el objeto de dar curso a la solicitud y obtener el registro de las referidas patentes, dibujos, modelos o marcas, en el pa's donde se intente hacerlos valer.

Art. 5. Se considera pa's de origen aquel en que el concesiona- rio tiene su principal establecimiento o su domicilio. Si no lo tuviere en ninguno de los Estados contratantes, se repu- tars pars de origen el Estado signatario de la nacionalidad del propietario.

Art. 6. Para conservar el derecho de prioridad de las patentes de invencion, modelos, dibujos o marcas importados, se concede el plazo de un afio respecto de las primeras, y de seis meses en cuanto a los demos, contados desde el otorgamiento de las patentes, hasta la presentaci 6 n de la solicitud ante la autoridad respectiva del Estado en el cual se intente importar el tftulo.

Art. 7. Las cuestiones que se susciten sobre la prioridad de la invenci6n y sobre la adopcion de una marca, se resolveran teniendo en cuenta la fecha de la solicitud de las patentes o marcas respectivas, en los pairses en que se otorgaron.

Art. 8. Se considera invenci~n: un nuevo modo de fabricar productos industriales; un nuevo aparato mecanico o manual, que sirva para fabricar dichos productos; el descubrimiento de un nuevo producto industrial, y la aplicacion de medios perfeccionados, con el objeto de conseguir resultados superiores a los ya conocidos. Los dibujos y modelos de fibrica se encuentran sujetos a las reglas de las invenciones o descubrimientos en lo que no sea especial a estos 6ltimos. Se reputa marca de comercio o de f~brica, el signo, emblema o nombre externo, que el comerciante adopta y aplica a sus mercaderras y productos, para distinguirlos de los de otros industriales o comerciantes que negocian en artfculos de la misma especie. TRATADO DE MEXICO (1902)

Art. 9. No podran obtener patente de invencion:

I. Las invenciones y descubrimientos que hubieren tenido publicidad en algiin Estado signatario, o no, de este Tratado.

11. Los que fueren contrarios a la moral y a las leyes del pals en donde las patentes hayan de expedirse o reccnocerse.

Art. 10. Tampoco se podran obtener o reconocer marcas de comercio o de f~brica, que se encuentran en el caso del parrafo segundo del articulo precedente.

Art. 11. La propiedad de la patente de invencion o de la marca fabril o comercial, comprende la facultad de disponer de la invenci 6 n o de usar de la marca y el derecho de transferirlas a otros.

Art. 12. El niimero de affos del privilegio sera el que fijen las leyes del pai's en que se pretenda hacerlo efectivo. Ese plazo podra 6 ser limitado al sefialado por las leyes del Estado en que primitivamen- te se acord6 la patente, si fuere menor.

Art. 13. Las responsabilidades civiles y criminales en que incurran los que daffen los derechos del inventor, se perseguiran y pe- naran con arreglo a las leyes del pais en que se haya ocasionado el perjuicio. Tambien las falsificaciones, adulteraciones o uso indebido de las marcas de comercio o de f~brica, se perseguiran con sujeci 6 n a las leyes del Estado en cuyo territorio se cometa la infraccion.

Art. 14. La declaratoria de nulidad de una patente o concesion de marca hecha en el pals de origen, sera comunicada en forma aut~n- tica a los demos par'ses signatarios, para que administrativamente se resuelva, ya sobre la solicitud de reconocimiento que se pretenda de la patente o marca obtenida en el extranjero, ya sobre el efecto que tal declaratoria deba producir respecto de la patente o marca antes importada a dichos pa'ses.

Art. 15. Los tratados sobre patentes de invenci6n y marcas de comercio o de falrica otorgados anteriormente entre los pai'ses signatarios del presente, quedaran substitul'dos por este, desde que quede perfeccionado, en cuanto a las relaciones entre dichos pa'ses signatarios.

Art. 16. Haran veces de canje del presente Tratado las comunicaciones que dirijan los Gobiernos que lo ratifiquen al de Mexico, para PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL que este lo haga saber a los demos Estados contratantes. El mismo Gobierno de M~xico les comunicara tambien la ratificaci6n, si la otorgase.

Art. 17. Hecho el canje por dos o mas Estados en la forma del artfculo anterior, este Tratado quedar& en vigor desde ese ac- to por tiempo indefinido.

Art. 18. La naci 6 n signataria que creyere conveniente desligar- se del Tratado, har6 saber el desahucio en la forma indicada en el art. 16, y un aflo despues de recibida la comunicaci6n respectiva, cesari la vigencia del Tratado respecto a la naci'n que lo hubiere denunciado.

Art. 19. En la forma prevenida por el art. 16 podran adherirse al Tratado las Naciones de America que originariamente no lo subs- criban. En fe de lo cual, los Plenipotenciarios y Delegados firman el presente Tratado y ponen en 41 el sello de la Segunda Conferencia In- ternacional Americana.

Hecho en la ciudad de Mexico el di'a veintisiete de enero de mil novecientos dos, en tres ejemplares, escritos en castellano, ingl~s y frances respectivamente, los cuales se depositaran en la Secreta- ria de Relaciones Exteriores del Gobierno de los Estados Unidos Me- xicanos, a fin de que de ellos se saquen copias certificadas para enviarlas por la via diplomatica a cada uno de los Estados signatarios.

§-Siguen las firmas de los sefiores Delegados.! TRATADO SOBRE PATENTES DE INVENCION, DIBUJOS Y MODELOS INDUSTRIALES, Y MARCAS DE COMERCIO Y DE FABRICA

Suscrito el 27 de enero de 1902 en la Segunda Conferencia Internacional Americana Mexico, D. F.

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INS TR UME NTO DEL INSTRUMENTO PAISES SIGNATARIOS DE RATIFICACION DE RATIFICACION

Argentina Bolivia Colombia Costa Rica Agosto 4, 1903 Agosto 25, 1903 8 Cuba* Enero 10, 1906* Febrero 27, 1906* Chile Julio 28, 1910 Julio 28, 1910 Ecuador Octubre 8, 1902** El Salvador Mayo 16, 1902 Julio 4, 1902 Guatemala Abril 25, 1902 Agosto 6, 1902 Haiti" Honduras Julio 2, 1904 Agosto 19, 1904 Mexico Nicaragua Septiembre 2, 1904 Noviembre 4, 1904 Paraguay Peru' Repuiblica Dominicana Junio 7, 1906 Julio 9, 1906 Uruguay

Cuba no firm6 esta Convenci6n originalmente. Las fechas que corresponden a ese pais representan su adhesi6n y el dep6sito de su instrumento de adhesi6n.

** Fecha del decreto de ratificaci 6 n. CONVENCION SOBRE PATENTES DE INVENCION, DIBUJOS Y MODELOS INDUSTRIALES, MARCAS DE FABRICA Y COMERCIO, Y PROPIEDAD LITERARIA Y ARTISTICA

RIO DE JANEIRO, 1906

Sus Excelencias el Presidente del Ecuador, el del Paraguay, el de Bolivia, el de Colombia, el de Honduras, el de Panama', el de Cuba, el de la Repiiblica Dominicana, el del Peru, el de El Salvador, el de Costa Rica, el de los Estados Unidos de M~xico, el de Guatemala, el de la Repulblica Oriental del Uruguay, el de la Repdblica Argentina, el de Nicaragua, el de los Estados Unidos del Brasil, el de los Estados Unidos de America y ei de Chile;

Deseando que sus palses respectivos fueran representados en la Tercera Conferencia Internacional Americana, enviaron a ella, debidarnente autorizados para aprobar las recomendaciones, resoluciones, convenciones y tratados que juzgaren iitiles a-los intereses de America, a los siguientes sefiores Delegados:

/-Siguen los nombres de los seffores Delegados./

Quienes, despues de haberse comunicado sus plenos poderes y encontrandolos en buena y debida forixna, han convenido en lo siguiente:

Art. I. Las Naciones signatarias adoptan en materia de Patentes de Invenci 6 n, Dibujos y Modelos Industriales, Marcas de FSbrica y Co- mercio, y Propiedad Literaria y Artfstica, los tratados suscritos en la Segunda Conferencia Internacional Americana de Mexico, el 27 de enero de 1902, con las modificaciones que en la presente Convenci 6 n se expre s an.

Art. II. Se constituye una Uni6n de las Naciones de America, que se hart efectiva por medio de dos Oficinas que, bajo la denominaci 6 n de Oficinas de la Union Internacional Americana para la Protecci6n de la Propiedad Intelectual e Industrial, funcionaran, una en la ciudad de La Habana, y otra en la de Rio de Janeiro, en completa correlaci6n entre si, y tendran por objeto centralizar el registro de obras literarias y artrsticas, patentes, marcas, dibujos y modelos, etc. , que se regis- traren en cada una de las Naciones signatarias, de acuerdo con los tratados respectivos, y a los efectos de su validez y reconocimiento en las demos. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Este registro internacional es puramente facultativo para el interesado, quien queda en libertad de solicitar, por si' mismo 0 por medio de apoderado, el registro en cada uno de los Estados en que pida protecci6n.

Art. III. La Oficina establecida en la ciudad de La Habana atendera los registros procedentes de los Estados Unidos de America, Mexico, Venezuela, Cuba, Haiti, Reptdblica Dominicana, el Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Guatemala, Panama y Colombia.

La Oficina establecida en la ciudad de Rio de Janeiro atendera los registros que procedan de las Repiblicas de los Estados Unidos del Brasil, de la Repiiblica Oriental del Uruguay, Repiiblica Argentina, Paraguay, Bolivia, Chile, Peru y Ecuador.

Art. IV. Para los efectos de la unificaci6n legal del Registro, las dos Oficinas Internacionales, que s 6 ol se dividen en atenci6n a la mayor facilidad de las comunicaciones, se consideran como una sola, y a este fin se dispone: (a) que ambas lleven los mismos libros y la 1U misma contabilidad, bajo un identico sistema;(b) que mensualmente se transmitan entre si copias autenticadas por los Gobiernos en cuyos territorios tienen su asiento, de todo registro, comunicacion u otros documentos que afecten al reconocimiento del derecho de los propietarios o autores.

Art. V. Cada uno de los Gobiernos adherentes a la Uni6n remitira al fin de cada mes, a la Oficina que le corresponda segiin el Art. III, copias autenticadas de todo registro de marcas, patentes, dibujos, modelos, etc., y ejemplares de las obras literarias y artfsticas que se hubieren registrado en ellas, asi como de toda caducidad, renuncia, transmision y otras mutaciones que se produjeren en los derechos, de acuerdo con los tratados y leyes respectivas, a fin de que sean comunicados o distribui'dos, y notificados segin los casos, por la Oficina Internacional que corresponda, a las Naciones que se hallan en relaci 6 n directa con ella.

Art. VI. El registro o dep6sito de dibujos, modelos, etc., hechos en el pai's de origen,de conformidad con la ley nacional de este y transmitido por la respectiva administraci6n a la Oficina Internacional, sera notificado por 4sta a los demos de la Uni6n, los que le daran ente- ra fe y credito, salvo cuando se hallase en el caso previsto por el Art. IX del Tratado sobre Patentes, Marcas, etc. , de Mexico, y en el de falta de los requisitos esenciales al reconocimientd de la propiedad internacional, si se trata de obras literarias o artisticas, de acuerdo con el Tratado de esta materia suscrito en Mexico. CONVENCION DE RIO DE JANEIRO (1906)

A fin de que los Estados que forman la Uni6n puedan aceptar o rehusar el reconocimiento de los derechos concedidos en el pal's de origen, y para los demas efectos legales de dicho reconocimiento, aquellos Estados tendran un affo de plazo desde la fecha de la notificaci 6 n por la Oficina correspondiente. En caso de negativa del reconocimiento de una patente, marca, dibujo, modelo, etc. , o del derecho sobre una obra literaria o art's- tica, por alguna de las administraciones de los Estados que forman la Uni6n, la haran saber a la Oficina Internacional con la relaci 6 n y motivos del caso, para que esta la transmita, a su vez, a aquella de donde procede y a la parte interesada, para los efectos a que hubiere lugar segun las leyes internas.

Art. VII. Todo registro o reconocimiento del derecho intelectual e industrial, hecho en uno de los pa'ses de la Uni6n, y comunicado a los dema's en la forma prescrita en los artfculos anteriores, surtira los mismos efectos que si hubiese sido registrado o reconocido en todos ellos, y toda nulidad o caducidad del derecho, producida en el pal's de origen, comunicada en la misma forma a los demos, tiene en 6stos los mismos efectos que en aqul. La duraci6n de la protecci6n internacional derivada del Registro ser la de las leyes del pa"s que hubiese otorgado o reconocido el derecho; y si ellas no contuviesen esta disposici6n, o no sefialasen tiempo, sera: para las patentes, de 15 afios; para las marcas de fabrica o de comercio, modelos y dibujos industriales, de 10; y para las obras literarias y artfsticas, de 25 afios despu~s de la muerte del autor; los dos primeros plazos pueden renovarse ilimitadamente por los mismos tramites del primer registro.

Art. VIII. Las Oficinas Internacionales para la Protecci6n de la Propiedad Intelectual e Industrial seran regidas por un mismo Regla- mento, proyectado de acuerdo por los Gobiernos de las Repdiblicas de Cuba y de los Estados Unidos del Brasil, y aprobado por todas las de- mis de la Uni6n. Su presupuesto de gastos, sancionado por estos mismos Gobiernos, sera costeado por todos los signatarios en la misma proporci 6 n establecida para la Oficina Internacional de las Repdiblicas Americanas, de Washington, y se hallar6 a este respecto bajo el con- trol de los Gobiernos en cuyo territorio tengan su asiento. A la tasa de los derechos que el pal's de origen exija por los registros o depositos y demas actos que se derivan del reconocimiento o garantfa de la propiedad intelectual e industrial, se agregara un emo- lumento de cinco pesos oro americano, o su equivalente en la moneda del pal's donde se verifique el pago, cuyo producto se distribuira por partes iguales entre los Gobiernos en cuyo territorio funcionen las Ofi- cinas Internacionales destinado exclusivamente para constribuir al sos- PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

tenimiento de estas.

Art. IX. Ademrs de las funciones prescritas en los art culos precedentes, las Oficinas Internacionales tendran las que siguen:

la. Reunir las informaciones de toda naturaleza que se refieran a la proteccion de la propiedad intelectual e industrial, publi- carlas y circularlas entre los pai'ses de America, con Ia periocidad conveniente;

2a. Fomentar el estudio de las cuestiones relativas a dichas materias, a cuyo efecto podran publicar una o mas revistas oficiales, con inserci 6 n de todos los documentos que les remitan las administraciones de los pai'ses signatarios;

3a. Hacer presente a los Gobiernos de la Uni6n las dificultades que se opongan a la m~s facil y eficaz aplicaci 6 n del presente convenio, indicando los medios de subsanarlas o allanarlas;

12 4a. Concurrir con los Gobiernos de la Uni6n a preparar conferencias internacionales para el estudio y progreso de las legislaciones sobre propiedad intelectual e industrial, para las reformas que conviniera introducir en el regimen de Ia Uni6n o en los tratados vigentes sobre la misma materia, y en caso de que tales conferencias se realicen, los directores de las Oficinas que no hubieran sido nombrados para representar a algun pals, tendran derecho de asistir a sus sesiones, emitir sus opiniones en ellas, pero no de votar;

5a. Presentar al Gobierno del palrs donde funcionen una memoria anual de sus trabajos, la que sera comunicada a todos los Estados de la Union;

6a. Entablar relaciones de canje de publicaciones, informes y datos concurrentes al progreso de Ia institucion, con las Oficinas e Ins- titutos similares, y con corporaciones Cientfficas, Literarias, Artfs- ticas e Industriales de Europa y America;

7a. Cooperar como agentes de cada uno de los Gobiernos de Ia Uni6n, para el desempefio de cualquier gesti6 n, iniciativa u oficios concurrentes a los fines de Ia presente Convenci6n, ante las administraciones de las demos.

Art. X. Las disposiciones contenidas en los Tratados de Mexico de 27 de enero de 1902 sobre patentes de invencion, dibujos y modelos industriales y marcas de fa'brica y comercio, y sobre propiedad litera- CONVENCION DE RIO DE JANEIRO (1906) ria y artfstica, en cuanto a las formalidades del registro o reconocimiento del derecho en los demos paises que no sean el de origen, se consideran substituidas por las prescripciones de la presente Con- venci6 n, desde que quede establecida una de las Oficinas Internacio- nales, y s6lo con relacion a los Estados que concurran a su consti- tucion; en todo lo demos, dichos Tratados quedaran en vigencia, y la presente Convenci6n sera considerada como adicional de las mismas.

Art. XI. Los Gobiernos de las Repiblicas de Cuba y de los Estados Unidos del Brasil procederan a la organizacion de las Oficinas Internacionales, cuando hayan ratificado la presente Convencion por lo menos las dos terceras partes de las Naciones que corresponden a cada grupo de las enunciadas en el Articulo III. No sera necesario el establecimiento simult~neo de las dos Oficinas, pues, habiendo el nu'- mero antes establecido de Gobiernos adherentes, podra instalarse una sola, quedando a cargo del Gobierno en cuya sede corresponda la Ofi- cina, tomar las medidas que conduzcan a dicho resultado, haciendo uso de las facultades que contiene el Articulo VIII. En el caso de que se haya establecido una de las dos Oficinas a las que la presente Convencion se refiere, podran acudir a ella, para 13 todos los efectos en la misma convenci 6 n previstos, los paises que pertenezcan a grupo distinto de aquel a que la Oficina establecida co- rresponde, hasta tanto quede constituida la segunda. Cuando 9sta se constituya, la primera le remitira todos los informes a que el segundo parrafo del Artfculo XII se refiere.

Art. XII. Por lo que respecta a la adhesi6n de las Naciones de America a la presente Convenci6n, ella sera comunicada al Gobierno de los Estados Unidos del Brasil, el que la dara a conocer a los demos, haciendo esta comunicacion las veces de canje. El Gobierno del Brasil notificara , ademas, esta adhesion a las Oficinas Internacionales, y estas remitiran al nuevo Gobierno adheren- te un estado completo de todas las marcas,patentes, modelos, dibujos, y obras literarias y arti'sticas registradas y que en esa fecha se halla- sen bajo la proteccion internacional.

En fe de lo cual, los Plenipotenciarios y Delegados firman la presente Convenci 6 n y ponen en ella el sello de la Tercera Conferencia In- ternacional Americana.

Hecho en la ciudad de Rio de Janeiro, el d'a veintitres de agosto de mil novecientos seis, en espafiol, portugues e ingles, y depositado en la Secretarfa de Relaciones Exteriores del Gobierno de los Estados PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Unidos del Brasil, a fin de que saquen copias certificadas para enviarlas por la via diplomatica a cada uno de los Estados signatarios.

/-Siguen las firmas de los seffores Delegados CONVENCION SOBRE PATENTES DE INVENCION, DIBUJOS Y MODELOS INDUSTRIALES, MARCAS DE FABRICA Y COMERCIO, Y PROPIEDAD LITERARIA Y ARTISTICA

Suscrita el 23 de agosto de 1906, en la Tercera Conferencia Internacional Americana Rio de Janeiro

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INSTR UMENTO DEL INSTRUMENTO PAISES SIGNATARIOS DIE RATIFICACION DE RATIFICACION

Argentina Bolivia Brasil Diciembre 6, 1911 Diciembre 6, 1911 Colombia Costa Rica Octubre 26, 1908 Diciembre 21, 1908 Cuba Chile Junio 9, 1909 Junio 27, 1910 Ecuador Noviembre 19, 1909 Noviembre 12, 1909 El Salvador Diciembre 29, 1909 Junio 3, 1910 Estados Unidos Guatemala Febrero 15, 1909 Abril 26, 1909 Honduras Febrero 5, 1907 Octubre 16, 1908 Mexico Nicaragua Junio 17, 1909 Agosto 25, 1909 Panama Febrero 5, 1911 Mayo 22, 1911 Paraguay Peru' Repulblica Dominicana Uruguay CONVENCION PATENTES DE INVENCION, DIBUJOS Y MODELOS INDUSTRIALES

BUENOS AIRES, 1910

Sus Excelencias los Presidentes de los Estados Unidos de Ame- rica, de la Repblica Argentina, del Brasil, de Chile, de Colombia, de Costa Rica, de Cuba, de la Republica Dominicana, del Ecuador, de Guatemala, de Haiti, de Honduras, de Mexico, de Nicaragua, de Pana- ma, del Paraguay, del Peru', de El Splvador, del Uruguay y de Venezue- la;

Deseando que sus parses respectivos fueran representados en la Cuarta Conferencia Internacional Americana, enviaron a ella debidamente autorizados,para aprobar las Recomendaciones, Resoluciones, Convenciones y Tratados, que juzgaren iitiles para los intereses de America, a los siguientes Seffores Delegados:

JSiguen los nombres de los seffores Delegados/

16 Quienes, despues de haberse comunicado sus poderes y encontrandolos en buena y debida forma, han acordado en celebrar la siguiente Convencion.

Art. I. Las naciones signatarias adoptan este Convenio para la protecci6n de las patentes de invenci 6 n, dibujos y modelos industria- le s.

Art. II. Toda persona de cualquiera de los Estados signatarios, gozara en cada uno de los otros Estados, de todas las ventajas que conceden las leyes relativas a patentes de invenci6n, dibujos y modelos industriales. En consecuencia, tendran la misma proteccion e identicos recursos legales contra todo ataque a sus derechos, sin perjuicio de cumplir con las formalidades y condiciones impuestas por las disposiciones de la legislaci 6 n interior de cada Estado.

Art. III. Toda persona que haya depositado debidamente una solicitud de patente de invenci 6 n, dibujo o modelo industrial, en uno de los Estados contratantes, gozara de un derecho de prioridad durante un termino de doce meses para las patentes de invenci 6 n, y de cuatro meses para los dibujos o modelos industriales, a fin de que pueda hacerse el dep6sito en los otros Estados, sin perjuicio de los derechos de un tercero. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

En consecuencia, el dep6sito ulteriormente hecho en alguno de los Estados signatarios antes del vencimiento de los terminos sefialados, no podra ser anulado por hechos ocurridos en el intervalo, ya sea especialmente por otro dep6sito, por la publicaci 6 n del inven- to o su explotaci 6 n, o por la venta de ejemplares del dibujo o modelo.

Art. IV. Cuando en los plazos fijados una persona haya depositado en varios Estados solicitudes de patente por el mismo invento, los derechos resultantes de las patentes as' solicitadas, seran independientes los unos de los otros. Serin tambien independientes de los derechos que resulten de las patentes que hayan sido adquiridas por el mismo invento en los paises que no formen parte de esta Convencion.

Art. V. Las cuestiones que se susciten sobre prioridad de las patentes de invenci 6 n, se resolveran teniendo en cuenta la fecha de la solicitud de las patentes respectivas en los pai'ses en que se otorgaron.

Art. VI. Se consjderara invencion: un nuevo modo de fabricar productos industriales; una nueva maquina o aparato mecanico o ma- 17 nual que sirva para fabricar dichos productos; el descubrimiento de un nuevo producto industrial; la aplicaci 6 n de medios conocidos con el objeto de conseguir resultados superiores, y todo dibujo nuevo, original y de adorno para un art'culo de la industria. El precepto anterior se entendera sin perjuicio de lo que disponga la legislaci 6 n de cada pals.

Art. VII. Cualquiera de los Estados signatarios podra rehusar el reconocimiento de patentes por algunas de las siguientes causas:

a) Porque las invenciones o descubrimientos hubieren tenido publicidad en cualquier pa's con anterioridad a la fecha de invencion por el solicitante ;

b) Porque hubieren sido registradas, publicadas o descritas en cualquier pals con un afio de anterioridad a la fecha de la solicitud en el pa's en el cual la patente se haya solicitado;

c) Porque sean de uso piblico o esten en venta en el pa's en el cual la patente haya sido solicitada, con un aflo de anterioridad a la fecha de dicha solicitud;

d) Porque las invenciones o descubrimientos sean de algu'n modo contrarios a la moral o a la legislacion. CONVENCION DE BUENOS AIRES (1910)

Art. VIII. La propiedad de una patente de invenci 6 n comprende la facultad de gozar de los beneficios de la misma, y el derecho de cederla o transferirla segdin las leyes de cada pa's.

Art. IX. Las personas que incurran en responsabilidadcs civiles o criminales por dafiar o perjudicar los derechos de los invento- res, se perseguiran y castigaran con arreglo a las leyes del pal's en que se haya cometido el delito u ocasionado el perjuicio.

Art. X. Las copias certificadas de las patentes de invenci 6 n en el pais de origen, de acuerdo con las leyes de la Naci6n, recibirin en- tera fe y crgdito como prueba del derecho de prioridad, sin perjuicio de lo que se dispone en el artfculo VII.

Art. XI. Los Tratados sobre patentes de invenci6n, dibujos o modelos industriales efectuados con anterioridad entre los parses signatarios del presente Convenio, ser~n substituidos por este desde que quede ratificado en cuanto a las relaciones entre los Estados signa- 18 tarios. Art. XII. Las adhesiones de las Naciones Americanas al presente Convenio seran dirigidas al Gobierno de la Repulblica Argentina, para que las comunique a los otros Estados. Estas comunicaciones haran las veces de canje.

Art. XIII. La Naci6n signataria que creyere conveniente desligar- se de este Convenio lo hart saber al Gobierno de la Repu'blica Argentina; y despues de un afio de recibida la comunicaci6n, cesara la vigencia de este Convenio, en cuanto a la Nacion que lo hubiere denunciado.

En fe de lo cual los Plenipotenciarios y Delegados firman la presente Convenci6n y ponen en ella el sello de la Cuarta Conferencia In- ternacional Americana.

Hecho y firmado en la Ciudad de Buenos Aires a los veinte dfas del mes de agosto de mil novecientos diez, en espafiol, ingles, portugues y francgs y depositado en el Ministerio de Relaciones Exteriores de la Repiiblica Argentina, a fin de que se saquen copias certificadas para enviarlas por la via diplom~tica a cada uno de los Estados signatarios.

fSiguen las firmas de los sefiores Delegados_/ CONVENCION PATENTES DE INVENCION, DIBUJOS Y MODELOS INDUSTRIALES

Suscrita el 20 de agosto de 1910, en la Cuarta Conferencia Internacional Americana Buenos Aires

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INSTR UMENTO DEL INSTRUMENTO PAISES SIGNATARIOS DE RATIFICACION DE RATIFICACION

Argentina Bolivia Mayo 19, 1914 (1) Brasil Febrero 9, 1915 Mayo 31, 1915 Colombia Costa Rica Junio 20, 1916 Agosto 31, 1916 Cuba Diciembre 23, 1912 Febrero 28, 1913 Chile Ecuador Abril 8, 1914 Mayo 31, 1914 El Salvador Estados Unidos Marzo 21, 1911 Mayo 10. , 1911 Guatemala Mayo 10, 1912 Diciembre 28, 1912 Haiti Octubre 8, 1918 Agosto 27, 1919 Honduras Octubre 16, 1913 Enero 27, 1914 Mexico Nicaragua Marzo 10, 1913 Septiembre 15, 1913 Panama Junio 12, 1913 Agosto 25, 1913 Paraguay Mayo 29, 1917 Junio 20, 1917 Peru' Repu'blica Dominicana Abril 18, 1912 Julio 31, 1912 Uruguay Agosto 7, 1919 Diciembre 17, 1919 Venezuela

(1) Adhesi6n definitiva. CONVENCION MARCAS DE FABRICA Y COMERCIO

B UENOS AIRES, 1910

Sus Excelencias los Presidentes de los Estados Unidos de Ame- rica, de la Repulblica Argentina, del Brasil, de Chile, de Colombia, de Costa Rica, de Cuba, de la Replblica Dominicana, del Ecuador, de Guatemala, de Hait', de Honduras, de M~xico, de Nicaragua, de Pa- nama, del Paraguay, del Per6, de El Salvador, del Uruguay y de Ve- nezuela;

Deseando que sus palses respectivos fueran representados en la Cuarta Conferencia Internacional Americana, enviaron a ella, debidamente autorizados, para aprobar las Recomendaciones, Resoluciones, Convenciones y Tratados que juzgaren iitiles para los intereses de AmErica, a los siguientes Sefiores Delegados:

T Siguen los nombres de los sefores Delegados7

20 Quienes, despues de haberse comunicado sus poderes y encontrandolos en buena y debida forma, han acordado en celebrar la siguiente Convenci 6 n sobre Marcas de F~brica y de Comercio:

Art. 1. Las Naciones signatarias adoptan esta Convenci6n para la protecci 6 n de las Marcas de Fabrica y de Comercio, y Nombres Co- merciales.

Art. 2. Toda marca debidamente registrada en uno de los Esta- dos signatarios se considerar6 registrada tambien en los demas paises de la Union, sin perjuicio de los derechos de un tercero y de los preceptos de la legislaci6n interna de cada Naci6n. Para gozar de este beneficio, debera el industrial o comerciante interesado en el registro de la marca, contribuir, adem~s de los derechos o emolumentos fijados en la legislaci 6 n interna, con la suma de $50 (dollars) por una sola vez, que se destinara a cubrir los gastos de Registro Internacional de la respectiva Oficina.

Art. 3. El deposito de una Marca de Fabrica o de Comercio en uno de los Estados signatarios, crea a favor del depositante un derecho de prioridad durante un plazo de seis meses, con el fin de que pueda hacer el dep6sito en los otros Estados. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIA L

En consecuencia, el dep6sito hecho posteriormente antes del vencimiento de ese plazo, no podra anularse por actos ejecutados en el intervalo, especialmente por otro dep6sito, por la publicaci6n o el uso de la marca.

Art. 4. Se considera Marca de Comercio o de Fabrica, todo signo, emblema o nombre especial que los comerciantes o industriales adopten o apliquen en sus arti'culos o productos para distinguirlos de los de otros industriales o comerciantes que fabriquen o negocien en articulos de la misma especie.

Art. 5. No podran adoptarse o usarse como Marca de Fabrica o de Comercio las banderas o escudos nacionales, provinciales o municipales; las figuras inmorales o escandalosas; los distintivos que se hayan ya obtenido por otros o que den lugar a confusion con otras marcas; las denominaciones generales de arti'culos; los retratos o nombres de personas, sin su permiso; y cualquier dibujo que haya sido adoptado como emblema por alguna asociacion fraternal o humanitaria. El precepto anterior se entendera sin perjuicio de lo que disponga la legislaci6n interna de cada pals. 21

Art. 6. Las cuestiones que se susciten sobre prioridad del dep6- sito o adopci6n de una Marca de Comercio o de Fa'brica, se resolveran teniendo en cuenta la fecha del dep6sito en el pal's en que se hizo la primera solicitud.

Art. 7. La propiedad de una Marca de Comercio o de Flbrica comprende la facultad de gozar de los beneficios de la misma, y el derecho de ceder su propiedad o su uso, total o parcialmente, de conformidad con la legislacion interna.

Art. 8. La falsificacion, simulaci 6 n o uso indebido de una Mar- ca de Comercio o de Flbrica, asi"como la falsa indicaci6n de procedencia de un producto, ser6 perseguida por la parte interesada, de acuerdo con las leyes del Estado en cuyo territorio se haya cometido el delito. Se considera como parte interesada, para los efectos de este artr'culo, cualquier productor, fabricante o comerciante dedicado a la produccion, fabricacion o comercio de dicho producto, o en el caso de falsa indicacion de procedencia, el establecido en la localidad falsamente indicada como de procedencia, o en la regi6 n en que dicha localidad este situada.

Art. 9. Cualquier persona de uno de los Estados signatarios podra pedir y obtener, en cualquiera de los otros Estados, ante la auto- CONVENCION DE BUENOS AIRES (1910)

ridad judicial competente, la anulaci 6 n del registro de una Marca de Comercio o de Fabrica, cuando haya solicitado el registro de dicha Marca o de otra cualquiera que se pueda confundir en dicho Estado con aquella cuya anulaci6n interese, probando:

a) que la Marca, cuyo registro solicita, ha sido empleada o usada dentro del pai's con anterioridad al empleo o uso de la Marca registrada por el registrante, o por aquel o aquellos de quienes 61 la hubo;

b) que el registrante de la Marca cuya anulaci 6 n se pretende, tuviera conocimiento de la propiedad, empleo o uso de la Marca del solicitante en cualquiera de los Estados signatarios, con anterioridad al empleo o uso de la Marca registrada por el registrante, o por aqu6l a aqu'llos de quienes '1 la hubo;

c) que el registrante no teni'a derecho a la propiedad, uso o empleo, de la Marca registrada, en la fecha de su dep6sito;

22 d) que la Marca registrada no hubiera sido usada o empleada por el registrante o su causahabiente, dentro del plazo que marquen las leyes del Estado en que se haya verificado el registro.

Art. 10. Los nombres comerciales ser~n protegidos en todos los Estados de la Uni6n, sin obligaci6n de dep6sito o registro, formen o no parte de una Marca de Fabrica o de Comercio.

Art. 11. A los fines indicados en el presente Tratado se constituye una Uni6n de las Naciones Americanas que funcionar6 por medio de dos Oficinas establecidas, una en la ciudad de La Habana y otra en la de Rfo de Janeiro, en completa correlaci6n entre si'.

Art. 12. Las Oficinas Internacionales tendran las siguientes funciones:

. 1 a Llevar un registro de los certificados de propiedad de Mar- cas de Fabrica y de Comercio, que se expidan por alguno de los Esta- dos signatarios. a 2 . Reunir cuantos informes y datos tengan relacian con la protecci 6 n de la propiedad intelectual e industrial, y publicarlos y circu- larlos en las Naciones de la Uni6n, asi" como suministrarles cualquier informaci6n especial que necesiten sobre la materia. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

30. Fomentar el estudio y divulgaci 6 n de las cuestiones relativas a la protecci6n de la propiedad intelectual e industrial, publican- do al efecto una o mas revistas oficiales, en las cuales se insertaran, en su totalidad o en resumen, los documentos que remitan a la Ofici- na las autoridades de los Estados signatarios. Los Gobiernos de dichos Estados se comprometen a remitir a las Oficinas Internacionales Americanas las publicaciones oficiales que contengan declaraciones de registro de Marcas, nombres comerciales y concesiones de patentes, de privilegios, asi como las senten- cias de nulidad de Marcas o Patentes, pronunciadas por sus respectivos Tribunales. 40. Comunicar a los Gobiernos de los Estados de la Union cualquiera dificultad u obstaculo que se oponga o demore la eficaz aplicacion de esta Convenci6n.

0 5 . Concurrir con los Gobiernos de los Estados signatarios a la preparaci6n de Conferencias Internacionales para el estudio de legislaciones relativas a la propiedad industrial y las reformas que conven- ga introducir en el r~gimen de la Union o en los tratados vigentes so- 23 bre protecci 6 n de aqugllas. Los Directores de las Oficinas tendran el derecho de asistir a las sesiones de las Conferencias, con voz pero sin voto.

60. Presentar a los Gobiernos de Cuba y de los Estados Unidos del Brasil relaciones anuales de los trabajos realizados, comunicando- los al mismo tiempo a los Gobiernos de todos los dems Estados de la Union.

70. Iniciar y mantener relaciones con Oficinas an~logas y con Sociedades e Instituciones, cientificas e industriales,para el canje de publicaciones, informes y datos que tiendan al progreso del derecho de la propiedad industrial.

80. Investigar los casos en que las Marcas de Fabrica o de Co- mercio, los Dibujos o Modelos Industriales, no hayan sido reconocidos o registrados, de acuerdo con esta Convencion, por autoridades de alguno de los Estados de la Uni6n, comunicando los hechos e informando las razones aducidas al Gobierno del paris de origen y a los interesados.

9. Cooperar, como agentes de los Gobiernos de las Naciones signatarias, ante las autoridades respectivas, al mejor desempefio de cualquiera gesti 6 n que tenga por objeto promover o realizar los fines de esta Convenci 6 n. CONVENCION DE BUENOS AIRES (1910)

Art. 13. La Oficina establecida en la ciudad de La Habana, tendra a su cargo los registros de las Marcas de Comercio y de Fabrica que procedan de los Estados Unidos de America, Mexico, Cuba, Haitf, Reptblica Dominicana, El Salvador, Honduras, Nica- ragua, Costa Rica, Guatemala y Panama. La Oficina establecida en la ciudad de Rio de Janeiro tendrai a su cargo los registros de las Marcas de Comercio y de Fbrica que procedan del Brasil, Uruguay, Argentina, Paraguay, Bolivia, Chile, Peru', Ecuador, Venezuela y Colombia.

Art. 14. Las dos Oficinas Internacionales se considerar~n como una sola, y a los efectos de unificaci 6 n de los registros, se dispone:

a) que ambas Ileven los mismos libros y la misma contabilidad, bajo un identico sistema;

b) que cada semana se remitan, reci'procamente, copias de todas las solicitudes, registros, comunicaciones y demos documentos de los propietarios. 24 que se refieran al reconocimiento de los derechos Art. 15. Las Oficinas Internacionales se regir~n por un mismo Reglamento, redactado de acuerdo por los Gobiernos de las Repiiblicas de Cuba y los Estados Unidos del Brasil, y aprobados por todos los demos Estados signatarios. Los presupuestos de gastos seran aprobados por dichos Gobier- nos y costeados por todos los Estados signatarios, en una proporci6n igual a la establecida por la Oficina Internacional de las Repiblicas Americanas en Washington, y a ese respecto, esas Oficinas estar~n bajo el contralor de los Gobiernos en cuyos pai'ses tengan su asiento. Las Oficinas Internacionales podr~n adoptar los Reglamentos in- teriores que crean convenientes para el cumplimiento de lo estipulado en esta Convencion, siempre que no esten en contradiccion con los terminos de ella.

Art. 16. Los Gobiernos de las Repiiblicas de Cuba y de los Es- tados Unidos del Brasil procederan a la organizacion de las Oficinas de la Uni6n Internacional, de acuerdo con lo estipulado, tan pronto como haya sido ratificada esta Convenci6n por las dos terceras partes, a lo menos, de las Naciones pertenecientes a cada grupo. No seri necesario el establecimiento simultaneo de las dos Ofi- cinas, pudiendo instalarse una sola, si hubiese el niimero sefialado de Naciones signatarias. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Art. 17. Los Tratados sobre Marcas de Comercio o de Fabri- ca, celebrados con anterioridad entre los Estados signatarios, seran substitui'dos por esta Convenci6n desde la fecha de su ratificaci6n, en cuanto a las relaciones entre dichos Estados.

Art. 18. La ratificaci6n o adhesiones de las Naciones America- nas a esta Convenci6n ser~n comunicadas al Gobierno de la Repiiblica Argentina, que las hara saber a todos los demos Estados de la Uni6n. Esas comunicaciones haran Las veces de canje.

Art. 19. El Estado signatario que creyere conveniente desligar- se de esta Convencio'n, lo hart saber al Gobierno de la Reptlblica Ar- gentina, que lo comunicara a los demos Estados de la Uni6n; y un afio despues de recibida la comunicaci6n respectiva, cesara la vigencia de esta Convenci6n respecto del Estado que la hubiera denunciado.

En fe de lo cual los Plenipotenciarios y Delegados firman la presente Convenci6n y ponen en ella el sello de la Cuarta Conferencia In- ternacional Americana. 25 Hecho y firmado en la Ciudad de Buenos Aires, a los veinte dias del mes de agosto de mil novecientos diez, en espafiol, ingLbs, portugues y frances, y depositado en el Ministerio de Relaciones Exterio- res de la Repiiblica Argentina a fin de que se saquen copias certificadas para enviarlas, por la via dipl atica, a cada uno de Los Estados signatarios.

,FSiguen las firmas de los sefiores Delegados.7 CONVENCION MARCAS DE FABRICA Y COMERCIO

Suscrita el 20 de agosto de 1910, en la Cuarta Conferencia Internacional Americana Buenos Aires

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INSTR UMENTO DEL INSTRUMENTO PAISES SIGNATARIOS DE RATIFICACION DE RATIFICACION

Argentina Bolivia Mayo 19, 1914 (1) Brasil Febrero 9, 1915 Mayo 31, 1915 26 Colombia Costa Rica* Junio 20, 1916 Agosto 31, 1916 Cuba Noviembre 15, 1916 Febrero 23, 1917 Chile Ecuador Abril 8, 1914 Mayo 31, 1914 El Salvador Estados Unidos Marzo 21, 1911 Mayo 10., 1911 Guatemala* Mayo 10, 1912 Diciembre 28, 1912 Haitf Octubre 8, 1918 Agosto 27, 1919 Honduras* Octubre 16, 1913 Enero 27, 1914 Mexico Nic ar agua* Marzo 13, 1913 Septiembre 15, 1913 Panama Junio 12, 1913 Agosto 25, 1913 Paraguay Mayo 29, 1917 Junio 20, 1917 Peru' Octubre 22, 1921 Enero 13, 1922 Repulblica Dominicana Abril 18, 1912 Julio 31, 1912 Uruguay Agosto 7, 1919 Diciembre 17, 1919 Venezuela

(1) Adhesi6n definitiva.

* Denunciada por : Costa Rica, septiembre 30, 1921; Guatemala, marzo 18, 1920; Honduras, febrero 17, 1922; Nicaragua, julio 16, 1920. CONVENCION PARA LA PROTECCION DE MARCAS DE FABRICA, COMERCIO Y AGRICULTURA Y NOMBRES COMERCIALES

SANTIAGO DE CHILE, 1923

Sus Excelencias, los Presidentes de Venezuela, de Panama, de los Estados Unidos de Amrica, del Uruguay, del Ecuador, de Chile, de Guatemala, de Nicaragua, de Costa Rica, de los Estados Unidos del Brasil, de El Salvador, de Colombia, de Cuba, del Paraguay, de la Republica Dominicana, de Honduras, de la Repiiblica Argentina y de Haitf,

Deseando que sus pafses respectivos fueran representados en la Quinta Conferencia Internacional Americana, enviaron a ella debidamente autorizados para aprobar las Recomendaciones, Resoluciones, Convenciones y Tratados que juzgaren utiles para los intereses de Am6rica, a los siguientes Sefiores Delegados:

/-Siguen los nombres de los sefiores Delegados.7 21 Quienes, despues de haberse comunicado sus poderes y haberlos encontrado en buena y debida forma, han acordado celebrar la siguiente Convenci6n para la Protecci 6 n de Marcas de F~brica, Comercio y Agricultura y Nombres Comerciales, que reforma la de 1910:

Art. I. P~rrafo I. Las Altas Partes Contratantes convienen en que toda marca de f~brica, comercio o agricultura, registrada o depositada en uno de los Estados Signatarios de la Convenci6n, por persona domiciliada en cualquiera de ellos, directamente o por medio de representante legal, podr& obtener en los demos la misma protecci6n que estos otorguen a las marcas registradas o depositadas en su propio territorio, sin perjuicio de derechos de terceros y siempre que se Ilenen las formalidades y condiciones exigidas por la legislaci 6 n interna de cada Estado, y se cumpla con los siguientes requisitos:

a) El interesado en el registro o dep6sito de la marca, deber6 presentar a la respectiva Oficina Interamericana, por medio de la Ofi- cina correspondiente del Estado del primer registro o dep6sito, una solicitud de reconocimiento de los derechos que alegue, de acuerdo con los requisitos exigidos en el Ap6ndice, que se declara parte integrante de esta Convencion: PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

b) Pagara, ademas de los derechos e emolumentos fijados por la legislaci6n interna de cada Estado en que solicite el reconocimien- to de sus derechos, y los otros gastos que este reconocimiento ori- gine, una suma equivalente a cincuenta d6lares oro americano por una sola vez en cada perl'odo, y por una misma marca, que se destinara a cubrir los gastos de la respectiva Oficina Interamericana.

Parrafo 2. El peri'odo durante el cual se otorgue protecci 6 n, sera el mismo que acuerden a las marcas las leyes del respectivo Estado.

Parrafo 3. Al fin de cada peri'odo podra renovarse en cada Es- tado la protecci6n que otorga esta Convenci6n, previo cumplimiento de los requisitos establecidos en el inciso b) de este artlfculo. El interesado podr tambienplresentar directamente a la respectiva Oficina Interamericana la solicitud de renovacion.

P.rrafo 4. Los nombres comerciales, formen o no parte de una marca, ser6n protegidos con arreglo a la ley interna de cada Estado, 6 o registro. 28 en todos los Estados Signatarios, sin obligaci n de dep6sito Art. II. La fecha de presentaci 6 n en el pai's en que se haga la primera solicitud para el registro o dep 6 sito mediante la Oficina In- teramericana respectiva, determinar6, a falta de otros medios de prueba de la propiedad de la marca, la prioridad para el registro o dep6sito en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes.

Art. III. Pirrafo 1. Los Estados Contratantes, inmediatamente que reciban una solicitud de reconocimiento remitida por la Oficina Interamericana respectiva, determinaran conforme a sus propias leyes si puede concederse la proteccion, y notificaran su resolucion a la misma Oficina Interamericana a la mayor brevedad posible.

Parrafo 2. En caso de oposici6n al registro o dep6sito de una marca conforme a esta Convenci 6 n, el plazo para contestarla dentro del Estado en que se formule, empezara' a correr noventa di'as despues de remitido el aviso de la oposici 6 n a la Oficina Interamericana respectiva, la cual no tendra otra intervenci6n en el proceso a que de lugar oposiclon.

Art. IV. La transferencia de marca registrada o depositada en uno de los Estados Contratantes sera reconocida igualmente en cada uno de los otros Estados, con la misma fuerza y efectos que si se hubiese efectuado conforme a sus leyes respectivas, siempre que se trate de una marca que haya sido registrada o depositada en el Estado en que se solicite el reconocimiento de la transferencia con.forme a esta Con- CONVENCION DE CHILE (1923) venci 6 n, y mientras no se contrari'en las bases del Arti[culo V de esta Convenci6n. Se notificarai la transferencia por medio de la Admi- nistraci 6 n del Estado del primer registro o dep6sito y de la respectiva Oficina Interamericana, previo pago de los derechos que correspondan en cada Estado por dicha transferencia.

Art. V. Parrafo 1. En toda cuesti6n de [.ndole civil, criminal o administrativa que se suscite en un Estado con respecto a una marca, tal como oposicion, falsificacion, simulaci6n o apropiacion indebida, asi' como la falsa indicaci6n de procedencia de un producto, solo ser.n competentes las autoridades de ese mismo Estado, con sujecion a sus propias leyes.

P1rrafo 2. Cuando al propietario de una marca que pida el reconocimiento de derechos conforme a esta Convenci 6 n, se le niegue en uno de los Estados Signatarios la protecci6n que esta Convenci6n concede, y esa negativa se base en un registro previo o en una solicitud pendiente, el propietario tendra' derecho a solicitar la cancelaci 6 n de la marca registrada anteriormente y a obtener dicha cancelaci 6 n, si probare, conforme a los procedimientos legales del Estado en que se 29 solicite la cancelaci6n, esa negativa y ademas, lo siguiente :

a) Que gozaba de protecci 6 n legal para su marca en uno de los Estados Signatarios antes de la fecha de la solicitud del registro que trata de anular; o

b) Que el registrador no tenia derecho a la propiedad, uso o empleo de la marca registrada en la fecha de su dep6sito; o

c) Que ha sido abandonada la marca protegida por el registro cuya cancelacion solicita.

P~rrafo 3, transitorio. Los que hayan solicitado los beneficios de esta Convenci6n para sus marcas y no hayan obtenido protecci6n en algunos Estados, podran aprovecharse del derecho establecido en este Art'culo dentro del plazo de dos afios, contado desde la fecha en que esta Convenci 6 n reformada entre en vigor. Los que soliciten dichos beneficios posteriormente podr~n hacer valer este derecho dentro del termino de un afio, contado, en cada caso, desde el di'a siguiente a la fecha en que la Oficina Interamericana respectiva reciba el aviso de denegacion de la protecci 6 n.

P~rrafo 4. No ser~n objeto de este recurso las marcas cuyo registro o deposito sea ya inatacable, segun la ley nacional; pero podran serlo las renovaciones. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

P~rrafo 5. La comprobaci 6 n de que una marca de fibrica en- cubre o simula la calidad, naturaleza o procedencia reales de la mer- caderl'a que protege, es causa de anulacion del registro o deposito efectuado por medio de la Oficina Interamericana correspondiente.

Art. VI. Para los fines indicados en la presente Convenci 6 n, se constituye una Uni6n de las Naciones Americanas que funcionar6 por medio de dos Oficinas Interamericanas, establecidas, una en la ciudad de La Habana y otra en la de RIo de Janeiro.

Art. VII. Las Altas Partes Contratantes convienen en otorgar franqueo libre a la correspondencia oficial de las Oficinas.

Art. VIII. Las Oficinas Interamericanas para el registro de marcas tendran las siguientes funciones:

Prrafo I. Llevar nota circunstanciada de las solicitudes de reconocimiento de marcas que reciban por medio de las oficinas naciona- 3f les y tramiten para los efectos de esta Convenci6n, asi como de las transferencias y demas datos que a dichas marcas se refieran.

Parrafo 2. Comunicar a cada uno de los Estados Contratantes, las solicitudes de reconocimiento recibidas, para los efectos que correspondan.

Parrafo 3. Distribuir las cuotas que reciban, en conformidad a lo prescrito en el inciso b) del Artfculo I. Las Oficinas Interamericanas haran a los respectivos Gobiernos o a sus Agentes debidamente autorizados en La Habana y en Rio de Ja- neiro, si aquellos asi' lo resolvieren, los pagos estipulados, al tiempo de pedir el reconocimiento de los derechos alegados por el solicitante conforme a esta Convenci6n. El costo de la remesa de dichos pagos sera de cuenta del Estado a quien se haga. Las Oficinas Interamerica- nas harsn llegar a los interesados las sumas que les sean devueltas.

Parrafo 4. Comunicar al Estado de primer registro o dep 6 sito, para conocimiento del propietario de la marca, los avisos recibidos de los otros Estados, con respecto a la concesion, oposici 6 n o denegacion de protecci 6 n, o cualquiera otra circunstancia que se relacione con la marca.

P~rrafo 5. Publicar peri 6 dicamente boletines en que se d6 noti- cia de las solicitudes de protecci 6 n conforme a esta Convenci6n recibidas de los distintos Estados y remitidas a ellos, conforme a los preceptos de la Convenci6n, asf com o documentos, infoines, estudios y CONVENCION DE CHILE (1923) arti'culos sobre protecci 6 n de la propiedad industrial. Las Altas Partes Contratantes convienen en proporcionar a las Oficinas Interamericanas todas las gacetas, revistas y otras publicaciones oficiales que contengan noticias de registro de marcas de fabrica y nombres comerciales, asi como de las actuaciones judiciales y resoluciones relacionadas con esta materia.

Prrafo 6. Llevar a efecto toda investigaci 6 n que el Gobierno de cualquiera de los Estados Signatarios les pida sobre esta materia, y fomentar el estudio de problemas, dificultades u obstaculos que en- torpezcan el funcionamiento de la Convencion.

Pfirrafo 7. Cooperar con los Gobiernos de los Estados Contra- tantes en la preparaci 6 n del material para conferencias internacionales sobre esta materia; presentar a dichos Estados las indicaciones que estimen 6tiles y las opiniones que se les soliciten sobre las modificaciones que deban introducirse en la presente Convenci6n o las leyes que afecten la propiedad industrial y, en general, facilitar la rea- lizaci 6 n de los fines de esta Convenci 6 n. 31

Parrafo 8. Dar cuenta a los Gobiernos Contratantes, por lo menos una vez al affo, de los trabajos realizados por las Oficinas.

P~rrafo 9. Mantener relaciones con oficinas analogas, con sociedades y organizaciones cientificas e industriales, para el canje de publicaciones, informes y datos que tiendan al progreso del derecho de la propiedad industrial.

P~rrafo 10. Establecer, de acuerdo con las estipulaciones de esta Convencion, los preceptos que los Directores estimen necesarios para el manejo interno de las Oficinas.

Art. IX. La Oficina establecida en la ciudad de La Habana ges- tionar6 entre los Estados Contratantes el registro o dep6sito de las marcas de comercio, de f~brica y de agricultura que procedan de los Estados Unidos de Amrica, Cuba, Hait', Repiiblica Dominicana, Gua- temala, El Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Panama, Co- lombia y Ecuador. La Oficina establecida en la ciudad de Rfo de Janeiro gestionar6 el registro de las marcas que procedan del Brasil, Uruguay, la Repu'- blica Argentina, Paraguay, Chile y Venezuela.

Parrafo transitorio. La Oficina Interamericana de Rio de Janei- ro se instalara tan pronto como la presente Convenci6n haya sido ratificada por un tercio de los Estados Signatarios. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Art. X. Las dos Oficinas Interamericanas se consideraran como una sola y, con el objeto de uniformar sus procedimientos, se dispone:

a) Que ambas adopten un mismo sistema de libros y de contabilidad;

b) Que se remitan, recrprocamente, copias de todas las solicitudes, registros, comunicaciones y demos documentos que se refieran al reconocimiento de los derechos de los propietarios de marcas.

Art. XI. Las Oficinas Interamericanas se regiran por un mismo Reglamento, redactado de acuerdo entre los Gobiernos de la Repiublica de Cuba y de los Estados Unidos del Brasil.

Art. XII. Se dedicar6 al costo del sostenimiento y funcionamien- to de cada Oficina Interamericana la parte de los derechos recibidos por la misma, destinados a este prop 6 sito, conforme a lo determinado en esta Convencion, y el producto de la venta de sus publicaciones a 32 particulares; y si esas sumas no bastaren, el exceso del costo sera pagado por los Estados Contratantes en la forma siguiente:

El deficit total del presupuesto de funcionamiento de ambas Ofi- cinas ser6 cubierto en un ochenta por ciento por los Estados Contra- tantes en proporcion al numero de marcas que anualmente hayan hecho registrar por medio de las Oficinas Interamericanas, y el veinte por ciento restante, por los mismos Estados, en proporcion al numero de marcas que hayan registrado a pedido de las Oficinas Interamericanas. El saldo sobrante anual que hubiere en una Oficina, se aplicara a disminuir el deficit que pudiera haber en la otra. Las Oficinas Interamericanas no incurriran en gasto o compromi. so alguno que no aparezca en sus presupuestos definitivos y para el cual no existan fondos disponibles en la 4poca en que hubiera de incu- rrirse en dicho gasto o compromiso. El presupuesto provisional de gastos anuales de cada una de las Oficinas se someterA a la aprobaci6n del Gobierno del pai's en que tenga su sede, y se comunicara a los Estados Contratantes para las observaciones que juzguen conveniente hacer. La fiscalizaci6n de las cuentas de las Oficinas Interamericanas la hari el funcionario autorizado por el respectivo Gobierno, y su informe lo remitiran los Directores de las Oficinas a los Estados Con- tratantes, por la vi{a diplomatica.

Art. XIII. Las marcas que gocen de la protecci 6 n de la Conven- ci 6 n de 1910 continuaran siendo protegidas sin pago de derecho alguno CONVENCION DE CHILE (1923) a los Estados Contratantes. Las Altas Partes Contratantes convienen en continuar otorgan- do la protecci6n de sus leyes de acuerdo con la Convenci6n de 1910, si la hubieren ratificado, a todas las marcas que se reciban hasta el di'a en que rija en ellas la Convenci6n reformada.

Art. XIV. Las ratificaciones o adhesiones a esta Convencion seran comunicadas al Gobierno de la Repdiblica de Chile, el cual las haraJ saber a los demos Estados Signatarios o adherentes. Estas comunicaciones har~n las veces de canje de ratificaciones. La Conven- ci 6 n reformada entrar6 en vigor treinta dfas despuds de que reciba el Gobierno de Chile aviso de su ratificaci6n por un niimero de Estados que constituya un tercio de los Estados Signatarios; y desde ese mo- mento cesar6 la Convenci 6 n firmada el 20 de agosto de 1910, sin perjuicio de lo que se previene en el artlrculo XIII de la presente Conven- ci6n. El Gobierno de Chile se compromete a notificar, por las vfas telegr~ficas y postal, a todos los Estados Signatarios y adherentes, la fecha en que la Convenci6n en su forma actual entre en vigor con- 33 forme a lo prevenido en este artlculo.

Art. XV. Los Estados Americanos que no han estado representados en esta Conferencia podr~n adherirse a esta Convenci6n comunicando su decision en debida forma al Gobierno de la Rep~iblica de Chi- le, debiendo ser incorporados al grupo a que deseen pertenecer.

Art. XVI. El Estado Contratante que creyere conveniente desli- garse de esta Convenci6n lo har6 saber al Gobierno de la Repulblica de Chile, el cual lo comunicari a los demos Estados Signatarios; y, un afio despu~s de recibida la comunicaci 6 n respectiva, cesara la vigencia de esta Convenci6n respecto del Estado que la hubiere denunciado; pero esta denuncia no afectar6 los derechos previamente adquiridos conforme a esta Convenci 6 n.

Art. XVII. Las Oficinas Interamericanas continuar~n funcionando mientras permanezcan adheridos a la Convenci6n no menos de la mitad de los Estados ratificantes. Si el nirero de Estados adherentes a la Convenci6n se redujere a menos de la mitad, se liquidarin las Ofi- cinas bajo la direcci6n de los Gobiernos de Cuba y del Brasil, y se dis- tribuirin sus fondos entre los Estados adherentes en la misma proporci 6 n en que ellos, en su caso, hubieran de contribuir para sostenerla. Los edificios y otras propiedades materiales de las Oficinas pasar~n a ser propiedad de los Gobiernos de Cuba y del Brasil, respectivamente, en reconocimiento de los servicios de esas Repblicas para Ilevar a la pr~ctica la Convenci 6 n; pero dichos Gobiernos se comprometen a de- PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

dicar esas propiedades a objetos de caricter esencialmente interamericano. Las Altas Partes Contratantes convienen en aceptar como definitiva toda disposicion que se tome para la liquidacion de las Oficinas. 6 La termjnacion de la Convenci n no afectara los derechos adquiridos durante el tiempo en que haya estado en vigor.

Art. XVIII. Las diferencias entre los Estados Contratantes rela- 6 6 tivas a la interpretacion o ejecuci n de esta Convenci n, se decidiran por arbitraje.

APENDICE

Disposiciones Reglamentarias

6 Art. I. Toda solicitud para obtener protecci n conforme a la Con- venci 6 n de la cual forma parte este Apendice, debe ser presentada por el dueffo de la marca o su representante legal a la Administracion del Es- tado de primer registro o dep6sito, de la manera prescrita por los re- 34 glamentos respectivos, y acompafiada de un giro pagadero al Director de la Oficina Interamericana respectiva, por la suma correspondiente segun la Convencion. La solbcitud y el giro deberan ir acompafiados de un clise que reproduzca la marca como haya sido registrada en el Esta- do de primer registro o dep6sito, y con las dimensiones exigidas en el Estado de primer registro o dep6sito.

6 Art. II. Luego que dicha Administraci n Nacional se cerciore de que el registro de la marca es regular y estan en vigor, transmitira a la Oficina Interamericana correspondiente:

a) El giro; b) El clise de la marca; c) Un certificado por duplicado que contenga los siguientes datos:

1. El nombre y direcci6n del propietario de la marca;

2. La fecha de la solicitud de registro en el Estado de primer registro o dep6sito;

3. La fecha del registro de la marca en el mismo Estado;

4. El n mero de orden de este registro;

6 5. La fecha en que expire la protecci n de la marca en el Estado de primer registro o dep6sito; CONVENCION DE CHILE (1923)

6. Un facsimile de la marca;

7. Una especificaci 6 n de los productos en que se usa la marca;

8. La fecha de solicitud de reconocimiento de derechos conforme a esta Convenci6n. Cuando el solicitante deseare que el color sea protegido como elemento distintivo de la marca, enviari treinta copias de la marca impresas en papel, con los colores reproducidos, y una breve descrip- cion de la misma.

Art. III. La Oficina Interamericana respectiva, al recibir de la Oficina del Estado dfI primer registro o dep6sito la comunicaci 6 n mencionada en el articulo anterior, inscribira todos los datos en sus libros y notificara a la Oficina del Estado remitente el recibo de la solicitud, y el nimero y la fecha del asientoo

Art. IV. La Oficina Interamericana respectiva enviara copias 35 de la partida del asiento, que contengan todos los detalles necesarios, a las Administraciones de los Estados en donde la Convenci6n haya sido ratificada y se solicite la protecci6n; y, con fines puramente infor- mativos, a los dema's Estados Contratantes.

Art. V. Las Oficinas Interamericanas publicarin en sus boletines reproducciones de las marcas recibidas y los datos que sean necesarios.

Art. VI. El aviso de aceptaci 6 n, oposici 6 n o rechazo de una marca por parte de los Estados Contratantes, sera transmitido por la Ofi- cina Interamericana respectiva a la Administraci6n del Estado de primer registro o dep6sito para que 6sta lo comunique a los interesados.

Art. VII. Las Oficinas Interamericanas anotaran en sus libros los carnbios de propiedad de marcas que se les comuniquen y enviardn la notificaci 6 n correspondiente a los otros Estados Contratantes.

Art. VIII. Los Directores de las Oficinas Interamericanas nom- braran o removeran a su arbitrio a los funcionarios o empleados de sus Oficinas, y comunicar~n estas determinaciones a los Gobiernos de los paises en que tengan su sede.

-En testimonio de lo cual, firman y sellan la presente Convenci6n en Santiago de Chile, a los veintiocho di'as del mes de Abril del afio mil novecientos veintitres, en castellano, ingles, portugues y frances. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Esta Convenci6n se depositara' en el Ministerio de Relacio- nes Exteriores de la Repulblica de Chile a fin de que se saquen copias certificadas para enviarlas, por la via diplomatica, a cada unc de los Estados Signatarios.

/-Siguen las firmas de los sefiores Delegados.7 CONVENCION PARA LA PROTECCION DE MARCAS DE FABRICA, COMERCIO Y AGRICULTURA Y NOMBRES COMERCIALES

Suscrita el 28 de abril de 1923, en la Quinta Conferencia Internacional Americana Santiago de Chile

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INSTRUMENTO DEL INSTRUMENTO DE RATIFICACION PAISES SIGNATARIOS DE RATIFIC ACION

Argentina Octubre 8, 1924 Brasil Agosto 13, 1924 Colombia Costa Rica Enero 17, 1925 Cuba Agosto 2, 1924 Chile Ecuador El Salvador Junio 25, 1925 Estados Unidos Abril 7, 1925 Guatemala Agosto 19, 1926 Hait" Mayo 15, 1925 Honduras Nicaragua Panama Junio 23, 1925 Paraguay Mayo 20, 1925 Junio 7, 1926 Republica Dominicana Abril 12, 1926 Abril 18, 1928 Uruguay Marzo 16, 1928 Venezuela CONVENCION GENERAL INTERAMERICANA DE PROTECCION MARCARIA Y COMERCIAL

WASHINGTON, 1929

Los Gobiernos de Peru, Bolivia, Paraguay, Ecuador, Uruguay, Republica Dominicana, Chile, Panama, Venezuela, Costa Rica, Cuba, Guatemala, Haiti, Colombia, Brasil, Mexico, Nicaragua, Honduras y Estados Unidos de America, representados en la Conferencia Paname- ricana de Marcas de Fa'brica reunida en Washington conforme a las Resoluciones aprobadas el 15 de febrero de 1928 por laSextaConferen- cia Internacional Americana celebrada en la ciudad de la Habana y el 2 de mayo del mismo afio, en Washington, por el Consejo Directivo de la Union Panamericana,

Considerando indispensable revisar la "Convenci 6 n para la Pro- teccion de las Marcas de F~brica, Comercio y Agricultura y Nombres Comerciales" firmada en Santiago de Chile el 28 de abril de 1923 que sustituyo a la "Convencion para la Proteccion de Marcas de Fabrica y de Comercio" celebrada en Buenos Aires el 20 de agosto de 1910, a fin 38 de introducir en ella las reformas aconsejadas por la praictica y el progreso del derecho;

Animados por el prop 6 sito de hacer compatibles los distintos sistemas juridicos que en esta materia rigen en las varias Republicas Americanas; y

Convencidos de la necesidad de realizar ese esfuerzo en la forma mas amplia que sea posible en las circunstancias actuales con el debido respeto a las respectivas legislaciones nacionales,

Han resuelto negociar la presente Convenci6n para la protecci6n marcaria y comercial y la represi6 n de la competencia desleal y de las falsas indicaciones de origen geogr~fico, nombrando para ese fin los siguientes delegados:

f-Siguen los nombres de los sefiores Delegados./

Quienes, despu~s de haber depositado sus credenciales, que fueron halladas en buena y debida forma por la Conferencia, han convenido lo siguiente : PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

CAPITULO I.

DE LA IGUALDAD DE NACIONALES Y EXTRANJEROS ANTE LA PROTECCION MARCARIA Y COMERCIAL

Arti'culo I.

Los Estados Contratantes se obligan a otorgar a los nacionales de los otros Estados Contratantes y a los extranjeros domiciliados que posean un establecimiento fabril o comercial o una explotaci6n agri'cola en cualquiera de los Estados que hayan ratificado o se hayan adherido a la presente Convenci6n, los mismos derechos y acciones que las leyes respectivas concedan a sus nacionales o domiciliados con relacion a marcas de fabrica, comercio o agricultura, a la protecci 6 n del nombre comercial, a la represi 6 n de la competencia desleal y de las falsas indicaciones de origen o procedencia geogr~ficos.

CAPITULO I.

DE LA PROTECCION MARCARIA 39

Arti'culo 2.

El que desee obtener protecci 6 n para sus marcas en un pa's distinto al suyo en que esta Convenci6n rija, podr obtener dicha protecci 6 n bien solicit!ndola directamente de la oficina correspondiente del Estado en que desee obtener la referida protecci 6 n, o por medio de la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas a que se refiere el Protocolo sobre Registro Interamericano, siempre que dicho Protocolo haya sido acep- tado por su pal's y por la naci 6 n donde se solicite la proteccion.

Arti'culo 3.

Toda marca debidamente registrada o legalmente protegida en uno de los Estados Contratantes seri admitida a registro o dep6sito y protegida legalmente en los demars Estados Contratantes, previo el cumplimiento de los requisitos formales establecidos por la ley nacional de dichos Estados. Podr6 denegarse o cancelarse el registro o dep6sito de marcas

1. Cuyos elementos distintivos violen los derechos previamente adquiridos por otra persona en el pal's donde se solicita el registro o dep~sito. CONVENCION DE WASHINGTON (1929)

2. Que est~n desprovistas de todo caracter distintivo o con- sistan exclusivamente en palabras, signos o indicaciones que sirven en el comercio para designar la clase, especie, calidad, cantidad, destino, valor, lugar de origen de los productos, 4poca de producci 6 n, o que son o hayan pasado a ser genericas o usuales en el len- guaje corriente o en la costumbre comercial del pals al iempo en que se solicite el registro o dep6sito, cuando el propietario de la marca las reivindique o pretenda reivindicarlas como elementos distintivos de la misma. Para determinar el car~cter distintivo de una marca, deberan to- marse en consideraci6n todas las circunstancias existentes, en especial la duraci6n del uso de la marca y si dicha marca ha adquirido de hecho en el pal's en que se solicite el dep6sito, registro o proteccion, una significaci6n distintiva de la mercanci'a del solicitante. 3. Que ofendan a la moral piiblica o sean contrarias al orden publico. 4. Que ridiculicen o tiendan a ridiculizar personas, instituciones, de interes publico. 40 creencias o simbolos nacionales o de asociaciones 5. Que contengan representaciones de tipos raciales o paisajes tfpicos o caracterfsticos de cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes distinto al de origen de la marca.

6. Que tengan entre sus elementos distintivos principales, frases, nombres o lemas que constituyan el nombre comercial o la parte esencial o caracteristica del mismo, perteneciente a alguna persona dedicada a la fabricacion, comercio o produccion de articulos o mercancias de la misma clase a que se destine la marca, en cualquiera de los demos paises contratantes.

Articulo 4.

Los Estados Contratantes acuerdan rehusar o cancelar el registro o deposito y prohibir el uso sin autorizacion de la autoridad competente, de las marcas que incluyan banderas nacionales o de los estados, escudos de armas, sellos nacionales o de los estados, dibujos de las mone- das piiblicas o de los sellos de correo, certificados o sellos oficiales de garantia, o cualesquiera insignias oficiales, nacionales o de los estaclos, o imitaciones de las mismas.

Arti'culo 5.

Las etiquetas, dibujos industriales, lemas, catalogos, anuncios o avisos que se usen para identificar o anunciar mercancias, gozar~n de PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIA L la misma protecci 6 n que las marcas en los Estados Contratantes cu- yas leyes as( lo dispongan, de acuerdo con las prescripciones de la legislaci6n local.

Artfculo 6.

Los Estados Contratantes se comprometen a admitir a registro o dep6sito y a proteger las marcas de propiedad colectiva o que pertenezcan a asociaciones cuya existencia no sea contraria a las leyes del pai's de origen, adn cuando dichas colectividades no posean un establecimien- to fabril, industrial, comercial o agri'cola. Cada pai's determinara las condiciones particulares bajo las cuales se podr~n protegex las marcas de dichas colectividades. Los Estados, Provincias o Municipios en su caracter de personas juridicas, podrin poseer, usar, registrar o depositar marcas y gozaran en tal sentido de los beneficios de esta Convencion.

Arti'culo 7.

Todo propietario de una marca legalmente protegida en uno de 41 los Estados Contratantes conforme a su legislaci 6 n interna, que tenga conocimiento de que alguna persona o entidad usa o pretende registrar o depositar una marca sustancialmente igual a la suya o susceptible de producir confusi 6 n o error en el adquirente o consumidor de los productos o mercanci'as a que se apliquen, tendr6 el derecho de oponerse al uso, registro o dep6sito de la misma, empleando los medios, procedimientos y recursos legales establecidos en el pal's en que se use o pretenda registrar o depositar dicha marca, probando que la persona que la usa o intenta registrar o depositar, teni'a conocimiento de la existencia y uso en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes, de la marca en que se funde la oposici 6 n y que 5 sta se usaba y aplicaba y continua usandose y aplicandose a productos o mercancias de la misma clase; y, en consecuencia, podra' reclamar para si el derecho a usar preferente y exclusivamente, o la prioridad para registrar o depositar su marca en el pal's de que se trate siempre que Ilene las formalidades establecidas en la legislaci 6 n interna y en esta Convencion.

Arti'culo 8.

Cuando el propietario de una marca solicite su registro o dep6si- to en otro de los Estados Contratantes distinto al del de origen de la marca, y se le niegue por existir un registro o dep6sito previo de otra marca que lo impida por su identidad o manifiesta semejanza capaz de crear confusi 6 n, tendr derecho a solicitar y obtener la cancelaci6n o anulaci 6 n del registro o dep6sito anteriormente efectuado, probando, CONVENCION DE WASHINGTON (1929)

conforme a los procedimientos legales del Estado en que se solicite la cancelacion:

(a) que gozaba de protecci 6 n legal para su marca en uno de los Estados Contratantes con anterioridad a la fecha de la solicitud del registro o dep6sito que trata de anular; y

(b) que el propietario de la marca cuya cancelaci6n se pretende teni'a conocimiento del uso, empleo, registro o dep6sito en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes, de la marca en que se funda la accion de nulidad, para los mismos productos o mercancias a que especificamen- te se aplique, con anterioridad a la adopcion y uso o a la presentacion de la solicitud de registro o dep 6 sito de la marca que se trata de cancelar; o

(c) que el propietario de la marca, que solicite la cancelaci6n basado en un derecho preferente a la propiedad y uso de la misma, haya comerciado y comercie con o en el pals en que se solicite la cance- 42 laci6n y que en este hayan circulado y circuen los productos o mercancias sefialados con su marca desde fecha anterior a la presentaci6n de la solicitud de registro o dep6sito de la marca cuya cancelaci6n se pretende, o de la adopcion y uso de la misma.

Artfculo 9.

Cuando la denegacion del registro o deposito de una marca se base en un registro previo hecho de acuerdo con esta Convenci6n, el propietario de la marca de que se trate tendra el derecho de pedir y de obtener la cancelaci6n de la marca previamente registrada o depositada, probando, de acuerdo con los procedimientos legales del pai's en que trata de obtener el registro o dep6sito de su marca, que el registrante de la marca que desea cancelar la ha abandonado. El termino para declarar abandonada una marca por falta de uso sera el que determine la ley nacional, y en su defecto, sera de dos afos y un dfa a contar desde la fecha del registro o dep 6 sito si la marca no ha sido nunca empleada, o de un aflo y un dia si el abandono o falta de empleo tuvo lugar despues de haber sido usada.

Artculo 10.

El perfiodo de protecci6n otorgado a las marcas registradas o depositadas de acuerdo con los terminos de esta Convenci6n, as('como sus renovaciones, sera el que fijen las leyes del Estado en que se solicite el registro o dep6sito al tiempo de solicitarse la protecci6n de acuerdo con esta Convenci6n. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Una vez efectuado el registro o deposito de una marca en cada Estado Contratante, existira independientemente y no sera afec- tado por los cambios que ocurran en el registro o dep6sito de dicha marca en otros Estados Contratantes, salvo que otra cosa disponga la legislaci 6 n interna de cada Estado Contratante.

Artculo 11.

La transmision en el pal's de origen de la propiedad de una marca registrada o depositada, tendr9 el mismo valor y ser, reconocida en los demos Estados Contratantes, siempre que se acompafien pruebas fehacientes de que dicha transmisi6n se ha efectuado y registrado de acuerdo con la legislaci 6 n interna del Estado en que se realiz6, y se cumpla ademrs con los requisitos legales del pal's en que debe tener efecto la trasmision. El uso y explotaci 6 n de las marcas puede cederse o traspasarse separadamente para cada pals, y se registrar6 siempre que se acompafien pruebas fehacientes de que dicha trasmisi6n se ha efectuado de acuerdo con la legislaci 6 n interna del Estado en que se realiz6 , y se cumpla adems con los requisitos legales del pals en que debe tener 43 efecto la trasmisi6n.

Artculo 12.

Cualquier registro o deposito efectuado en uno de los Estados Contratantes, o cualquiera solicitud de registro o dep6sito pendiente de resolver, hecha por un agente, representante o cliente del propietario de una marca sobre la que se haya adquirido derecho en otro Estado Contratante por su registro, solicitud previa o uso como tal marca, da- r derecho al primitivo propietario a pedir su cancelaci 6 n o denegaci6n de acuerdo con las estipulaciones de esta Convenci6n y a solicitar y obtener la protecci 6 n para sr, consider~ndose que dicha protecci6n se retrotraera a la fecha de la solicitud cancelada o denegada.

Artrculo 13.

El uso de una marca por su propietario en una forma distinta de la forma en que la marca ha sido registrada en cualquiera de los Esta- dos Contratantes, por lo que respecta a elementos secundarios o no substanciales, no acarrear6 la nulificaci6n del registro ni afectara la proteccion de la marca. En caso de que la forma o los elementos distintivos de la marca sean sustancialmente cambiados, o que sea modificada o aumentada la lista de los productos a que vaya a aplicarse, podri exigirse al propietario que solicite un nuevo registro, sin perjuicio de la protecci6n de CONVENCION DE WASHINGTON (1929)

la marca original o de la lista original de los productos. Los requisitos que las leyes de los Estados Contratantes exi- jan con respecto a la leyenda que indica la autorizaci6n del uso de las marcas, se consideraran satisfechos por lo que toca a los productos de origen extranjero, si dichas marcas llevan las palabras o indicaciones autorizadas legalmente en el pars de origen de los productos.

CAPITULO III.

DE LA PROTECCION DEL NOMBRE COMERCIAL

Art~culo 14.

El nombre comercial de las personas naturales o juri'dicas domiciliadas o establecidas en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes sera protegido en todos los demos sin necesidad de registro o dep 6 sito, forme o no parte de una marca.

44 Artfculo 15.

Se entendera por nombre comercial el propio nombre y apellidos que el fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor particular use en su negocio para darse a conocer como tal, as' como la razon social, denominaci6n o trtulo adoptado y usado legalmente por las sociedades, corporaciones, compaff'as o entidades fabriles, industriales, comerciales o agrr'colas, de acuerdo con las disposiciones de sus respectivas leyes nacionales.

Arti'culo 16.

La proteccion que esta Convencic'n otorga a los nombres comerciales consistira:

(a) en la prohibicio'n de usar o adoptar un nombre comercial identico o engafiosamente semejante al legalmente adoptado y usado por otro fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor dedicado al propio giro en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes; y

(b) en la prohibicio'n de usar, registrar o depositar una marca cuyo elemento distintivo principal este formado por todo o parte esencial del nombre comercial legal y anteriormente adoptado y usado por otra persona natural o juri'dica domiciliada o establecida en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes y dedicada a la fabricaci6n o comercio de productos o mercancfas de la propia clase a que se destine la marca. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Arti'culo 17.

Todo fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor domici- liado o establecido en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes podra oponerse dentro de los terminos y por los procedimientos legales del pafs de que se trate, a la adopci6n, uso, registro o dep6sito de una marca destinada a productos o mercancfas de la misma clase que constituya su giro o explotaci6n, cuando estime que el o los elementos distintivos de tal marca puedan producir en el consumidor error o confusion con su nombre comercial, legal y anteriormente adoptado y usado.

Artculo 18.

Todo fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor domicilia- do o establecido en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes podra solicitar y obtener de acuerdo con las disposiciones y preceptos legales del pal's respectivo, la prohibici6n de usar, o la cancelaci 6 n del registro o deposito de cualquier nombre comercial o marca destinados a la fabricacion, comercio o produccion de articulos o mercanci'as de la misma clase en que 4l trafica, probando : 45

(a) que el nombre comercial o marca cuya cancelaci6n pretende es sustancialmente identico o engafiosamente semejante a su propio nombre comercial legalmente adoptado y usado con anterioridad en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes para la fabricaci6n o comercio de productos o mercancfas de la misma clase, y

(b) que con anterioridad a la adopci6n y uso del nombre comercial, o a la adopcion y uso o solicitud de registro o dep 6 sito de la marca cuya cancelaci 6 n pretende, empleoy que continua empleando en la fabricacion o comercio de los mismos productos o mercancfas su propio nombre comercial, legal y anteriormente adoptado y usado en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes, en o dentro del Estado enque solicite la cancelacion.

Artfculo 19.

La protecci 6 n del nombre comercial se impartir£i de acuerdo con la legislaci 6 n interna y las estipulaciones de esta Convenci6n, de oficio, cuando las autoridades gubernativas o administrativas competentes tengan conocimiento o pruebas ciertas de su existencia y uso legal, o a peticion de parte interesada en los casos comprendidos en los artfculos anteriores. CONVENCION DE WASHINGTON (1929)

CAPITULO IV.

DE LA REPRESION DE LA COMPETENCIA DESLEAL

Arti'culo 20.

Todo acto o hecho contrario a la buena fe comercial o al normal y honrado desenvolvimiento de las actividades irdustriales o mercantiles sera considerado cono de competencia desleal y, por tanto, injus- to y prohibido.

Artfculo 21.

Se declaran de competencia desleal los siguientes actos, y al no estar sefialadas sus penas en la legislaci 6 n interna de cada Estado Con- tratante, se reprimir'n de acuerdo con las prescripciones de esta Con- vencion:

46 (a) Los Actos que tengan por objeto dar a entender, directa o indirectamente, que los artfculos a actividades mercantiles de un fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor pertenecen o corresponden a otro fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor de alguno de los otros Estados Contratantes, ya sea apropiandose o simulando marcas, simbolos, nombres distintivos, imitando etiquetas, envases, recipientes, nombres comerciales u otros medios usuales de identifi- cacion en el comercio.

(b) Las falsas descripciones de los artfculos, usando palabras, sirmbolos y otros medios que tiendan a engafiar al publico en el pa's donde estos actos ocurran, con respecto a la naturaleza, calidad o utilidad de las mercancias.

(c) Las falsas indicaciones de origen o procedencia geograficos de los artirculos, por medio de palabras, si'mbolos, o de otra manera, que tiendan a engafiar en ese respecto al publico del pal's donde estos hechos ocurran.

(d) Lanzar al mercado u ofrecer o presentar en venta al puiblico un artf'culo, producto o mercancia bajo forma o aspecto tales que aun cuando no contenga directa ni indirectamente indicaci6n de origen o procedencia geograficos determinados, de o produzca la impresion, ya por los dibujos, elementos ornamentales o idioma empleado en el tex- to, de ser un producto, articulo o mercancia original, manufacturado o producido en otro de los Estados Contratantes. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

(e) Cualesquiera otros hechos o actos contrarios a la buena fe en materias industriales, comerciales o agrlcolas que, por su naturaleza o finalidad, puedan considerarse analogos o asimilables a los anteriormente mencionados.

Artfculo 22.

Los Estados Contratantes que an no hayan legislado sobre los actos de competencia desleal mencionados en este capitulo, aplicaran a ellos las sanciones contenidas en su legislacion sobre marcas, o en cualesquiera otras leyes, y ordenaran la suspension de dichos actos a petici6n de las personas perjudicadas, ante las cuales los causantes seran tambien respons-ables por los dafios y perjuicios que les hayan ocasionado.

CAPITULO V.

DE LA REPRESION DE LAS FALSAS INDICACIONES DE ORIGEN Y PROCEDENCIA GEOGRAFICOS 47 Artfculo 23.

Sera considerada falsa e ilegal, y por tanto prohibida, toda indi- caci6n de origen o procedencia que no corresponda realmente al lugar en que el arti'culo, producto o mercancfa fue fabricado, manufacturado o recolectado.

Artrculo 24.

A los efectos de esta Convenci 6 n se considerara como indicaci6n de origen o procedencia geograficos, consignar o hacer aparecer en alguna marca, etiqueta, cubierta, envase, envoltura, prescinta, de cualquier articulo, producto o mercancfa, o directamente sobre el mismo, el nombre geogr~fico de una localidad, regi 6 n, pa's o naci6n determinada, bien sea de modo expreso y directo, o indirectamente, siempre que dicho nombre geografico sirva de base o ral'z a las frases, palabras o expresiones que se empleen.

Artfculo 25.

Los nombres geogr~ficos que indiquen origen o procedencia no son susceptibles de apropiaci 6 n individual, pudiendo usarlos libremente para indicar el origen o procedencia de los productos o mercancfas o su propio domicilio comercial, cualquier fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor establecido en el lugar indicado o que comercie con CONVENCION DE WASHINGTON (1929)

los productos que seoriginenen este.

Articulo 26.

La indicaci6n de origen o procedencia geogr~ficos, fijada o estampada sobre un producto o mercanci'a, debera corresponder exac- tamente al lugar en que dicho producto o merc ancia ha sido fabricado, manufacturado o recolectado.

Artrculo 27.

Quedan exceptuadas de las disposiciones contenidas en los anteriores artculos aquellas denominaciones, frases o palabras que, cons- tituyendo en todo o en parte terminos geograficos, hayan pasado, por los usos constantes, universales y honrados del comercio, a formar el nombre o designaci6n propias del artrculo, producto o mercancia a que se apliquen, no estando comprendidas, sin embargo, en esta excepci6n las indicaciones regionales de origen de productos industriales o agri'- colas cuya calidad y aprecio por parte del p,6blico consumidor dependa 48 del lugar de producci6n u origen.

Arltculo 28.

A falta de disposiciones especiales que repriman las falsas indicaciones de origen o procedencia geograficos, se aplicaran a este fin las respectivas leyes sanitarias o las referentes a la protecci6n marcaria en los Estados Contratantes.

CAPITULO VI.

DE LAS SANCIONES

Artrculo 29.

Queda prohibido manufacturar, exportar, importar, distribuir, o vender artfculos o productos que infrinjan directa o indirectamente alguna de !as modalidades seffaladas en esta Convenci6n para la protec- ci6nmarcaria,la protecci6n y defensa del nombre comercial, la repre- si6n de la competencia desleal, y la represi6n de las falsas indicaciones de origen o procedencia geogr~ficos.

Artrculo 30.

Cualquier acto de los prohibidos por esta Convencio'n sera repri- mido por las autoridades gubernativas, administrativas 0 judiciales PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIA L competentes del Estado en que se cometa, por los medios y procedimientos legales que en dicho pa's rijan, ya de oficio, ya a petici 6 n de parte interesada, la que podr6 ejercitar las acciones y derechos que las leyes le concedan para ser indemnizada de los daflos y perjuicios recibidos, pudiendo ser decomisados, destrufdos o inutilizados, segun el caso, los articulos, productos o mercancas, o sus distintivos, que hayan sido objeto del acto de competencia desleal.

Artfculo 31.

Cualquier fabricante, industrial, comerciante o agricultor interesado en la producci6n, fabricaci6n o comercio de las mercanci-as o arti'culos afectados por el acto o hecho prohibido, asi' como sus agentes, representantes o apoderados en cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes y los funcionarios consulares del Estado a que corresponda la localidad o regi 6 n falsamente indicada cuando se trate de un caso de falsa indi- caci6n de origen o procedencia geograficos, tendr~n personalidad legal suficiente para ejercitar las acciones y recursos correspondientes y continuarlos por todos sus tramites ante las autoridades administrativas y tribunales de justicia de los Estados Contratantes. 49 Igual personalidad tendran las comisiones o instituciones oficiales y los sindicatos o asociaciones que representen a la industria, a la agricultura o al comercio, legalmente establecidas para la defensa de los procedimientos honrados y leales.

CAPITULO VII.

DISPOSICIONES COMUNES

Arti'culo 32.

Las autoridades administrativas y los tribunales de justicia de cada Estado Contratante son los iinicos competentes para resolver los ex- pedientes administrativos y los juicios contencioso-administrativos, civiles o criminales que se incoaren con motivo de la aplicaci6n de las leyes nacionales. Las dudas que se suscitaren acerca de la interpretacion o aplicaci 6 n de los preceptos de esta Convencion seran resueltas por los tribunales de justicia de cada Estado y solo en el caso de denegacion de justicia serin sometidas a arbitraje.

Artculo 33.

Cada uno de los Estados Contratantes en que no exista, se compromete a establecer un servicio para la protecci 6 n marcaria y la represi6n CONVENCION DE WASHINGTON (1929)

de la competencia desleal y de las falsas indicaciones de origen o procedencia geograficos, debiendo publicar en el peri6dico oficial del Gobierno, o en otra forma peri6dica, las marcas solicitadas y concedidas y las decisiones administrativas recai'das en esta materia.

Artfculo 34.

La presente Convenci 6 n sera susceptible de revisiones peri6di- cas con objeto de introducir en ella las mejoras que la experiencia indique, aprovechandose de la oportunidad de la celebraci 6 n de las conferencias internacionales arnericanas, recomendandose que cada pal's envie en su delegaci 6 n expertos en materias marcarias para que puedan realizar un trabajo efectivo. La administracion del Estado donde deba celebrarse la Confe- rencia preparara sus trabajos con la ayuda de la Uni6n Panamericana y de la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas. El director de la Oficina Interamericana podra asistir a las sesiones de la conferencia y tomara parte en las discusiones con voz, pe- 50 ro sin voto.

Arltrculo 35.

Las estipulaciones contenidas en esta Convenci6n tendran fuerza de ley en aquellos Estados en que los tratados internacionales tienen ese caracter tan pronto como son ratificados por sus 6 rganos consti- tucionale s. Los Estados Contratantes en que el cumplimiento de los pactos internacionales este subordinado a la promulgaci6n de leyes concomi- tantes, al aceptar en principio esta Convenci 6 n se obligan a solicitar de sus organos legislativos la adopcion, en el mas breve plazo posible, de la legislaci 6 n que sea necesaria para ponerla en vigor, de acuerdo con sus prescripciones constitucionales. Artrculo 36.

Los Estados Contratantes convienen en que, tan pronto como esta Convenci 6 n entre en vigor, las Convenciones sobre Marcas de Fabri- ca de 1910 y 1923 quedaran automiticamente sin efecto alguno, pero cualesquiera derechos que de acuerdo con sus estipulaciones se hayan adquirido o puedan adquirirse hasta la fecha en que entre en vigor esta Convenci6n, continuar~n siendo v~lidos hasta que expiren.

Articulo 37.

La presente Convenci6n sera ratificada por los Estados Contra- PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL tantes de acuerdo con sus procedimientos constitucionales. La Convenci 6 n original y los instrumentos de ratificaci6n se- r~n depositados en la Uni6n Panamericana, la que enviara copia certificada del primero y comunicar i aviso del recibo de dichas ratificaciones a los Gobiernos de los Estados Contratantes, entrando la Convenci6n en vigor entre los Estados Contratantes en el orden en que vayan depositando sus ratificaciones. Esta Convenci6n regira indefinidamente, pero podr6 ser denunciada mediante aviso anticipado de un afio, transcurrido el cual, cesara en sus efectos para el Estado denunciante, quedando subsistente para los demos contratantes. La denuncia sera dirigida a la Uni6n Panamericana, la que trasmitir6 aviso de su recibo a los Gobiernos de todos los demos Estados. Los Estados Americanos que no hayan suscrito esta Convenci6n podr~n adherirse a ella, enviando el instrumento oficial en que se con- signe esta adhesion a la Uni6n Panamericana, la que notificara aviso de su recibo a los Gobiernos de los demos Estados Contratantes en la forma antes expresada.

En testimonio de lo cual, los delegados arriba nombrados firman 51 la presente Convenci6n en espafiol, ingles, portugues y frances y es- tampan sus respectivos sellos.

Hecha en la ciudad de Washington, a los veinte dias del mes de febrero de mil novecientos veintinueve.

F-Siguen las firmas de los sefiores delegados.7

RESERVA HECHA AL FIRMAR LA CONVENCION

Chile : Subscribo la presente Convencion en cuanto sus disposiciones no sean contrarias a la legislaci6n nacional de mi pafs, haciendo reserva expresa de las disposiciones de esta Convenci6n sobre las cuales no hay legislacion en Chile. CONVENCION GENERAL INTERAMERICANA DE PROTECCION MARCARIA Y COMERCIAL

Suscrita el 20 de febrero de 1929, en la Conferencia Panamericana de Marcas de F~brica Washington

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INS TR UMEN TO DEL INSTRUMENTO PAISES SIGNATARIOS DE RATIFICACION DE RATIFICACION

Bolivia Brasil Colombia Junio 22, 1936 Julio 22, 1936 Costa Rica 52 Cuba Marzo 10, 1930 Abril 2, 1930 Chile* Ecuador Estados Unidos Febrero 11, 1931 Febrero 17, 1931 Guatemala Noviembre 20, 1929 Diciembre 30, 1929 Haitf Junio 29, 1931 Agosto 14, 1931 Honduras Octubre 19, 1935 Noviern re 29, 1935 Mexico Nicaragua Marzo 26, 1935 Junio 7, 1935 Panama Enero 30, 1935 Abril 8, 1935 Paraguay Agosto 30, 1943 Marzo 1, 1944 Peru' Febrero 15, 1937 Marzo 25, 1937 Rep~iblica Dominicana Uruguay Venezuela

* Con reserva. PROTOCOLO SOBRE EL REGISTRO INTERAMERICANO DE MARCAS DE FABRICA

WASHINGTON, 1929

POR CUANTO: los Gobiernos de Peru, Bolivia, Paraguay, Ecua- dor, Uruguay, Republica Dominicana, Chile, Panama, Venezuela, Costa Rica, Cuba, Guatemala, Haiti', Colombia, Brasil, Mexico, Ni- caragua, Honduras y Estados Unidos de America, han firmado hoy en Washington por medio de sus respectivos delegados una Convenci6n General Interamericana de Proteccion Marcaria y Comercial;

POR CUANTO: se considera conveniente el mantenimiento de una agencia internacional americana que facilite a los fabricantes, industriales, comerciantes o agricultores el goce de la proteccion marcaria y comercial que dicha Convenci6n les otorga, y que sirva, ademis, de centro de informacion, coadyuvando al cumplimiento y mejo- ramiento de las disposiciones contenidas en ella;

POR CUANTO: la adopci6n por separado de una convenci6n general de caracter sustantivo y de un protocolo como ste, puede faci- 53 litar la ratificaci6n de los Estados Contratantes y la adhesi6n de las Repi1blicas Americanas que no han tomado parte en las negociaciones, toda vez que la aceptaci6n de la Convenci 6 n no lleva implcita la de este instrumento,

Los Gobiernos arriba mencionados han convenido lo siguiente

Artfculo 1.

Las personas naturales o juri'dicas domiciliadas o que posean un establecimiento fabril o come rcial o una explotaci6n agri'cola en cualquiera de los Estados que hayan ratificado o se hayan adherido al presente Protocolo podr~n obtener la protecci6 n de sus marcas mediante el registro de las mismas en la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas.

Artfculo 2.

El titular de una marca registrada o depositada en uno de los Es- tados Contratantes que desee registrarla en los demos Estados Contra- tantes, deber, presentar una solicitud a tal efecto en la Oficina respectiva del pa's de registro original, cuya oficina la cursari a la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas cumpliendo las reglas dispuestas en el Re- PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

glamento, y a cuya solicitud acompafiara un giro postal o de un banco de credito reconocido, por un total de $50. 00 como derechos de la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas, mas el importe de los derechos que sefiale la ley nacional de cada uno de los paises en que desea obtener proteccion para su marca.

Artfculo 3.

Inmediatamente despues de recibida la solicitud de registro de una marca y de encontrar que 1lena los requisitos del caso, la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas expedira un certificado del registro en la oficina y trasmitira por correo en sobre certificado copias de la misma acompaffadas de un giro por la cantidad correspondiente a las Oficinas respectivas de los Estados en que se desee la protecci 6 n. En el caso de nuevas adhesiones o ratificaciones de Estados despues de registrada una marca, la Oficina Interamericana avisara a los propietarios de marcas registradas por su conducto, dichas adhesiones o ratificaciones por medio de la Oficina respectiva de su pal's, informandoles del derecho que tienen de registrar sus marcas en los nuevos Estados ad- 54 herentes o ratificantes, cuyo registro se efectuara en la forma antes expresada. Artfculo 4.

Cada uno de los Estados Contratantes por conducto de su Oficina de Marcas, acusara inmediatamente el recibo de la solicitud de registro de cada Marca a la Oficina Interamericana, y procedera a tramitar el expediente con toda la prontitud posible publicandola por cuenta del solicitante en los periodicos oficiales de costumbre, y oportunamente notificara a la Oficina Interamericana la resoluci6n que haya dictado de acuerdo con su legislaci6n interna y la estipulaciones de esta Conven- con. En el caso de que sea otorgada la protecci6n a la marca solicitada, expedira' un certificado de registro haciendo constar la vida legal del registro, el cual certificado sera otorgado con las mismas formalidades que los nacionales y surtira los mismos efectos en cuanto a la propiedad de la marca. Este certificado de registro se enviar6 a la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas, quien lo remitira al propietario por conducto de la Oficina respectiva del pai's de origen. Si dentro de un plazo de siete meses de haber sido recibida por un Estado Contratante la solicitud de protecci6n de una marca remitida por la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas, la administraci6n de ese Es- tado no ha comunicado a dicha Oficina la denegaci 6 n de protecci6n fun- dada en los preceptos de su legislaci 6 n interna o de'la Convenci6n Gene- ral Interamericana de Protecci6n Marcaria y Comercial, se considera- PROTOCOLO DE WASHINGTON (1929) ra registrada dicha marca, y la Oficina Interamericana lo hara saber asi al solicitante por conducto del pars de origen expidiendo un certificado especial que tendr6 la misma fuerza y valor legal de un certificado nacional. En el caso de que la protecci6n de una marca sea denegada de acuerdo con los preceptos de la legislacion de cada Estado o de la Convenci6n General Interamericana de Protecci 6 n Marcaria y Comer- cial, el solicitante podra hacer uso de los mismos recursos que las leyes respectivas conceden a los ciudadanos del Estado que dict6 la negativa de protecci 6 n, y los t~rminos que para el ejercicio de dichos recursos y acciones concedan las leyes nacionales empezaran a contarse despugs de los cuatro meses de haberse recibido el aviso de negativa en la Oficina Interarnericana de Marcas. El registro interamericano de una marca comunicado a los Esta- dos Contratantes, que sea protegida en estos, substituir cualquier otro registro de la misma marca que haya sido hecho anteriormente por cualquier otro medio, sin perjuicio de los derechos adquiridos por el registro nacional.

Arti'culo 5. 55

Igual procedimiento al estipulado en los artr'culos anteriores se seguira para el registro de la trasmisi 6 n de la propiedad de una marca o de la cesion del uso de la misma, pero en ese caso s 6 lo se remitira a la Oficina Interamericana la cantidad de $10.00 que retendra la Ofi- cina, mas el importe que fije la legislaci6n interna de cada pal's en que se desee registrar la trasmision o cesion, entendiendose que el uso de las marcas puede ser transferido separadamente en cada pars.

Arti'culo 6.

Si el solicitante reivindica el color como elemento constitutivo de su marca, se le exigira:

1. Que lo declare acompafiando al registro una nota que indique el color o la combinaci6n de colores que reivindica, y

2. Que una a su solicitud copias o ejemplares, de dicha marca, en colores, tal como se encuentra en uso, los cuales se anexaran a las notificaciones hechas por la Oficina Interamericana. El n6mero de dichos ejemplares se fijar6 por el Reglamento. PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

Arti'culo 7.

Las marcas registradas se publicaran en una hoja peridica editada por la Oficina Interamericana, dando las indicaciones contenidas en la solicitud de registro y un disefio suministrado por el registrante. Para la publicidad que ha de darse en los Estados Contratantes a las marcas inscriptas, cada administracion recibira gratuitamente de la Oficina Interamericana el nfimero de ejemplares de la precitada publicaci6n que quiera pedir. La publicaci6n de una marca en la hoja peri6dica de la Oficina Interamericana tendra la misma fuerza que su publicaci6n en los peri6- dicos o boletines oficiales de los Estados Contratantes.

Artic ulo 8.

La Oficina Interamericana expedira a cualquier persona que la pida, mediante un derecho que fijara el Reglamento, copia de las ano- 50 taciones hechas en el registro con referencia a una marca determinada. Articulo 9.

La Oficina registrars tambien las renovaciones una vez cumpli- dos los requisitos de la legislaci 6 n interna de cada Estado Contratante, previo pago de un derecho de $ 10. 00 para la Oficina y los derechos que corresponden a los Estados en que dichas renovaciones se efectulen. Seis meses antes de la expiracion del termino de proteccion, la Oficina Interamericana pasara aviso oficioso a la Administraci6n del pals de origen y al propietario de la marca.

Arti'culo 10.

El propietario de una marca podra siempre renunciar a la proteccion en uno o varios de los Estados Contratantes, mediante una declara- ci 6 n enviada a la administraci6n del pa's de origen de la marca, para ser comunicada a la Oficina Interamericana, la cual notificara a los paises a que concierna dicha renuncia.

Arti'culo 11.

Los que soliciten el registro, dep6sito, trasmisi6n, cesi6n o renovacion de una marca por medio de la Oficina Interamericana, podran nombrar en cualquier tiempo, por medio del correspondiente poder, un agente o apoderado a fin de que los represente en cualquier procedimien- to administrativo, judicial o de cualq.uiera otra clase que surja con mo- PROTOCOLO DE WASHINGTON (1929) tivo de dichas marca o solicitud en cualquiera de los Fstados Contra- tante s. Dichos apoderados tendrn derecho a notificarse de todas las actuaciones y a recibir y presentar los documentos que fueren necesarios en la Oficina de Marcas de cada pal's, de acuerdo con las estipulaciones de este Protocolo.

Artifculo 12.

La Administraci6n del pal's de origen notificar6 a la Oficina In- teramericana las anulaciones, cancelaciones, renuncias, traspasos y demos cambios que se produjeren en la propiedad o uso de la marca. La Oficina Interamericana inscribiri dichos cambios, los notifi- car6 a las administraciones de los Estados Contratantes, y los publi- cara en seguida en su periodico. Se proceder6 igualmente cuando el propietario de la marca solicite reducir la lista de los productos a que se aplica. La adici6n ulterior de un nuevo producto a la lista, no puede ob- tenerse sino por un nuevo registro efectuado conforme a las disposiciones del articulo 2 de este Protoclo. A la adici6n se asimila la subs- 51 tituci 6 n de un producto en lugar de otro.

Arti'culo 13.

Los Estados Contratantes se obligan a enviar por conducto de sus oficinas nacionales de marcas, tan pronto como se publiquen, dos ejemplares de las gacetas o publicaciones oficiales en que aparezcan senten- cias o resoluciones judiciales o administrativas, leyes, decretos, reglamentos, circulares o cualesquiera otras disposiciones emanadas de los poderes ejecutivo, legislativo o judicial que se refieran a la protecci 6 n marcaria, la defensa de los nombres comerciales, o la represi 6 n de la competencia desleal y de las falsas indicaciones de procedencia, tanto en el orden administrativo, como en el civil o penal.

Arti'culo 14.

A fin de cumplir este Protocolo y facilitar el registro interamericano de marcas, los Estados Contratantes establecen por su agencia internacional, la oficina situada en La Habana, Repiblica de Cuba, que se denominar6 en lo sucesivo "Oficina Interamericana de Marcas," y confieren a su correspondencia oficial la franquicia postal.

Art'culo 15.

La Oficina Interamericana de Marcas desempefiar6 las funciones PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIA L

expresadas en este Protocolo y en el Reglamento anexo, y se sosten- dr6 con los derechos que perciba por la tramitaci 6 n de las marcas, m~s las cuotas asignadas a los Estados Contratantes. Dichas cuotas se pagar~n directamente a la Oficina por anualidades adelantadas, y se calcular~n de la manera siguiente :

Se determinar la poblaci6n de cada Estado Contratante que ra- tifique este Protocolo, por medio de los respectivos censos oficiales mas recientes, dividiendo el mimero de habitantes en unidades que representen 100,000, considerando las fracciones mayores de 50,000 como una unidad y no tomando en cuenta las menores. El monto de dicha contribuci 6 n anual se dividira entre el numero total de unidades asi" obtenido, Io que determinar el importe de la cuota por unidad, y mul- tiplicando esta por el niimero de unidades asignado a cada Estado, se fijara su contribucion para la Oficinalnteramericana. Al recibirse nuevas ratificaciones o adhesiones al presente Pro- tocolo, se procederi con los nuevos Estados en la misma forma, deter- minando en cada caso su contribucion, previa adici6n de las nuevas unidades y determinaci 6 n de la cuota por unidad que asi' resulte. 58 Queda expresamente convenido que esta contribuci 6 n anual se efectuar mientras los demos ingresos de la Oficina no sean suficientes para su sostenimiento; mientras esto ocurra, cada afio se revisar~n los censos de poblaci6n haciendo los cambios que resulten necesarios de acuerdo con los datos oficiales suministrados por cada Estado Contra- tante y calculando nuevamente las cuotas, antes de fijar las contribuciones de dichos Estados. Una vez que la Oficina pueda sostenerse con sus propios ingresos, se distribuir& el remanente de las contribuciones entre los Estados en proporcion a las cantidades de ellos percibidas. A la terminaci 6 n de cada afio, la Oficina Interamericana har una liquidaci6n de los derechos y cuotas percibidas, y despues de cubierto su presupuesto para el afio venidero, y de mantener una reserva adecuada, devolvera el sobrante a los Estados Contratantes en proporci 6 n a las cuotas pagadas por 4stos. El presupuesto de dicha Oficina y la reserva que debe mantener, serin aprobados por el Ejecutivo del Estado en que la misma radique, a propuesta del Director de la misma, quien dar6 cuenta anualmente a todos los Estados ratificantes para su conocimiento.

Artfculo 16.

En caso de que la Oficina cese de funcionar con car~cter definitivo se proceder6 a su liquidaci 6 n bajo la supervisi 6 n del Gobierno de Cuba, distribuy~ndose el saldo que resulte entre los Estados Contra- tantes en la misma proporci~n en que contribuyeron a su sostenimiento. PROTOCOLO DE WASHINGTON (1929)

Los edificios y otras propiedades materiales de Ia Oficina pasar~n a ser propiedad del Gobierno de Cuba en reconocimiento de los servicios prestados por esa Repiblica para Ilevar a la pra'ctica este Protocolo; pero dicho Gobierno se compromete a dedicar esas propiedades a objetos de car~cter esencialmente interamericano. Los Estados Contratantes convienen en aceptar como definitiva toda disposici6n que se tome para la liquidaci6n de la Oficina.

Arti'culo 17.

Las estipulaciones contenidas en este Protocolo tendr~n fuerza de ley en aquellos Estados en que los tratados internacionales tienen ese caracter tan pronto como son ratificados por sus 6 rganos constitucionales. Los Estados Contratantes en que el cumplimiento de los pactos internacionales est 6 subordinado a la promulgaci6n de leyes concomi- tantes, al aceptar en principio este Protocolo, se obligan a solicitar de sus 6 rganos legislativos la adopci6n en el mas breve plazo posible de la legislaci6n que sea necesaria para ponerla en vigor, de acuerdo con sus prescripciones constitucionales. 59

Articulo 18.

Los Estados Contratantes convienen en que tan pronto como este Protocolo entre en vigor las Convenciones sobre marcas de f~brica de 1910 y 1923 quedaran automaticamente sin efecto alguno en cuanto se re- fieren a la organizacion y funcionamiento de la Oficina Interamericana; pero cualesquiera derechos que de acuerdo con sus estipulaciones se hayan adquirido o puedan adquirirse hasta la fecha en que entre en vigor este Protocolo, continuar~n siendo v~lidos hasta que expiren.

Articulo 19.

El presente Protocolo sera ratificado por los Estados Contratan- tes despu~s que hayan ratificado la "Convenci6n General Interamerica- na para la ProteccionMarcaria y Comercial," de acuerdo con sus procedimientos cons titucionales. El Protocolo original y los instrumentos de ratificaci6n ser~n depositados en la Uni6n Panamericana, la que enviara copia certificada del primero y comunicar6 aviso del recibo de las ratificaciones a los Gobiernos de los Estados Contratantes, entrando el Protocolo en vigor entre dichos Estados en el orden en que vayan depositando sus ratifi- cacione s. Este Protocolo regirA indefinidamente, pero podrA ser denunciado mediante aviso anticipado de un afio, transcurrido el cual cesara en PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

sus efectos para el Estado denunciante, quedando subsistente para los demos Contratantes. La denuncia ser6 dirigida a la Uni6n Pa- namericana que trasmitira aviso de la misma a los Gobiernos de los demos Estados. Los Estados Americanos que no hayan suscrito este Protocolo podr~n adherirse a e1, enviando el instrumento oficial en que se con- signe esta adhesi6n a la Uni6n Panamericana, la que lo notificar6 a los Gobiernos de los demas Estados Contratantes en la forma antes expresada.

ANEXO

Reglamento

Arti'culo I.

La solicitud para obtener protecci 6 n bajo el Protocolo del cual este Anexo es parte integrante, debera hacerse por el titular de la marca o por su representante legal a la administraci6n del Estado en 60 que dicha marca haya sido registrada o depositada originalmente, de acuerdo con las disposiciones vigentes en dicho Estado, acompafiando un giro postal o bancario pagadero al Director de la Oficina Interame- ricana de Marcas, por la suma requerida en el Protocolo. Tanto la solicitud como el giro deber~n ir acompafiados de un electrotipo de 10 x 10 centrnetros, que sea reproducci6n fiel de la marca tal como esta ha quedado registrada en el Estado de registro original.

Arti'culo 2.

Una vez que la Oficina Nacional haya comprobado que el registro de la marca es legal y v~lido, debera enviar a la Oficina Interamerica- na de Marcas, a la mayor brevedad posible

A. El giro; B. El electrotipo de la marca; C. Un certificado en duplicado con los siguientes detalles: 1. Nombre y direcci6n del propietario de la marca; 2. Fecha en que se hizo la solicitud de registro en el Estado del registro original; 3. Fecha en que la marca fu4 registrada en dicho Estado; 4. Nilmero del orden de registro en dicho Estado. 5. Fecha en que expira la protecci 6 n de la marca en dicho Estado; 6. Un facsi'mile de la marca tal como se usa. 7. Una relaci 6 n de los productos en que se utiliza; 8. Fecha en que se hizo la solicitud a la Oficina Nacional del Es- PROTOCOLO DE WASHINGTON (1929)

tado de registro original para obtener protecci 6 n de acuerdo con la Convenci 6 n y este Protocolo. D. En el caso de que el solicitante desee reclamar un color como elemento distintivo de su marca, treinta copias de la marca impresas en papel, mostrando dicho color, asi como una breve descripci6n de la misma.

Artrculo 3.

Dentro de diez dias contados desde el recibo del material reque- rido por el Art culo 2, la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas procedera a inscribir toda la informacion en sus libros y a notificar a la Oficina Nacional de dicho Estado el recibo de la solicitud y la fecha y ndimero del registro interamericano.

Articulo 4.

Dentro de treinta dias contados desde dicho recibo, se procederan a enviar copias detalladas del registro interamericano a las Oficinas 61 Nacionales de los Estados que hayan ratificado el Protocolo.

Articulo 5.

La Oficina Interamericana de Marcas publicar peri6dicamente un boletin en el cual aparecer~n los datos inclui'dos en el certificado a que se refiere el inciso C del Articulo 2 de este Reglamento y la in- formaci6n que fuere pertinente sobre el registro de dichas marcas en los distintos paises. La Oficina Interamericana de Marcas podr6, ademas, publicar en su boletfn, o por separado, libros, documentos, informes, estudios y arti'culos relacionados con la protecci 6 n de la propiedad industrial. Artfculo 6.

La aceptaci 6 n, objeci6n o denegaci 6 n de una marca por la Ofici- na Nacional de cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes debera trasmi- tirse a la oficina del Estado de origen de la solicitud, con objeto de que lo comunique a quien pueda interesar dentro de los diez dias siguientes a la fecha de su recibo por la Oficina Interamericana de Mar- cas.

Art1culo 7.

Todo aviso de cambio de propiedad de una marca, comunicado por PROPIEDAD INDUSTRIAL

la oficina del pai~s de origen a la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas, que vaya acompafiado de los respectivos derechos deber examinarse y anotarse en el registro, enviandose el correspondiente aviso a las Oficinas de los demas Estados Contratantes en que dichos cambios deban hacerse, acompafiado, de los derechos que les corresponda; todo dentro del plazo fijado respecto de la solicitud.

Artfculo 8.

El Director de la Oficina Interamericana de Marcas sera nombrado por el Poder Ejecutivo del Estado en que la misma este sita, entre abogados de experiencia en la materia y de solvencia moral reconocida. El Director podr6 a discreci6n nombrar o remover los funcionarios o empleados de su Oficina, notific~ndolo al Gobierno de Cuba; y adoptar y promulgar los reglamentos, circulares, y disposiciones que considere convenientes para la buena marcha de la Oficina y que no sean incompatibles con este Protocolo.

Artfculo 9. 62 La Oficina Interamericana de Marcas podra emprender cualquiera investigaci 6 n sobre marcas que el Gobierno de cualquiera de los Es- tados Contratantes le pueda encomendar, asi'como tambi~n estimular la investigaci6n de los problemas, dificultades u obstaculos que puedan impedir el funcionamiento de la Convenci6n General Interamericana de Protecci6n Marcaria y Comercial o de este Protocolo.

Articulo 10.

La Oficina Interamericana de Marcas coadyuvar! con los Gobier- nos de los Estados Contratantes en la preparaci6n del material para conferencias internacionales de esta i'ndole; suministrar6 a dichos Estados cualesquiera indicaciones que considere de utilidad asi'como las opiniones que puedan pedirsele respecto a las modificaciones que deban introducirse en los pactos interamericanos o en las leyes relativas a las materias de que ella trata; y en general, facilitar6 el cumplimiento de los fines de este Protocolo.

Artfculo 11.

La Oficina Interamericana deMarcasinformar6 a los Gobiernos signatarios, cuando menos una vez al afio, de los trabajos que haya efectuado o est6 haciendo durante ese perl'odo. PROTOCOLO DE WASHINGTON (1929)

Artic ulo 12.

La Oficina Interamericana de Marcas mantendr6 en lo posible relaciones con otras oficinas de la misma irndole, y con instituciones y organismos cientfficos e industriales, para el intercambio de publicaciones, informes y datos relacionados con el progreso del derecho con respecto a la protecci6n marcaria, la defensa y protecci 6 n de los nombres comerciales y la represi 6 n de la competencia desleal y de las falsas indicaciones de procedencia.

Artfculo 13.

Este Reglamento podra ser modificado en cualquier tiempo a solicitud de cualquiera de los Estados Contratantes o del Director de la Oficina, siempre que la modificaci6n no infrinja la Convenci 6 n Ge- neral ni el Protocolo de que el Reglamento forma parte, y haya sido aprobada por el Consejo Directivo de la Uni6n Panamericana, despue's de circulada entre los Estados Contratantes por un peri'odo de seis meses antes de la aprobaci6n por la Uni6n Panamericana.

En testimonio de lo cual los delegados arriba nombrados firman el presente Protocolo en espaffol, ingles, portugues y franc~s, y estam- pan sus respectivos sellos.

Hecho en la ciudad de Washington a los veinte dias del mes de febrero de mil novecientos veintinueve.

,-Siguen las firmas de los sefiores delegados.7 PROTOCOLO SOBRE EL REGISTRO INTERAMERICANO DE MARCAS DE FABRICA

Suscrito el 20 de febrero de 1929, en la Conferencia Panamericana de Marcas de F~brica Washington

FECHA DEL FECHA DEL DEPOSITO INSTRUMENTO DEL INSTRUMEN TO PAISES SIGNATARIOS DE RATIFICACION DE RATIFICACION

Bolivia Brasil Colombia Costa Rica 64 Cuba Marzo 10, 1930 Abril 2, 1930 cEcuador Estados Unidos* Febrero 11, 1931 Febrero 17, 1931 Haiti* Junio 29, 1931 Agosto 14, 1931 Honduras * Octubre 19, 1935 Noviembre 29, 1935 Mexico Nicaragua Panama Enero 30, 1935 Abril 8, 1935 Paraguay Perii* Septiembre 23, 1936 Octubre 26, 1936 RepU'blica Dominicana Venezuela

* Denunciado por: Haiti, Noviembre 27, 1944; Estados Unidos, Septiem- bre 29, 1944; Peru, Mayo 10. , 1945; Honduras, Febrero 13, 1945; Pa- nama, Noviembre 18, 1946. OAS REATY OFFICIAL RECORDS OEA/Ser.X/2 (Engl ish) kRIES 16

INTER-AMERICAN PEACE TREATIES AND CONVENTIONS

PAN AMERICAN UNION oral Secretariat, Organization of American States Washington, D.C.

OAS TREATY SERIES NO. 16 OFFICIAL RECORDS O EA/Ser. X/2 (English)

IXTERAMIERICAN PEACE TREATIES AXD CONVENTIONS

PAN AMERICAN UNION General Secretariat, Organization of American States Washington, D.C., 1961 SECOND EDITION REVISED

First edition published in 1954 in the Law and Treaty Series. This second edition, revised, printed in 1961 in the OAS Official Records Series as OEA/Ser.X/2 (English), Treaty Series No. 16.

This Series is published under the direction of the General Legal Division, Department of Legal Affairs, Pan American Union, Washington, D. C. EXPLANATORY NOTE For the past several years the Pan American Union has been reproducing the texts of inter-American treaties and conventions that had become exhausted. All such instruments signed at the International Conferences of American States from the Second to the Seventh are now available in a separate pamphlet for each Conference. At the First Conference no treaties or conventions were signed. With respect to the treaties signed at the Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance of Peace, held at Buenos Aires in 1936, inasmuch as many of them related to the pacific settlement of disputes, it was decided to publish a special issue to include all agreements of this type, before as well as after 1936, thus making conveniently available all inter-American peace agreements in one volume. Following each of the texts a chart has been in- serted that shows the status of the agreement, that is, the signatures, ratifications, and deposits with respect to each country. The American Treaty on Pacific Settlement, signed at Bogota in 1948, known as the Pact of Bogota, was designedto be a codification of peace procedures, replacing all prior treaties as listed in Article LVIII of the Pact. Provision was made in the Pact that as it came into force between any two or more countries the earlier treaties should cease to be in effect. Inas- much, however, as only nine States have ratified the Pact of Bogotd, the earlier treaties may still be in force between the States that ratified them, so that in order to know whether one of the earlier treaties is still in force between any two parties, it will be necessary to consult the chart showing the ratifications of the Pact of Bogota. Because of the reservations made to the Pact of Bogotd and in view of the small number of ratifications so far deposited, an item was included on the agenda of the Tenth Inter-American Conference on the possibility of revising it. Since the Conference was not prepared to proceed with the revision, it requested the Council of the Organization of American States, by Reso- lution XCIX, to conduct an inquiry among the member states to ascertain the desirability and possibility of revision. This inquiry was made, but upon finding that the majority of the governments expressed opinions not favorable to revision the Council declared the inquiry at an end. As noted above, the present volume comprises the inter-American treaties and conventions dealing with the pacific settlement of disputes. In addition, however, there is a procedure which, although established by a resolution, is in force, and has been applied on several occasions. This collection could not be considered complete without a reference to that procedure, and consequently at the end of this publication a short statement has been added on the Inter-American Peace Committee, created by Resolution XIV of the Sec- ond Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of Foreign Affairs held at Havana in 1940.

September 1961

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Explanatory N ote ...... iii Treaty on Compulsory Arbitration, January 29, 1902 ...... 1 Treaty to Avoid or Prevent Conflicts Between the American States (Gondra Treaty), M ay 3, 1923 ...... 5 General Convention of Inter-American Conciliation, January 5 , 1929 ...... 10 General Treaty of Inter-American Arbitration, January 5, 1929.. 15 Protocol of Progressive Arbitration, January 5, 1929 ...... 22 Anti-War Treaty of Non-aggression and Conciliation (Saavedra Lamas Pact), October 10, 1933 ...... 24 Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter-American Conciliation, December 26, 1933 ...... 34 Convention on Maintenance, Preservation and Reestablishment of Peace, Decem ber 23, 1936 ...... 36 Additional Protocol Relative to Non-intervention, December 23, 193 6 ...... 4 1 Treaty on the Prevention of Controversies, December 23, 1936.. 45 Inter-American Treaty on Good Offices and Mediation, December 23 , 1936 ...... 49 Convention to Coordinate, Extend and Assure the Fulfillment of the Existing Treaties Between the American States, December 23 , 19 3 6 ...... 53 American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogot), April 30 , 1948 ...... 60 Inter-American Peace Committee ...... 72

TREATY ON COMPULSORY ARBITRATION Signed at the City of Mexico, January 29, 1902

The undersigned, Representatives of ARTICLE 4. Whenever a special Tri- Argentina, Bolivia, the Dominican Re- bunal should be organized on any ac- public, Guatemala, El Salvador, Mexico, count, whether it is so desired by any of Paraguay, Peru and Uruguay, at the the parties, or because the Permanent Second International American Confer- Court of Arbitration of The Hague should ence, held at Mexico City, and duly not be opened to them, the procedure to authorized by their respective Govern- be followed shall be established at the ments, have agreed upon the following time the arbitration agreement is signed. articles: The Court shall determine the date and ARTICLE 1. The High Contracting Par- place of its sessions and the language to ties obligate themselves to submit to the be used, and shall in every case be in- decision of arbitrators all controversies vested with the authority to decide all that exist, or may arise, among them and questions relating to its own jurisdiction which diplomacy cannot settle, provided and even those referring to the procedure that in the exclusive judgment of any of of points not considered in the arbitra- the interested Nations said controversies tion agreement. do not affect either the independence or ARTICLE 5. If upon organizing a special the national honor. Tribunal the High Contracting Parties ARTICLE 2. Independence or national should not agree upon the designation of honor shall not be considered as involved the arbitrator, the Tribunal shall consist in controversies with regard to diplo- of three judges. Each State shall appoint matic privileges, boundaries, rights of an arbitrator who will designate an um- navigation, and validity, construction pire. Should the arbitrators fail to agree and enforcement of treaties. on this appointee, it shall be made by the ARTICLE 3. By virtue of the power Government of a third State, to be desig- established in art. 26 of the Convention nated by the arbitrators appointed by the for the peaceful adjustment of inter- parties. If no agreement is reached with national differences signed at The Hague regard to this last appointment, each of on July 29, 1899, the High Contracting the parties shall name a different Power Parties agree to submit to the decision and the election of the third arbitrator of the Permanent Court of Arbitration, shall be made by the two Powers so desig- created by such Convention, all the con- nated. troversies referred to in the present ARTICLE 6. The High Contracting Par- Treaty, unless either of the parties pre- ties hereby stipulate that, in case of a fers the establishment of a special tri- serious disagreement or conflict between bunal. two or more of them, which may render In the event that the High Contracting war imminent, they will have recourse, as Parties should submit to the jurisdiction far as circumstances allow, to the good of the Permanent Court of The Hague, offices or the mediation of one or more they accept the precepts of said Conven- friendly Powers. tion, both with respect to the organiza- ARTICLE 7. Independently of this re- tion of the Tribunal and to its procedure. course, the High Contracting Parties consider it useful, that one or more Powers, entrust the mission of entering into di- strangers to the dispute, should, on their rect negotiation with the Power elected own initiative, as far as circumstances will by the other interested party, with the allow, offer their good offices or mediation object of preventing the rupture of pacific to the States at variance. relations. The right to offer the Good Offices or For the period of this mandate, the Mediation belongs to Powers who are term of which, unless otherwise stipu- strangers to the conflict, even during the lated, cannot exceed thirty days, the course of hostilities. contending Powers shall cease all direct The exercise of this right shall never be communication on the subject of the dis- regarded by either of the contending par- pute, which is regarded as referred ex- ties as an unfriendly act. clusively to the mediating Powers. ARTICLE 8. The part of the mediator If these friendly Powers do not suc- consists in reconciling the opposing claims ceed in agreeing on a solution that would and appeasing the feeling- of resentment be acceptable to those in conflict, they which may have arisen between the States shall designate a third that is to act as at variance. mediator. ARTICLE 9. The functions of the media- This third Power, in case of a definite tor are at an end when once it is declared, rupture of pacific relations, shall at all either by one of the parties to the dispute times be charged with the task of taking or by the mediator himself, that the meth- advantage of any opportunity to restore ods of conciliation proposed by him are peace. not accepted. ARTICLE 13. In controversies of an ARTICLE 10. Good Offices and Media- international nature arising from a dif- tion, whether at the request of the parties ference of opinion on points of fact, the at variance or upon the initiative of signatory Powers consider it useful that Powers, who are strangers to the dispute, the parties who have not been able to have exclusively the character of advice, come to an agreement by means of di- and never have binding force. plomacy, should, so far as circumstances ARTICLE 11. The acceptance of media- allow, institute an International Commis- tion cannot, unless there be an agreement sion of Inquiry, to facilitate a solution of to the contrary, have the effect of inter- those differences, elucidating the facts by rupting, delaying or hindering mobiliza- means of an impartial and conscientious tion, or other measures of preparation for investigation. war. If mediation occurs after the com- ARTICLE 14. The International Com- mencement of hostilities, it causes no missions of Inquiry are constituted by interruption to the military operations in special agreement. The agreement defines progress, unless there be an agreement to the facts to be examined, and the extent the contrary. of the Commissioner's powers, and settles ARTICLE 12. In case of a serious differ- the procedure to which they must limit ence endangering peace, and whenever themselves. On the inquiry both sides the interested Powers cannot agree in shall be heard, and the form and periods electing or accepting as mediator a to be observed, if not stipulated by the friendly Power, it is to be recommended agreement, shall be determined by the to the States in dispute the election of a Commission itself. Power to whom they shall respectively ARTICLE 15. The International Coin- missions of Inquiry are constituted, un- States of Mexico, which shall communi- less otherwise stipulated, in the same cate it to the other Governments. manner as the Tribunal of Arbitration. ARTICLE 22. The nations which do not ARTICLE 16. The Powers in dispute en- sign the present Treaty, may adhere to it gage to supply the International Commis- at any time. If any of the signatory na- sion of Inquiry, as fully as they may deem tions should desire to free itself from its possible, with all means and facilities obligations, it shall denounce the Treaty; necessary to enable it to be completely but such denouncement shall not produce acquainted with and to accurately under- any effect except with respect to the stand the facts in question. nation which may denounce it, and only ARTICLE 17. The above mentioned one year after the notification of the same Commissions shall limit themselves to has been made. ascertain the truth of the facts alleged, Whenever the denouncing nation shall without entering into any other apprecia- have any arbitration negotiations pend- tions than those merely technical. ing at the expiration of the year, the de- ARTICLE 18. The International Com- nouncement shall not have any effect mission of Inquiry shall present its re- with reference to the case not yet decided. port to the Powers which have constituted it, signed by all its members. This report, GENERAL PROVISIONS limited to the investigation of facts, has in no manner the character of an arbitral I. This Treaty shall be ratified as soon award, and it leaves the contending par- as possible. ties at liberty to give it the value they II. The ratifications shall be forwarded may deem proper. to the Department for Foreign Relations ARTICLE 19. The constitution of Com- of Mexico, where they shall be deposited. missions of Inquiry may be included in III. The Mexican Government shall the Arbitration Bonds, as a previous pro- send a certified copy of each of them to ceeding, to the end of determining the the other Contracting Governments. facts which are to be the subject of the IN VIRTUE WHEREOF they have signed Inquiry. the present Treaty and have attached ARTICLE 20. The present Treaty does their respective seals thereto. not abrogate any previous existing ones, Made in the City of Mexico, on the between two or more of the Contracting twenty-ninth day of January one thou- Parties, in so far as they give greater sand nine hundred and two, in one single extension to Compulsory Arbitration. copy, which shall be deposited in the De- Neither does it alter the stipulations re- partment for Foreign Relations of the garding Arbitration, relating to specific United Mexican States, a certified copy questions which have already arisen, nor of which shall be sent, through diplo- the course of arbitration proceedings matic channels, to each of the Contract- which may be pending by reason of the ing Governments. same. ARTICLE 21. Without the necessity of Argentina: ANTONIO BERMEJO, LORENZO exchanging ratifications, this Treaty shall ANAD6N. take effect so soon as three States, at Bolivia: FERNANDO E. GUACHALLA. least, of those signing it, express their ap- Dominican Republic: FEDERICO HENRf- proval to the Government of the United QUEZ I CARVAJAL. Guatemala: FRANcIscO OLA. ROSENDO PINEDA, M. SINCHEZ MAR- El Salvador: FRANCISCO A. REYES, MOL. BALTASAR ESTUPINIAN. Paraguay: CECILIO BXEZ. Mxico: G. RAIGOSA, JOAQUIN D. Perft: MANUEL ALVAREZ CALDER6N, CASASPS, PABLO MACEDO, E. PARDO, ALBERTO ELMORE. JR., ALFREDO CHAVERO, Josg L6PEZ- Uruguay: JUAN CUESTAS. PORTILLO Y ROJAS, F. L. DE LA BARRA,

TREATY ON COMPULSORY ARBITRATION

Signed at Mexico City, January Z9, 1902, at the Second International Conference of American States

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Argentina Bolivia Dominican Republic September 30, 1904 El Salvador May 28,1902 Guatemala August 25,1902 Mexico April 18,1903 Paraguay Peru October 10,1903 Uruguay January 31, 1903

The original instrument is deposited with the Secretariat of Foreign Affairs of Mexico, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification.

It came into effect, as stipulated in the Treaty, on January 31, 1903, on which date the Government of Uruguay deposited the third ratification.

See also the Treaty and Protocol of Washington, 1929, and the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948. TREATY TO AVOID OR PREVENT CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE AMERICAN STATES

GONDRA TREATY

Signed at Santiago, May 3, 1923

The Governments represented at the Barros Borgofio, Emilio Bello Codecido, Fifth International Conference of Ameri- Antonio Huneeus, Alcibiades Roldn, can States, desiring to strengthen pro- Guillermo Subercaseaux, Alejandro del gressively the principles of justice and Rio. of mutual respect which inspire the policy Guatemala: Eduardo Poirier, Mbximo observed by them in their reciprocal re- Soto Hall. lations, and to quicken in their peoples Nicaragua: Carlos Cuadra Pasos, Ar- sentiments of concord and of loyal friend- turo Elizondo. ship which may contribute toward the Brazil: Afranio de Mello Franco, consolidation of such relations, Sylvino Gurgel do Amaral, James Darcy, Confirm their most sincere desire to Helio Lobo. maintain an immutable peace, not only Colombia: Guillermo Valencia. between themselves but also with all the Cuba: Jos6 C. Vidal Caro, Carlos other nations of the earth; Garcia V6lez, Aristides Agiiero, Manuel Condemn armed peace which increases M~irquez Sterling. military and naval forces beyond the Paraguay:Manuel Gondra. necessities of domestic security and the Dominican Republic: Tulio M. Cestero. sovereignty and independence of States; Honduras: Benjamin Villaseca Mujica. and, Argentina: Manuel E. MalbrAn. With the firm purpose of taking all Haiti: Arthur Rameau. measures which will avoid or prevent the ARTICLE I. All controversies which for conflicts which may eventually occur be- any cause whatsoever may arise between tween them, agree to the present Treaty, two or more of the High Contracting Par- negotiated and concluded by the Plenipo- ties and which it has been impossible to tentiary Delegates whose full powers were settle through diplomatic channels or to found to be in good and due form by the submit to arbitration in accordance with Conference: existing treaties, shall be submitted for Venezuela: C6sar Zumeta, Jos6 Austria. investigation and report to a Commission Panama:Jos6 Lefevre. to be established in the manner provided United States of America: Henry P. for in Article IV. The High Contracting Fletcher, Frank B. Kellogg, Atlee Pomer- Parties undertake, in case of disputes, ene, Willard Saulsbury, George E. Vin- not to begin mobilization or concentra- cent, Frank C. Partridge, William Eric tion of troops on the frontier of the other Fowler, Leo S. Rowe. Party, nor to engage in any hostile acts Uruguay: Eugenio Martinez Thgdy. or preparations for hostilities, from the Ecuador: Rafael M. Arizaga, Jos6 time steps are taken to convene the Com- Rafael Bustamante. mission until the said Commission has Chile: Agustin Edwards, Manuel Rivas rendered its report or until the expiration Vicufla, Carlos Aldunate Solar, Luis of the time provided for in Article VII. This provision shall not abrogate nor compose the Commission of Inquiry in limit the obligations contained in treaties representation of that Government, and of arbitration in force between two or the other Party shall, likewise as soon more of the High Contracting Parties, as it receives notification, designate its nor the obligations arising out of them. members. It is understood that in disputes arising The Party initiating the procedure es- between Nations which have no general tablished by this Treaty may address treaties of arbitration, the investigation itself, in doing so, to the Permanent shall not take place in questions affecting Commission which it considers most effi- constitutional provisions, nor in questions cacious for a rapid organization of the already settled by other treaties. Commission of Inquiry. Once the request ARTICLE II. The controversies referred for convocation has been received and to in Article I shall be submitted to the the Permanent Commission has made the Commission of Inquiry whenever it has respective notifications the question or been impossible to settle them through controversy existing between the Parties diplomatic negotiations or procedure or and as to which no agreement has been by submission to arbitration, or in cases reached, will ipso facto be suspended. in which the circumstances of fact render ARTICLE IV. The Commission of In- all negotiation impossible and there is quiry shall be composed of five members, imminent danger of an armed conflict all nationals of American States, ap- between the Parties. Any one of the pointed in the following manner: each Governments directly interested in the Government shall appoint two at the investigation of the facts giving rise to time of convocation, only one of whom the controversy may apply for the convo- may be a national of its country. The cation of the Commission of Inquiry and fifth shall be chosen by common accord to this end it shall be necessary only to by those already appointed and shall per- communicate officially this decision to the form the duties of President. However, a other Party and to one of the Permanent citizen of a nation already represented on Commissions established by Article III. the Commission may not be elected. Any ARTICLE III. Two Commissions to be of the Governments may refuse to accept designated as Permanent shall be estab- the elected member, for reasons which it lished with their seats at Washington may reserve to itself, and in such event a (United States of America) and at Monte- substitute shall be appointed, with the video (Uruguay). They shall be composed mutual consent of the Parties, within of the three American diplomatic agents thirty days following the notification of longest accredited in said capitals, and at this refusal. In the failure of such agree- the call of the Foreign Offices of those ment, the designation shall be made by States they shall organize, appointing the President of an American Republic their respective chairmen. Their func- not interested in the dispute, who shall tions shall be limited to receiving from be selected by lot by the Commissioners the interested Parties the request for a already appointed, from a list of not more convocation of the Commission of In- than six American Presidents to be formed quiry, and to notifying the other Party as follows: each Government party to the thereof immediately. The Government controversy, or if there are more than two requesting the convocation shall appoint Governments directly interested in the at the same time the persons who shall dispute, the Government or Governments on each side of the controversy, shall Commission shall render its report within designate three Presidents of American one year from the date of its inauguration. States which maintain the same friendly If it has been impossible to finish the in- relations with all the Parties to the dis- vestigation or draft the report within the pute. period agreed upon, it may be extended Whenever there are more than two six months beyond the period established, Governments directly interested in a provided the Parties to the controversy controversy, and the interest[s] of two or are in agreement upon this point. more of them are identical, the Govern- ARTICLE VI. The findings of the Com- ment or Governments on each side of mission will be considered as reports upon the controversy shall have the right to the disputes which were the subjects of increase the number of their Commis- the investigation, but will not have the sioners, as far as it may be necessary, so value or force of judicial decisions or that both sides in the dispute may always arbitral awards. have equal representation on the Com- ARTICLE VII. Once the report is in pos- mission. session of the Governments parties to Once the Commission has been thus the dispute, six months' time will be organized in the capital city, seat of the available for renewed negotiations in Permanent Commission which issued the order to bring about a settlement of the order of convocation, it shall notify the difficulty in view of the findings of said respective Governments of the date of its report; and if during this new term they inauguration, and it may then determine should be unable to reach 'a friendly upon the place or places in which it will arrangement, the Parties in dispute shall function, taking into account the greater recover entire liberty of action to proceed facilities for investigation. as their interests may dictate in the ques- The Commission of Inquiry shall itself tion dealt with in the investigation. establish its rules of procedure. In this ARTICLE VIII. The present Treaty does regard there are recommended for in- not abrogate analogous conventions which corporation into said rules of procedure may exist or may in the future exist be- the provisions contained in Articles 9, 10, tween two or more of the High Contract- 11, 12 and 13 of the Convention signed in ing Parties; neither does it partially Washington, February 1923, between the abrogate any of their provisions, although Government of the United States of they may provide special circumstances America and the Governments of the Re- or conditions differing from those herein publics of Guatemala, El Salvador, stipulated. Honduras, Nicaragua and Costa Rica, ARTICLE IX. The present Treaty shall which appear in the appendix to this be ratified by the High Contracting Par- Treaty. ties, in conformity with their respective Its decisions and final report shall be constitutional procedures, and the rati- agreed to by the majority of its members. fications shall be deposited in the Ministry Each Party shall bear its own expenses for Foreign Affairs of the Republic of and a proportionate share of the general Chile, which will communicate them expenses of the Commission. through diplomatic channels to the other ARTICLE V. The Parties to the contro- Signatory Governments, and it shall enter versy shall furnish the antecedents and into effect for the Contracting Parties in data necessary for the investigation. The the order of ratification. This Treaty shall remain in force in- of Inquiry is organized, it shall, at the re- definitely; any of the High Contracting quest of any of the Parties to the dispute, Parties may denounce it and the de- have the right to fix the status in which nunciation shall take effect as regards the Parties must remain, in order that the the Party denouncing, one year after situation may not be aggravated and mat- notification thereof has been given. ters may remain in status quo pending the Notice of the denunciation shall be rendering of the report by the Commis- sent to the Government of Chile, which sion will transmit it for appropriate action to I- vITNESS WHEREOF, the Plenipoten- the other Signatory Governments. tiaries and Delegates sign this Convention ARTICLE X. The American States which in Spanish, English, Portuguese and have not been represented in the Fifth French and affix the seals of the Fifth Conference may adhere to the present International Conference of American Treaty, transmitting the official docu- States, in the city of Santiago, Chile, on ments setting forth such adherence to the 3rd day of May in the year one thou- the Ministry for Foreign Affairs of Chile, nine hundred and twenty three. which will communicate it to the other sand This Convention shall be filed in the Contracting Parties. Ministry for Foreign Affairs of the Re-

APPENDIX public of Chile in order that certified copies thereof may be forwarded through ARTICLE I. The Signatory Governments diplomatic channels to each of the Signa- grant to all the Commissions which may tory States. be constituted, the power to summon witnesses, to administer oaths and to Venezuela: C. ZUMETA, Jos, AUSTRIA. receive evidence and testimony. Panama: J. E. LEFEVRE. ARTICLE II. During the investigation United States of America: HENRY P. the Parties shall be heard and may have FLETCHER, FRANK B. KELLOGG, ATLEE the right to be represented by one or more POMERENE, WILLARD SAULSBURY, agents and counsel. GEORGE E. VINCENT, FRANK C. PART- ARTICLE III. All members of the Com- RIDGE, WILLIAM ERIC FOWLER, L. mission shall take oath duly and faith- S. ROWE. fully to discharge their duties, before the Uruguay: EUGENIO MARTfNEZ TH DY, highest judicial authority of the place with reservations relative to the pro- where it may meet. visions of Article I (first) in so far as ARTICLE IV. The Inquiry shall be con- they exclude from the investigation ducted so that both Parties shall be heard. questions that affect constitutional pro- Consequently, the Commission shall no- visions. tify each Party of the statements of facts Ecuador: Jos RAFAEL BUSTAMANTE. submitted by the other, and shall fix Chile: MANUEL RIVAS VICURA, CARLOS periods of time in which to receive evi- ALDUNATE S., L. BARROS B., EMILIO dence. BELLO C., ANTONIO HUNEEUS, ALCI- Once the Parties are notified, the Com- BlADES ROLDAN, GUILLERMO SUBER- mission shall proceed to the investigation, CASEAUX, ALEJANDRO DEL Rio. even though they fail to appear. Guatemala: EDUARDO POIRIER, MXIMO ARTICLE V. As soon as the Commission SOTO HALL. Nicaragua: CARLOS CUADRA PASOS, AR- RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE TIME TURO ELIZONDO. OF RATIFICATION Brazil: AFRANIO DE MELLO FRANCO, S. Peru: GURGEL Do AMARAL, HELlO LOBO. With the express and definite reserva- Colombia: GUILLERMO VALENCIA. tion that the adherence of Peru does not Cuba: J. C. VIDAL CARO, CARLOS GARCfA alter the arbitration and good offices of V9LEZ, A. DE AGOERO, M. MARQUEZ the President of the United States of STERLING. America and his Government in the mat- Paraguay:M. GONDRA. ter of Tacna and Arica. Dominican Republic: TULIO M. CESTERO. Honduras: BENJAMfN VILLASECA M. Uruguay: Argentina: MANUEL E. MALBRXN. With the reservations made at the time Haiti: ARTHUR RAMEAU. of signature.

TREATY TO AVOID OR PREVENT CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE AMERICAN STATES Gondra Treaty Signed at Santiago, May 3, 1923, at the Fifth International Conference of American States SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Argentina1 Bolivia August 14,1928 Brazil October 8,1924 Chile September 23,1925 Colombia November 5,1931 Costa Rica November 23,1928 Cuba January 17, 1925 Dominican Republi February 22,1929 Ecuador March 6,1929 El Salvador 1 September 12,1928 Guatemala October 5,1928 Haiti August 19,1926 Honduras April 30,1931 1 Mexico December 26,1927 Nicaragua January 11, 1933 Panama May 23,1928 Paraguay June 23,1925 1 Peru December 26,19282 United States May 30,1924 2 Uruguay April 18, 19282 Venezuela July 17, 1925

1. Adhered. The Treaty was left open for adherence by the States that did not sign during the Conference, the instrument of adherence to be sent to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Chile.

2. With reservations. The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Republic of Chile, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. It went into force on October 8, 1924, when the second ratification was deposited by Brazil. This Treaty has been superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogoti), 1948. It continues in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of Bogotd. GENERAL CONVENTION OF INTER-AMERICAN CONCILIATION Signed at Washington, January 5, 1929

The Governments of Venezuela, Chile, Bolivia: Eduardo Diez de Medina. Bolivia, Uruguay, Costa Rica, Peru, Uruguay: Jos6 Pedro Varela. Honduras, Guatemala, Haiti, Ecuador, Costa Rica: Manuel Castro Quesada, Colombia, Brazil, Panama, Paraguay, Jos6 Tible-Machado. Nicaragua, Mexico, El Salvador, the Peru: Hernin Velarde, Victor M. Dominican Republic, Cuba, and the Matirtua. United States of America, represented at Honduras: R6mulo Dur6n, Marcos the Conference on Conciliation and Arbi- L6pez-Ponce. tration, assembled at Washington, pur- Guatemala: Adrian Recinos, Jos6 Falla. suant to the Resolution adopted on Haiti: Auguste Bonamy, Raoul Lizaire. February 18, 1928, by the Sixth Inter- Ecuador: Gonzalo Zaldumbide. national Conference of American States Colombia: Enrique Olaya Herrera, held in the City of Habana; Carlos Escall6n. Desiring to demonstrate that the con- Brazil: S. Gurgel do Amaral, A. G. de demnation of war as an instrument of Araujo-Jorge. national policy in their mutual relations, Panama: Ricardo J. Alfaro, Carlos L. set forth in the above-mentioned resolu- L6pez. tion, constitutes one of the fundamental Paraguay: Eligio Ayala. bases of inter-American relations; Nicaragua:Miximo H. Zepeda, AdriAn Animated by the purpose of promoting, Recinos, J. Lisandro Medina. in every possible way, the development of Mexico: Fernando Gonzilez Roa, Be- international methods for the pacific nito Flores. settlement of differences between the El Salvador: Cayetano Ochoa, David States; Rosales h. Being convinced that the "Treaty to Dominican Republic: Angel Morales, Avoid or Prevent Conflicts between the Gustavo A. Diaz. American States," signed at Santiago de Cuba: Orestes Ferrara, Gustavo Gu- Chile, May 3, 1923, constitutes a notable ti~rrez. achievement in inter-American relations, United States of America: Frank B. Kel- which it is necessary to maintain by giving logg, Charles Evans Hughes. additional prestige and strength to the Who, after having deposited their full action of the commissions established by powers, which were found to be in good Articles 3 and 4 of the aforementioned and due form by the Conference, have treaty; agreed as follows: Acknowledging the need of giving con- ARTICLE 1. The High Contracting Par- ventional form to these purposes have ties agree to submit to the procedure of agreed to enter into the present Conven- conciliation established by this convention, for which purpose they have ap- tion all controversies of any kind which pointed Plenipotentiaries as follows: have arisen or may arise between them for Venezuela: Carlos F. Grisanti, Fran- any reason and which it may not have cisco Arroyo Parejo. been possible to settle through diplomatic Chile: Manuel Foster Recabarren, channels. Antonio Planet. ARTICLE 2. The Commission of Inquiry to be established pursuant to the pro- tendering their good offices or their medi- visions of Article 4 of the Treaty signed ation, jointly or severally, on their own in Santiago de Chile on May 3, 1923, motion or at the request of one or more shall likewise have the character of Com- of the Parties to the controversy; but the mission of Conciliation. High Contracting Parties agree not to ARTICLE 3. The Permanent Commis- make use of those means of pacific settle- sions which have been established by ment from the moment that the Commis- virtue of Article 3 of the Treaty of sion described in Article 2 is organized Santiago de Chile of May 3, 1923, shall until the final act referred to in Article 11 be bound to exercise conciliatory func- of this convention is signed. tions, either on their own motion when it ARTICLE 6. The function of the Com- appears that there is a prospect of dis- mission, as an organ of conciliation, in all turbance of peaceful relations, or at the cases specified in Article 2 of this conven- request of a Party to the dispute, until tion, is to procure the conciliation of the the Commission referred to in the pre- differences subject to its examination by ceding article is organized. endeavoring to effect a settlement be- ARTICLE 4. The conciliatory functions tween the Parties. of the Commission described in Article 2 When the Commission finds itself to be shall be exercised on the occasions herein- within the case foreseen in paragraph 3 of after set forth: Article 4 of this convention, it shall under- (1) The Commission shall be at take a conscientious and impartial exam- liberty to begin its work with an ef- ination of the questions which are the fort to conciliate the differences sub- subject of the controversy, shall set forth mitted to its examination with a view in a report the results of its proceedings, to arriving at a settlement between and shall propose to the Parties the bases the Parties. of a settlement for the equitable solution (2) Likewise the same Commission of the controversy. shall be at liberty to eii(leavor to ARTICLE 7. Except when the Parties conciliate the Parties at any time agree otherwise, the decisions and recom- which in the opinion of the Commis- mendations of any Commission of Concili- sion may be considered to be favor- ation shall be made by a majority vote. able in the course of the investigation ARTICLE 8. The Commission described and within the period of time fixed in Article 2 of this convention shall estab- therefor in Article 5 of the Treaty of lish its rules of procedure. In the absence Santiago de Chile of May 3, 1923. of agreement to the contrary, the pro- (3) Finally, the Commission shall cedure indicated in Article 4 of the Treaty be bound to carry out its conciliatory of Santiago de Chile of May 3, 1923, shall function within the period of six be followed. months which is referred to in Article Each party shall bear its own expenses 7 of the Treaty of Santiago de Chile and a proportionate share of the general of May 3, 1923. expenses of the Commission. The Parties to the controversy may, ARTICLE 9. The report and the recom- however, extend this time, if they so agree mendations of the Commission, insofar as and notify the Commission in due time. it may be acting as an organ of concilia- ARTICLE 5. The present convention tion, shall not have the character of a does not preclude the High Contracting decision nor an arbitral award, and shall Parties, or one or more of them, from not be binding on the Parties either as regards the exposition or interpretation of ARTICLE 15. The provisions of the pre- the facts or as regards questions of law. ceding article shall also apply with regard ARTICLE 10. As soon as possible after to -the Permanent Commissions consti- the termination of its labors the Commis- tuted by the aforementioned Treaty of sion shall transmit to the Parties a certi- Santiago de Chile, to the end that said fied copy of the report and of the bases of Commissions may exercise the concilia- settlement which it may propose. tory functions prescribed in Article 3 of The Commission in transmitting the re- this convention. port and the recommendations to the ARTICLE 16. The present convention Parties shall fix a period of time, which shall be ratified by the High Contracting shall not exceed six months, within which Parties in conformity with their respec- the Parties shall pass upon the bases of tive constitutional procedures, provided settlement above referred to. that they have previously ratified the ARTICLE 11. Once the period of time Treaty of Santiago, Chile, of May 3,1923. fixed by the Commission for the Parties The original convention and the instru- to make their decisions has expired, the ments of ratification shall be deposited in Commission shall set forth in a final act the Ministry for Foreign Affairs of the the decision of the Parties, and if the Republic of Chile which shall give notice conciliation has been effected, the terms of the ratifications through diplomatic of the settlement. channels to the other signatory Govern- ARTICLE 12. The obligations set forth ments and the convention shall enter into in the second sentence of the first para- effect for the High Contracting Parties in graph of Article 1 of the Treaty of Santi- the order that they deposit their ratifica- ago de Chile of May 3, 1923, shall extend tions. to the time when the final act referred to This convention shall remain in force in the preceding article is signed. indefinitely, but it may be denounced by ARTICLE 13. Once the procedure of means of notice given one year in advance conciliation is under way it shall be inter- at the expiration of which it shall cease to rupted only by a direct settlement be- be in force as regards the Party denounc- tween the Parties or by their agreement ing the same, but shall remain in force as to accept absolutely the decision ex aequo regards the other signatories. Notice of et bono of an American Chief of State or the denunciation shall be addressed to the to submit the controversy to arbitration Ministry for Foreign Affairs of the Re- or to an international court. public of Chile which will transmit it for ARTICLE 14. Whenever for any reason appropriate action to the other signatory the Treaty of Santiago de Chile of May Governments. 3. 1923, does not apply, the Commission Any American State not a signatory of referred to in Article 2 of this convention this convention may adhere to the same shall be organized to the end that it may by transmitting the official instrument exercise the conciliatory functions stipu- setting forth such adherence, to the lated in this convention; the Commission Ministry for Foreign Affairs of the Re- shall be organized in the same manner as public of Chile which will notify the other that prescribed in Article 4 of said treaty. High Contracting Parties thereof in the in such cases, the Commission thus or- manner heretofore mentioned. ganized shall be governed in its operation IN WITNESS WHEREOF the above-men- by the provisions relative to conciliation, tioned Plenipotentiaries have signed this of this convention. convention in English, Spanish, Portu- guese and French and hereunto affix their Guatemala:ADRL(N REcINos, Josi FALLA. respective seals. Haiti: A. BONAMY, RAOUL LIZAIRE. Done at the city of Washington, on this Ecuador: GONZALO ZALDUMBIDE. fifth day of January, 1929. Colombia: ENRIQUE OLAYA HERRERA, C. ESCALL6N. Venezuela: CARLOS F. GRISANTI, FR. Brazil: S. GURGEL DO AMARAL, A. ARROYO PAREJO. ARAUJO-JORGE. Chile: A. PLANET, MANUEL FOSTER. Chile Panama: R. J. ALFARO, CARLOS L. L6PEZ. makes exception in this convention of Paraguay:ELIGIo AYALA. questions which may arise from situa- Nicaragua: MkXIMO H. ZEPEDA, ADRIXN tions or acts prior thereto.' RECINOS, J. LISANDRO MEDINA. GONZLEZ ROA, BE- Bolivia: E. DIEZ DE MEDINA. Mexico: FERNANDO NITO FLORES. Uruguay: Josg PEDRO VARELA. CAYETANO OCHOA, DAVID Costa Rica: MANUEL CASTRO QUESADA, El Salvador: JosE' TIBLE-MACHADO. ROSALES HiJo. Dominican Republic: A. MORALES, G. A. Peru: HERNXN VELARDE, VfCTOR M. DfAZ. MAIXRTUA. GUSTAVO Gu- Honduras: R6MULO DUR6N, MARCOS Cuba: ORESTES FERRARA, L6PEZ PONCE. TIERREZ. United States of America: FRANK B. KEL- I The Government of Chile ratified the convention without reservations. LOGG, CHARLES EVANS HUGHES. GENERAL CONVENTION OF INTER-AMERICAN CONCILIATION

Signed at Washington, January 5, 1929, at the International Conference of American States on Conciliation and Arbitration

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Bolivia Brazil January 26,1932 Chile 1 December 28,1929 Colombia June 21,1938 Costa Rica Cuba August 7, 1930 Dominican Republic December 9,1932 Ecuador February 22,1933 El Salvador December 28,1929 Guatemala November 15,1929 Haiti April 18, 1933 Honduras January 21,1937 Mexico January 9,1930 Nicaragua January 11, 1933 Panama February 20,1933 Paraguay January 10,1939 Peru May 11, 1934 United States March 27,1929 Uruguay October 15,1934 Venezuela November 16,1936

1. With reservation.

The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Chile, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. The Convention entered into force on November 15, 1929 when the second ratification was deposited by Guatemala. Article 16 of the Convention requires the prior ratification of the Treaty to Avoid or Prevent Conflicts between the American States, signed at Santiago, Chile in 1923.

This Treaty has been superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948. It continues in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of Bogotd. GENERAL TREATY OF INTER-AMERICAN ARBITRATION Signed at Washington, January 5, 1529

The Governments of Venezuela, Chile, eignty of the States and in the most ample Bolivia, Uruguay, Costa Rica, Peru, manner possible under present interna- Honduras, Guatemala, Haiti, Ecuador, tional conditions, have resolved to effect Colombia, Brazil, Panama, Paraguay, the present treaty, and for that purpose Nicaragua, Mexico, El Salvador, the have designated the Plenipotentiaries Dominican Republic, Cuba, and the hereinafter named: United States of America, represented at Venezuela: Carlos F. Grisanti, Fran- and Arbi- the Conference on Conciliation cisco Arroyo Parejo. tration assembled at Washington, pur- Chile: Manuel Foster Recabarren, suant to the Resolution adopted on Antonio Planet. February 18, 1928, by the Sixth Inter- Bolivia: Eduardo Diez de Medina. national Conference of American States Uruguay: Jos6 Pedro Varela. held in the City of Habana; Costa Rica: Manuel Castro Quesada, declara- In accordance with the solemn Jos6 Tible-Machado. tions made at said Conference to the effect Peru: Hern~n Velarde, Victor M. that the American Republics condemn Mafirtua. war as an instrument of national policy Honduras: R6mulo Dur6n, Marcos and adopt obligatory arbitration as the L6pez Ponce. of their inter- means for the settlement Guatemala: Adri6n Recinos, Jos6 Falla. national differences of a juridical char- Haiti: Auguste Bonamy, Raoul Lizaire. acter; Ecuador: Gonzalo Zaldumbide. of Being convinced that the Republics Colombia: Enrique Olaya Herrera, the New World, governed by the princi- Carlos Escall6n. ples, institutions and practices of democ- Brazil: S. Gurgel do Amaral, A. G. de mutual racy and bound furthermore by Araujo-Jorge. interests, which are increasing each day, Panama: Ricardo J. Mfaro, Carlos L. have not only the necessity but also the L6pez. duty of avoiding the disturbance of conti- Paraguay: Eligio Ayala. nental harmony whenever differences Nicaragua: M~ximo H. Zepeda, Adrian which are susceptible of judicial decision Recinos, J. Lisandro Medina. arise among them; M~xico: Fernando GonzAlez Roa, Be- Conscious of the great moral and nito Flores. to material benefits which peace offers El Salvador: Cayetano Ochoa, David that the sentiment and humanity and Rosales h. opinion of America demand, without de- Dominican Republic: Angel Morales, lay, the organization of an arbitral system Gustavo A. Diaz. which shall strengthen the permanent Cuba: Orestes Ferrara, Gustavo Gu- reign of justice and law; ti~rrez. And animated by the purpose of giving United States of America: Frank B. conventional form to these postulates and Kellogg, Charles Evans Hughes. aspirations with the minimum exceptions which they have considered indispensable Who, after having deposited their full to safeguard the independence and sover- powers, found in good and due form by the Conference, have agreed upon the Each Party shall nominate two arbi- following: trators, of whom only one may be a ARTICLE 1. The High Contracting Par- national of said Party or selected from ties bind themselves to submit to arbitra- the persons whom said Party has desig- tion all differences of an international nated as members of the Permanent character which have arisen or may arise Court of Arbitration at The Hague. The between them by virtue of a claim of other member may be of any other Ameri- right made by one against the other under can nationality. These arbitrators shall treaty or otherwise, which it has not been in turn select a fifth arbitrator who shall possible to adjust by diplomacy and be the president of the court. which are juridical in their nature by Should the arbitrators be unable to reason of being susceptible of decision by reach an agreement among themselves for the application of the principles of law. the selection of a fifth American arbi- There shall be considered as included trator, or in lieu thereof, of another who among the questions of juridical char- is not, each Party shall designate a non- acter: American member of the Permanent (a) The interpretation of a treaty; Court of Arbitration at The Hague, and (b) Any question of international the two persons so designated shall select law; the fifth arbitrator, who may be of any (c) The existence of any fact which, nationality other than that of a Party to if established, would constitute a the dispute. breach of an international obligation; ARTICLE 4. The Parties to the dispute (d) The nature and extent of the shall formulate by common accord, in reparation to be made for the breach each case, a special agreement which shall of an international obligation. clearly define the particular subject- The provisions of this treaty shall not matter of the controversy, the seat of the preclude any of the Parties, before resort- court, the rules which will be observed in ing to arbitration, from having recourse the proceedings, and the other conditions to procedures of investigation and concih- to which the Parties may agree. ation established in conventions then in If an accord has not been reached with force between them. regard to the agreement within three ARTICLE 2. There are excepted from months reckoned from the date of the the stipulations of this treaty the follow- installation of the court, the agreement ing controversies: shall be formulated by the court. (a) Those which are within the ARTICLE 5. In case of death, resigna- domestic jurisdiction of any of the tion or incapacity of one or more of the Parties to the dispute and are not arbitrators the vacancy shall be filled in controlled by international law; and the same manner as the original appoint- (b) Those which affect the interest ment. or refer to the action of a State not ARTICLE 6. When there are more than a Party to this treaty. two States directly interested in the same ARTICLE 3. The arbitrator or tribunal controversy, and the interests of two or who shall decide the controversy shall be more of them are similar, the State or designated by agreement of the Parties. States who are on the same side of the In the absence of an agreement the fol- question may increase the number of lowing procedure shall be adopted: arbitrators on the court, provided that in all cases the Parties on each side of the of America which will transmit it for ap- controversy shall appoint an equal num- propriate action to the other signatory ber of arbitrators. There shall also be a Governments. presiding arbitrator selected in the same Any American State not a signatory of manner as that provided in the last para- this treaty may adhere to the same by graph of Article 3, the Parties on each transmitting the official instrument set- side of the controversy being regarded as ting forth such adherence to the Depart- a single Party for the purpose of making ment of State of the United States of the designation therein described. America which will notify the other High ARTICLE 7. The award, duly pro- Contracting Parties thereof in the man- nounced and notified to the Parties, ner heretofore mentioned. settles the dispute definitively and with- IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-men- out appeal. tioned Plenipotentiaries have signed this Differences which arise with regard to treaty in English, Spanish, Portuguese, its interpretation or execution shall be and French and hereunto affix their re- submitted to the decision of the court spective seals. which rendered the award. Done at the city of Washington, on this ARTICLE 8. The reservations made by fifth day of January, 1929. one of the High Contracting Parties shall RESERVATIONS MADE BY THE have the effect that the other Contract- DELEGATIONS ing Parties are not bound with respect to the Party making the reservations except Venezuela: to the same extent as that expressed The Delegation of Venezuela signs the therein. present treaty of arbitration with the following reservations: ARTICLE 9. The present treaty shall be ratified by the High Contracting Parties First: There shall be excepted from this in conformity with their respective consti- Treaty those matters which, according to tutional procedures. the Constitution or the laws of Venezuela, The original treaty and the instruments are under the jurisdiction of its courts; of ratification shall be deposited in the and especially those matters relating to Department of State of the United States pecuniary claims of foreigners. In such of America which shall give notice of the matters arbitration shall not be resorted ratifications through diplomatic channels to except when legal remedies having been to the other signatory Governments and exhausted by the claimant it shall appear the treaty shall enter into effect for the that there has been a denial of justice. High Contracting Parties in the order Second: There shall also be excepted controlled by international that they deposit their ratifications. those matters This treaty shall remain in force in- agreements now in force. definitely, but it may be denounced by Chile: means of one year's previous notice at Chile does not accept obligatory arbi- the expiration of which it shall cease to tration for questions which have their be in force as regards the Party denounc- origin in situations or acts antedating the ing the same, but shall remain in force present treaty nor does it accept obliga- as regards the other signatories. Notice of tory arbitration for those questions which, the denunciation shall be addressed to the being under the exclusive competency of Department of State of the United States the national jurisdiction, the interested parties claim the right to withdraw from restrict the arbitration conventions which the cognizance of the established judicial are now in force between Costa Rica and authorities, unless said authorities decline another or others of the high contracting to pass judgment on any action or excep- parties and do not involve arbitration, dis- tion which any natural or juridical foreign avowal, or renewed discussion of ques- person may present to them in the form tions which may have already been settled established by the laws of the country. by arbitral awards. B91ivia: (b) The obligations contracted under The Delegation of Bolivia in accordance this Treaty do not involve the arbitration with the doctrine and policy invariably of judgments handed down by the courts maintained by Bolivia in the field of of Costa Rica in civil cases which may be international jurisprudence, gives full ad- submitted to them and with regard to herence to and signs the General Treaty which the interested parties have recog- of Inter-American Arbitration which the nized the jurisdiction of said courts. Republics of America are to sanction, Honduras: formulating the following express reserva- The Delegation of Honduras, in signing tions: the present Treaty, formulates an express First: There may be excepted from the reservation making it a matter of record provisions of the present agreement, that the provisions thereof shall not be questions arising from acts occurring or applicable to pending international ques- conventions concluded before the said tions or controversies or to those which treaty goes into effect, as well as those may arise in the future relative to acts which, in conformity with international prior to the date on which the said Treaty law, are under the exclusive jurisdiction goes into effect. of the state. Guatemala: Second: It is also understood that, for The Delegation of Guatemala makes the submission to arbitration of a terri- the follov, ing reservations: torial controversy or dispute, the zone to 1. In order to submit to arbitration any which the said arbitration is to apply questions relating to the boundaries of the must be previously determined in the nation, the approval of the Legislative As- arbitral agreement. sembly must first be given, in each case, Uruguay: in conformity with the Constitution of the I vote in favor of the Treaty of Arbitra- Republic. tion, with the reservation formulated by 2. The provisions of the present Con- the Delegation of Uruguay at the Fifth vention do not alter or modify the con- Pan American Conference, favoring broad ventions and treaties previously entered arbitration; and with the understanding into by the Republic of Guatemala. that arbitration will be resorted to only Ecuador: in case of denial of justice, when the na- The Delegation of Ecuador, pursuant to tional tribunals have jurisdiction, ac- instructions of its Government, reserves cording to the legislation of their own from the jurisdiction of the obligatory country. arbitration agreed upon in the present Costa Rica: Treaty: (a) The obligations contracted under 1. Questions at present governed by this Treaty do not annul, abrogate, or conventions or treaties now in effect; 2. Those which may arise from previous the competent national authority has causes or may result from acts preceding been placed in the class of res judicata. the signature of this treaty; El Salvador: 3. Pecuniary claims of foreigners who The Delegation of El Salvador to the may not have previously exhausted all Conference on Conciliation and Arbitra- legal remedies before the courts of justice tion assembled in Washington accepts and of the country, it being understood that signs the General Treaty of Inter-Ameri- such is the interpret ,tion and the extent can Arbitration concluded this day by of the application which the Government said Conference, with the following reser- of Ecuador has always given to the vations or restrictions: Buenos Aires Convention of August 1. After the words of paragraph 1 of 11, 1910. Article 1 reading: "under treaty or other- Colombia: wise", the following words are to be added: The Delegation of Colombia signs the "subsequent to the present Convention." foregoing Convention with the following The article continues without any other two declarations or reservations: modification. First: The obligations which the Re- 2. Paragraph (a) of Article 2 is accepted public of Colombia may contract thereby by the Delegation without the final words refer to the differences which may arise which read: "and are not controlled by from acts subsequent to the ratification international law," which should be con- of the Convention; sidered as eliminated. Second: Except in the case of a denial 3. This Treaty does not include contro- of justice, the arbitration provided for versies or differences with regard to points in this convention is not applicable to the or questions which, according to the questions which may have arisen or which Political Constitution of El Salvador, may arise between a citizen, an associa- must not be submitted to arbitration, and tion or a corporation of one of the parties 4. Pecuniary claims against the nation and the other contracting state when the shall be decided by its judges and courts, judges or courts of the latter state are, in since they have jurisdiction thereof, and accordance with its legislation, competent recourse shall be had to international to settle the controversy. arbitration only in the cases provided in Paraguay: the Constitution and laws of El Salvador, I sign this treaty with the reservation that is in cases of denial of justice or un- that Paraguay excludes from its applica- usual delay in the administration thereof. tion questions which directly or indirectly Dominican Republic: affect the integrity of the national terri- The Dominican Republic, in signing the tory and are not merely questions of General Treaty of Inter-American Arbi- frontiers or boundaries. tration, does so with the understanding Mexico: that controversies relating to questions Mexico makes the reservation that dif- which are under the jurisdiction of its courts shall not be referred to arbitral ferences, which fall under the jurisdiction of the courts, shall not form a subject of jurisdiction except in accordance with the the procedure provided for by the Con- principles of international law. vention, except in case of denial of justice, Venezuela: CARLOS F. GmSANTI, FR. and until after the judgment passed by ARROYO PAREJO. Chile: MANUEL FOSTER, A. PLANET. Ecuador [Translation]: Bolivia: E. DIEZ DE MEDINA. With the purpose of seeking more ade- Uruguay: Josg PEDRO VARELA. quate means of generalizing and making Costa Rica: MANUEL CASTRO QUESADA, effective the American instruments of Josi TIBLE-MACHADO. peace, the Republic of Ecuador abandons Peru: HERNIN VELARDE, VfCTOR M. the First and Second Reservations made MA16RTUA. by the representative of Ecuador upon Honduras: R6MuLO E. DUR6N, M. L6PEZ signing the said General Treaty of Inter- PONCE. American Arbitration, in accordance with Guatemala: ADRI.IN RECINOS, Jos19 Article 1 of the Protocol of Progressive FALLA. Arbitration of January 5, 1929; which Haiti: A. BONAMY, RAOUL LIZAIRE. reservations were made in this manner: Ecuador: GONZALO ZALDUMBIDE. The Delegation of Ecuador, pur- Colombia: ENRIQUE OLAYA HERRERA, suant to instructions of its Govern- C. ESCALL6N. ment, reserves from the jurisdiction Brazil: S. GURGEL DO AMARAL, A. of the obligatory arbitration agreed ARAUJO-JORGE. upon in the present Treaty: 1. Panama:R. J. ALFARO, CARLOS L. L6PEZ. Questions at present governed by Paraguay:ELIGIo AYALA. conventions or treaties now in effect; Nicaragua: MkXIMO H. ZEPEDA, ADRIkN 2. Those which may arise from previ- RECINOS, J. LISANDRO MEDINA. ous causes or may result from acts Mexico: FERNANDO GONZXLEZ ROA, BE- preceding the signature of this treaty. NITO FLORES. El Salvador: DAVID ROSALES, HiJo, The Republic of Ecuador upon ratify- CAYETANO OCHOA. ing the present Treaty maintains in effect Dominican Republic: A. MORALES, G. A. the Third Reservation made by the Pleni- DfAz. potentiary, Mr. Gonzalo Zaldumbide, the Cuba: ORESTES FERRARA, GUSTAVO Gu- text of which reads as follows: TIKRREZ. 3. Pecuniary claims of foreigners United States of America: FRANK B. who may not have previously ex- KELLOGG, CHARLES EVANS HUGHES. hausted all legal remedies before the courts of justice of the country, it being understood that such is the RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE TIME OF interpretation and the extent of the RATIFICATION application which the Government Chile: of Ecuador has always given to the With the reservations made at the time Buenos Aires Convention of August of signature. 11, 1910. Colombia: El Salvador: With the reservations made at the time With the reservations made at the time of signature. of signature.

Dominican Republic: Guatemala: With the reservations made at the time With the reservations made at the time of signature. of signature. Honduras: such ratification, that the special agree- With the reservations made at the time ment in each case shall be made only by of signature. the President, and then only by and with Meico: the advice and consent of the Senate, pro- With the reservations made at the time vided two thirds of the Senators present of signature. concur." United States of America: Venezuela: This Government ratified the Treaty With the reservations made at the time "with the understanding, made a part of of signature.

GENERAL TREATY OF INTER-AMERICAN ARBITRATION

Signed at Washington, January 5, 1929, at the International Conference of American States on Conciliation and Arbitration

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

1 Bolivia Brazil January 25,1932 Chile I February 27, 19301 1 Colombia July 12, 1938 1 Costa Rica' Cuba November 8,1930 1 Dominican Republic September 17,19291 1 Ecuador November 3,1937 2 El Salvador' December 28,1929 1 Guatemalal October 28,1929 1 Haiti April 4,1933 1 Honduras February 9,19371 Mexico I January 6,1930 1 Nicaragua June 15,1932 Panama January 20,1933 Paraguay Peru May 23,1934 United States April 16,1935 1 Uruguay I Venezuela 1 September 1,1932 1

1. With reservations. 2. Upon ratifying, Ecuador abandoned the first and second reservations formulated at the time of signature.

The original instrument is deposited with the Department of State of the United States, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. The Treaty entered into force on October 28, 1929, when the second ratification was deposited by Guatemala. It has been superseded by the American Treaty on Pa- cific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948, but continues in effect between the States that have not ratified the latter.

See also the Treaty on Compulsory Arbitration of Mexico, 1902, and the Protocol of Progressive Ar bitration. PROTOCOL OF PROGRESSIVE ARBITRATION Signed at Washington, January 5, 1929 Whereas, a General Treaty of Inter- mitted by the said Department through American Arbitration has this day been diplomatic channels to every other Party signed at Washington by Plenipoten- to the above mentioned General Treaty tiaries of the Governments of Venezuela, of Inter-American Arbitration. Chile, Bolivia, Uruguay, Costa Rica, IN WITNESS WHEREOF the above men- Peru, Honduras, Guatemala, Haiti, Ecua- tioned Plenipotentiaries have signed this dor, Colombia, Brazil, Panama, Para- protocol in English, Spanish, Portuguese, guay, Nicaragua, Mexico, El Salvador, and French and hereunto affix their re- the Dominican Republic, Cuba, and the spective seals. United States of America; Done at the city of Washington, on this Whereas, that treaty by its terms ex- fifth day of January, 1929. cepts certain controversies from the Venezuela: CARLOS F. GRISANTI, FR. stipulations thereof; ARROYO PAREJO. Whereas, by means of reservations at- Chile: MANUEL FOSTER, A. PLANET. tached to the treaty at the time of signing, Bolivia: E. DIEZ DE MEDINA. ratifying or adhering, certain other con- Uruguay: Josg PEDRO VARELA. troversies have been or may be also Costa Rica: MANUEL CASTRO QUESADA, excepted from the stipulations of the Josg TIBLE-MACHADO. treaty or reserved from the operation Peru: HERNAN VELARDE, VfCTOR M. thereof; MAIRTUA. Whereas, it is deemed desirable to Honduras: R6MULO E. DUR6N, M. L6PEZ establish a procedure whereby such ex- PONCE. ceptions or reservations may from time Guatemala:ADRIN RECINOS, Josg FALLA. to time be abandoned in whole or in part Haiti: A. BONAMY, RAOUL LIZAIRE. by the Parties to said treaty, thus progres- Ecuador: GONZALO ZALDUMBIDE. sively extending the field of arbitration; Colombia: ENRIQUE OLAYA HERRERA, The Governments named above have C. ESCALL6N. agreed as follows: Brazil: S. GURGEL DO AMARAL, A. ARTICLE 1. Any Party to the General ARAUJO-JORGE. Treaty of Inter-American Arbitration Panama: R. J. ALFARO, CARLOS L. signed at Washington the fifth day of L6PEZ. January, 1929, may at any time deposit Paraguay:ELIGIo AYALA. with the Department of State of the Nicaragua: MkXIMO H. ZEPEDA, ADRIXN United States of America an appropriate RECINOS, J. LISANDRO MEDINA. instrument evidencing that it has aban- Mexico: FERNANDO GONZkLEZ ROA, BE- doned in whole or in part the exceptions NITO FLORES. from arbitration stipulated in the said El Salvador: CAYETANO OCHOA, DAVID treaty or the reservation or reservations ROSALES, HIJO. attached by it thereto. Dominican Republic: A. MORALES, G. A. ARTICLE 2. A certified copy of each DfAZ. instrument deposited with the Depart- Cuba: ORESTES FERRARA, GUSTAVO Gu- ment of State of the United States of TIERREZ. America pursuant to the provisions of United States of America: FRANK B. Article 1 of this protocol shall be trans- KELLOGG, CHARLES EVANS HUGHES. PROTOCOL OF PROGRESSIVE ARBITRATION

Signed at Washington, January 5, 1929, at the International Conference of American States on Conciliation and Arbitration

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Bolivia Brazil Chile February 27,1930 Colombia Costa Rica Cuba Dominican Republic September 17,1929 Ecuador November 3,1937 El Salvador December 28,1929 Guatemala October 28,1929 Haiti April 4,1933 Honduras February 9,1937 Mexico January 6,1930 Nicaragua July 18,1932 Panama Paraguay Peru United States Uruguay Venezuela September 1,1932

The original instrument is deposited with the Department of State of the United States, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. The Protocol provides that any Party to the General Treaty of Inter-American Arbitration of 1929 may at any time deposit with the Department of State of the United States an appropriate instrument evidencing that it has abandoned in whole or in part the exceptions from arbitration stipulated in the said Treaty or the reservation or reservations attached by it thereto. This Protocol together with the Treaty has been superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settle- ment (Pact of BogotA), 1948. It continues in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of BogotS. ANTI-WAR TREATY OF NON-AGGRESSION AND CONCILIATION Signed at Rio de Janeiro, October 10, 1933

The states designated below, in the any territorial arrangement which is not desire to contribute to the consolidation obtained by pacific means, nor the of peace, and to express their adherence validity of the occupation or acquisition to the efforts made by all civilized nations of territories that may be brought about to promote the spirit of universal har- by force of arms. mony; ARTICLE 3. In case of noncompliance, To the end of condemning wars of ag- by any state engaged in a dispute, with gression and territorial acquisitions that the obligations contained in the fore- may be obtained by armed conquest, going articles, the contracting states making them impossible and establishing undertake to make every effort for the their invalidity through the positive pro- maintenance of peace. To that end they visions of this treaty, and in order to re- will adopt in their character as neutrals a place them with pacific solutions based common and solidary attitude; they will on lofty concepts of justice and equity; exercise the political, juridical, or eco- Convinced that one of the most effec- nomic means authorized by international tive means of assuring the moral and law; they will bring the influence of material benefits which peace offers to public opinion to bear, but will in no the world, is the organization of a perma- case resort to intervention, either diplo- nent system of conciliation for inter- matic or armed; subject to the attitude national disputes, to be applied immedi- that may be incumbent on them by virtue ately on the violation of the principles of other collective treaties to which such mentioned; states are signatories. Have decided to put these aims of ARTICLE 4. The high contracting par- nonaggression and concord in conven- ties obligate themselves to submit to the tional form by concluding the present conciliation procedure established by this treaty, to which end they have appointed treaty the disputes specially mentioned the undersigned plenipotentiaries, who, and any others that may arise in their having exhibited their respective full reciprocal relations, without further limi- powers, found to be in good and due form, tations than those enumerated in the have agreed upon the following: following article, in all controversies ARTICLE 1. The high contracting parties which it has not been possible to settle solemnly declare that they condemn wars by diplomatic means within a reasonable of aggression in their mutual relations or period of time. in those with other states, and that the ARTICLE 5. The high contracting par- settlement of disputes or controversies of ties and the states which may in the any kind that may arise among them shall future adhere to this treaty may not be effected only by the pacific means formulate, at the time of signature, which have the sanction of international ratification, or adherence, other limita- law. tions to the conciliation procedure than ARTICLE 2. They declare that as be- those which are indicated below: tween the high contracting parties terri- (a) Differences for the solution of torial questions must not be settled by which treaties, conventions, pacts, violence, and that they will not recognize or pacific agreements of any kind whatever may have been concluded, treaties in effect, the high contracting which in no case shall be considered parties undertake to submit their dif- as annulled by this agreement, but ferences to the examination and investi- supplemented thereby insofar as they gation of a conciliation commission which tend to assure peace; as well as the shall be formed as follows, unless there is questions or matters settled by previ- an agreement to the contrary of the ous treaties; parties in each case; (b) Disputes which the parties The conciliation commission shall con- prefer to solve by direct settlement sist of five members. Each party to the or submit by common agreement to controversy shall designate a member, an arbitral or judicial solution; who may be chosen by it from among its (c) Questions which international own nationals. The three remaining mem- law leaves to the exclusive compe- bers shall be designated by common agree- tence of each state, under its consti- ment by the parties from among the na- tutional system, for which reason tionals of third powers, who must be of the parties may object to their being different nationalities, must not have submitted to the conciliation pro- their customary residence in the territory cedure before the national or local of the interested parties, nor be in the jurisdiction has decided definitively; service of any of them. The parties shall except in the case of manifest denial choose the president of the conciliation or delay of justice, in which case the commission from among the said three conciliation procedure shall be initi- members. ated within a year at the latest; If they cannot arrive at an agreement (d) Matters which affect constitu- with regard to such designations, they tional precepts of the parties to the may entrust the selection thereof to a controversy. In case of doubt, each third power or to some other existing party shall obtain the reasoned international organism. If the candidates opinion of its respective tribunal or so designated are rejected by the parties supreme court of justice, if the latter or by any one of them, each party shall should be invested with such powers. present a list of candidates equal in num- The high contracting parties may com- ber to that of the members to be selected, municate, at any time and in the manner and the names of those to sit on the provided for by article 15, an instrument conciliation commission shall be deter- stating that they have abandoned wholly mined by lot. or in part the limitations established by ARTICLE 7. The tribunals or supreme them in the conciliation procedure. courts of justice which, in accordance with The effect of the limitations formulated the domestic legislation of each state, by one of the contracting parties shall be may be competent to interpret, in the that the other parties shall not consider last or the sole instance and in matters themselves obligated in regard to that under their respective jurisdiction, the party save in the measure of the excep- constitution, treaties, or the general tions established. principles of the law of nations, may be ARTICLE 6. In the absence of a perma- designated preferentially by the high nent conciliation commission or of some contracting parties to discharge the other international organization charged duties entrusted by the present treaty to with this mission by virtue of previous the conciliation commission. In this case the tribunal or court may function as a counting from its first meeting, unless the whole or may designate some of its mem- parties should decide by common agree- bers to proceed alone or by forming a ment to shorten or extend this period. mixed commission with members of other The conciliation procedure, having been courts or tribunals, as may be agreed once begun, may be interrupted only by a upon by common accord between the direct settlement between the parties or parties to the dispute. by their subsequent decision to submit the ARTICLE 8. The conciliation commission dispute by common accord to arbitration shall establish its own rules of procedure, or to international justice. which shall provide in all cases for hearing ARTICLE 12. In communicating its re- both sides. port to the parties, the conciliation com- The parties to the controversy may mission shall fix for them a period, which furnish, and the commission may require shall not exceed 6 months, within which from them, all the antecedents and in- they must decide as to the bases of the formation necessary. The parties may settlement it has proposed. On the expira- have themselves represented by delegates tion of this term, the commission shall and assisted by advisers or experts, and record in a final act the decision of the also present evidence of all kinds. parties. ARTICLE 9. The labors and delibera- This period having expired without tions of the conciliation commission shall acceptance of the settlement by the not be made public except by a decision parties, or the adoption by common ac- of its own to that effect, with the assent of cord of another friendly solution, the the parties. parties to the dispute shall regain their In the absence of stipulation to the freedom of action to proceed as they may contrary, the decisions of the commission see fit within the limitations flowing from shall be made by a majority vote, but the articles 1 and 2 of this treaty. commission may not pronounce judgment ARTICLE 13. From the initiation of the on the substance of the case except in the conciliatory procedure until the expira- presence of all its members. tion of the period fixed by the commission ARTICLE 10. It is the duty of the com- for the parties to make a decision, they mission to secure the conciliatory settle- must abstain from any measure prej- ment of the disputes submitted to its udicial to the execution of the agreement consideration. that may be proposed by the commission After an impartial study of the ques- and, in general, from any act capable of tions in dispute, it shall set forth in a aggravating or prolonging the contro- report the outcome of its work and shall versy. propose to the parties bases of settlement ARTICLE 14. During the conciliation by means of a just and equitable solution. procedure the members of the commission The report of the commission shall in shall receive honoraria the amount of no case have the character of a final de- which shall be established by common cision or arbitral award either with re- agreement by the parties to the contro- spect to the exposition or interpretation versy. Each of them shall bear its own of the facts, or with regard to the con- expenses and a moiety of the joint ex- siderations or conclusions of law. penses or honoraria. ARTICLE 11. The conciliation commis- ARTICLE 15. The present treaty shall be sion must present its report within 1 year, ratified by the high contracting parties as soon as possible, in accordance with Chile: MhRCL&L MARTNEZ DE FERRARI, their respective constitutional procedures. Ambassador Extraordinary and Pleni- The original treaty and the instru- potentiary at Rio de Janeiro, with the ments of ratification shall be deposited reservations under letters, a, b, c, and in the Ministry of Foreign Relations and d of article V. Worship of the Argentine Republic, Mexico: ALFONSO REYES, Ambassador which shall communicate the ratifications Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary at to the other signatory states. The treaty Rio de Janeiro. shall go into effect between the high Paraguay: ROGELIO IBARRA, Envoy Ex- contracting parties 30 days after the de- traordinary and Minister Plenipoten- posit of the respective ratifications, and tiary at Rio de Janeiro. in the order in which they are effected. Uruguay: JUAN CARLOS BLANCO, Am- ARTICLE 16. This treaty shall remain bassador Extraordinary and Plenipo- open to the adherence of all states. tentiary at Rio de Janeiro.

Adherence shall be effected by the de- RESERVATIONS' posit of the respective instrument in the Ministry of Foreign Relations and Wor- AMERICAN STATES ship of the Argentine Republic, which, Chile: shall give notice thereof to the other With reservations of letters a, b, c and interested states. d of Article V, at the time of signing the ARTICLE 17. The present treaty is con- treaty and confirmed in the instrument of cluded for an indefinite time, but may be ratification. denounced by 1 year's notice, on the Colombia: expiration of which the effects thereof With the following declarations in the shall cease for the denouncing state, and instrument of ratification: remain in force for the other states which a) The Pact is signed subject to later are parties thereto, by signature or ad- legislative approval in Colombia. herence. b) The Government of Colombia con- The denunciation shall be addressed to siders it necessary, in order to assure the the Ministry of Foreign Relations and effective and full application of the Pact, Worship of the Argentine Republic, to place the following definition of aggres- which shall transmit it to the other inter- sion on record as a supplement to article ested states. 1 and with reference to the other proposi- IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the respective tions in the Pact: plenipotentiaries sign the present treaty 1. Declaration of war against in one copy, in the Spanish and Portu- another State; guese languages, and affix their seals 2. Invasion by the armed forces of thereto, at Rio de Janeiro, D. F., on the one State of the territory of another tenth day of the month of October State, even without a declaration of nineteen hundred and thirty-three. war; 3. An attack by the land, naval or Argentina: CARLOS SAAVEDRA LAMAS, air forces of one State on the terri- Minister of Foreign Relations and tory, ships or aircraft of another Worship. 1 The English translations of these reservations wee Brazil: AFRANIO DE MELLO FRANCO, made available to the Pan American Union by the De- Minister of Foreign Relations. partment of State of the United States of Amerwia. State, even without a declaration of "In adhering to this treaty the United war; States does not thereby waive any rights 4. A naval blockade of the coasts it may have under other treaties or con- or ports of another State; ventions or under international law." 5. The support given by a State NON-AMERICAN STATES to armed bands which, formed in its territory, have invaded the territory Bulgaria: of another State, or the action of re- With the following reservations in the fusing, in spite of the request of the instrument of ratification: invaded State, to adopt in its own "We approve, confirm and ratify the territory all such measures as depend foregoing Treaty, subject to reservations on it to deprive the said armed bands a, b, c and d given in Article V, under- of all aid or protection. taking to have it executed and observed in accordance with its form and tenor." Ecuador: With Article 5's reservations and with Czechoslovakia-Rumania- Yugoslavia: the reservations that the Treaty does not Reservations made jointly by N. Ti- touch existing Treaties, Conventions and tulescu, in his capacity of President of international engagements nor affect, or the Little Entente: modify the rights of Ecuador set forth 1. This adherence cannot affect in any therein. way or change any of the previous engagements, particularly those resulting from El Salvador: the Covenant of the League of Nations, With the following reservations: the Briand-Kellogg Pact, the London a) In connection with the Third Article, Treaties of July 3 and 4, 1934, (and) El Salvador, as signatory of the Covenant treaties of alliance, from adherence to the of the League of Nations, only allows the optional clause of Article 36 of the provisions which, in conformity with that Statute of the Permanent Court of Inter- Covenant, at present govern collective national Justice of The Hague, etc., all of intervention; and which engagements remain in force, not b) The reservations which appear under being extended or restricted by this ad- the letters "A", "B", "C", and "D" of herence. the Fifth Article of the same Treaty. 2. From the fact that the Governments Honduras: of the Little Entente are members of the With the reservations contained in League of Nations, it follows that, apart letters a, b, c and d of Article V, in the from the Covenant of the League of Na- Instrument of Ratification. tions, the conciliation provided by the anti-war treaty concluded at Rio de Peru: Janeiro on October 10, 1933 may be em- With the following reservation in the ployed only if the states concerned give Instrument of Ratification: "The ad- their consent in each single case in adherence to this pact does not change or vance; this reservation is in full con- modify the international pacts and conformity with Article 5 of the anti-war ventions of present effectiveness as they treaty. were signed by Peru." In conformity with its constitutional United States: provisions and in accordance with Para- With the following reservation: graph d, Article 5, of the anti-war treaty, we declare explicitly that no question be- which is the peaceful settlement of con- longing under domestic jurisdiction may troversies between nations; be subsequently brought before any inter- 2. The Government of Finland is not national organ for the purpose of a new bound by any obligation under Article decision or conciliation. III of this treaty to employ any force 3. This adherence does not include against states participating in disputes either direct or indirect recognition of a between nations; and territorial dispute on the part of the 3. The procedure for adjustment fixed States of the Little Entente, nor any in this treaty shall not apply to the dif- change in their point of view that with ferences and questions mentioned in a), the present territorial status there abso- b), c) and d), Article V. lutely cannot be any territorial dispute. In testimony whereof this note of ad- Likewise it does not include extension or herence is subscribed by the undersigned change of the obligations undertaken and confirmed by his seal. under the Covenant of the League of Na- Given at Helsinki the 28th day of May, tions, nor the acceptance of a conciliation 1937. or a legal or arbitral decision on questions Greece: which would belong under the reservation Adherence on the conditions given made at the time of adherence to the op- below: tional clause of Article 36 of the Statute 1. This adherence cannot in any way of the Permanent Court of International impair or constitute a change or modifica- Justice, in particular for all questions on tion of any kind whatever as regards the matters themselves or questions of previous engagements, particularly those procedure, which might directly or in- resulting from the Covenant of the League directly lead to discussion as to the of Nations, from the General Act signed present territorial integrity of these at Geneva on September 26, 1928, from States of the Little Entente and their the Briand-Kellogg Pact, from the Lon- rights of sovereignty, also over ports and don Treaties of July 3 and 4, 1933, from transportation lines. Treaties of alliance, from adherence to Finland: the optional clause of article 36 of the With the following reservations: Statute of the Permanent Court of Inter- "Having examined the above treaty, national Justice of The Hague, etc., etc., which has been considered by the Finnish etc.; all of which engagements remain in Parliament, I have decided in virtue of force without extension or restriction as a the power granted me under the consti- result of the present adherence. tution of the Republic, that the Republic 2. As the Hellenic Republic is a member of Finland will adhere to the treaty men- of the League of Nations, it follows that, tioned, with the following reservations, apart from the Covenant of the League of approved by the Parliament: Nations, the procedure of conciliation 1. Finland's adherence to this treaty in provided by the Rio de Janeiro Treaty no wise alters any of the rights and obliga- may come into play only after the consent tions of Finland under the Covenant of of the states concerned has been ob- the League of Nations or other treaties tained in each particular case. concluded previously, or the ties which This reservation is in strict conformity may be formed with other nations in with Article 5 of the Rio de Janeiro future under those treaties the purpose of Treaty. In conformity with the constitutional relations with States which have not ac- provisions in force in the country, and cepted the same obligations. through application of paragraph d of The present adherence does not preju- Article 5 of the Rio de Janeiro Treaty, dice the rights and obligations which flow the Hellenic Republic must likewise ex- to Italy from treaties and agreements in pressly stipulate that any affair involving force with other States. its internal competence cannot later be The adherence of Italy as regards taken before any international organ Article II of the Treaty will have effect whatever for further decision or concilia- from the date the determination of which tion. the Royal Government reserves to itself. 3. The present adherence cannot imply On the basis of Article V of the Treaty, direct or indirect recognition by the there shall be excepted from the concilia- Hellenic Republic of any territorial dis- tion procedure instituted by the said pute or a change of its point of view that Treaty, the controversies, disputes and there cannot be territorial disputes in the questions indicated in letters a), b), c) present status of frontiers without any of the said Article, there being understood exception whatever. as included in the disputes to be settled It can likewise not involve extension or by direct agreement between the inter- change in the obligations assumed by it ested parties those disputes which refer to through the Covenant of the League of the relations of Italy with a third power. Nations, further than the acceptance of And it is understood that the obligation a conciliation or a judicial or arbitral mentioned in Article IV of the Treaty settlement for questions reserved at the does not refer to controversies or disputes moment of its adherence to the general relative to events or situations antedating act signed at Geneva on September 26, the present adherence. 1928, as well as to the optional clause of Norway: article 36 of the Statute of the Permanent By order of my Government, I have the Court of International Justice, in par- honor to advise Your Excellency that the ticular; any question of basis or of procedure which may directly or indirectly Government of the King is happy to give its adherence to the Treaty of non-aggres- lead to discussion as to the territorial sion and conciliation of October 10, 1933, status of Greece, including therein dif- initiated by Argentina, subject to ratifica- ferences relative to its rights of sover- tion and with the following special reser- eignty over its ports and means of com- vations: munication. 1. The provisions of the present Treaty Italy: cannot in any way affect the rights and The undersigned, duly authorized, obligations resulting for Norway from adheres with the present Act, in the name the Covenant of the League of Nations of His Majesty the King of Italy, and or from other treaties previously con- subject to ratification, to the Anti-War cluded, nor from treaties looking toward Treaty of Non-Aggression and Concilia- the pacific settlement of international dis- tion, signed at Rio de Janeiro on October putes which might later be concluded be- 10, 1933, with the following declarations: tween Norway and other States. The obligations deriving from the pre- 2. The Norwegian Government assumes ceding Treaty will not bind Italy in its no obligation by virtue of Article 3 of the present Treaty to employ coercive meas- In conformity with the constitutional ures against any party in an international provisions in force in the country, and dispute. through application of paragraph d of 3. There shall be exempted from the Article 5 of the Rio de Janeiro Treaty, conciliation procedure instituted by the the Government of the Republic must Treaty the differences and questions likewise expressly stipulate that any af- mentioned under letters a, b, and c of fair involving its internal competence Article 5. cannot later be taken before any international organ whatever for further Rumania: (See Czechoslovakia) decision or conciliation. Turkey: 3. The present adhcrence cannot imply Adherence with the following reserva- direct or indirect recognition by the tions: Turkish Republic of any territorial dis- 1. This adherence cannot impair or pute or a change of its point of view that constitute a change or modification of there cannot be territorial disputes in the any kind whatever as regards previous present status of frontiers without any engagements, particularly those resulting exception whatever. It cannot likewise from the Covenant of the League of Na- involve extension or change in the obligations, from the General Act signed at tions assumed by it through the Covenant Geneva on September 26, 1928, from the of the League of Nations, further than the Kellogg-Briand Pact, from the London acceptance of a conciliation or a judicial or Treaties of July 3 and 4, 1933, from arbitral settlement for questions reserved Treaties of alliance, from adherence to the at the moment of its adherence to the optional clause of article 36 of the Statute general act signed at Geneva on Septem- of the Permanent Court of International ber 26, 1928, as well as to the optional Justice of The Hague, etc., etc.; all of clause of article 36 of the Statute of the which engagements remain in force with- Permanent Court of International Justice, out extension or restriction as a result of in particular: any question of basis or of the present adherence. procedure which may directly or in- 2. As Turkey is a member of the League directly lead to discussions as to the of Nations, it follows that, apart from the territorial status of Turkey, including Covenant of the League of Nations, the therein differences relative to its rights procedure of conciliation provided by the of sovereignty over its ports and means Rio de Janeiro Treaty may come into of communication. play only after the consent of the states This adherence will have its full effect concerned has been obtained in each par- for Turkey after ratification of the ticular case. Treaty by the Great National Assembly This reservation is in strict conformity of Turkey. with Article 5 of the Rio de Janeiro Treaty. Yugoslavia: (See Czecnoslovakia) ANTI-WAR TREATY OF NON-AGGRESSION AND CONCILIATION (SAAVEDRA - LAMAS PACT)

Signed at Rio de Janeiro, October 10, 1933

Adherences by American States

ADHERING OR SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

1 Argentina October 14,1935 2 Bolivia 1 Brazil August 26,1936 Chile3 August 23,193410 Colombia- June 22,193610 2 Costa Rica 4 June 6,1935 Cuba 5 Dominican Republic September 17, 1934 6 Ecuador April 20,193610 7 El Salvador September 20,193510 2 Guatemala August 11, 1936 2 July 10,1936 Haiti 7 Honduras April 20,193610 February 17,1936 Mexico1 8 Nicaragua August 13,1935 2 Panama November 12,1936 Parauay December 28,1938 Peru April 21,193610 2 United States August 10,193410 Uruguay1 July 27,1936 Vene zuela December 27,193510

Original signatory. Adhered April 27, 1934. Original signatory; with reservations. Adhered April 30, 1934. Adhered July 18, 1934. Adhered February 7, 1934. Adhered April 28, 1934. Adhered December 15, 1934. Adhered June 11, 1934. With reservations. ANTI-WAR TREATY OF NON-AGGRESSION AND CONCILIATION (SAAVEDRA-LAMAS PACT)

Signed at Rio de Janeiro, October 10, 1933

Adherences by Non-American States

ADHERING OR SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

1 Bulgaria April 15,193512 Czechoslovakia 2 June 10,193512 3 Finland February 17,193812 4 Greece Italy 5 6 Norway Portugal 7 Rumania8 June 10,193512 Spain 9 April 5,1936 Turkey 1 0 Yugoslavia 1 May 9,193512

1. Adhered June 20, 1934. 2. Adhered December 12, 1934. 3. Adhered May 28, 1937. 4. Adhered July 17, 1935, with reservations. 5. Adhered March 14, 1934, with reservations. 6. Adhered April 17, 1936, with reservations. 7. Adhered November 2, 1934. 8. Adhered December 12, 1934. 9. Adhered May 25, 1934. 10. Adhered June 18, 1935, with reservations. 11. Adhered December 12, 1934, with reservations. 12. With reservations.

The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Argentine Republic, wnich is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. It becomes effective as to each contracting State thirty days after the deposit of its ratification.

It has been superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948. This Treaty continues in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of BogotA. ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL TO THE GENERAL CONVENTION OF INTER-AMERICAN CONCILIATION Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933

The High Contracting Parties of the in the Ministry of Foreign Relations of General Convention of Inter-American the Republic of Chile, the names of the Conciliation of the 5th of January, 1929, two members whose designation they convinced of the undeniable advantage are empowered to make by Article 4 of giving a permanent character to the of the Convention of Santiago, Chile, Commissions of Investigation and Con- and said members, so named, shall conciliation to which Article 2 of said Con- stitute the members of the Commissions vention refers, agree to add to the afore- which are to be organized with bilateral mentioned Convention the following and character in accordance with this Proto- additional Protocol. col. ARTICLE 1. Each country signatory ARTICLE 5. It shall be left to the Gov- to the Treaty signed in Santiago, Chile, erning Board of the Pan American Union the 3rd of May, 1923, shall name, as to initiate measures for bringing about soon as possible, by means of a bilateral the nomination of the fifth member of agreement which shall be recorded in a each Commission of Investigation and simple exchange of notes with each one Conciliation in accordance with the of the other signatories of the afore- stipulation established in Article 4 of the mentioned Treaty, those members of the Convention of Santiago, Chile. various commissions provided for in ARTICLE 6. In view of the character Article 4 of said Treaty. The commissions which this Protocol has as an addition so named shall have a permanent charac- to the Convention of Conciliation of ter and shall be called Commissions of Washington, of January 5, 1929, the Investigation and Conciliation. provision of Article 16 of said Conven- ARTICLE 2. Any of the contracting tion shall be applied thereto. parties may replace the members which have been designated, whether they be IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plenipo- nationals or foreigners; but, at the same tentiaries hereinafter indicated, have set time, the substitute shall be named. In their hands and their seals to this Addi- case the substitution is not made, the tional Protocol in English, and Spanish, replacement shall not be effective. in the city of Montevideo, Republic of ARTICLE 3. The commissions organized Uruguay, this twenty-sixth day of the in fulfillment of Article 3 of the aforemen- month of December in the year nineteen tioned Treaty of Santiago, Chile, shall be hundred and thirty-three. called Permanent Diplomatic Commis- sions of Investigation and Conciliation. United States of America: ALEXANDER ARTICLE 4. To secure the immediate W. WEDDELL, J. BUTLER WRIGHT. organization of the commissions men- Uruguay: A. MARI, Jos9 PEDRO VARELA, tioned in the first Article hereof, the MATEO MARQUES CASTRO, DARDO High Contracting Parties engage them- REGULES, SoFfA ALVAREZ VIGNOLI DE selves to notify the Pan American Union DEMICHELI, TE6FILO PIREYRO CHAIN, at the time of the deposit of the ratifica- LUIS A. DE HERRERA, MARTfN R. tion of the present Additional Protocol ECHEGOYEN, Jos9 G. ANTURA, J. C. BLANCO, PEDRO MANINI Rfos, Ro- Chile: J. RAM6N GUTI9RREZ, F. FIGUE- DOLFO MEZZERA, OCTAVIO MORAT6, ROA, B. COHEN. Luis MORQUIO, Jos SERRATO. Venezuela: Ecuador: A. AGUIRRE APARICIo, ARTURO This Government adhered with a SCARONE. reservation with respect to Article 1.

ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL TO THE GENERAL CONVENTION OF INTER-AMERICAN CONCILIATION OF 1929

Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933, at the Seventh International Conference of American States

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Chile March l 10,1935 Colombia August 24, 1943 Dominican Republic September 10,1936 Ecuador 1 Guatemala 1 August 10,1938 August 20,1938 HondurasI Mexico April 22,1936 Nicaragua 1 Panama Paraguay January 10,1939 United States August 18,1934 Uruguay Venezuela November 17,19382

1. Adhered subject to ratification.

2. With a reservation.

The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Chile, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. The Protocol entered into force on March 10, 1935, when Chile became the second country to deposit its ratification.

See also the General Convention of Inter-American Conciliation concluded at Washington in 1929.

It has been superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948. This Treaty continues in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of Bogota. CONVENTION ON MAINTENANCE, PRESERVATION AND REESTABLISHMENT OF PEACE Signed at Buenos Aires, December 28, 1936

The Governments represented at the Daniel Antokoletz, Carlos Brebbia, C6sar Inter-American Conference for the Main- Diaz Cisneros. tenance of Peace, Paraguay: Miguel Angel Soler, J. CONSIDERING: That according to the Isidro Ramirez. statement of His Excellency, Franklin Honduras: Antonio Bermildez M., D. Roosevelt, President of the United Juliin L6pez Pineda. States, to whose lofty ideals the meeting Costa Rica: Manuel F. Jimdnez, Carlos of this Conference is due, the measures to Brenes. be adopted by it "would advance the Venezuela: Caracciolo Parra P6rez, cause of world peace, inasmuch as the Gustavo Herrera, Alberto Z6rega Fom- agreements which might be reached would bona. supplement and reinforce the efforts of Peru: Carlos Concha, Alberto Ulloa, the League of Nations and of all other Felipe Barreda Laos, Di6medes Arias existing or future peace agencies in seek- Schreiber. ing to prevent war"; El Salvador: Manuel Castro Ramirez, That every war or threat of war affects Maximiliano Patricio Brannon. directly or indirectly all civilized peoples Mexico: Francisco Castillo NAjera, and endangers the great principles of Alfonso Reyes, Ram6n Beteta, Juan liberty and justice which constitute the Manuel Alvarez del Castillo. American ideal and the standard of Brazil: Jos6 Carlos de Macedo Soares, American international policy; Oswaldo Aranha, Jos6 de Paula Rodri- That the Treaty of Paris of 1928 gues Alves, Helio Lobo, Hildebrando (Kellogg-Briand Pact) has been ac- Pompeu Pinto Accioly, Edmundo da Luz cepted by almost all the civilized states, Pinto, Roberto Carneiro de Mendonga, whether or not members of other peace Rosalina Coelho Lisboa de Miller, Maria organizations, and that the Treaty of Luiza Bittencourt. Non-Aggression and Conciliation of 1933 Uruguay: Jos6 Espalter, Pedro Manini (Saavedra Lamas Pact signed at Rio de Rios, Eugenio Martinez Thedy, Juan Janeiro) has the approval of the twenty- Antonio Buero, Felipe Ferreiro, Andr6s one American Republics represented in F. Puyol, Abalcizar Garcia, Jos6 G. this Conference, Antufia, Julio C~sar Cerdeiras Alonso, Have resolved to give contractual form Gervasio Posadas Belgrano. to these purposes by concluding the Guatemala: Carlos Salazar, Jos6 A. present Convention, to which end they Medrano, Alfonso Carrillo. have appointed the Plenipotentiaries Nicaragua:Luis Manuel Debayle, Jos6 hereafter mentioned; Maria Moncada, Modesto Valle. Argentina: Carlos Saavedra Lamas, Dominican Republic: Max Henriquez Roberto M. Ortiz, Miguel Angel Circano, Urefia, Tulio M. Cestero, Enrique Jim& Jos6 Maria Cantilo, Felipe A. Espil, nez. Leopoldo Melo, Isidoro Ruiz Moreno, Colombia: Jorge Soto del Corral, Miguel L6pez Pumarejo, Roberto Urdaneta Arbe- States, the Governments of the American lez, Alberto Lleras Camargo, Jos6 Igna- Republics represented at this Conference cio Diaz Granados. shall undertake without delay the neces- Panama: Harmodio Arias M., Julio sary mutual consultations, in order to J. Fibrega, Eduardo Chiari. exchange views and to seek, within the United States of America: Cordell Hull, obligations resulting from the pacts above Sumner Welles, Alexander W. Weddell, mentioned and from the standards of Adolf A. Berle, Jr., Alexander F. Whitney, international morality, a method of peace- Charles G. Fenwick, Michael Francis ful collaboration; and, in the event of an Doyle, Elise F. Musser. international war outside America which Chile: Miguel Cruchaga Tocornal, Luis might menace the peace of the American Barros Borgofio, F61ix Nieto del Rio, Republics, such consultation shall also Ricardo Montaner Bello. take place to determine the proper time Ecuador: Humberto Albornoz, Antonio and manner in which the signatory states, Pons, Jos6 Gabriel Navarro, Francisco if they so desire, may eventually co- Guarderas, Eduardo Salazar G6mez. operate in some action tending to pre- Bolivia: Enrique Finot, David Alv6ste- serve the peace of the American Con- gui, Eduardo Diez de Medina, Alberto tinent. Ostria Guti6rrez, Carlos Romero, Alberto ARTICLE 3. It is agreed that any ques- Cortadellas, Javier Paz Campero. tion regarding the interpretation of the Haiti: H. Pauleus Sannon, Camille J. present Convention, which it has not Le6n, Elie Lescot, Edm6 Manigat, Pierre been possible to settle through diplo- Eugene de Lespinasse, Clement Magloire. matic channels, shall be submitted to the Cuba: Jos6 Manuel Cortina, Ram6n procedure of conciliation provided by Zaydin, Carlos MArquez Sterling, Rafael existing agreements, or to arbitration or Santos Jim6nez, C6sar Salaya, Calixto to judicial settlement. Whitmarsh, Jos6 Manuel Carbonell. ARTICLE 4. The present Convention Who, after having deposited their full shall be ratified by the High Contracting powers, found to be in good and due Parties in conformity with their respec- form, have agreed as follows: tive constitutional procedures. The origi- ARTICLE 1. In the event that the peace nal convention shall be deposited in the of the American Republics is menaced, Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Argen- and in order to coordinate efforts to pre- tine Republic which shall communicate vent war, any of the Governments of the ratifications to the other signatories. the American Republics signatory to the The Convention shall come into effect Treaty of Paris of 1928 or to the Treaty between the High Contracting Parties of Non-Aggression and Conciliation of in the order in which they have deposited 1933, or to both, whether or not a member their ratifications. of other peace organizations, shall consult ARTICLE 5. The present Convention with the other Governments of the Ameri- shall remain in effect indefinitely but can Republics, which, in such event, may be denounced by means of one year's shall consult together for the purpose of notice, after the expiration of which finding and adopting methods of peaceful period the Convention shall cease in its cooperation. effects as regards the party which de- ARTICLE 2. In the event of war, or a nounces it but shall remain in effect for virtual state of war between American the remaining signatory States. De- nunciations shall be addressed to the PINTO, ROBERTO CARNEIRO DE MEN- Government of the Argentine Republic, DONgA, ROSALINA COELHO LISBOA DE which shall transmit them to the other MILLER, MARIA LUIZA BITTENCOURT. contracting States. Uruguay: PEDRO MANINI Rfos, EUGENIO MARTNEZ THEDY, FELIPE FERREIRO, IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above men- ABALCXZAR GARCfA, JuLio CISAR CER- tioned Plenipotentiaries sign the present DEIRAS ALONSO, CERVASIO POSADAS Convention in English, Spanish, Portu- BELGRANO. guese and French and hereunto affix their Guatemala: CARLOS SALAZAR, Josg A. respective seals, at the City of Buenos MEDRANO, ALFONSO CARILLO. Aires, Capital of the Argentine Republic, Nicaragua:Luis MANUEL DEBAYLE, Jos9 on the twenty-third day of the month MARfA MONCADA, MODESTO VALLE. of December, nineteen hundred and Dominican Republic: MAX HENRfQUEZ thirty-six. URERA, TULIO M. CESTERO, ENRIQUE Argentina: CARLOS SAAVEDRA LAMAS, JIMJ9NEZ. ROBERTO M. ORTIZ, MIGUEL ANGEL Colombia: JORGE SoTo DEL CORRAL, C1RCANO, JQS9I MARIA CANTILO, FE- MIGUEL L6PEZ PUMAREJO, ROBERTO LIPE A. ESPIL, LEOPOLDO MELO, URDANETA ARBELXEZ, ALBERTO ISIDORO Ruiz MORENO, DANIEL ANTO- LLERAS CAMARGO, JOS19 IGNACIO DAZ KOLETZ, CARLOS BREBBIA, C9SAR DfAZ GRANADOS. CISNEROS. Panama: HARMODIO ARIAS M., JULIO Paraguay: MIGUEL ANGEL SOLER, J. J. FkBREGA, EDUARDO CHIARI. ISIDRO RAMfREZ, with the express and United States of America: CORDELL HULL, definite reservation in respect to its SUMNER WELLES, ALEXANDER W. peculiar international position as re- WEDDELL, ADOLPH A. BERLE, JR., gards the League of Nations. ALEXANDER F. WHITNEY, CHARLES G. Honduras: ANTONIO BERMPDEZ M., JU- FENWICK, MICHAEL FRANCIS DOYLE, LIkN L6PEZ PINEDA. ELISE F. MUSSER. Costa Rica: MANUEL F. JIMI NEZ, CARLOS Chile: MIGUEL CRUCHAGA TOCORNAL, BRENES. Luis BARROS BORGORO, FgLIX NIETO Venezuela: CARACCIOLO PARRA P19REZ, DEL RIo, RICARDO MONTANER BELLO. GUSTAVO HERRERA, ALBERTO Z] REGA Ecuador: HUMBERTO ALBORNOZ, ANTONIO FOMBONA. PONS, Josi GABRIEL NAVARRO, FRAN- Per?: CARLOS CONCHA, ALBERTO ULLOA, CISCO GUARDERAS. FELIPE BARREDA LAos, DI6MEDES Bolivia: ENRIQUE FINOT, DAVID ALV9S- ARIAS SCHREIBER. TEGUI, CARLOS ROMERO. El Salvador: MANUEL CASTRO RAMfREZ, Haiti: H. PAULEUS SANNON, CAMILLE MAXIMILIANO PATRICiO BRANNON. J. LE6N, ELIE LESCOT, EDM9 MANI- Mexico: FRANCISCO CASTILLO NkJERA, GAT, PIERRE EUGPNE DE LESPINASSE, ALFONSO REYES, RAMN BETETA, JUAN CL19MENT MAGLOIRE. MANUEL ALVAREZ DEL CASTILLO. Cuba: Josg MANUEL CORTINA, RAM6N Brazil: Josg CARLOS DE MACEDO SOARES, ZAYDIN, CARLOS Mk.RQUEZ STERLING, JOS1 DE PAULA RODRIGUEZ ALVES, RAFAEL SANTOS JIM9NEZ, CtSAR SA- HELIo LOBO, HILDEBRANDO POMPEU LAYA, CALIXTO WHITMARSH, JosP PINTO ACCIOLY, EDMTNDO DA LUZ MANUEL CARBONELL. RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE TIME OF Honduras: RATIFICATION El Gobierno de Honduras consigna su reserva en el sentido de que en el Arbi- Ecuador: traje no habrA m.s excepciones que los La Repiblica del Ecuador, al ratificar casos que hayan side resueltos por aquel la preinserta Convenci6n, declara, con medio; y que las disposiciones de la relaci6n al Articulo Segundo de la citada presente Convenci6n no serin aplicables Convenci6n, que admite la consulta a los asuntos o controversias pendientes como coadyuvante y no excluyente de los ni a los que se promuevan en lo sucesivo Tratados y Compromisos vigentes, de sobre hechos anteriores a la fecha en que caricter particular, cuya inejecuci6n esta Convenci6n entre en vigor. pudiera producir conflictos internacio- [Translation] nales. The Government of Honduras formu- [Translation] lates a reservation in the sense that there In ratifying the foregoing Convention, shall be no exceptions to arbitration the Republic of Ecuador declares that, except questions already settled by that with regard to Article 2, it considers procedure; and that the provisions of this consultation as supplementing and not Convention may not be applied to pend- as excluding existing Treaties and Agree- ing matters or controversies, nor to those ments of a special character, when the which may arise in the future concerning non-fulfillment thereof could result in events which took place before the Con- international conflicts. vention enters into effect. CONVENTION ON MAINTENANCE, PRESERVATION AND REESTABLISHMENT OF PEACE

Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1936, at the Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance of Peace

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Argentina Bolivia B r azil April 4, 1938 Chile August 18,1938 Colombia March 10, 1938 Costa Rica July 21,1939 Cuba March 25,1938 Dominican Republic July 1,1937 Ecuador September 10,19371 El Salvador April 12,1938 Guatemala August 4,1938 Haiti August 20,1938 Honduras July Z5, 19381 Mexico December 15,1937 Nicaragua Novenber 24,1938 Panama December 7,1938 1 Paraguay December 28, 19381 Peru United States August 25,1937 Uruguay Venezuela December 22,1937

1. With reservations.

The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Argentine Republic, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. It entered into force on August 25, 1937, when the second ratification was deposited by the United States. ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL RELATIVE TO NON-INTERVENTION Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1936

The Governments represented at the Alfonso Reyes, Ram6n Beteta, Juan Inter-American Conference for the Main- Manuel Alvarez del Castillo. tenance of Peace, Brazil: Jos6 Carlos de Macedo Soares, Desiring to assure the benefits of peace Jos6 de Paula Rodrigues Alves, Helio in their mutual relations and in their Lobo, Hildebrando Pompeu Pinto Ac- relations with all the nations of the earth, cioly, Edmundo da Luz Pinto, Roberto and to abolish the practice of inter- Carneiro de Mendon~a, Rosalina Coelho vention; and Lisboa de Miller, Maria Luiza Bitten- Taking into account that the Conven- court. tion on Rights and Duties of States, Uruguay: Jos6 Espalter, Pedro Manini signed at the Seventh International Rios, Eugenio Martinez Thedy, Juan Conference of American States, Decem- Antonio Buero, Felipe Ferreiro, Andr(s ber 26, 1933, solemnly affirmed the F. Puyol, Abalczar Garcia, Jos6 G. fundamental principle that "no State Antufia, Julio C~sar Cerdeiras Alonso, has the right to intervene in the internal Gervasio Posadas Belgrano. or external affairs of another," Guatemala: Carlos Salazar, Jos6 A Have resolved to reaffirm this principle Medrano, Alfonso Carrillo. through the negotiation of the following Nicaragua: Luis Manuel Debayle, Additional Protocol, and to that end Jos6 Maria Moncada, Modesto Valle. they have appointed the Plenipotenti- Dominican Republic: Max Henriquez aries hereafter mentioned: Urefia, Tulio M. Cestero, Enrique Ji- Argentina: Carlos Saavedra Lamas, m6nez. Roberto M. Ortiz, Miguel Angel Cir- Colombia: Jorge Soto del Corral, cano, Jos6 Maria Cantilo, Felipe A. Miguel L6pez Pumarejo, Roberto Ur- Espil, Leopoldo Melo, Isidoro Ruiz daneta ArbelAez, Alberto Lleras Camargo, Moreno, Daniel Antokoletz, Carlos Breb- Jos6 Ignacio Diaz Granados. bia, C6sar Diaz Cisneros. Panama: Harmodio Arias M., Julio J. Paraguay: Miguel Angel Soler, J. FAbrega, Eduardo Chiari. Isidro Ramirez. United States of America: Cordell Honduras: Antonio Bermfidez M., Hull, Sumner Welles, Alexander W. JuliAn L6pez Pineda. Weddell, Adolf A. Berle, Jr., Alexander Costa Rica: Manuel F. Jim6nez, Carlos F. Whitney, Charles G. Fenwick, Michael Brenes. Francis Doyle, Elise F. Musser. Venezuela: Caracciolo Parra P6rez, Chile: Miguel Cruchaga Tocornal, Luis Gustavo Herrera, Alberto Z6rega Fom- Barros Borgofio, F61lix Nieto del Rio, bona. Peru: Carlos Concha, Alberto Ulloa, Ricardo Montaner Bello. Felipe Barreda Laos, Di6medes Arias Ecuador: Humberto Albornoz, Antonio Schreiber. Pons, Jos6 Gabriel Navarro, Francisco El Salvador: Manuel Castro Ramirez, Guarderas, Eduardo Salazar G6mez. Maximiliano Patricio Brannon. Bolivia: Enrique Finot, David Alv~gte- Mexico: Francisco Castillo Ntjera, gi, Eduardo Diez de Medina, Alberto Ostria Gutidrrez, Carlos Romero, Alberto ARTICLE 4. The present Additional Cortadellas, Javier Paz Campero. Protocol shall remain in effect indefinitely Haiti: H. Pauleus Sannon, Camille J. but may be denounced by means of one Le6n, Elie Lescot, Edm6 Manigat, year's notice after the expiration of Pierre Eug6ne de Lespinasse, Cl6ment which period the Protocol shall cease in Magloire. its effects as regards the party which Cuba: Jos6 Manuel Cortina, Ram6n denounces it but shall remain in effect Zaydin, Carlos Mfirquez Sterling, Rafael for the remaining Signatory States. Santos Jim6nez, C6sar Salaya, Calixto Denunciations shall be addressed to the Whitmarsh, Jos6 Manuel Carbonell. Government of the Argentine Republic Who, after having deposited their which shall notify them to the other full powers, found to be in good and due Contracting States. form, have agreed as follows: IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above ARTICLE 1. The High Contracting mentioned Plenipotentiaries sign the Parties declare inadmissible the inter- present Additional Protocol in English, vention of any of them, directly or in- Spanish, Portuguese and French and directly, and for whatever reason, in hereunto affix their respective seals, at the internal or external affairs of any the City of Buenos Aires, Capital of the other of the Parties. Argentine Republic, on the twenty- The violation of the provisions of this third day of the month of December, Article shall give rise to mutual consulta- nineteen hundred and thirty-six. tion, with the object of exchanging views Argentina: CARLOS SAAVEDRA LAMAS, and seeking methods of peaceful adjust- ROBERTO M. ORTIZ, MIGUEL ANGEL ment. C;kRCANO, Jos MARfA CANTILO, FE- ARTICLE 2. It is agreed that every LIPE A. ESPIL, LEOPOLDO MELO, question concerning the interpretation ISIDORO Ruiz MORENO, DANIEL ANTO- of the present Additional Protocol, which KOLETZ, CARLOS BREBBIA, C19SAR DfAZ it has not been possible to settle through CISNEROS. diplomatic channels, shall be submitted Paraguay: MIGUEL ANGEL SOLER, J. to the procedure of conciliation provided ISIDRO RAMIREZ. for in the agreements in force, or to Honduras: ANTONIO BERM6DEZ M., JU- arbitration or to judicial settlement. LfAN L6PEZ PINEDA. ARTICLE 3. The present Additional Costa Rica: MANUEL F. JIM9NEZ, CARLOS Protocol shall be ratified by the High BRENES. Contracting Parties in conformity with Venezuela: CARACCIOLO PARRA PPREZ, their respective constitutional procedures. GUSTAVO HERRERA, ALBERTO ZKREGA The original instrument and the instru- FOMBONA. ments of ratification shall be deposited Peru: CARLOS CONCHA, ALBERTO ULLOA, in the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the FELIPE BARREDA LAOS, DI6MEDES Argentine Republic which shall com- ARIAS SCHREIBER. municate the ratifications to the other El Salvador: MANUEL CASTRO RAMIREZ, signatories. The Additional Protocol MAXIMILIANO PATmICIo BRANNON. shall come into effect between the High Mexico: FRANCISCO CASTILLO NLIERA, Contracting Parties in the order in which ALFONSO REYES, RAM6N BETETA, they shall have deposited their ratifica- JUAN MANUEL ALVAREZ DEL CASTILLO. tions. Brazil: Josg CARLOS DE MACEDO SOARES, JOS9 DE PAULA RODRfGUES ALVES, FENWICK, MICHAEL FRANCIS DOYLE, HELIO LOBO, HILDEBRANDO POMPEU ELISE F. MUSSER. PINTO ACCIOLY, EDMUNDO DA Luz Chile: MIGUEL CRUCHAGA TOCORNAL, PINTO, ROBERTO CARNEIRO DE MEN- LuIs BARROS BORGOi4O, FtLIX NIETO DONgA, ROSALINA COELHO LISBOA DEL Rfo, RICARDO MONTANER BELLO. DE MILLER, MARIA LUIZA BITTEN- Ecuador: HUMBERTO ALBORNOZ, AN- COURT. TONIO PONS, Josg GABRIEL NAVARRO, Uruguay: PEDRO MANINI Rfos, EUGENIO FRANCISCO GUARDERAS. MARTINEZ THEDY, FELIPE FERREIRO, Bolivia: ENRIQUE FINOT, DAVID ALVJ9STE- ABALCXZAR GARCfA, JULIO Ct9SAR GUI, CARLOS ROMERO. CERDEIRAS ALONSo, GERVASIO POSA- Haiti: H. PAULEUS SANNON, CAMILLE DAS BELGRANO. J. LE6N, ELIE LESCOT, EDMP MANI- Guatemala: CARLOS SALAZAR, Josg A. GAT, PIERRE EUG9NE DE LESPINASSE, MEDRANO, ALFONSO CARRILLO. CLEMBNT MAGLOIRE. Nicaragua: LuIs MANUEL DEBAYLE, Cuba: Josg MANUEL CORTINA, RAM6N Jos9 MARfA MONCADA, MODESTO ZAYDIN, CARLOS MXRQUEZ STERLING, VALLE. RAFAEL SANTOS JIM9NEZ, CI SAR SA- Dominican Republic: MAX HENRQUEZ LAYA, CALIXTO WHITMARSH, JOS19 URE9A, TULIO M. CESTERO, ENRIQUE MANUEL CARBONELL.

JIM19NEZ. RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE Colombia: JORGE SOTO DEL CORRAL, TIME OF RATIFICATION MIGUEL L6PEZ PUMAREJO, ROBERTO Ecuador: URDANETA ARBELAEZ, ALBERTO The Republic of Ecuador, upon ratify- LLERAS CAMARGO, Jos9 IGNACIO DIAZ ing the said Additional Protocol, declares GRANADOS. that it accepts it in all cases and with- Panama: HARMODIO ARIAS M., JULIO J. out reservations, provided that the FXBREGA, EDUARDO CHIARI. procedure of consultation provided in United States of America: CORDELL HULL, the Convention for the Maintenance, SUMNER WELLES, ALEXANDER W. Preservation and Reestablishment of WEDDELL, ADOLF A. BERLE, JR., Peace is not judged as direct or indirect ALEXANDER F. WHITNEY, CHARLES G. intervention. ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL RELATIVE TO NON-INTERVENTION

Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1936, at the Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance of Peace

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Argentina Bolivia Brazil April 4,1938 Chile August 18,1938 Colombia March 10, 1938 Costa Rica July 21,1939 Cuba March 25,1938 Dominican Republic July 1,1937 Ecuador September 10,19371 El Salvador April 12,1938 Guatemala August 4,1938 Haiti August 20,1938 Honduras July 25,1938 Mexico December 15,1937 Nicaragua February 6,1939 Panama December 7, 1938 Paraguay Peru United States August 25,1937 Uruguay Venezuela December 22,1937

1. With a reservation.

Provisions relating to non-intervention are found also in other agreements and resolutions. TREATY ON THE PREVENTION OF CONTROVERSIES Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1936

The Governments represented at the gues Alves, Helio Lobo, Hfldebrando Inter-American Conference for the Main- Pompeu Pinto Accioly, Edmundo da tenance of Peace, Luz Pinto, Roberto Carneiro de Men- In order to adopt, in the interest of donga, Rosalina Coelho Lisboa de Miller, the maintenance of international peace Maria Luiza Bittencourt. so far as may be attainable, a preventive Uruguay: Jos6 Espalter, Pedro Manini system for the consideration of possible Rios, Eugenio Martinez Thedy, Juan causes of future controversies and their Antonio Buero, Felipe Ferreiro, Andr(s settlement by pacific means; and F. Puyol, Abalcizar Garcia, Jos6 G. Convinced that whatever assures and Antufia, Julio C6sar Cerdeiras Alonso, facilitates compliance with the treaties Gervasio Posadas Belgrano. in force constitutes an effective guarantee Guatemala: Carlos Salazar, Jos6 A. of international peace, Medrano, Alfonso Carrillo. Have agreed to conclude a treaty and Nicaragua: Luis Manuel Debayle, to this effect have named the following Jos6 Maria Moncada, Modesto Valle. plenipotentiaries: Dominican Republic: Max Henriquez Argentina: Carlos Saavedra Lamas, Urefia, Tulio M. Cestero, Enrique Jim& Roberto M. Ortiz, Miguel Angel Circano, nez. Jos6 Maria Cantilo, Felipe A. Espil, Colombia: Jorge Soto del Corral, Leopoldo Melo, Isidoro Ruiz Moreno, Miguel L6pez Pumarejo, Roberto Ur- Daniel Antokoletz, Carlos Brebbia, C6sar daneta ArbelAez, Alberto Lleras Camargo, Diaz Cisneros. Jos6 Ignacio Diaz Granados. Paraguay: Miguel Angel Soler, J. Panama: Harmodio Arias M., Julio J. Isidro Ramirez. Fbbrega, Eduardo Chiari. Honduras: Antonio Bermddez M., United States of America: Cordell Hull, Julidn L6pez Pineda. Sumner Welles, Alexander W. Weddell, Costa Rica: Manuel F. Jimnez, Carlos Adolf A. Berle, Jr., Alexander F. Whitney, Brenes. Charles G. Fenwick, Michael Francis Venezuela: Caracciolo Parra P6rez, Doyle, Elise F. Musser Gustavo Herrera, Alberto Z6rega Fom- Chile: Miguel Cruchaga Tocornal, bona. Luis Barros Borgofio, F61ix Nieto del Peru: Carlos Concha, Alberto Ulloa, Rio, Ricardo Montaner Bello. Felipe Barreda Laos, Di6medes Arias Ecuador: Humberto Albornoz, Antonio Schreiber. Pons, Jos6 Gabriel Navarro, Francisco El Salvador: Manuel Castro Ramirez, Guarderas, Eduardo Salazar G6mez. Maximiliano Patricio Brannon. Bolivia: Enrique Finot, David Al- Mexico: Francisco Castillo N6,jera, v6stegui, Eduardo Diez de Medina, Alfonso Reyes, Ram6n Beteta, Juan Alberto Ostria Guti6rrez, Carlos Romero, Manuel Alvarez del Castillo. Alberto Cortadellas, Javier Paz Campero. Brazil: Jos6 Carlos de Macedo Soares, Haiti: H. Pauleus Sannon, Camille J. Oswaldo Aranha, Jos6 de Paula Rodri- Le6n, Elie Lescot, Edmd Manigat, Pierre Eugene de Lespinasse, C1ment shall be transmitted to the governments Magloire. represented in the commissions. Cuba: Jos6 Manuel Cortina, Ram6n ARTICLE 4. The present treaty shall Zaydin, Carlos MArquez Sterling, Rafael not affect obligations previously entered Santos Jim~nez, C6sar Salaya, Calixto into by the High Contracting Parties by Whitmarsh, Jos6 Manuel Carbonell. virtue of international agreements. ARTICLE 5. The present Treaty shall Who, after having deposited their full be ratified by the High Contracting powers, found to be in good and due Parties in conformity with their respec- form, have agreed as follows: tive constitutional procedures. The original instrument shall be deposited in the ARTICLE 1. The High Contracting Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Parties bind themselves to establish Argentine Republic which shall transmit permanent bilateral mixed commissions authentic certified copies to the Govern- composed of representatives of the ments for the aforementioned purpose of signatory governments which shall in ratification. The instruments of ratifica- fact be constituted, at the request of any tion shall be deposited in the archives of of them, and such party shall give notice the Pan American Union in Washington, of such request to the other signatory which shall notify the signatory Govern- governments. ments of said deposit. Such notification Each Government shall appoint its shall be considered as an exchange of own representative to the said commis- ratifications. sion, the meetings of which are to be ARTICLE 6. The present Treaty will held, alternatively, in the capital city come into effect between the High Con- of one and the other Governments tracting Parties in the order in which represented in each of them. The first they deposit their respective ratifications. meeting shall be held at the seat of the ARTICLE 7. The present Treaty shall Government which convokes it. remain in effect indefinitely but may be ARTICLE 2. The duty of the afore- denounced by means of one year's mentioned commissions shall be to notice given to the Pan American Union, study, with the primary object of elimi- which shall transmit it to the other nating them, as far as possible, the signatory governments. After the expira- causes of future difficulties or contro- tion of this period the Treaty shall cease versies; and to propose additional or in its effects as regards the party which detailed lawful measures which it might denounces it but shall remain in effect be convenient to take in order to promote, for the remaining High Contracting as far as possible, the due and regular Parties. application of treaties in force between [ARTICLE 8. The present Treaty shall the respective parties, and also to pro- be open to the adherence and accession mote the development of increasingly of States which may not have signed. good relations in all ways between the The corresponding instruments shall be two countries dealt with in each case. deposited in the archives of the Pan ARTICLE 3. After each meeting of any American Union, which shall communi- of the said preventive Commissions a cate them to the other High Contracting minute shall be drawn and signed by its Parties.]' members setting out the considerations I This article appears only in the official Portuguese and and decisions thereof and such minute French texts of the Treaty. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above ABALC!kZAR GAaCuA, JuIO CASAR mentioned Plenipotentiaries sign the CERDEIRAS ALONSO, CERVASIO POSA- present Treaty in English, Spanish, DAS BELGRANO. Portuguese and French and hereunto Guatemala: CARLOS SALAZAR, Josi A. affix their respective seals, at the City MEDRANO, ALFONSO CARRILLO. of Buenos Aires, Capital of the Argentine Nicaragua: LuIs MANUEL DEBAYLE, Republic, on the twenty-third day of the Jos9 MARIA MONCADA, MODESTO month of December, 1936. VALLE. Dominican Republic: MAX HENRfQUEZ Argentina: CARLOS SAAVEDRA LAMAS, URERA, TULIO M. CESTERO, ENRIQUE ROBERTO M. ORTIZ, MIGUEL ANGEL JIMI NEZ. CIRCANO, JosI MARfA CANTILO, FE- Colombia: JORGE SOTO DEL CORRAL, LIPE A. ESPIL, LEOPOLDO MELO, MIGUEL L6PEZ PUMAREJO, ROBERTO ISIDORO Ruiz MORENO, DANIEL ANTO- URDANETA ARBELXEZ, ALBERTO LLE- KOLETZ, CARLOS BREBBIA, C1 SAR DAz RAS CAMARGO, Jost IGNACIO DfAz CISNEROS. GRANADOS. Paraguay: MIGUEL ANGEL SOLER, J. Panama: HARMODIO ARIAS M., JULIO J. ISIDRO RAMIREZ. FABREGA, EDUARDO CHIARI. Honduras: ANTONIO BERMIiDEZ M., JU- United States of America: CORDELL HULL, LI-N L6PEZ PINEDA. SUMNER WELLES, ALEXANDER W. Costa Rica: MANUEL F. JIMI NEZ, CARLOS WEDDELL, ADOLF A. BERLE, JR., BRENES. ALEXANDER F. WHITNEY, CHARLES G. Venezuela: CARACCIOLO PARRA PI REZ, FENWICK, MICHAEL FRANCIS DOYLE, GUSTAVO HERRERA, ALBERTO ZIREGA ELISE F. MUSSER. FOMBONA. Chile: MIGUEL CRUCHAGA TOCORNAL, Peru: CARLOS CONCHA, ALBERTO ULLOA, LuIs BARROS BORGORO, F9LIX NIETO FELIPE BARREDA LAOS, D I6MEDES DEL Rfo, RICARDO MONTANER BELLO. ARIAS SCHREIBER. Peru adheres to Ecuador: HUMBERTO ALBORNOZ, ANTONIO the above Treaty with a reservation PONS, Josig GABRIEL NAVARRO, FRAN- to Article 1 in the sense that it under- CISCO GUARDERAS. stands that recourse to the bilateral Bolivia: ENRIQUE FINOT, DAVID ALvigs- mixed commission is not mandatory TEGUI, CARLOS ROMERO. but optional. Haiti: H. PAULEUS SANNON, CAMILLE J. El Salvador: MANUEL CASTRO RAMfREZ, LE6N, ELIE LESCOT, EDM19 MANIGAT, CL19- MAXIMILIANO PATRICIO BRANNON. PIERRE EUGhNE DE LESPINASSE, Mexico: FRANCISCO CASTILLO NXJERA, MENT MAGLOIRE. ALFONSO REYES, RAM6N BETETA, Cuba: Jost MANUEL CORTINA, RAM6N CARLOS MkRQUEZ STERLING, JUAN MANUEL ALVAREZ DEL CASTILLO. ZAYDIN, C9SAR SA- Brazil: Josi CARLOS DE MACEDO SOARES, RAFAEL SANTOS JIMI9NEZ, LAYA, CALIXTO WHITMARSH, Jost JOSE DE PAULA RODRfGUES ALVES, MANUEL CARBONELL. HELlo LOBO, HILDEBRANDO POMPEU ACCIOLY, EDMUNDO DA LUZ PINTO RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE PINTO, ROBERTO CARNEIRO DE MEN- TIME OF RATIFICATION DONgA, ROSALINA COELHO LISBOA DE MILLER, MARIA LUIZA BITENCOURT. Guatemala: respecto al articulo Uruguay: PEDRO MANINI Rfos, EUGENIO Con la reserva la Comisi6n Bilateral se MARTINEZ THEDY, FELIPE FERREIRO, primero de que entiende, no como recurso obligatorio, With the reservation, regarding Article uino facultativo. 1, that recourse to the bilateral mixed com- fTranslation] mission is not mandatory but optional.

TREATY ON THE PREVENTION OF CONTROVERSIES

Signed at Buenos Aires, December Z3, 1936, at the Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance of Peace

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Argentina Bolivia Brazil Chile July 28,1938 Colombia May 23, 1938 Costa Rica June 27,1939 Cuba March 1,1938 Dominican Republic June 5,1937 Ecuador October 19,1937 El Salvador April 1, 1938 Guatemala August 23,19381 Haiti September 10,1938 Honduras August 3,1938 Mexico December 23,1937 Nicaragua December 6,1938 Panama December 13,1938 Paraguay Pe ru United States July 29,1937 Uruguay Venezuela

1. With reservations.

The original is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Argentina. The Pan American Union is depository of the instruments of ratification. It came into force on July 29, 1937, when the second ratification was deposited by the United States.

It was superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948, continuing in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of Bogota. INTER-AMERICAN TREATY ON GOOD OFFICES AND MEDIATION

Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1986

The Governments represented at the Uruguay: Jos6 Espalter, Pedro Manini Inter-American Conference for the Main- RWos, Eugenio Martinez Thedy, Juan tenance of Peace; Antonio Buero, Felipe Ferreiro, Andrds F. Considering that, notwithstanding the Puyol, AbalcAzar Garcia, Jos6 G. Antufia, pacts which have been concluded between Julio C6sar Cerdeiras Alonso, Gervasio them, it is desirable to facilitate even Posadas Belgrano. more recourse to peaceful methods for Guatemala: Carlos Salazar, Jos6 A. the solution of controversies, Modrano, Alfonso Carrillo. Have resolved to celebrate a treaty of Nicaragua: Luis Manuel Debayle, Good Offices and Mediation between the Jos6 Maria Moncada, Modesto Valle. American Countries, and to this end Dominican Republic: Max Henriquez have named the following Plenipoten- Urefia, Tulio M. Cestero, Enrique Jim6nez. tiaries: Colombia: Jorge Soto del Corral, Argentina: Carlos Saavedra Lamas, Miguel L6pez Pumarejo, Roberto Ur- Roberto M. Ortiz, Miguel Angel CArcano, daneta Arbeliez, Alberto Lleras Camargo, Jos6 Maria Cantilo, Felipe A. Espil, Jos6 Ignacio Diaz Cranados. Leopoldo Melo, Isidoro Ruiz Moreno, Panama: Harmodio Arias M., Julio J. Daniel Antokoletz, Carlos Brebbia, C6sar Fbbrega, Eduardo Chiari. Diaz Cisneros. United States of America: Cordell Hull, Paraguay: Miguel Angel Soler, J. Sumner Welles, Alexander W. Weddell, Isidro Ramirez. Adolf A. Berle, Jr., Alexander F. Whitney, Honduras: Antonio Bermddez M., Charles G. Fenwick, Michael Francis JuliAn L6pez Pineda. Doyle, Elise F. Musser. Costa Rica: Manuel F. Jim6nez, Carlos Chile: Miguel Cruchaga Tocornal, Brenes. Luis Barros Borgofio, F61ix Nieto del Venezuela: Caracciolo Parra Perez, Rio, Ricardo Montaner Bello. Gustavo Herrera, Alberto Z6rega Fom- Ecuador: Humberto Albornez, Antonio bona. Pons, Jos6 Gabriel Navarro, Francisco Peru: Carlos Concha, Alberto Ulloa, Guarderas, Eduardo Salazar G6mez. Felipe Barreda Laos, Di6medes Arias Bolivia: Enrique Finot, David Alvs- Schreiber. tegui, Eduardo Diez de Medina, Alberto El Salvador: Manuel Castro Ramirez, Ostria Guti~rrez, Carlos Romero, Alberto Maximiliano Patricio Brannon. Cortadellas, Javier Paz Campero. M~xico: Francisco Castillo NAjera, Haiti: H. Pauleus Sannon, Camille J. Alfonso Reyes, Ram6n Beteta, Juan Le6n, Elie Lescot, Edm6 Manigat, Pierre Manuel Alvarez del Castillo. Eug6ne de Lespinasse, Cl6ment Magloire. Brazil: Jos6 Carlos de Macedo Soares, Cuba: Jos6 Manuel Cortina, Ram6n Oswaldo Aranha, Jos6 de Paula Rodrgues Zaydin, Carlos MArquez Sterling, Rafael Alves, Helio Lobo, Hildebrando Pompeu Santos Jim6nez, C6sar Salaya, Calixto Pinto Accioly, Edmundo da Luz Pinto, Whitmarsh, Jos6 Manuel Carbonell. Roberto Cameiro de Mendonqa, Rosalina Who after having deposited their full Coelho Lisbos de Miller, Maria Luiza powers, found to be in good and due form, Bittencourt. have agreed as follows: ARTICLE 1. When a controversy arises parties to arrive at some peaceful settle- between them, that cannot be settled ment. Should this period expire before by the usual diplomatic means, the High the parties have reached some solution, Contracting Parties may have recourse the controversy shall be submitted to the to the good offices or mediation of an procedure of conciliation provided for in eminent citizen of any of the other existing inter-American agreements. American countries, preferably chosen ARTICLE 5. During the procedure from a general list made up in accordance established in this Treaty each of the with the following article. interested parties shall provide for its ARTICLE 2. To prepare the afore- own expense and shall contribute equally mentioned list, each Government, as to common costs or honoraria. soon as the present treaty is ratified, ARTICLE 6. The present Treaty shall shall name two citizens selected from not affect obligations previously entered among the most eminent by reason of into by the High Contracting Parties by their high character and juridical learn- virtue of international agreements. ing. ARTICLE 7. The present Treaty shall The designations shall immediately be ratified by the High Contracting be communicated to the Pan American Parties in conformity with their respec- Union, which shall prepare the list and tive constitutional procedures. The origi- shall forward copies thereof to the con- nal instrument shall be deposited in the tracting parties. Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the ARTICLE 3. According to the hypothe- Argentine Republic which shall transmit sis set forth in Article 1, the countries in authentic certified copies to the Govern- controversy shall, by common agreement, ments for the aforementioned purpose of select one of the persons named on this ratification. The instruments of ratifica- list, for the purposes indicated in this tion shall be deposited in the archives of treaty. the Pan American Union in Washington, The person selected shall name the which shall notify the signatory govern- place where, under his chairmanship, ments of said deposit. Such notification one duly authorized representative of shall be considered as an exchange of each of the parties shall meet in order ratifications. to seek a peaceful and equitable solution ARTICLE 8. The present Treaty will of the difference. come into effect between the High Con- If the parties are unable to agree tracting Parties in the order in which concerning the selection of the person they deposit their respective ratifications. lending his good offices or mediation, ARTICLE 9. The present Treaty shall each one shall choose one of those named remain in effect indefinitely but may be on the list. The two citizens chosen in denounced by means of one year's this way shall select, from among the notice given to the Pan American Union, names listed, a third person who shall which shall transmit it to the other undertake the functions referred to, signatory Governments. After the expira- endeavoring, in so far as possible, to tion of this period the Treaty shall cease make a choice that shall be acceptable to in its effects as regards the Party which both parties. denounces it, but shall remain in effect ARTICLE 4. The mediator shall deter- for the remaining High Contracting mine a period of time, not to exceed six Parties. nor be less than three months for the IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above mentioned Plenipotentiaries sign the Jos9 MARIA MONCADA, MODESTO present Treaty in English, Spanish, VALLE. Portuguese and French, and hereunto Dominican Republic: MAX HENRfQUEZ affix their respective seals, at the City of URERA, TULIO M. CESTERO, ENRIQUE Buenos Aires, Capital of the Argentine JIMIENEZ. Republic, on the twenty-third day of the Colombia: JORGE SOTO DEL CORRAL, month of December, 1936. MIGUEL L6PEZ PUMAREJO, ROBERTO URDANETA ARBELXEZ, ALBERTO LLE- Argentina: CARLOS SAAVEDRA LAMAS, RAS CAMARGO, JosI IGNACIO DfAZ ROBERTO M. ORTIZ, MIGUEL ANGEL CRANADOS. CARCANO, FELIPE A. ESPIL, LEOPOLDO Panama: HARMODIO ARIAS M., JULIO J. MELO, ISIDORO Ruiz MORENO, DANIEL FABREGA, EDUARDO CHIARI. ANTOKOLETZ, CARLOS BREBBIA, C9SAR United States of America: CORDELL HULL, DIAZ CISNEROS. SUMNER WELLES, ALEXANDER W. Paraguay: MIGUEL ANGEL SOLER, J. WEDDELL, ADOLF A. BERLE, JR., ISIDRO RAMfREZ. ALEXANDER F. WHITNEY, CHARLES G. Honduras: ANTONIO BERMISDEZ M., Ju- FENWICK, MICHAEL FRANCIS DOYLE, LIAN L6PEZ PINEDA. ELISE F. MUSSER. Costa Rica: MANUEL F. JIME NEZ, CARLOS Chile: MIGUEL CRUCHAGA TOCORNAL, BRENES. LUIS BARROS BORGOIO, FgLIX NIETO Venezuela: CARACCIOLO PARRA PI REZ, DEL RIo, RICARDO MONTANER BELLO. GUSTAVO HERRERA, ALBERTO ZEREGA Ecuador: HUMBERTO ALBORNOZ, ANTONIO FOMBONA. PoNs, Josi GABRIEL NAVARRO, FRAN- Peru: CARLOS CONCHA, ALBERTO ULLOA, CISCO GUARDERAS. FELIPE BARREDA LAOS, DI6MEDES Bolivia: ENRIQUE FINOT, DAVID ALV9S- ARIAS SCIREIBER. TEGUI, CARLOS ROMERO. El Salvador: MANUEL CASTRO RAMfREZ Haiti: H. PAULEUS SANNON, CAMILLE J. MAXIMILIANO PATRICIO BRANNON. LE6N, ELIE LESCOT, EDM9 MANIGAT, M~xico: FRANCISCO CASTILLO NXJERA, PIERRE EUG9NE DE LESPINASSE, ALFONSO REYES, RAM6N BETETA, CLI9MENT MAGLOIRE. JUAN MANUEL ALVAREZ DEL CASTILLO. Cuba: Josg MANUEL CORTINA, RAMN Brazil: JosE CARLOS DE MACEDO SOARES, ZAYDIN, CARLOS MARQUEZ STERLING, OSWALDo ARANHA, JOSE DE PAULA RAFAEL SANTOS JIM1KNEZ, CI SAR SA- RODRIGUES ALVES, HELIo LoBo, HIL- LAYA, CALIXTO WHITMARSH, JOS DEBRANDO POMPEU PINTO ACCIOLY, MANUEL CARBONELL. EDMUNDO DA LUZ PINTO, ROBERTO CARNEIRO DE MENDONgA, ROSALINA RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE COELIIO LISBOA DE MILLER, MARIA TIME OF RATIFICATION LUIZA BITTENCOURT. Uruguay: PEDRO MANINI Rfos, EUGENIO Honduras: su MARTINEZ THEDY, FELIPE FERREIRO, El Gobierno de Honduras consigna ABALCXZAR GARCfA, JULIO CI SAR reserva en el sentido de que en el Arbi- que los CERDEIRAS ALONSO, GERVASIO POSA- traje no habrd mAs excepciones sido resueltos por aquel DAS BELGRANO. casos que hayan Guatemala: CARLOS SALAZAR, Josg A. medio; y que las disposiciones de la Convenci6n no serAn aplicables MEDRANO, ALFONSO CARRILLO. presente pendientes Nicaragua: LuIs MANUEL DEBAYLE, a los asuntos o controversias ni a los que se promuevan en lo sucesivo already settled by that procedure, and sobre hechos anteriores a la fecha en that the provisions of this Convention que esta Convenci6n entre en vigor. may not be applied to pending matters [Translation] or controversies, nor to those which may Honduras formulates a reservation arise in the future concerning events in the sense that there shall be no excep- which take place before the Convention tions to arbitration, except questions enters into effect.

INTER -AMERICAN TREATY ON GOOD OFFICES AND MEDIATION

Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1936, at the Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance of Peace

SIGNATOR Y DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

Argentina Bolivia Brazil April 11, 1938 Chile July 28,1938 Colombia May 23,1938 Costa Rica June 27,1939 Cuba March 1,1938 Dominican Republic June 5,1937 Ecuador October 19,1937 El Salvador April 1,1938 Guatemala August 23,1938 Haiti September 10, 1938 Honduras August 3,19381 Mexico December 23,1937 Nicaragua April 29,1938 Panama December 13,1938 Paraguay Peru United States July 29,1937 Uruguay Vene zuela

1. With a reservation.

The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Argentina. The Pan Amer- ican Union is depository of the instruments of ratification. It came into force on July 29, 1937, when the se ond ratification was deposited by the United States.

It was superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota), 1948, continuing in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of Bogota. CONVENTION TO COORDINATE, EXTEND AND ASSURE THE FULFILLMENT OF THE EXISTING TREATIES BETWEEN THE AMERICAN STATES Signed at Buenos Aires, December 23, 1936

The Governments represented at the Mexico: Francisco Castillo Ntjera, Inter-American Conference for the Main- Alfonso Reyes, Ram6n Beteta, Juan tenance of Peace, Manuel Alvarez del Castillo. Animated by a desire to promote the Brazil: Jos6 Carlos de Macedo Soares, maintenance of general peace in their Oswaldo Aranha, Jos6 de Paula Rodrigues mutual relations; Alves, Helio Lobo, Hildebrando Pompeu Appreciating the advantages derived Pinto Accioly, Edmundo da Luz Pinto, and to be derived from the various Roberto Carneiro de Mendonca, Rosalina agreements already entered into con- Coelho Lisboa de Miller, Maria Luiza demning war and providing methods for Bittencourt. the pacific settlement of international Uruguay: Jos6 Espalter, Pedro Manini disputes; Rios, Eugenio Martinez Thedy, Juan Recognizing the need for placing the Antonio Buero, Felipe Ferreiro, Andr~s F. greatest restrictions upon resort to war; Puyol, AbalcAzar Garcia, Jos6 G. Antufta, and Julio C6sar Cerdeiras Alonso, Gervasio Believing that for this purpose it is Posadas Belgrano. desirable to conclude a new convention Guatemala: Carlos Salazar, Jos6 A. to coordinate, extend and assure the Medrano, Alfonso Carrillo. fulfillment of existing agreements, have Nicaragua: Luis Manuel Debayle, appointed plenipotentiaries as follows: Jos6 Maria Moncada, Modesto Valle. Max Henriquez Argentina: Carlos Saavedra Lamas, Dominican Republic: Enrique Jim6- Roberto M. Ortiz, Miguel Angel Circano, Urefia, Tulio M. Cestero, nez. Jos6 Maria Cantilo, Felipe A. Espil, Colombia: Jorge Soto del Corral, Leopoldo Melo, Isidoro Ruiz Moreno, Miguel L6pez Pumarejo, Roberto Ur- Daniel Antokoletz, Carlos Brebbia, C6sar Ca- Diaz Cisneros. daneta Arbeliez, Alberto Lleras Diaz Granados. Paraguay: Miguel Angel Soler, J. margo, Jos6 Ignacio Panama: Harmodio Arias M., Julio J. Isidro Ramirez. Fibrega, Eduardo Chiari. Honduras: Antonio Bermfidez M., United States of America: Cordell Hull, JuliAn L6pez Pineda. Sumner Welles, Alexander W. Weddell, Costa Rica: Manuel F. Jim6nez, Carlos Adolf A. Berle, Jr., Alexander F. Whitney, Brenes. Charles G. Fenwick, Michael Francis Venezuela: Caracciolo Parra P6rez, Doyle, Elise F. Musser. Gustavo Herrera, Alberto Z6rega Fom- Chile: Miguel Cruchaga Tocornal, bona. Luis Barros Borgoflo, F61ix Nieto del Peru: Carlos Concha, Alberto Ulloa, Rio, Ricardo Montaner Bello. Felipe Barreda Laos, Di6medes Arias Ecuador: Humberto Albornoz, Antonio Schreiber. Francisco El Salvador: Manuel Castro Ramirez, Pons, Josd Gabriel Navarro, Maximiliano Patricio Brannon. Guarderas, Eduardo Salazar G6mez. Bolivia: Enrique Finot, David Alv6s- diplomatic channels, and to establish a tegui, Eduardo Diez de Medina, Al- "Commission of Conciliation" to carry berto Ostria Guti~rrez, Carlos Romero, out the obligations assumed in the Alberto Cortadellas, Javier Paz Campero. Convention; Haiti: H. Pauleus Sannon, Camille J. That by the General Treaty of In- Le6n, Elie Lescot, Edm6 Manigat, ter-American Arbitration, signed at Pierre Eug6ne de Lespinasse, C16ment Washington, January 5, 1929, the High Magloire. Contracting Parties bind themselves to Cuba: Jos6 Manuel Cortina, Ram6n submit to arbitration, subject to certain Zaydin, Carlos M~rquez Sterling, Rafael exceptions, all differences between them Santos Jim6nez, Cdsar Salaya, Calixto of an international character, which it Whitmarsh, Jos6 Manuel Carbonell. has not been possible to adjust by diplo- Who, after having deposited their full macy and which are juridical in their powers, found to be in good and due nature by reason of being susceptible of form, have agreed upon the following decision by the application of the prin- provisions: ciples of law, and moreover, to create a ARTICLE 1. Taking into consideration procedure of arbitration to be followed; that, by the Treaty to Avoid and Prevent and Conflicts between the American States, That by the Treaty of Non-Aggres- signed at Santiago, May 3, 1923, (known sion and Conciliation, signed at Rio de as the Gondra Treaty) the High Con- Janeiro October 10, 1933, (known as the tracting Parties agree that all contro- Saavedra Lamas Treaty), the High versies which it has been impossible to Contracting Parties solemnly declare settle through diplomatic channels or to that they condemn wars of aggression submit to arbitration in accordance with in their mutual relations or in those with existing treaties shall be submitted for other states and that the settlement of investigation and report to a Commission disputes or controversies between them of Inquiry; shall be effected only by pacific means That by the Treaty for the Renuncia- which have the sanction of international tion of War, signed at Paris on August law, and also declare that as between 28, 1928 (known as the Kellogg-Briand them territorial questions must not be Pact, or Pact of Paris) the High Con- settled by violence, and that they will tracting Parties solemnly declare in the not recognize any territorial arrangement names of their respective peoples that not obtained by pacific means, nor the they condemn recourse to war for the validity of the occupation or acquisition solution of international controversies of territories brought about by force of and renounce it as an instrument of arms, and, moreover, in a case of non- national policy in their relations with compliance with these obligations, the one another; contracting states undertake to adopt, That by the General Convention of in their character as neutrals, a common Inter-American Conciliation, signed at and solidary attitude and to exercise the Washington, January 5, 1929, the High political, juridical or economic means Contracting Parties agree to submit to authorized by international law, and to the procedure of conciliation all con- bring the influence of public opinion to troversies between them, which it may bear, without, however, resorting to not have been possible to settle through intervention, either diplomatic or armed, subject nevertheless to the attitude that spirit of mutual regard for their respec- may be incumbent upon them by virtue tive rights, having recourse for this of their collective treaties; and, further- purpose to direct diplomatic negotiation more, undertake to create a procedure or to the alternative procedures of of conciliation; mediation, commissions of inquiry, com- The High Contracting Parties reaffirm missions of conciliation, tribunals of the obligations entered into to settle, arbitration, and courts of justice, as by pacific means, controversies of an provided in the treaties to which they international character that may arise may be parties; and they also agree that, between them. should it be impossible to settle the ARTICLE 2. The High Contracting dispute by diplomatic negotiation and Parties, convinced of the necessity for should the States in dispute have recourse the cooperation and consultation pro- to the other procedures provided in the vided for in the Convention for the present Article, they will report this Maintenance, Preservation and Reestab- fact and the progress of the negotiations lishment of Peace signed by them on to the other signatory States. These this same day, agree that in all matters provisions do not affect controversies which affect peace on the Continent, already submitted to a diplomatic or such consultation and cooperation shall juridical procedure by virtue of special have as their object to assist, through the agreements. tender of friendly good offices and of ARTICLE 5. The High Contracting mediation, the fulfillment by the Ameri- Parties agree that, in the event that the can Republics of existing obligations for methods provided by the present Con- pacific settlement, and to take counsel vention or by agreements previously together with full recognition of their concluded should fail to bring about a juridical equality, as sovereign and pacific settlement of differences that independent states, and of their general may arise between any two or more of right to individual liberty of action, when them, and hostilities should break out an emergency arises which affects their between two or more of them, they shall common interest in the maintenance of be governed by the following stipulations: peace. (a) They shall, in accordance ARTICLE 3. In case of threat of war, the with the terms of the Treaty of High Contracting Parties shall apply the Non - Aggression and Conciliation provisions contained in Articles 1 and 2 (Saavedra Lamas Treaty), adopt of the Convention for the Maintenance, in their character as neutrals a Preservation and Reestablishment of common and solidary attitude; and Peace, above referred to, it being under- shall consult immediately with one stood that, while such consultation is in another, and take cognizance of the progress and for a period of not more than outbreak of hostilities in order to six months, the parties in dispute will not determine either jointly or individu- have recourse to hostilities or take any ally, whether such hostilities shall military action whatever. be regarded as constituting a state ARTICLE 4. The High Contracting of war so as to call into effect the Parties further agree that, in the event provisions of the present Convention. of a dispute between two or more of (b) It is understood that, in regard them, they will seek to settle it in a to the question whether hostilities actually in progress constitute a Contracting Parties, and without detri- state of war, each of the High Con- ment to their obligations derived from tracting Parties shall reach a prompt other treaties to which they are or may decision. In any event, should become parties. hostilities be actually in progress ARTICLE 7. Nothing contained in the between two or more of the Con- present Convention shall be understood tracting Parties, or between two or as affecting the rights and duties of the more signatory States not at the High Contracting Parties which are at time parties to this Convention by the same time members of the League of reason of failure to ratify it, each Nations. Contracting Party shall take notice ARTICLE 8. The present Convention of the situation and shall adopt shall be ratified by the High Contracting such an attitude as would be con- Parties in accordance with their consistent with other multilateral stitutional procedures. The original con- treaties to which it is a party or in vention and the instruments of ratifica- accordance with its municipal legis- tion shall be deposited with the Ministry lation. Such action shall not be of Foreign Affairs of the Argentine deemed an unfriendly act on the Republic, which shall communicate the part of any state affected thereby. ratifications to the other Signatory ARTICLE 6. Without prejudice to the States. It shall come into effect when universal principles of neutrality pro- ratifications have been deposited by not vided for in the case of an international less than eleven of the Signatory States. war outside of America and without The Convention shall remain in force affecting the duties contracted by those indefinitely; but it may be denounced by American States members of the League any of the High Contracting Parties, of Nations, the High Contracting Parties such denunciation to be effective one reaffirm their loyalty to the principles year after the date upon which such enunciated in the five agreements re- notification has been given. Notice of ferred to in Article 1, and they agree denunciation shall be communicated to that in the case of an outbreak of hos- the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the tilities or threat of an outbreak of Argentine Republic which shall transmit hostilities between two or more of them, copies thereof to the other Signatory they shall, through consultation, im- States. Denunciation shall not be re- mediately endeavour to adopt in their garded as valid if the Party making such character as neutrals a common and denunciation shall be actually in a state solidary attitude, in order to discourage of war, or shall be engaged in hostilities or prevent the spread or prolongation of without fulfilling the provisions es- hostilities. tablished by this Convention. With this object, and having in mind IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plenipo- the diversity of cases and circumstances, tentiaries above mentioned have signed they may consider the imposition of this Treaty in English, Spanish, Portu- prohibitions or restrictions on the sale guese, and French, and have affixed or shipment of arms, munitions and im- thereto their respective seals, in the City plements of war, loans or other financial of Buenos Aires, Capital of the Argentine help to the states in conflict, in accordance Republic, this twenty-third day of with the municipal legislation of the High December, of the year 1936. RESERVATIONS MADE BY That State shall be considered as an THE DELEGATIONS aggressor which becomes responsible for acts: Argentina: one or several of the following, a) That its armed forces, to what- In no case, under Article VI, can food- ever branch they may belong, il- stuffs or raw materials destined for the legally cross the land, sea or air civil populations of belligerent countries frontiers of other States. When the be considered as contraband of war, nor violation of the territory of a State shall there exist any duty to prohibit has been effected by irresponsible credits for the acquisition of said food- bands organized within or outside stuffs or raw materials which have the of its territory and which have re- destination indicated. ceived direct or indirect help from With reference to the embargo on arms, another State, such violation shall each Nation may reserve freedom of be considered equivalent, for the action in the face of a war of aggression. purposes of the present Article, to Paraguay: that effected by the regular forces In no case, under Article VI, can food- of the State responsible for the stuffs, or raw materials destined for the aggression; civil populations of belligerent countries b) That it has intervened in a be considered as contraband of war, nor unilateral or illegal way in the shall there exist any duty to prohibit internal or external affairs of another credits for the acquisition of said food- State; stuffs or raw materials which have the c) That it has refused to fulfill a destination indicated. legally given arbitral decision or With reference to the embargo on sentence of international justice. arms, each Nation may reserve freedom No consideration of any kind, whether of action in the face of a war of aggres- political, military, economic or of any sion. other kind, may serve as an excuse or El Salvador: justification for the aggression here With reservation with respect to the anticipated. idea of continental solidarity when con- Argentina: CARLOS SAAVEDRA LAMAS, fronted by foreign aggression. ROBERTO M. ORTIZ, MIGUEL ANGEL Colombia: CkRCANO, Jos9 MARIA CANTILO, FE- In signing this convention, the Dele- LIPE A. EsPIL, LEOPOLDO MELO, gation of Colombia understands that the ISIDORO Ruiz MORENO, DANIEL ANTo- phrase "in their character as neutrals," KOLETZ, CARLOS BREBBIA, C9SAR DfAZ which appears in Articles V and VI im- CISNEROS. plies a new concept of international law Paraguay: MIGUEL ANGEL SOLER, J. which allows a distinction to be drawn ISIDRO RAMfREZ. between the aggressor and the attacked, Honduras: ANTONIO BERMIJDEZ M., Ju- and to treat them differently. At the LIIN L6PEZ PINEDA. same time, the Delegation of Colombia Costa Rica: MANUEL F. JIM19NEZ, CARLOS considers it necessary, in order to assure BRENES. the full and effective application of this Venezuela: CARACCIOLO PARRA P19REZ, Pact, to set down in writing the following GUSTAVO HERRERA, ALBERTO ZREGA definition of the aggressor: FOMBONA. Peru: CARLOS CONCHA, ALBERTO VLLOA, Bolivia: ENRIQUE FINOT, DAVID ALV9S- FELIPE BARREDA LAOS, DI6MEDES TEGUI, CARLOS ROMERO. ARIAS SCHREIBER. Haiti: H. PAULEUS SANNON, CAMILLE El Salvador: MANUEL CASTRO RAMfREZ, J. LE6N, ELIE LESCOT, EDM9 MANI- MAXIMILIANO PATRICIO BRANNON. GAT, PIERRE EUGENE DE LESPINASSE, Mexico: FRANCISCO CASTILLO NkJERA, CLEMENT 'IAGLOIRE. ALFONSO REYES, RAM6N BETETA, Cuba: Jose MANUEL CORTINA, RAM6N JUAN ALVAREZ DEL CASTILLO. ZAYDIN, CARLOS MARQUEZ STERLING, Brazil: Jose CARLOS DE MACEDO SOARES, RAFAEL SANTOS .J]IMI.NEZ, CESAR SA- JOSE DE PAULA RODRiGUES ALVES, LAYA, CALIXTO WHITMARSH. HELIO LOBO, HILDEBRANDO POMPEU PINTO ACCIOLY, EDMUNDO DA LUZ PINTO, ROBERTO CARNEIRO DE MEN- RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE DONqA, ROSALINA COALno LISBOA DE TIME OF RATIFICATION IILLER, MARfA LUIZA BITTENCOURT. Colombia: Uruguay: PEDRO MIANINI Rfos, EUGENIO With the reservations made at the MARTfNEZ THEDY, FELIPE FERREIRO, time of signature. ABALCAZAR GARCiA, JULIO CESAR CERDEIRAS ALONSO, GARVASIO POSA- El Salvador: DAS BELGRANO. With the reservation made at the time Guatemala: CAI.LOS SALAZAR, JosE A of signature. MEDRANO, ALFONSO CARRILLO. United States of America: Nicaragua: Luis M.ANUEL DEBAYLE, The United States of America holds Jos9 MARfA MONCADA, MODESTO that the reservations to this convention VALLE. do not constitute an amendment to the Dominican Republic: MAX HENRfQUEZ text, but that such reservations, inter- URE&A, TULIO M. CESTERO, ENRIQUE pretations, and definitions by separate JIMENEZ. governments are solely for the benefit Colombia: JORGE SOTO DEL CORRAL, of such respective governments and are MI(UEL L6PEZ PUMAREJO, ROBERTO not intended to be controlling upon the URDANETA ARBEL,.EZ, ALBERTO United States of America. LLERAS CAMARGO, Jos' IGNACIO DfAZ GRANADOS. Honduras: Panama: HAIRMODIO ARIAS i., JULIO J. El Gobierno do Honduras consigna FABREGA, EDUARDO CItlARI. su reserva en el sentido de que en el United States of America: CORDELL HULL, Arbitraje no habrI mds excepciones que SUMNER WELLES, ALEXANDER W. los casos que hayan sido resueltos por WEDDELL, ADOLF A. BERLE, JR., aquel medio; y que las disposiciones de ALEXANDER F. WHITNEY, CHARLES la presente Convenci6n no serdn apli- G. FENWICK, MICHAEL FRAN(IS cables a los asuntos o controversias DOYLE, ELISE F. MUSSER. pendientes ni a los que se promuevan en Chile: MIGUEL CRUCIAGA TOCORNAL, lo sucesivo sobre hechos anteriores a la LuIs BARROS BORGOS'O, FELIX NIETO fecha en que esta Convenci6n entre en DEL Rio, RICARDO MONTANER BELLO. vigor. Ecuador:HUMBERTO ALBORNOZ, ANTONIO [Translation] PONS, Jose GABRIEL NAVARRO, FRAN- The Government of Honduras formu- CISCO GUARDERAS. lates a reservation in the sense that there shall be no exceptions to arbitration pending matters or controversies, nor except questions already settled by that to those which may arise in the future procedure; and that the provisions of concerning events which took place this Convention may not be applied to before the Convention enters into effect.

'CONVENTION TO COORDINATE, EXTEND AND ASSURE THE FULFILLMENT OF THE EXISTING TREATIES BETWEEN THE AMERICAN STATES

Signed at Buenos Aires, Decenber 23, 1936, at the Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance of Peace

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

1 Argentina Bolivia Brazil January 10, 1939 Chile August 18,1938 Colombia 1 March 10, 19381 Costa Rica Cuba March Z5,1938 Dominican Republic July 1,1937 Ecuador September 10 1937 El Salvador 1 April 12,1938' Guatemala August 4, 1938 Haiti August 20,1938 Honduras August 16,19381 Mexico December 15,1937 Nicaragua November 24,1938 Panama December 7,1938 Paraguay Peru United States August 25,19371 Uruguay Venezuela

1. With reservations.

The original instrument is deposited with the Ministry of Foreign affairs of the Argentine Republic, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification.

It came into effect on November 24, 1938, the date on which Nicaragua deposited its instrument of ratification, constituting the eleventh ratification required by the convention.

It was superseded by the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Bogota'), 1948, continuing in effect, however, among the States that have not ratified the Pact of Bogotzi. AMERICAN TREATY ON PACIFIC SETTLEMENT "PACT OF BOGOTa"

Signed at Bogotd, April 30, 1948

In the name of their peoples, the which they consider most appropriate Governments represented at the Ninth in each case, or that they should use all International Conference of American these procedures, or that any of them States have resolved, in fulfillment of have preference over others except as Article XXIII of the Charter of the expressly provided. Organization of American States, to ARTICLE IV. Once any pacific procedure conclude the following Treaty: has been initiated, whether by agreement between the parties or in fulfillment of CHAPTER ONE the present Treaty or a previous pact, GENERAL OBLIGATION TO SETTLE no other procedure may be commenced DISPUTES BY PACIFIC M.lEANS until that procedure is concluded. ARTICLE I. The High Contracting ARTICLE V. The aforesaid procedures Parties, solemnly reaffirming their com- may not be applied to matters which, mitments made in earlier international by their nature, are within the domestic conventions and declarations, as well jurisdiction of the state. If the parties as in the Charter of the United Nations, are not in agreement as to whether the agree to refrain from the threat or the controversy concerns a matter of domestic use of force, or from any other means of jurisdiction, this preliminary question coercion for the settlement of their shall be submitted to decision by the controversies, and to have recourse at all International Court of Justice, at the times to pacific procedures. request of any of the parties. ARTICLE II. The High Contracting ARTICLE VI. The aforesaid procedures, Parties recognize the obligation to settle furthermore, may not be applied to international controversies by regional matters already settled by arrangement procedures before referring them to the between the parties, or by arbitral Security Council of the United Nations. award or by decision of an international Consequently, in the event that a court, or which are governed by agree- controversy arises between two or more ments or treaties in force on the date of signatory states which, in the opinion of the conclusion of the present Treaty. parties, cannot be settled by direct the ARTICLE VII. The High Contracting negotiations through the usual diplomatic Parties bind themselves not to make channels, the parties bind themselves to diplomatic representations in order to use the procedures established in the protect their nationals, or to refer a present Treaty, in the manner and under controversy to a court of international the conditions provided for in the following articles, or, alternatively, such jurisdiction for that purpose, when the special procedures as, in their opinion, said nationals have had available the will permit them to arrive at a solution. means to place their case before com- ARTICLE III. The order of the pacific petent domestic courts of the respective procedures established in the present state. Treaty does not signify that the parties ARTICLE VIII. Neither recourse to may not have recourse to the procedure pacific means for the solution of controversies, nor the recommendation of ARTICLE XIII. In the event that the their use, shall, in the case of an armed High Contracting Parties have agreed attack, be ground for delaying the exer- to the procedure of mediation but are cise of the right of individual or collective unable to reach an agreement within self-defense, as provided for in the two months on the selection of the Charter of the United Nations. mediator or mediators, or no solution to the controversy has been reached within TWO CHAPTER five months after mediation has begun, PROCEDURES OF GOOD OFFICES the parties shall have recourse without AND MEDIATION delay to any one of the other procedures ARTICLE IX. The procedure of good of peaceful settlement established in the offices consists in the attempt by one or present Treaty. more American Governments not parties ARTICLE XIV. The High Contracting to the controversy, or by one or more Parties may offer their mediation, either eminent citizens of any American State individually or jointly, but they agree which is not a party to the controversy, not to do so while the controversy is in to bring the parties together, so as to process of settlement by any of the make it possible for them to reach an other procedures established in the adequate solution between themselves. present Treaty. ARTICLE X. Once the parties have CHAPTER THREE been brought together and have resumed PROCEDURE OF INVESTIGATION direct negotiations, no further action is AND CONCILIATION to be taken by the states or citizens that have offered their good offices or have ARTICLE XV. The procedure of in- consists in accepted an invitation to offer them; vestigation and conciliation to a they may, however, by agreement be- the submission of the controversy Con- tween the parties, be present at the Commission of Investigation and negotiations. ciliation, which shall be established in the provisions estab- ARTICLE XI. The procedure of media- accordance with of the tion consists in the submission of the lished in subsequent articles function controversy to one or more American present Treaty, and which shall limitations prescribed therein. Governments not parties to the con- within the XVI. The party initiating the troversy, or to one or more eminent ARTICLE and concilia- citizens of any American State not a procedure of investigation of the party to the controversy. In either case tion shall request the Council of American States to the mediator or mediators shall be chosen Organization of Investigation by mutual agreement between the convoke the Commission The Council for its parties. and Conciliation. part shall take immediate steps to ARTICLE XII. The functions of the convoke it. mediator or mediators shall be to assist convoke the Com- the parties in the settlement of con- Once the request to mission has been received, the controversy troversies in the simplest and most between the parties shall immediately be direct manner, avoiding formalities and suspended, and the parties shall refrain seeking an acceptable solution. No report from any act that might make concilia- shall be made by the mediator and, so tion more difficult. To that end, at the far as he is concerned, the proceedings request of one of the parties, the Council shall be wholly confidential. of the Organization of American States ARTICLE XIX. In the event that a may, pending the convocation of the controversy should arise between two Commission, make appropriate recom- or more American States that have not mendations to the parties. appointed the Commission referred to in ARTICLE XVII. Each of the High Article XVII, the following procedure Contracting Parties may appoint, by shall be observed: means of a bilateral agreement consisting a) Each party shall designate two of a simple exchange of notes with each members from the permanent panel of the other signatories, two members of of American conciliators, who are the Commission of Investigation and not of the same nationality as the Conciliation, only one of whom may be of appointing party. its own nationality. The fifth member, b) These four members shall in who shall perform the functions of turn choose a fifth member, from chairman, shall be selected immediately the permanent panel, not of the by common agreement of the members nationality of either party. thus appointed. c) If, within a period of thirty Any one of the contracting parties days following the notification of may remove members whom it has their selection, the four members appointed, whether nationals or aliens; at are unable to agree upon a fifth the same time it shall appoint the suc- member, they shall each separately cessor. If this is not done, the removal list the conciliators composing the shall be considered as not having been permanent panel, in order of their made. The appointments and substitu- preference, and upon comparison of tions shall be registered with the Pan the lists so prepared, the one who American Union, which shall endeavor first receives a majority of votes to ensure that the commissions maintain shall be declared elected. The person their full complement of five members. so elected shall perform the duties ARTICLE XVIII. Without prejudice to of chairman of the Commission. the provisions of the foregoing article, ARTICLE XX. In convening the Com- the Pan American Union shall draw up a mission of Investigation and Concilia- permanent panel of American conciliators, tion, the Council of the Organization of to be made up as follows: American States shall determine the a) Each of the High Contracting place where the Commission shall meet. Parties shall appoint, for three- Thereafter, the Commission may deter- year periods, two of their nationals mine the place or places in which it is to who enjoy the highest reputation for function, taking into account the best fairness, competence and integrity; facilities for the performance of its b) The Pan American Union shall work. request of the candidates notice of ARTICLE XXI. When more than two their formal acceptance, and it shall states are involved in the same con- place on the panel of conciliators the names of the persons who so notify troversy, the states that hold similar it; points of view shall be considered as a c) The governments may, at any single party. If they have different time, fill vacancies occurring among interests they shall be entitled to increase their appointees; and they may the number of conciliators in order that reappoint their members. all parties may have equal representation. The chairman shall be elected in the unless the parties decide otherwise. If manner set forth in Article XIX. no agreement is reached, the final report ARTICLE XXII. It shall be the duty of shall contain a summary of the work of the Commission of Investigation and the Commission; it shall be delivered to Conciliation to clarify the points in the parties, and shall be published after dispute between the parties and to the expiration of six months unless the endeavor to bring about an agreement parties decide otherwise. In both cases, between them upon mutually acceptable the final report shall be adopted by a terms. The Commission shall institute majority vote. such investigations of the facts involved ARTICLE XXVIII. The reports and in the controversy as it may deem neces- conclusions of the Commission of In- sary for the purpose of proposing ac- vestigation and Conciliation shall not be ceptable bases of settlement. binding upon the parties, either with ARTICLE XXIII. It shall be the duty respect to the statement of facts or in of the parties to facilitate the work of regard to questions of law, and they shall the Commission and to supply it, to the have no other character than that of fullest extent possible, with all useful recommendations submitted for the con- documents and information, and also to sideration of the parties in order to use the means at their disposal to enable facilitate a friendly settlement of the the Commission to summon and hear controversy. witnesses or experts and perform other ARTICLE XXIX. The Commission of tasks in the territories of the parties, in Investigation and Conciliation shall trans- conformity with their laws. mit to each of the parties, as well as to ARTICLE XXIV. During the proceed- the Pan American Union, certified copies ings before the Commission, the parties of the minutes of its proceedings. These shall be represented by plenipotentiary minutes shall not be published unless the delegates or by agents, who shall serve parties so decide. as intermediaries between them and the ARTICLE XXX. Each member of the Commission. The parties and the Com- Commission shall receive financial re- mission may use the services of technical muneration, the amount of which shall advisers and experts. be fixed by agreement between the ARTICLE XXV. The Commission shall parties. If the parties do not agree conclude its work within a period of six thereon, the Council of the Organization months from the date of its installation; shall determine the remuneration. Each but the parties may, by mutual agree- government shall pay its own expenses ment, extend the period. and an equal share of the common ex- ARTICLE XXVI. If, in the opinion of penses of the Commission, including the the parties, the controversy relates aforementioned remunerations. exclusively to questions of fact, the CHAPTER FOUR Commission shall limit itself to investi- JUDICIAL PROCEDURE gating such questions, and shall conclude its activities with an appropriate report. ARTICLE XXXI. In conformity with ARTICLE XXVII. If an agreement is Article 36, paragraph 2, of the Statute of reached by conciliation, the final report the International Court of Justice, the of the Commission shall be limited to the High Contracting Parties declare that text of the agreement and shall be pub- they recognize, in relation to any other lished after its transmittal to the parties, American State, the jurisdiction of the Court as compulsory ipso facto, without controversies submitted to the judicial the necessity of any special agreement so procedure to which this Treaty refers, long as the present Treaty is in force, in the decision shall devolve upon the full all disputes of a juridical nature that Court, or, if the parties so request, upon arise among them concerning: a special chamber in conformity with a) The interpretation of a treaty; Article 26 of the Statute of the Court. b) Any question of international The parties may agree, moreover, to have law; the controversy decided ex aequo et bono. c) The existence of any fact which, ARTICLE XXXVII. The procedure to if established, would constitute the be followed by the Court shall be that breach of an international obliga- established in the Statute thereof. tion; d) The nature or extent of the CHAPTER FIVE reparation to be made for the breach PROCEDURE OF ARBITRATION of an international obligation. ARTICLE XXXVIII. Notwithstanding ARTICLE XXXII. When the concilia- the provisions of Chapter Four of this tion procedure previously established in Treaty, the High Contracting Parties the present Treaty or by agreement of may, if they so agree, submit to arbitra- the parties does not lead to a solution, tion differences of any kind, whether and the said parties have not agreed upon juridical or not, that have arisen or may an arbitral procedure, either of them arise in the future between them. shall be entitled to have recourse to the ARTICLE XXXIX. The Arbitral Tri- International Court of Justice in the bunal to which a controversy is to be manner prescribed in Article 40 of the submitted shall, in the cases contem- Statute thereof. The Court shall have plated in Articles XXXV and XXXVIII compulsory jurisdiction in accordance of the present Treaty, be constituted in with Article 36, paragraph 1, of the said the following manner, unless there exists Statute. an agreement to the contrary. ARTICLE XXXIII. If the parties fail to ARTICLE XL. (1) Within a period of agree as to whether the Court has juris- two months after notification of the diction over the controversy, the Court decision of the Court in the case provided itself shall first decide that question. for in Article XXXV, each party shall ARTICLE XXXIV. If the Court, for the name one arbiter of recognized com- reasons set forth in Articles V, VI and petence in questions of international law VII of this Treaty, declares itself to be and of the highest integrity, and shall without jurisdiction to hear the con- transmit the designation to the Council troversy, such controversy shall be of the Organization. At the same time, declared ended. each party shall present to the Council a ARTICLE XXXV. If the Court for any list of ten jurists chosen from among other reason declares itself to be without those on the general panel of members of jurisdiction to hear and adjudge the the Permanent Court of Arbitration of controversy, the High Contracting Parties The Hague who do not belong to its obligate themselves to submit it to national group and who are willing to be arbitration, in accordance with the members of the Arbitral Tribunal. provisions of Chapter Five of this Treaty. (2) The Council of the Organization ARTICLE XXXVI. In the case of shall, within the month following the presentation of the lists, proceed to agree upon a fifth arbiter within establish the Arbitral Tribunal in the one month after the Council of the following manner: Organization has notified them of a) If the lists presented by the their appointment, each of them parties contain three names in shall separately arrange the list common, such persons, together of jurists in the order of their with the two directly named by the preference and, after comparison parties, shall constitute the Arbitral of the lists so formed, the person Tribunal; who first obtains a majority vote b) In case these lists contain more shall be declared elected. than three names in common, the ARTICLE XLI. The parties may by three arbiters needed to complete the mutual agreement establish the Tribunal Tribunal shall be selected by lot; in the manner they deem most ap- c) In the circumstances envisaged propriate; they may even select a single in the two preceding clauses, the arbiter, designating in such case a chief five arbiters designated shall choose of state, an eminent jurist, or any court one of their number as presiding of justice in which the parties have officer; mutual confidence. d) If the lists contain only two ARTICLE XLII. When more than two names in common, such candidates states are involved in the same contro- and the two arbiters directly selected versy, the states defending the same by the parties shall by common interests shall be considered as a single agreement choose the fifth arbiter, party. If they have opposing interests who shall preside over the Tribunal. they shall have the right to increase the The choice shall devolve upon a number of arbiters so that all parties jurist on the aforesaid general may have equal representation. The panel of the Permanent Court of presiding officer shall be selected by the Arbitration of The Hague who has method established in Article XL. not been included in the lists drawn ARTICLE XLIII. The parties shall in up by the parties; each case draw up a special agreement e) If the lists contain only one clearly defining the specific matter that name in common, that person shall is the subject of the controversy, the be a member of the Tribunal, and seat of the Tribunal, the rules of pro- another name shall be chosen by lot cedure to be observed, the period within from among the eighteen jurists which the award is to be handed down, remaining on the above-mentioned and such other conditions as they may lists. The presiding officer shall be agree upon among themselves. elected in accordance with the If the special agreement cannot be procedure established in the pre- drawn up within three months after the ceding clause; date of the installation of the Tribunal, f) If the lists contain no names in it shall be drawn up by the International common, one arbiter shall be chosen Court of Justice through summary by lot from each of the lists; and procedure, and shall be binding upon the the fifth arbiter, who shall act as parties. presiding officer, shall be chosen in ARTICLE XLIV. The parties may be the manner previously indicated; represented before the Arbitral Tribunal g) If the four arbiters cannot by such persons as they may designate. ARTICLE XLV. If one of the parties execution of the award shall be sub- fails to designate its arbiter and present mitted to the decision of the Arbitral its list of candidates within the period Tribunal that rendered the award. provided for in Article XL, the other ARTICLE XLVIII. Within a year after party shall have the right to request the notification thereof, the award shall be Council of the Organization to establish subject to review by the same Tribunal the Arbitral Tribunal. The Council at the request of one of the parties, shall immediately urge the delinquent provided a previously existing fact is party to fulfill its obligations within an discovered unknown to the Tribunal and additional period of fifteen days, after to the party requesting the review, and which time the Council itself shall provided the Tribunal is of the opinion establish the Tribunal in the following that such fact might have a decisive manner: influence on the award. a) It shall select a name by lot ARTICLE XLIX. Every member of the from the list presented by the Tribunal shall receive financial remunera- petitioning party. tion, the amount of which shall be fixed b) It shall choose, by absolute by agreement between the parties. If the majority vote, two jurists from the parties do not agree on the amount, the general panel of the Permanent Council of the Organization shall deter- Court of Arbitration of The Hague mine the remuneration. Each Govern- who do not belong to the national ment shall pay its own expenses and an group of any of the parties. equal share of the common expenses of c) The three persons so designated, the Tribunal, including the aforemen- together with the one directly chosen tioned remunerations. by the petitioning party, shall select CHAPTER SIX the fifth arbiter, who shall act as FULFILLMENT OF DECISIONS presiding officer, in the manner provided for in Article XL. ARTICLE L. If one of the High Con- d) Once the Tribunal is installed, tracting Parties should fail to carry out the procedure established in article the obligations imposed upon it by a XLIII shall be followed. decision of the International Court of Justice or by an arbitral award, the other ARTICLE XLVI. The award shall be party or parties concerned shall, before accompanied by a supporting opinion, resorting to the Security Council of the shall be adopted by a majority vote, United Nations, propose a Meeting of and shall be published after notification Consultation of Ministers of Foreign thereof has been given to the parties. Affairs to agree upon appropriate meas- The dissenting arbiter or arbiters shall ures to ensure the fulfillment of the have the right to state the grounds for judicial decision or arbitral award. their dissent. The award, once it is duly handed CHAPTER SEVEN down and made known to the parties, ADVISORY OPINIONS shall settle the controversy definitively, ARTICLE LI. The parties concerned in shall not be subject to appeal, and shall the solution of a controversy may, by be carried out immediately. agreement, petition the General Assembly ARTICLE XLVII. Any differences that or the Security Council of the United arise in regard to the interpretation or Nations to request an advisory opinion of the International Court of Justice on any cease to be in force with respect to the juridical question. state denouncing it, but shall continue The petition shall be made through the in force for the remaining signatories. Council of the Organization of American The denunciation shall be addressed to States. the Pan American Union, which shall transmit it to the other Contracting CHAPTER EIGHT Parties. FINAL PROVISIONS The denunciation shall have no effect ARTICLE LII. The present Treaty shall with respect to pending procedures be ratified by the High Contracting initiated prior to the transmission of the Parties in accordance with their con- particular notification. stitutional procedures. The original in- ARTICLE LVII. The present Treaty strument shall be deposited in the Pan shall be registered with the Secretariat American Union, which shall transmit of the United Nations through the Pan an authentic certified copy to each American Union. Government for the purpose of ratifica- ARTICLE VLIII. As this Treaty comes tion. The instruments of ratification into effect through the successive ratifica- shall be deposited in the archives of the tions of the High Contracting Parties, Pan American Union, which shall notify the following treaties, conventions and the signatory governments of the deposit. protocols shall cease to be in force with Such notification shall be considered as respect to such parties: an exchange of ratifications. Treaty to Avoid or Prevent Conflicts ARTICLE LIII. This Treaty shall come between the American States, of May 3, into effect between the High Contracting 1923; Parties in the order in which they deposit General Convention of Inter-American their respective ratifications. Conciliation, of January 5, 1929; ARTICLE LIV. Any American State General Treaty of Inter-American which is not a signatory to the present Arbitration and Additional Protocol of Treaty, or which has made reservations Progressive Arbitration, of January 5, thereto, may adhere to it, or may with- 1929; draw its reservations in whole or in part, Additional Protocol to the General by transmitting an official instrument to Convention of Inter-American Concilia- the Pan American Union, which shall tion, of December 26, 1933; notify the other High Contracting Parties Anti-War Treaty of Non-Agression in the manner herein established. and Conciliation, of October 10, 1933; ARTICLE LV. Should any of the High Convention to Coordinate, Extend and Contracting Parties make reservations Assure the Fulfillment of the Existing concerning the present Treaty, such Treaties between the American States, of reservations shall, with respect to the December 23, 1936; state that makes them, apply to all Inter-American Treaty on Good Offices signatory states on the basis of reciproc- and Mediation, of December 23, 1936; ity. Treaty on the Prevention of Con- ARTICLE LVI. The present Treaty troversies, of December 23, 1936. shall remain in force indefinitely, but ARTICLE LIX. The provisions of the may be denounced upon one year's foregoing Article shall not apply to notice, at the end of which period it shall procedures already initiated or agreed upon in accordance with any of the instrument. The compulsory execution of above-mentioned international instru- arbitral or judicial decisions and the ments. limitation which prevents the states from ARTICLE LX. The present Treaty shall judging for themselves in regard to be called the "PACT OF BoGor." matters that pertain to their domestic IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned jurisdiction in accordance with Article Plenipotentiaries, having deposited their V are contrary to Argentine tradition. full powers, found to be in good and due The protection of aliens, who in the form, sign the present Treaty, in the Argentine Republic are protected by its name of their respective Governments, Supreme Law to the same extent as the on the dates appearing below their nationals, is also contrary to that tradi- signatures. tion." Done at the City of BogotA, in four Bolivia: texts, in the English, French, Portuguese "The Delegation of Bolivia makes a and Spanish languages respectively, on reservation with regard to Article VI, the thirtieth day of April, nineteen inasmuch as it considers that pacific hundred forty-eight. procedures may also be applied to con-

RESERVATIONS troversies arising from matters settled by arrangement between the Parties, Argentina: when the said arrangement affects the "The Delegation of the Argentine vital interests of a state." Republic, on signing the American Treaty on Pacific Settlement (Pact of Ecuador: BogotA), makes reservations in regard "The Delegation of Ecuador, upon to the following articles, to which it does signing this Pact, makes an express not adhere: reservation with regard to Article VI 1) VII, concerning the protection and also every provision that contradicts of aliens; or is not in harmony with the principles 2) Chapter Four (Articles XXXI proclaimed by or the stipulations con- to XXXVII), Judicial Procedure; tained in the Charter of the United 3) Chapter Five (Articles XXX- Nations, the Charter of the Organization VIII to XLIX), Procedure of Ar- of American States, or the Constitution bitration; of the Republic of Ecuador." 4) Chapter Six (Article L), Ful- United States of America: fillment of Decisions. "1. The United States does not under- Arbitration and judicial procedure take as the complainant State to submit have, as institutions, the firm adherence to the International Court of Justice of the Argentine Republic, but the any controversy which is not considered Delegation cannot accept the form in to be properly within the jurisdiction of which the procedures for their applica- the Court. tion have been regulated, since, in its 2. The submission on the part of the opinion, they should have been estab- United States of any controversy to lished only for controversies arising in arbitration, as distinguished from judicial the future and not originating in or settlement, shall be dependent upon the having any relation to causes, situations conclusion of a special agreement be- or facts existing before the signing of this tween the parties to the case. 3. The acceptance by the United the exclusion of these cases from the States of the jurisdiction of the Inter- application of every procedure. national Court of Justice as compulsory 3. Reservation with regard to Article ipso facto and without special agreement, XXXV, in the sense that, before arbitra- as provided in this Treaty, is limited by tion is resorted to, there may be, at the any jurisdictional or other limitations request of one of the parties, a meeting contained in any Declaration deposited of the Organ of Consultation, as es- by the United States under Article 36, tablished in the Charter of the Organiza- paragraph 4, of the Statute of the Court, tion of American States. and in force at the time of the submission 4. Reservation with regard to Article of any case. XLV, because it believes that arbitration 4. The Government of the United set up without the participation of one States cannot accept Article VII relating of the parties is in contradiction with its to diplomatic protection and the ex- constitutional provisions." haustion of remedies. For its part, the Nicaragua: Government of the United States main- "The Nicaraguan Delegation, on giving tains the rules of diplomatic protection, its approval to the American Treaty on including the rule of exhaustion of local Pacific Settlement (Pact of BogotA) remedies by aliens, as provided by wishes to record expressly that no pro- international law." visions contained in the said Treaty may Paraguay: prejudice any position assumed by the "The Delegation of Paraguay makes Government of Nicaragua with respect the following reservation: to arbitral decisions the validity of which Paraguay stipulates the prior agree- it has contested on the basis of the ment of the parties as a prerequisite to principles of international law, which the arbitration procedure established in clearly permit arbitral decisions to be this Treaty for every question of a non- attacked when they are adjudged to be juridical nature affecting national sov- null or invalidated. Consequently, the ereignty and not specifically agreed signature of the Nicaraguan Delegation upon in treaties now in force." to the Treaty in question cannot be Peru: alleged as an acceptance of any arbitral "The Delegation of Peru makes the decisions that Nicaragua has contested following reservations: and the validity of which is not certain. 1. Reservation with regard to the Hence the Nicaraguan Delegation second part of Article V, because it reiterates the statement made on the considers that domestic jurisdiction 28th of the current month on approving should be defined by the state itself. the text of the above-mentioned Treaty 2. Reservation with regard to Article in Committee III." XXXIII and the pertinent part of Honduras: M. A. BATRES, RAM6N E. Article XXXIV, inasmuch as it con- CRUZ, VIRGILIo R. GkLvEz. siders that the exceptions of res judicata, Chile: J. HERNXNDEZ, JULIO BARRENE- resolved by settlement between the CHEA, J. RAM6N GUT1IRREZ, W. parties or governed by agreements and MULLER, D. BASSI, E. BARROS JARPA, treaties in force, determine, in virtue of GASPAR MORA SOTOMAYOR, RODRIGO their objective and peremptory nature, GONZALEZ. Uruguay: DARDO REGULES, JUAN F. Bolivia: J. PAZ CAMPERO, E. MONTE GUICH6N, BLANCA MIERES DE BoTTo, Y M., H. PALZA, A. ALEXANDER CARLOS MANINI Rfos, NILo BERCHESI, HUMBERTO LINARES. H9CTOR A. GRAUERT, GEN. PEDRO Peru: A. REVOREDO I., V. A. BELAI9NDE Sicco, R. PfRIZ COELHO, PEDRO LuIs FERNN CISNEROS, JUAN BAU. CHOUHY TERRA, Josi A. MORA. TISTA DE LAVALLE, G. N. DE AIIM. ARIOSTO D. GONZALEZ. BURU, LUIS ECHECOPAR GARCfA, E Guatemala: L. CARDOZA Y ARAG6N, REBAGLIATI. VIRGILIO RODRfGUEZ BETETA, M. Paraguay: CI SAR A. VASCONSELLOS NORIEGA M., J. L. MENDOZA, Jos9 M. AUGUSTO SALDIVAR. SARAVIA. Costa Rica: EMILIO VALVERDE, ROLANDC United States of America: NORMAN BLANCO, JOS9 MIRANDA. ARMOUR, WILLARD L. BEAULAC, WIL- Ecuador: A. PARRA V., HOMERO VITERI LIAM D. PAWLEY, WALTER J. DON- L., P. JARAMILLO A., GEN. L. LARREA NELLY, PAUL C. DANIELS. A., H. GARCfA ORTIZ, ALBERTO PUIG Dominican Republic: ARTURO DESPRA- AROSEMENA, B. PERALTA P. DEL, MINERVA BERNARDINO, TEMfS- Brazil: Jojo NEVES DA FONTOURA, TOCLES MESSINA, JOAQUfN BALA- ARTHUR FERREIRA DOS SANTOS, GA- GUER, E. RODRfGUEZ DEMORIZI, Hgc- BRIEL DE REZENDE PASSOS, ELMANO TOR INCH AUSTEGUI C. GOMES CARDIM, JoAo HENRIQUE SAM- Cuba: 0. GANS Y M., ERNESTO DIHIGO, PAIO, VIEIRA DA SILVA, A. CAMILLO DE CARLOS TABERNILLA, R. SARABASA, OLIVEIRA, JORGE FELIPPE KAFURI, GuY P9REZ CISNEROS, E. PANDO. ERNESTO DE ARAIJO, SALVADOR CE- Nicaragua: Luis MANUEL DEBAYLE, SAR OBINO. GUILLERMO SEVILLA SACASA, JESI(S Argentina: ENRIQUE COROMINAS, PAS- S.NCHEZ, DIEGO M. CHAMORRO, Mo- CUAL LA ROSA, PEDRO JUAN VIGNALE, DESTO VALLE. SAVERIO S. VALENTI, R. A. ARES. Mexico: J. TORRES BODET, R. C6RDOVA, Colombia: EDUARDO ZULETA ANGEL, LuIs QUINTANILLA, JOS9 M. ORTIZ CARLOS LOZANO Y LOZANO, DOMINGO TIRADO, P. CAMPOS ORTIZ, J. GOROS- ESGUERRA, SILVIO VILLEGAS, Luis TIZA, E. VILLASEROR, Josg L6PEZ B., L6PEZ DE MESA, JORGE SOTO DEL M. SANCHEZ CUI N, G. RAMOS MI- LLA.N, E. ENRIQUEZ, MARIO DE LA CUE- CORRAL, CARLOS ARANGO VELEZ, MI- VA, F. A. URSI6A. GUEL JIM9NEZ L6PEZ, AUGUSTO RAMf- Panama: MARIO DE DIEGO, ROBERTO REZ MORENO, CIPRIANO RESTREPO JIM9NEZ, R. J. ALFARO, EDUARDO A. JARAMILLO, ANTONIO ROCIIA. CHIARI. El Salvador: H9CTOR DAVID CASTRO, H. ESCOBAR SERRANO, JOAQUiN GUI- RESERVATIONS MADE AT THE TIME LL9N RIVAS, ROBERTO E. CANESSA. OF RATIFICATION Haiti: GUSTAVE LARAQUE, J. L. DEJEAN. Nicaragua: Venezuela: R6MULO BETANCOURT, LuIS LANDER, Jos RAFAEL POCATERRA, With the reservation made at the tim( MARIANO PIC6N SALAS. of signature. AMERICAN TREATY ON PACIFIC SETTLEMENT 'Pact of Bogot&'

Signed at Bogota, April 30, 1948, at the Ninth International Conference of American States

SIGNATORY DATE OF DEPOSIT OF THE COUNTRIES INSTRUMENT OF RATIFICATION

1 Argentina 1 Bolivia Brazil Chile Colombia Costa Rica May 6,1949 Cuba Dominican Republic September 12,1950 1 Ecuador El Salvador September 11, 1950 Guatemala Haiti March 28,1951 Honduras February 7,1950 Mexico November 23,1948 Nicaragua 1 July 26,19501 Panama 1 April 25,1951 Paraguay 1 Peru 1 United States Uruguay September 1,1955 Venezuela

1. With reservations.

The original instrument is deposited with the Pan American Union, which is also the depository of the instruments of ratification. The Treaty entered into force on May 6, 1949, when the second ratification was deposited by Costa Rica. It was registered with the United Nations on May 13, 1949 (Reg. No. 449, Vol 30).

As this Treaty comes into effect, through the successive ratification of the High Contracting Parties, the treaties, conventions and protocols mentioned in Article LVIII cease to be in force with respect to such parties. INTER-AMERICAN PEACE COMMITTEE

As indicated in the Explanatory International Conference of Ameri- Note, it has been considered neces- can States regarding the status of sary, in order to make this collec- such conflicts and the steps which tion complete, to include a state- may have been taken to bring about ment on the Inter-American Peace a solution." Committee. Although created by a On December 4, 1940, the Gov- resolution, it is one of the existing erning Board of the Pan American procedures for the pacific settle- Union established Washington, D.C., ment of disputes, and forms part of as the seat of the Committee and the inter-American system. selected as its members two coun- This Committee was created at the tries of the north (the United States Second Meeting of Consultation of and Mexico), two of the south (Ar- Ministers of Foreign Affairs, held gentina and Brazil), and one of Cen- at Havana in 1940, by the following tral America and the Antilles (Cuba). resolution: Although the Committee was es- "RESOLUTION XIV tablished in 1940, its services were not requested until 1947, and it was THE PEACEFUL SOLUTION OF CONFLICTS not actually installed until July 31, "Whereas: In behalf of the closest 1948. Since that time it has aided in possible unity of the Continent, it is the settlement of a number of situa- imperative that differences existing tions that have arisen between dif- between some of the American na- ferent countries. tions be settled. The Inter-American Peace Com- "The Second Meeting of the Min- mittee submitted a report to the isters of Foreign Affairs of the Tenth Inter-American Conference, American Republics which reviewed its work and pro- "Resolves: posed a draft resolution on its or- "To recommend to the Governing ganization and functioning. The Ca- Board of the Pan American Union racas Conference applauded the that it organize, in the American fruitful work of the Committee, and capital deemed most suitable for the not having sufficient time to do so purpose, a committee composed of itself requested the Council of the representatives of five countries, OAS to draft a new Statute. The which shall have the duty of keeping Council was to approve the text de- constant vigilance to insure that finitively after receiving observa- States between which any dispute tions thereon from the governments, exists or may arise, of any nature and such approval was given at a whatsoever, may solve it as quickly special meeting of May 9, 1956. Mod- as possible, and of suggesting, with- ifications were made in the composi- out detriment to the methods adopted tion of the Committee and in the term by the parties or to the procedures to be served by the members. Any which they may agree upon, the American State directly interested measures and steps which may be in a conflict or controversy with conducive to a settlement. another American State may request "The Committee shail submit a the Committee to act, but before the report to each Meeting of the Min- Committee can do so the parties isters of Foreign Affairs and to each must give their consent. The Fifth Meeting of Consultation from abroad designed to overthrow of Ministers of Foreign Affairs, held established governments or provoke at Santiago, Chile, in 1959, conferred instances of intervention or aggres- new powers on the Inter-American sion as contemplated in inter-Amer- Peace Committee, authorizing it to ican instruments, and to prepare a study the questions that hadbeenthe report to be submitted to the Elev- subject of the convocation of the enth Inter-American Conference. Meeting, to take action either at the That Conference will decide whether request of the governments or on the new powers granted temporarily its own initiative, within certain lim- are to be made a definitive part of itations, in the event of activities the Statute of the Committee.